Book13 - Roller Screen RR1439 - P0EBD72 PDF

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
Roller screen RR1439
P0EBD72
Manual 1
Use of machine in accordance with
intended purpose
FAM
Magdeburger Förderanlagen
und Baumaschinen GmbH
Sudenburger Wuhne 47
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799
SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 1/6

CONTENTS
1 USE OF MACHINE IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTENDED PURPOSE ................................................... 3
1.1 Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Basic notes ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Responsibility of the operator ................................................................................................................ 4
1.4 Responsibility of the personnel ............................................................................................................. 5
1.5 Warranty and liability .............................................................................................................................. 5
1.6 Copyright .................................................................................................................................................. 5
1.7 Constructional changes .......................................................................................................................... 6

1 USE OF MACHINE IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTENDED PURPOSE
1.1 Preface
These operating instructions are intended for machine operators who have been trained by the operator and
have confirmed this with their signature.
It is also intended for experts (like machine setters, electricians and metalworkers) who are charged with
installation, commissioning, setting up, retrofitting, maintenance, repair and dismantling of the machine/system.
Before commissioning, read through the operating instructions of the machine/plant completely to be able to
use every function correctly and securely.
The operating instruction contains important information on how to operate the machine/installation securely,
properly and economically. Taking notice of these instructions helps to avoid risks, minimize repair costs and
downtimes and increase reliability and durability of the machine /installation.
Due to existing national regulations for accident prevention and environment protection, the operating
instructions have to be complemented by instructions.
The operating instructions must always be available on site of the machine/installation.
1.2 Basic notes

The machine/plant has been manufactured to the latest state of the art and under consideration of the FEM
Codes and Standard (Fédération Européenne de la Manutention), ISO und DIN standards and the
acknowledged rules of safety engineering. Nevertheless, use of this equipment might involve risks to life of
operators or third parties or damage to the machine/plant or other property.
Therefore, the operator of this machine/plant shall prepare job-specific instructions on the basis of the intra-
company occupational safety and accident prevention codes and declare them obligatory so that accident-free
operation, repair and maintenance of this machine/plant can be ensured.
This machine/plant should be used only in technically perfect condition and in full accordance with the intended
purpose, with safety awareness and under strict adherence to the operation and maintenance instructions.
Troubles that might impair operational safety must be eliminated immediately.
The machine/plant shall be used only for the application parameters described in Section „Technical Data“. Use
of equipment for other purposes and/or different application parameters is considered as not in accordance with
the intended purpose. The manufacturer rejects claims resulting from this, and the risk shall be fully on the
user’s side.
The user is obliged to study the complete documentation so that he understands it.
IMPORTANT

1.3 Responsibility of the operator
 The operator is obliged to ensure that the personnel are instructed on all potential dangers and selected
safety measures. These instructions must be repeated at appropriate intervals.
 The operator is obliged to only allow persons to work with the machine/installation, who are familiar
with the nationally applicable laws and regulations and with the applicable plant-internal occupational
health & safety and accident prevention regulations.
We recommend you check that your personnel are working in a safety-conscious

manner at regular intervals!
IMPORTANT
 The operator is obliged to familiarise the personnel on how to operate the machine/installation.
 The operator is obliged to only operate the machine/installation when in a faultless condition from a
safety-related perspective.
 The operator is obliged to only have work on the electrical and electronic machines / systems carried
out by electricians under observance of the valid safety regulations for working with electrical systems.
 The operator is obliged to have the specified setting, maintenance and inspection work executed by
the due date by skilled personnel.
 The operator is obliged to follow the respective, valid legal environmental protection regulations in
addition to the information provided in these operating instructions.
 The operator is obliged to only allow persons to work on the system, who
 have the legal age
 are not under the influence of drugs or alcohol
 are familiar with the basic occupational safety, health and environmental protection regulations and
have been trained on how to work with the system.
 have read and understood these operating instructions and have confirmed this through their
signature.
 The operator is obliged to check that his/her personnel are working in a safety-conscious manner and
to counteract deviations from safety measures with suitable measures.
 The operator is obliged to provide the operating and maintenance personnel with personal protective
equipment. The design of the personal protective equipment is the responsibility of the system operator.
 The operator is obliged to make sure that all security and warning notes on the machine/installation are
not removed and are in legible condition.

1.4 Responsibility of the personnel
All persons, who are assigned to work with the machine/installation, are obliged:
 to observe the respective, nationally applicable Labour Protection Act and the regulations of the
Industrial Health and Safety Ordinance;
 to carefully read through the operating instructions before operating the machine to ensure that these
are always near at hand;
 to observe the respective manufacturer operating instructions when working with and/or on machine
components! This applies in particular for personnel, who only work occasionally with the machine, e.g.
in the case of machine maintenance;
 to report changes in the machine performance immediately to the responsible location or person;
 in the case of malfunctions, which endanger the safety of persons or parts, to immediately shut down
the machine and to inform the responsible location / person.
1.5 Warranty and liability

Any warranty and liability claims are excluded for damage to man and equipment if such damage is due to one
of the following causes:
 Use of machine/plant not in accordance with the intended purpose;
 Improper assembly, start-up, operation and maintenance;
 Operation of machine/plant with defective protective appliances or guards and safety devices not fitted
correctly or not functioning properly;
 Non-observance of operation and maintenance instructions;
 Modifications or conversions made without the express approval by FAM;
 Insufficient supervision of system and machine components which are subjected to wear, as well as
improperly executed repair work.
 Catastrophic situation by foreign objects or cases of force majeure.
1.6 Copyright
The copyright in this documents remains with Magdeburger Förderanlagen und Baumaschinen GmbH.
Reproduction, disclosure to third parties, announcement or similar modes of publication and use for any other
purposes are prohibited without the express written approval of the copyright owner.
All rights are reserved for the case of patent granting or registration of utility models.
Infringements may result not only in order to refrain but also in claims for damages.

1.7 Constructional changes
Unauthorized constructional changes on the machine/plant are not admissible for reasons of safety – the same
applies as well to welding work on load bearing structures.
All planned modifications require prior written approval by FAM.
Make sure that only original spare parts, wearing parts and accessories are used
since they are specifically designed for use in the machine/plant. When parts from
other sources are used, the stress-bearing capacity and safety aspects cannot be
NOTE guaranteed.
Parts and special components not supplied by FAM must be considered as items not released for use by FAM.

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 2
Basic safety requirements
FAM
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799

CONTENTS
1 BASIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Explanation of symbols and notes ........................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Safety and protective appliances ........................................................................................................... 9

1.2.1 Basic rules ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.2 EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons .............................................................................................. 10
1.3 Notes describing specific kinds of potential hazard ......................................................................... 11

1.3.1 Potential hazards caused by electric power ................................................................................ 11
1.3.2 Potential hazards caused by hydraulic components.................................................................... 11
1.3.3 Gas, dust, vapours and smoke .................................................................................................... 12
1.4 Specific areas where hazards might exist .......................................................................................... 12
1.5 Cleaning the machine/plant and waste disposal in general .............................................................. 13
1.6 Noise level of machines ........................................................................................................................ 14
1.7 Environmental protection ..................................................................................................................... 14

1 BASIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Explanation of symbols and notes
The following symbols are used in the operation manual for dangers and advices:
This symbol means: Warning of very dangerous areas- imminent risks to the life and
health of persons.
This danger sign marks a very dangerous situation with the consequence that non-
observance of the required rules of behaviour might cause most severe bodily injuries (e.g.
DANGER heavy skin burns) or property damage. Even fatal injuries are possible.
This symbol means: Warning of a dangerous area - potential risk to the life and health
of persons.
This warning sign marks a very dangerous situation. Non-observance of the required rules
of behaviour might cause severe bodily injuries, even the loss of limb or severe property
WARNING damage.
This symbol means: Caution, Warning of a dangerous area and a potentially hazardous
situation involving risks to the health of persons.
of behaviour might cause light bodily injuries and/or property damage.
CAUTION
This symbol stands for hints and other particularly important information.
IMPORTANT
This symbol stands for specific instructions for the operator that can be followed or are of
specific importance as background information.
NOTE

This symbol means: „Warning of suspended load“.
Work should not be carried out under suspended load, as far as possible.
The diligent crane operator will do its best to avoid load movements across the heads of
persons. Should it be unavoidable to move loads over the heads of people, the crane
operator must release a warning signal so that people may leave this zone.
DANGER
Work under suspended load (e.g. work under load lifted by floor conveyors) is prohibited.
DANGER TO LIFE!
This symbol means „Warning of hazardous electrical voltage“.

Only those persons should carry out work on electrical equipment and in control rooms who
are suitably qualified (e.g. skilled electricians or other qualified persons) and authorized to
do so.
This danger symbol stands for extremely dangerous situations. Non-observance of the
DANGER behaviour rules might cause most severe bodily injuries (e.g. heavy skin burns) or property
damage. Even fatal injuries are possible.
This symbol means: „Warning of automatic start-up“.

Start-up of machines in production plants is announced by flashing light and/or audible
signal. From this moment all work on the production plant must be stopped.
After signal release all persons must leave the dangerous area.
Be sure to keep a sufficient distance to components that might move since there is the risk
of bruising injury or getting caught by moving machine parts.
DANGER
of behaviour might cause severe bodily injuries, even the loss of limb or severe property
damage.
This symbol means: „Warning of explosive substances“.

Warning of risks caused by explosive substances kept in rooms or getting into contact with
equipment items like machines, tools etc.
Areas marked by this symbol are subject to the risk of explosions.
Persons doing work in the marked rooms and/or on the marked equipment parts should
work carefully and strictly observe the applicable rules of behaviour.
DANGER
heavy skin burns) or property damage. Even fatal injuries are possible..

This symbol means: “Never use floor conveyors for transport of persons“.
heavy skin burns) or property damage. Even fatal injuries are possible.
DANGER
This symbol means: ”Danger, „Ban on open flame, open light and smoking“.
This safety sign is used in areas where inflammable or explosive solid, liquid or gaseous
substances are stored so that the risk of fire is present.
No ignition sources are admissible in the areas marked by this sign.
(For exceptions and necessary type approvals for components for use in the individual
zones see the Directives on Explosion Protection.)
Work where ignition sparks are developed must not be carried out in these areas, such as
welding, grinding, abrasive or flame cutting).
The following ignition sources must not be used in areas marked with the safety sign:
 Open flames and hot gases (e.g. candles, matches, welding pearls, welding sparks,
glowing charcoal or tobacco)
 Heated or hot surfaces (e.g. radiators, hotplates, bulbs, engine bowls, exhaust gas
DANGER systems)
 Friction heat (e.g. bearings running hot)
 Mechanically generated sparks (e.g. rock, concrete or metal sparks generated by
grinding, abrasive cutting or by hammer blows)
If such kind of work is necessary in areas marked by this sign, specific safety measures
must be taken before.
heavy skin burns) or property damage. Even fatal injuries are possible.

This symbol means: „Warning, danger of squashing-off limbs“.
Work in areas marked by this sign involves the risk of squashing-off limbs.
Persons working in these areas or with products marked by this sign should do their work
with utmost care.
WARNING of behaviour might cause severe bodily injuries, even the loss of limbs or severe property
damage.
This symbol means: „Warning, danger of falling“.

The risk of failing down exists in all height levels above 1.0 metres without protective railings
or similar, or in places where the risk of sinking exists.
Work in areas marked by this sign requires utmost care.
If necessary, workers should use safety belts and/or suitable safety clothing.
WARNING
of behaviour might cause severe bodily injuries, even the loss of limbs.
This symbol means: „Warning, Hot liquids and vapours“

The presence of hot liquids and vapours emerging from open vessels or under high pressure
cannot be safety detected under all circumstances.
Protective gloves should be used when getting into contact with hot liquids or vapours.
WARNING of behaviour might cause severe bodily injuries, even the loss of limbs or severe property
damage.
This symbol means: „Caution, danger of stumbling“.

Normally all paths can be used without any risks and without the need to permanently look
down. However, steps might be provided for equalization of height differences between
workplaces.
Cables and hoses laid on the ground may cause further temporary danger of stumbling.
Therefore, people walking there should occasionally look down in order to detect uneven
CAUTION areas so that stumbling cannot occur.
This warning sign marks a dangerous situation. Non-observance of the required rules of
behaviour might cause light bodily injuries.

This symbol means: „Prior to work, isolate machine from power supply“.
Only skilled electricians should carry out work on electrical plants and equipment items.
Prior to work, the electrical plant and the equipment items must be isolated from power
supply.
Non-observance of this rule may cause damage to health.
This symbol means: „Use catching safety belt“ (personal safety equipment for protection
against falling).
If an area (e.g. erection site) involves a higher danger of falling, catching safety belts and
the personal safety equipment must be used for protection against falling.
Non-observance of this instruction may cause damage to health and even fatal injuries.
This symbol means: „Use protective clothing“.

If a specific type of protective clothing is required on a workplace, the shown sign must be
provided there and a written note must be added to the operation instructions.
Special protective clothing could be among others:
 Weather protection, heat protection or frost protection clothing
 Clothing for protection against chemicals, welder’s protective clothing
 Isolating protective clothing for electricians
Non-observance of these rules may cause damage to health.
This symbol means: „Use ear protectors“.

If a high noise level is present in certain areas, ear protectors must be used.
In areas with a sound pressure level of 85 dB(A) or more, this sign should be provided to
remind the workers of their duty to use ear protectors.
Areas marked by this sign and/or operation of machines and equipment generating such a
sound pressure level make it compulsory to use the correct type of ear protectors. Otherwise
the workers could loose the hearing power of their ears (reversible hearing impairment after
an extended rest period) or suffer from impairment of hearing (irreversible hearing damage).

This symbol means: „Escape route“.
These signs are fitted along the escape route.
In case of emergency (e.g. fire or explosion) all persons should follow the arrow marking on
the escape route signs. Normally the escape routes are not confined. Escape routes must
be kept permanently free. In most cases they show the shortest way out of the dangerous
area up to the next structural unit (e.g. neighbouring building, way out to the open air).
The directional arrow must show the way to the next structural unit or to the open air.
This symbol means: „Danger of environmental pollution“.

Non-observance of this instruction may cause effects detrimental to the environment.
This symbol means: „Marking of containers provided for disposal of used oils and
lubricants“.
Non-observance of this instruction may cause effects detrimental to health and to the
environment.
This symbol means: „Marking of containers provided for disposal of oily cleaning
cloths“.
Non-observance of this instruction may cause effects detrimental to health and to the
environment.

1.2 Safety and protective appliances
1.2.1 Basic rules
Operation of the machine/plant without effective protection equipment might cause
severe injuries of operating staff.
Therefore, make sure that the machine/plant is never operated without protective wire
mesh guards, railings, protective covers or other safety appliances.
Never bypass or remove effective safety appliances since machine operators would be
exposed to the risk of accidents.
DANGER
 Moving mechanical components might cause severe injuries.
 Lethal electric shocks might occur.
Make sure that operators use the required personal safety equipment.
 Before putting the machine/plant into operation, check if all guards are fully operable and fitted correctly.
 Check all safety and monitoring appliances of the machine/plant for safe function. Never start the
machine/plant with missing or defective safety appliances.
 Never remove or bypass safety appliances.
 The machine is working with rotating machine components that can provoke squeezing injuries.
 If the removal of safety appliances is required for repair or maintenance work and this removal has
been authorized before, the equipment must be shut down and isolated from power supply so that the
machine/plant cannot be erroneously restarted. Once the repair and maintenance work has been
completed, all safety appliances must be re-installed in their original positions again.
 All EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons must be freely accessible. They must not be covered so that they
are not visible, and their settings must not be changed.
 Automatically actuated switches must not be blocked so that safe release is possible.
 Make sure that all fire alarming and fire-fighting equipment is in a technically sound condition. Keep all
operating staff informed about the locations and correct use of such fire alarming and fighting
equipment.
 Observe all safety and warning panels of the machine/plant and keep them in a good legible condition.
 Keep all limit switches and other safety appliances in a clean state, fully operable and free from dirt so
that their function cannot be impaired.

 Make sure to adhere to the setting, maintenance and inspection activities and intervals plus data on
replacement of parts and components contained in the operation manual. All those activities should be
accomplished only by qualified personnel (skilled work force).
Qualified personnel (skilled work force) are persons who have been authorized by the re-sponsible
for maintaining the safety of the components/ plant, to perform such activities and to detect and avoid
possible dangers as a result of their training, experience, instruction or familiarity with the relevant
Standards, regulations, accident prevention measures and operating conditions.
1.2.2 EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons
In case of danger, operate the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton or the pull-cable

switch. The machine/plant stops immediately.
ATTENTION: Observe the overtravel time of the machine!
IMPORTANT
Do not use the EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons for service stops of equipment since this mode of equipment
stop should be restricted to cases of emergency. Moreover, the use of EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons for
service stop of equipment may cause damage to the machine.
Sudden movements of equipment components may cause severe injuries.

Before unlocking the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton and resuming operation of the
equipment, make sure that the risk of accidents and damage can be excluded.
DANGER

1.3 Notes describing specific kinds of potential hazard
1.3.1 Potential hazards caused by electric power
Switch off the machine/plant immediately in case of troubles in the electric power supply!
POTENTIAL HAZARDS CAUSED BY ELECTRIC POWER!

Only well-qualified electricians shall accomplish all work on power supply systems.
Make sure that machine and equipment subject to compulsory inspections, repair and
maintenance work are – if required - iso-lated from power before such work is carried
out. To be sure, check the isolated equipment items if they are still under voltage. Earth
and short-circuit them and isolate other equipment in the vicinity of power supply.
DANGER If work is necessary on live components, a second person must be available for safety
reasons who may open the circuit breaker or isolate the equipment in case of need. This
second person must be well familiar with resuscitation measures.
Check the electrical equipment at regular intervals. Defects found must be eliminated
immediately.
Keep the control cabinet closed. Access to the control cabinet is limited to authorised
persons.
1.3.2 Potential hazards caused by hydraulic components
ALL WORK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY WELL QUALIFIED STAFF

The system must be relieved from pressure before repair and mainte-nance work,
including opening of system parts and pressure pipes, can be carried out.
Check the hydraulic components at regular intervals (leak tightness of the system,
WARNING
hydraulic oil filters).
CAUTION, HOT LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS

Be careful when handling hot utilities and auxiliary materials. Risk of skin burning!
WARNING

1.3.3 Gas, dust, vapours and smoke
CAUTION, RISK OF EXPLOSION AND FIRE!

Welding, flame cutting, soldering and grinding work must not be carried out without the
express permission by the manager or the competent foreman. All applicable safety
measures must be strictly followed. This includes the cleaning of machines/plants and
the elimination of dust and inflammable materials. Ensure sufficient ventilation.
DANGER
Cover broken-out spots with non-inflammable materials.
1.4 Specific areas where hazards might exist
CAUTION, SUSPENDED LOADS!

Persons must not stay under suspended loads. All load handling operations shall be
supervised by a number of persons. Crane operator and supervisors must have direct
contact with each other.
DANGER
CAUTION, RISK OF DOWNFALL!

Working, maintenance and repair platforms without safety railing involve the risk of
downfall!
WARNING
CAUTION, RISK OF STUMBLING!

When walking on working, maintenance and repair platforms, note the risk of stumbling
caused by ledges in objects provided on the floor.
DANGER
CAUTION, RISK OF SQUEEZING!

In mobile machine/plant parts, all persons must be kept out of the safety zones.
DANGER

CAUTION, RISK OF DOWNFALL!
 Certain repair and maintenance work may make it neces-sary to climb over the
safety barriers of shutdown ma-chine/plant.
DANGER  Only well instructed workers who are well familiar with the potential hazards
should be nominated for this work.
 The use of safety belts, safety harnesses shall be used for protection against
downfall.
All zones where safety facilities are changed or even removed must be blocked. Access
to these zones must be blocked with safety chains.
DANGER
1.5 Cleaning the machine/plant and waste disposal in general
CAUTION RISK OF FIRE! / CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION!

Note that there is a risk of fire and explosion when using solvents and sol-vent-
containing cleaning agents.
DANGER
When using solvents and solvent-containing cleaning agents, note that there is a ban
on
naked fire of any kind and smoking!

DANGER
USE CLOTHS AND MATERIALS CORRECTLY AND DISPOSE THEM PROPERLY, WITH
THE EMPHASIS ON:
 Work on lubrication systems and appliances.
 Cleaning by use of solvents.

1.6 Noise level of machines
Depending on the local conditions on site, a higher sound pressure level may develop
and cause hardness of hearing- In such causes the workers are obliged to wear ear
protectors or to take other protective measures.
1.7 Environmental protection
All lubricants, cooling or cleaning agents hazardous to environment must be disposed

of in compliance with the latest statutory requirements.
During all work with or on the equipment the rules on the avoidance of wastes and the
correct disposal or recycling of wastes shall be observed.
Substances like
 Hydraulic fluids
 Oils and greases
 Coolants
 Solvent-containing cleaning agents
required for installation, repair and maintenance work must not get into the soil or enter
the sewage system.
These fluids must be collected in suitable vessels before they are disposed of properly.

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 3
Technical data
FAM
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799

CONTENTS
1 TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................................... 3

1 TECHNICAL DATA

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 4
Design and function
FAM
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799

CONTENTS
1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM FUNCTION ................................................................................................. 3
1.1 General function and locking conditions .............................................................................................. 3

1.1.1 Basics ............................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1.2 On-site operation............................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.3 Alarm list ........................................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.4 Activation release ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.1.5 Activation process .......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.6 Deactivation release ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.7 Deactivation ................................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.8 Fault analysis ................................................................................................................................. 6
1.1.8.1 Basics .................................................................................................................................. 6
1.1.8.2 Emergency stop ................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.8.3 Standstill of the removing system ........................................................................................ 6
1.1.8.4 Speed monitoring ................................................................................................................. 6
1.1.8.5 Switching on-site operating points ....................................................................................... 7
1.1.8.6 Failure of the lubrication system .......................................................................................... 7
1.1.8.7 Electrical faults, tripping of protection elements .................................................................. 7
1.1.8.8 Voltage failure at the infeed ................................................................................................. 7
1.1.8.9 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................................................. 7
1.2 Function description lubrication system for the roller screen ........................................................... 8
1.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 8
1.2.2 Activation release ........................................................................................................................... 8
1.2.3 Activation ........................................................................................................................................ 8
1.2.4 Deactivation release ...................................................................................................................... 8
1.2.5 Deactivation ................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.6 Fault analysis ................................................................................................................................. 9
1.2.6.1 Basics .................................................................................................................................. 9
1.2.6.2 Grease container - Fill level below min................................................................................ 9
1.2.6.3 Switching on-site operating points ....................................................................................... 9
1.2.6.4 Electrical faults, tripping of protection elements .................................................................. 9
1.2.6.5 Voltage failure at the infeed ................................................................................................. 9

1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM FUNCTION
1.1 General function and locking conditions
1.1.1 Basics
The roller screen consists of several rollers placed in sequence and consisting of polygonal discs. The roller
set is made of several rollers placed in parallel with each other on which the load is divided according to the
separating size.
Fine grain (smaller than the separating size) leaves the rollers downwards. Coarse grain (larger than the
separating size) is transported on to the end of the roller screen on the rollers (overflow).
On-site operation via a local operator panel (LOP) must be provided:
The following signals must be provided:
 EMERGENCY STOP
 SELECTION SWITCH for on-site operation
 Switch normal, reversing
 START all rollers
 STOP all rollers
Rotating direction reversal only possible after 5s (adjust at commissioning).
IMPORTANT

1.1.2 On-site operation
Working in on-site operation, remote operation must be locked and the speed monitoring must be bridged.
Transport of material in on-site operation must be prevented.
Emergency stop is always active. Motor currents must be protected against overcurrent via the motor protection
switch.
1.1.3 Alarm list

Field device Alarm Measured value Comments
Rotating speed of Underspeed for more than 1 90% nominal speed
rollers second in at least one roller;
reverse all rollers for 1 second.
Then let the rollers turn again
normally. If the rated speed is not
reached after 2 seconds, stop the
rollers.
(Alarm 3)
Temperature motor Temperature HH Value according to Provide PTC
coil manufacturer's evaluation unit
(Alarm 3)
documentation
(3x1 PTC)
Motor current Triple power intake for more than 1 Value according to Provide for current
second manufacturer's recording and read
documentation in control
Stop rollers.
(Alarm 3)
An Alarm 1 generates a warning in the control centre and requires inspection in the system.
An Alarm 2 generates deactivation of the supplying system. If the system is switched on while there is an alarm
2, the roller screen cannot be started up.
If an Alarm 3 is generated during operation, the roller screen must be switched off at once.
1.1.4 Activation release

The following prerequisites are needed to activate the roller screen:
 The removing system must be in operation in the locked (remote) operation.
 In the unlocked (on-site-operation) condition, operation takes place solely in the responsibility of the
operator.

1.1.5 Activation process
The roller screen is activated in the same manner in the locked (remote) and unlocked (on-site) operation.
The rollers are switched on in sequence at an interval of 0.5 seconds, starting with the last roller in the conveying
direction. An acoustic and visual warning signal must be tripped before the shear roller crusher starts up (5x
buzzer + flash lamp each). Persons who are in the danger area must have enough time to leave the danger
area.
The roller screen is deemed on:
 once it has been started
The roller screen is deemed ready:
 when both rollers have reached their nominal speeds
1.1.6 Deactivation release

The following prerequisites are needed to deactivate the roller screen:
 The supplying system must be out of operation in the locked operation.
 In the unlocked condition, operation takes place solely in the responsibly of the operator.
1.1.7 Deactivation
In locked (remote) operation, a lag time of approx. 60 seconds must be complied with to empty the roller screen
first.
In unlocked (on-site) operation, this time is not needed. Then both rollers are switched off at the same time.
Then both rollers are switched off at the same time.
The roller screen is deemed off:
 when all rollers have been switched off
The roller screen is deemed out of operation:
 When both rollers have reached rotating speed 0

1.1.8 Fault analysis
1.1.8.1 Basics
Switching procedures that are initiated due to faults can be performed independently of the activation or
deactivation releases.
The cause of the fault must be signalled accordingly.
After the deactivation, independent reactivation of the system is not permitted. If the roller screen switches off,
a signal must be formed that can be used to switch off the supplying system. At normal operation, the power
intake of the motors is monitored. When the triple nominal current is reached within 1 second, the roller screen
is switched off.
1.1.8.2 Emergency stop

Two emergency stop buttons must be provided. When an emergency stop is tripped, all rollers are switched off
at once. Reactivation is only permitted after inspection on site and confirmation.
1.1.8.3 Standstill of the removing system

In locked (remote) operation, all rollers are switched off at once when the removing system is standing still.
In unlocked (on-site) operation, standstill of the removing system has no influence.
Reactivation is possible at once in compliance with the activation release.
1.1.8.4 Speed monitoring

Every roller of the roller screen is monitored separately for undercutting of the nominal speed. When the roller
starts up, the speed evaluation is bridged for one second.
If the min. speed of a roller is below the nominal speed, this may be due to catching. To release this, all rollers
are briefly reversed. During the process, the rotating speed evaluation of the rollers is bridged. The process
goes as follows:
 Immediate deactivation of all rollers
 Waiting time 1 second
 Activation of all rollers in the opposite direction
 Deactivation of the reversed rollers
 Activation of all rollers in the normal rotating direction
 Activation of the rotating speed monitoring after one second
If the rotating speed of the same rollers is undercut again within 10 minutes after reversing, all rollers must be
switched off at once. Reactivation is only permitted after removal of the causes and confirmation.

1.1.8.5 Switching on-site operating points
When the roller screen is not switched off and switching at the on-site operating point takes place from on-site
to remote or vice versa, all rollers must be switched off at once. Reactivation is only permitted after confirmation.
1.1.8.6 Failure of the lubrication system

In the locked condition, all rollers will be switched off after 24 operating hours of the roller screen. Reactivation
is only permitted after removal of the causes and confirmation. In the unlocked condition, operation takes place
solely in the responsibly of the operator. There is no deactivation in this case.
1.1.8.7 Electrical faults, tripping of protection elements

Faults from failure of electrical operating equipment or tripping of protection elements (motor protection switch,
safety monitoring, etc.) will lead to immediate deactivation of all rollers. Reactivation is only permitted after
removal of the causes and confirmation.
1.1.8.8 Voltage failure at the infeed

When the voltage returns after a voltage failure at the infeed, the roller screen will not start up again on its own.
Reactivation is only permitted after confirmation.
1.1.8.9 Maintenance and servicing

During maintenance or servicing, the system generally must be powered down and the emergency stop must
be pushed.

1.2 Function description lubrication system for the roller screen
1.2.1 General
The lubrication system is made up of a pump, a main and two subdistributors that supply the lubrication points
with grease. The distributors are designed as progressive distributors. The main distributor has a sensor for
lubrication cycle monitoring.
Lubrication takes place in intervals. For precise setting of the intervals, the control must use a variable time link
(break times) and a variable counting element (cycle number).
On-site control must be provided.
1.2.2 Activation release

The following prerequisites are needed to automatically activate the lubrication system:
 The roller screen must be in operation in the locked (remote) operation.
 In the unlocked (on-site-operation) condition, operation takes place solely in the responsibility of the
operator.
1.2.3 Activation
The lubrication system is activated in locked (remote) operation.
The lubrication pump is running in the following intervals:
 Activation of the lubrication pump after the break times set in the time link (usually 3 minutes).
 The break time between the lubrication cycles may be between 60 minutes and 0 minutes in locked
(remote) operation (usually approx. 40 minutes).
 Deactivation of the lubrication pump after the cycle number set in the counting element (flank change
0-1).
In unlocked (on-site) operation, the lubrication system at the on-site control is switched on by activation of the
lubrication pump; the lubrication pump runs in permanent operation.
1.2.4 Deactivation release

The following prerequisites are needed to automatically deactivate the lubrication system:
 The roller screen must be out of operation in the locked (remote) operation.
 In the unlocked (on-site-operation) condition, operation takes place solely in the responsibility of the
operator.

1.2.5 Deactivation
In locked (remote) operation, the lubrication system is switched off by deactivation of the roller screen.
The lubrication system is deemed off when:
 The roller screen is switched off in the locked (remote) operation.
 The lubrication pump is off in the unlocked (on-site) operation.
1.2.6 Fault analysis

1.2.6.1 Basics
The cause of the fault must be signalled accordingly.
After the deactivation, independent reactivation of the system is not permitted. If the lubrication system is
switched off, a signal must be formed that can be used to switch off the roller screen with a delay.
1.2.6.2 Grease container - Fill level below min

If the fill level in the supply container undercuts the lower limit, the lubrication pump will be switched off at once.
1.2.6.3 Switching on-site operating points

When the lubrication system is not switched off and switching at the on-site operating point takes place from
on-site to remote or vice versa, the lubrication pump must be switched off.
Reactivation is only permitted after a starting command.
1.2.6.4 Electrical faults, tripping of protection elements

Fault from failure of electrical operating equipment or tripping of protection elements (motor protection switch,
safety monitoring, etc.) will lead to immediate deactivation of the lubrication pump.
Reactivation is only permitted after removal of the causes and confirmation.
1.2.6.5 Voltage failure at the infeed

When the voltage returns after a voltage failure at the infeed, the lubrication pump will not start up again on its
own. Reactivation is only permitted after confirmation.

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 5
General view drawing
FAM
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799

CONTENTS
1 GENERAL VIEW DRAWING .................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Drawing directory .................................................................................................................................... 3

1 GENERAL VIEW DRAWING
1.1 Drawing directory
Description Drawing-No. Revision Page
ROLLER GRIZZLY.RR.14.39.P-E 0000019063 0 1

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 6
Maintenance
FAM
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799

CONTENTS
1 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Basic safety notes ............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Ropes and rope fixtures ..................................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Torques for tightening of bolts .......................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Basic safety notes for repair .............................................................................................................. 8

1.4.1 Replacing polygon discs .................................................................................................................11
1.4.2 Replacing wear plates of the scrapers ............................................................................................11
1.4.3 Replacing of the geared motor ........................................................................................................11
Annex 1: Lubrication
Annex 2: Control and Maintenance
Annex 3: Spare and wear parts

1 MAINTENANCE
1.1 Basic safety notes
Please note the information in the manual 1 “Use of machine according to intended
purpose” and manual 2 “Basic safety requirements”.
The supplied documentation of attachment parts (e.g. gearbox, motors etc.)
supplements the following statements and should be understood as obligatory.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to adhere to the setting, maintenance and inspection activities and intervals plus data on
replacement of parts and components contained in the operation manual. All those activities should be
accomplished only by qualified personnel (skilled work force).
Qualified personnel (skilled work force) are persons who have been authorized by the responsible for
maintaining the safety of the components/ plant, to perform such activities and to detect and avoid possible
dangers as a result of their training, experience, instruction or familiarity with the relevant Standards,
regulations, accident prevention measures and operating conditions.
Data on lubrication points, lubricants, filling volume and frequency of lubrication

may be found in the lubrication chart in Appendix 1.
NOTE Data on maintenance actions and frequencies may be found in the maintenance
plan in Appendix 2.
During all work with or on the equipment the rules on the avoidance of wastes and
the correct disposal or recycling of wastes shall be observed.
Substances like
 Hydraulic fluids
 Oils and greases
 Coolants
 Solvent-containing cleaning agents
required for installation, repair and maintenance work must not get into the soil or
enter the sewage system.
These fluids must be collected in suitable vessels before they are disposed of
properly.

WARNING! OVERPRESSURE
Prior to repair or maintenance, the equipment items and pressure lines to be opened
must be relieved from pressure.
WARNING Work should be carried out only by skilled workers.
CAUTION, HOT LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS

Be careful when handling hot substances. Risk of skin burns and scalds.
WARNING
POTENTIAL HAZARDS CAUSED BY ELECTRIC POWER

POTENTIAL RISK OF AUTOMATIC OR UNINTENDED START OF MACHINE
Only qualified electricians should carry out work on the power supply system.
DANGER Make sure that machine and plant equipment subject to compulsory inspections,
repair and maintenance work are isolated from power before such work is carried
out. To be sure, check the isolated equipment items if they are still under voltage.
Earth and short-circuit them and isolate other equipment in the vicinity from power
supply.
DANGER
Prior to all repair and erection work, the equipment and its components should be
isolated from power supply so that drives cannot be started by mistake while repair
work is carried out.
All cable connections of components to be replaced must be disconnected. After
reassembly, cable connections must be made again!
DANGER FOR THE DRIFT STABILITY

Suitable measures must be taken to ensure at any time that all repair and
maintenance work can be safely accomplished without impairing the stability of the
overall machine. If brakes are removed, additional fixtures (e.g. clamping devices)
DANGER must be used that have the same effect.
WARNING, DANGER OF SQUEEZING INJURIES

Utmost care is required when suspending or threading-in auxiliary tools for lifting of
loads (chains, lifting belts, ropes). Note the risk of squeezing-off limbs.
WARNING

CAUTION, SUSPENDED LOADS!
Nominate only well-experienced persons for suspension of loads and for giving
instructions to the crane operator. The person giving instructions to the crane
operator must be positioned so that it is in sight contact with the crane operator or
may communicate with him through a radiotelephone set.
When replacement of single parts or larger components is required, the parts must
be safely fitted to the hoisting gear and handled so that all risks are excluded. Only
suitable hoisting gears and load carrying attachments in technically sound condition
and with sufficient hoisting capacity shall be used.
DANGER
For handling of plant components only the provided suspension points and marked
eyebolts shall be used.
Persons must not stay or work under suspended loads.
It is prohibited to transport persons together with the load or on the load suspension
devices.
ATTENTION IN CASE OF WORK IN ELEVATED POSITIONS!

Never use equipment parts for climbing.
When work in overhead positions is required, use only tested and approved
DANGER equipment for protection against falling down.
In case of repair or maintenance work in elevated positions the workforce may fall
down and suffer heavy injuries or even death.
Therefore, use only approved climbing aids and working platforms.
DANGER DUE TO BLOCKED ESCAPE ROUTES

DANGER Keep escape routes free from all obstacles: never put down or store components in
escape routes and observe the applicable safety rules.
Damage to the paint must be eliminated according to the paint specification after
having finished maintenance works.
IMPORTANT

1.2 Ropes and rope fixtures
 Ropes must be kept under supervision while they are in operation and while they are not used. This is
applicable not only to the ropes but also to the rope fixtures, rope connections and rope guides.
 In case of wire rope fixtures, the specified number of rope clips must not be reduced.
Nominal size (rope) Required torque for Tensile force required Required number of
tightening in the rope clip thread wire rope clips
[Nm] [N]
5 2,20 2300 5
6,5 3,85 3200 5
8 6,60 4700 6
10 9,90 7100 6
13 36,30 15400 6
16 53,90 21000 6
19 74,47 28900 6
22 117,70 40800 7
26 161,70 47600 7
30 233,20 62300 8
34 325,60 79200 8
40 399,30 89800 8
1.3 Torques for tightening of bolts

Bolt size Bolt property class 10.9 Bolt property class 8.8
Tightening moment to be applied Tightening moment to be applied
MA [Nm] MA [Nm]
M8 20
M10 40
M12 100 70
M16 250 170
M20 450 300
M22 650 450
M24 800 600
M27 1250 900
M30 1650 1200
M36 2800 2100
MA = Required torque for tightening with torque wrench

All torques for tightening are applicable to bolts with metric thread according DIN 13, nut with MoS 2
treated

Bolt size Stainless steel / Tightening moment to be applied
3)
A2-70; A4-70 MoS2 4) µges~0,10
Nm
M8 15
M 10 30
M 12 51
M 16 125
M 20 245
M 24 421
M 27 620
M 30 844
3) Metric thread acc. to DIN 13

4) nut with MoS2 or equivalent lubricant treated

1.4 Basic safety notes for repair
DANGER FOR THE STABILITY!

All repair work must be realized only at wind speeds up to maximum 5 m/s. During
the repairs, the wind speed must not exceed 10 m/s!
DANGER
DANGER DUE TO UNINTENDED RE-START!

Prior to repair, the conveying routes affected and upstream conveyors of
machines must be made empty. Suitable actions are required to ensure that such
equipment cannot be started by mistake.
DANGER Starting of the electrical or hydraulic drives of the assembly groups that are being
worked on, must be excluded.

In case repair work technology makes it necessary to erect piles between ground
level and machine, the load carrying capacity of soil must be calculated before the
piles are erected (the permitted ground pressure need to be complied).
The piles must be erected on a ground level sufficiently able to take the maximum
load.
The size of the piles must be selected according to the permitted ground pressure
DANGER and the imposed load.
The piles must be secured against overturning.
In this process need to be ensured that the piles are positioned vertically and
centrically under the support points.

In case of using mobile lifting devices, the load carrying capacity of soil must be
calculated before (the permitted ground pressure need to be complied).
DANGER
DANGER DUE TO OBJECTS FALLING DOWN!

For all repair works it is forbidden to stay under the repair area! This area has to
be closed off across a large area.
DANGER Falling objects may cause severe bodily injury or loss of life.

WARNING! RISK OF INJURIES CAUSED BY SPRING TENSION/CHAIN TENSION!
When installing or removing components under mechanical stresses, persons
might suffer injuries and equipment parts may become damaged or even
destroyed.
DANGER Before performing work on such components suitable action should be taken to
exclude such potential risks.
RISK OF SQUEEZING-OFF LIMBS

The conveying belt is always under tension, even while a belt conveyor is switched
off. In the case of works where the conveyor belt exerts a direct or indirect effect,
pretension must be neutralized by relieving the conveyor belt before starting the
work. This might result in a short movement of the conveyor belt and the take-up
DANGER device.
RISK OF SQUEEZING-OFF LIMBS

For all belt-drive repair works suitable measures (e.g. belt clamps) have to be used
to secure the conveyor belt against self-actuated movement.
DANGER
DANGER DUE TO MISSING OR NOT CORECTLY INSTALLED SAFETY

APPLIANCES
After repair all safety devices must be checked for mounting and function and a
start-up test without transported material must be realized!
DANGER

Repair works at
 Spherical bearings of the bridge segments
 Ball-bearing slewing ring
 Hoisting -and levelling cylinder
 Main carrying construction
DANGER As well as the disassebly of machine parts of the travel drive notably affect the
stability of the entire plant. That is why these works may only be carried out after
having consulted the company FAM and only by qualified maintenance personnel.
Non-observance of this instruction may lead to damages at the plant, severe or
even fatal injuries.

In case of repair where fitting bolts or fitting bolt connections are to be removed,
the parts concerned shall be properly marked so that they can be re-installed in the
correct positions!
If the fitting bolt connections have been removed, in the course of reassembly they
should be replaced by new bolts with a thicker fitting shaft. Conjointly the holes
IMPORTANT should be bored to a larger size.
If components (such as drive units or belt drums) are not immediately reinstalled
after disassembly, the previously disassembled railings, grating grids or protective
grilles must be reassembled after disassembly until the component is rebuilt.
Failure to observe this instruction can result in serious injury or death.
GEFAHR
For the transport of the plant components, only the intended anchor points or stop
lugs are to be used (see information in the supplier documentation).
GEFAHR
After repair, all safety devices must be checked for mounting and function!
GEFAHR

1.4.1 Replacing of the roller
 Separate the coupling halves of the drives
 Disassemble cover and material guide with lifting device and lay down
 Disassemble the sealing
 Loosen the upper part of the bearing blocks on both sides
 Attach roller (approx. 275 kg/piece) to lifting device, lift and further transport to the repair workshop
 Dismount the bearings
 Mount the bearings to the new roller
 Assembly is carried out in reverse order
 Adjust the gap between wear plates and lower edge of the polygon discs
1.4.2 Replacing wear plates of the scrapers
Cover the chute under the roller grizzly by means of timber blocks, so that the wear
plates can be reached safely.
Danger
 Replace the wear plates from the inside
 Adjust the gap between wear plates and lower edge of the polygon discs
1.4.3 Replacing of the geared motor
See Documentation of the drive unit roller screen in manual 7.

NOTE
 Isolate the roller screen from power supply and secure it against unauthorized, erroneous and unintended
start-up.
 Dismount the supply lines.
 Separate the roll from the geared motor by loosening the screw fittings and coupling.
 Sling the geared motor to the crane and secure it against tilting.
 Remove the fastening bolt connections of the geared motor.
 Lift the geared motor.
 Slew the crane and lower the geared motor on a suitable truck and secure it against moving.
 Further transport to the repair shop and there dismounting the components, if necessary.
 Re-assembly of the disassembled components is performed in the reverse order of disassembly.

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 6
Maintenance
Annex 1
Lubrication
SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M6.1 1/2

Project: Song Hau 1 Lubrication Plan
Legend Lubrication period: HH..........operation

Betriebsstunden
hours
TT.....
.....days
Tagen
WW.... ....weeks
Wochen
Order No.: 124442 MM.....month
..... Monaten
J J.. .....
... year
Jahren
Plant unit: Roller grizzly RR1439
Supplier: FAM Code: P0EBD72

Points
No. of lubric.
No. Lubrication point Manufacturer Lubricant Type of Lubricant Amount of Lubrication Cycle Date of Company/ Signature
name Lubricant Control First lubricant Relubrication Renewal of filling or Name
Manufacturer
Lubricant supply renewal Quantity Lubricant control
1 Drive 14 R87 Oil CLP220 2,3 every 3000 H ** at the latest
Spur gear Fill in Mineral oil Litre at least every 6 months every 3 years
2 Drive 28 R87 Grease Renolit CX-TOM15 * ** at the latest
Bearing Spur gear Fill in Fuchs every 3 years
* -FFor fast-running
f t i bearings
b i (M
(Motor-
t and d gear unit
it iinputt end):
d) Fill th
the cavities
iti b between
t th
the rolling
lli elements
l t one-third
thi d ffullll with
ith grease.
- For slow-running bearings (in the gear unit and gear unit output end): Fill the cavities between the rolling elements two-thirds full with grease.
** - Depending on the operating conditions as oil temperature (see Assembly and Operating Instructions Gear Unit chapter 6.3)
3 Central lubrication 1 Grease GADUS.S.2.V.100.2 10 Liter Electrical fill level control
unit Fill in Shell Tank 8 Liter Refill when signal occurs
4 Bearing 28 Grease GADUS.S.2.V.100.2 8 signals for 1 complete lubrication cycle; Adjust the interval between lubrication cycles between 60
Central lubrication
Rollers unit
Shell minutes and 0 minutes during commissioning (normally 40 minutes)
Note the special information on lubrication in the add-on parts documentation!
Control
Comment: Date: .............................................. Name: ........................ Signature: .................................
Status: 28.02.2017
File: 124442_M6_AN1_E.xls Sheet: 1 of 1
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 6
Maintenance
Annex 2
Control and Maintenance

Maintenance Plan
Legend of maintenance intervals: a - Daily; b - Weekly; c - Monthly; d - Every 3 months; e - Every six months; f - Yearly; S - Special intervals
Pos. device/assembly group

measurements/comments a b c d e f S
No. description of scope of services
1. General maintenance
<> General visual inspection of all plant components Daily X
<> Visual inspection for bulk material accumulation and dirt Weekly (remove bulk material accumulation and dirt if necessary) X
<> Cleaning the surfaces of equipment items and electric components Monthly X
1.1. General controls
<> Overall check up Check for sound condition daily before start of work shift X
<> Check for corrosion every 6 months; X
Defects in the paint coating must be repaired under consideration of coating specification
<> Check for: Every 6 months; X
-- Deformation
-- Loose joints of bolted, screwed and other connections
-- Visual damage to welded connections
<> Check all fasteners like bolts, nuts, pins etc. for firm seating X
<> Check for cleanliness clean if necessary X
<> Thorough cleaning Use scraper, brush and compressed air for cleaning in repair shift X
<> Check the internal space for material baking Baking found in the internal space must be removed manually X
<> Check the wear plates for firm seating weekly X
• visual check
2. Drive
2.1 Gear motor R87 DRN112M4/TF
<> Inspect the motor: every 10000 hours of operation; see "Operating
Operating instructions SEW: Chapter 7"
7 X
- Check rolling bearing and change if necessary
- Replace the oil seal
- Clean the cooling air passages
<> Touch up or renew the surfaces/anticorrosion coating depending on external factors
Bearing of the bevel-helical gear unit
<> Occasionally check the condition of the grease filling
<> Renewal of the ball-bearing grease approx. 2 years, together with due oil change of the gear unit, see operating instructions SEW X
when re-greasing, clean the bearings with suitable solvents, only 2/3 of the free room of the
bearing filled with grease
Date: 27.02.2017 Page 1 of 3

Maintenance Plan

Gear unit R87 see "Operating instructions SEW"
<> Check the oil and the oil level every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months; see chapter 6 X
<> Check running noise for possible bearing damage every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months X
<> Visually check the seals for leakage every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months X
<> For gear units with a torque arm: Check the rubber buffer and change it, if necessary every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months X
<> Change synthetic oil Depending on the operating conditions (see chapter 6), at least every 3 years X
see also chapter 6
<> Replace roller bearing grease Depending on the operating conditions (see chapter 6), at least every 3 years X
<> Replace oil seal (do not install it in the same track) Depending on the operating conditions (see chapter 6), at least every 3 years X
see also chapter 6
<> Touch up or renew the surface/anticorrosion coating depending on external factors, see chapter 6 X
Bearing of the motor
<> Change of ball bearing together with the due grease change of the gear unit bearing, see operating instructions SEW X
3. Progressive grease central lubrication system

Given that the plant is only operated with clean lubricant, the corresponding plant components do not need special maintenance. All metallic and movable parts within the lubrication area are
located in the middle of the lubricant to be conveyed and therefore lubricate themselves. Furthermore we refer to the corresponding technical information on operating and maintenance
regulations. They are an inherent part of the operating instructions and have to be kept in mind.
3.1 Grease p
pump p
<> Check for cleanliness, leak tightness and function if necessary, clean; always keep the container tightly closed, X
check for unusual noises X
3.2 Grease pump - Level switch
<> Check level switch for function Sensor surface has to be clean, do not soil with lubricant when filling ! X
Function control with open lid by means of a suitable test area X
3.3 Pressure relief valve NU-A
<> Check for possibly leaked out lubricant Leaked out lubricant is a sign for overpressure in the system or a faulty valve X
Troubleshooting necessary. Possible reasons might be: Loss of pressure too high in the lines,
distributor or lubrication point blocked. X
3.4 Lubricant distributor
<> Check for cleanliness, leak tightness and function if necessary, clean; check for function of the motion indicator X
Check for lubricant leakage at the consumption point X
3.5 Tube and hose connections, Hydraulic-screw joints and fasteners
<> Check for leak tightness and firm seat replace damaged or porous hose lines X
Date: 27.02.2017 Page 2 of 3

Maintenance Plan

4. Rollers
<> Check polygon discs for wear Visual check; replace worn out elements X
<> Check bearings for warming and smooth running X
<> Check bearings for lubrication see Lubrication plan
5. Housing
<> Check wear plates for wear monthly visual check, replace worn out wear plates X
6. Local electrical appliances
<> Check for dirt X
<> Check electrical connections for safe fixings and damage X
<> Check for correct function X
7. Scrapers (4 pcs.)
<> Check wear plates for correct setting and excessive wear One visual inspection per month. If necessary, correct the scraper gap (5 mm) and X
replace wear plates
<> check the seals for wear Visual inspection, if necessary replace X
Note the special information about maintenance in the technical documentation of the add-on parts and prefer them to those mentioned above.
Date: 27.02.2017 Page 3 of 3

OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 6
Maintenance
Annex 3
Spare and wear parts

Dear Ladies and Gentlemen,
The standard package of services rendered by FAM Förderanlagen Magdeburg for your project
includes an electronic spare parts catalog.
The electronic catalog provides a detailed overview of all mechanical spare, wear and add-on parts as
well as their installation locations in the equipment supplied by FAM:
Spare parts drawing
Project overview
Spare parts list
The catalog is available online. To use the online version, please follow the link:
https://etk.fam.de/template/index.php
or use the access from our FAM website:

The LOGIN page of the electronic spare parts catalog appears:
Select the option ”Forgot your password?“ and send the automatically generated e-mail with your
request to the pre-set address:
etk@fam.de
You can contact us directly via the above mentioned address.
In this case, the members of our service team will get in touch with you as soon as possible.
We are looking forward to a successful cooperation.
Best regards,
Your Service-Team
FAM Förderanlagen Magdeburg
D-39112 Magdeburg
Postfach 35 40
D-39010 Magdeburg
Tel.: +49-(0)3 91 / 63 80-10700

Fax.: +49-(0)3 91 / 63 80-10799
service@fam.de
http://www.fam.de
Projekt: Verschleiss- und Ersatzteilliste
Project:
Song Hau 1 Spare and Wear Parts List
Projekt-Nr.: ROLLENROST P0EBD72

Project-No.:
124442 ROLLER SCREEN P0EBD72
FAM Art.-Nr. eingebaute Anzahl
Zeichng.-Nr. / Detail Pos.-Nr. Menge Einheit Gewicht ET VT AnT
insgesamt
Bezeichnung Description
Total No. of
FAM Ident No. Drawing-No / Detail Pos.-Nr. Qty Unit Weight SP WP AnT
installed Parts
[kg]
0 VN.124442A.40A.380044 ROLLENROST P0EBD72 ROLLER SCREEN P0EBD72 1 ST 1 ST

1 9302448 ROLLENROST.RR.14.39.P-E ROLLER.SCREEN.RR.14.39.P-E_E EVT 09302448 1 1 ST 1 ST 11380,00
2 9302450 ROLLENSATZ SET.OF.ROLLERS EVT 09302450 1 1 ST 1 ST 3820,00
3 9300076 ROLLE ROLL EVT 09300076 1 7 ST 7 ST 275,00 X
4 9300078 WELLE SHAFT EVT 09300078 1 7 ST 7 ST 245,00 X
5 9300085 POLYGONSCHEIBE POLYGON.DISK 4 98 ST 196 ST 0,90 X
4 10005405 BUCHSE BUSH 2 14 ST 28 ST 4,30 X
4 10005400 LAGERDECKEL BEARING.COVER 3 14 ST 28 ST 2,20 X
4 10005404 LABYRINTHRING LABYRINTH.RING 6 21 ST 42 ST 1,10 X
4 10002825 SCHALTFAHNE SWITCH.FLAG 7 7 ST 14 ST 0,20 X
4 20013236 PASSFEDER PARALLEL.KEY 8 28 ST 56 ST 0,12 X
4 52358 PASSFEDER PARALLEL.KEY 9 7 ST 14 ST 0,10 X
4 9306241 NUTMUTTER SLOTTED.NUT 10 7 ST 14 ST 0,56 X
4 20001267 SICHERUNGSBLECH LOCK.PLATE 11 7 ST 14 ST 0,06 X
4 3290 WAELZLAGER ROLLER.BEARING 16 14 ST 28 ST 3,50 X
3 9300077 ROLLE ROLL EVT 09300077 2 7 ST 7 ST 275,00 X
4 9300079 WELLE SHAFT EVT 09300079 1 7 ST 7 ST 245,00 X
5 9300085 POLYGONSCHEIBE POLYGON.DISK 4 98 ST 196 ST WT 0,90 X
4 10005405 BUCHSE BUSH 2 14 ST 28 ST WT 4,30 X
4 10005400 LAGERDECKEL BEARING.COVER 3 14 ST 28 ST WT 2,20 X
4 10005404 LABYRINTHRING LABYRINTH.RING 6 21 ST 42 ST WT 1,10 X
4 10002825 SCHALTFAHNE SWITCH.FLAG 7 7 ST 14 ST WT 0,20 X
4 20013236 PASSFEDER PARALLEL.KEY 8 28 ST 56 ST WT 0,12 X
4 52358 PASSFEDER PARALLEL.KEY 9 7 ST 14 ST WT 0,10 X
4 9306241 NUTMUTTER SLOTTED.NUT 10 7 ST 14 ST WT 0,56 X
4 20001267 SICHERUNGSBLECH LOCK.PLATE 11 7 ST 14 ST WT 0,06 X
4 3290 WAELZLAGER ROLLER.BEARING 16 14 ST 28 ST WT 3,50 X
2 9302449 GEHAEUSE HOUSING EVT 09302449 2 1 ST 1 ST 3130,00
3 9302479 AUSLAUFTEIL OUTLET.PART 2 1 ST 1 ST 370,00 X
3 9131558 QUERSTEG CROSS.BEAM 5 3 ST 5 ST 31,00 X
3 9114532 OBERTEIL UPPER.PART 6 2 ST 2 ST 58,00 X
3 9114534 OBERTEIL UPPER.PART EVT 09114534 9 2 ST 2 ST 60,00 X
4 9110244 KLAPPE FLAP EVT 09110244 6 2 ST 2 ST 9,00 X
5 20021364 ZELLKAUTSCHUK INDIAN.RUBBER.STRIP 9 2,8 M 11,52 M 0,13 X
4 9110245 SCHUTZGITTER GUARD EVT 09110245 7 2 ST 2 ST 2,70 X
5 20021364 ZELLKAUTSCHUK INDIAN.RUBBER.STRIP 3 2,8 M 11,52 M WT 0,13 X
3 9306242 RAHMEN FRAME EVT 09306242 11 1 ST 1 ST 405,00
4 9131558 QUERSTEG CROSS.BEAM 1 2 ST 5 ST WT 31,00 X
3 9103323 DISTANZBLECH SPACER.PLATE 12 8 ST 8 ST 1,60 X
Ersatzteilliste_124442_P0EBD72.xlsm 1/3
insgesamt
Total No. of
installed Parts

3 9110262 DECKEL END.COVER EVT 09110262 20 4 ST 4 ST 9,70 X
4 20021364 ZELLKAUTSCHUK INDIAN.RUBBER.STRIP 3 5,92 M 11,52 M WT 0,13 X
2 9302436 ANTRIEB DRIVE EVT 09302436 3 1 ST 1 ST 1720,00
3 7000133 ANTRIEBSEINHEIT DRIVE.UNIT EVT 07000133 1 14 ST 14 ST 117,00
4 27000037 G-MOTOR GEAR.MOTOR 1 14 ST 14 ST 102,00 X
4 27000038 KUPPLUNG COUPLING 2 14 ST 14 ST 15,00 X
3 9302489 DISTANZRING SPACER.RING 2 14 ST 14 ST 0,17 X
2 9304319 ZUBEHOER.U.MONTAGEMAT ACCESSORIES.A.ASSEMBLY.MATERIAL EVT 09304319 4 1 ST 1 ST 1270,00
3 9267225 ABDICHTUNG SEAL EVT 09267225 1 1 ST 1 ST 355,00
4 9103347 DICHTUNGSRING PACKING.RING EVT 09103347 7 28 ST 28 ST 4,00
5 10078839 FILZRINGSEGMENT SEGMENT OF FELT STRIP 3 112 ST 112 ST 0,02 X
4 12713 ZELLKAUTSCHUK INDIAN.RUBBER.STRIP 14 5,5 M 5,5 M 0,64 X
3 9302432 MATERIALFUEHRUNG MATERIAL.GUIDANCE EVT 09302432 3 1 ST 1 ST 465,00
4 9131663 SEITENFUEHRUNG SIDE.GUIDE EVT 09131663 1 1 ST 1 ST 42,00 X
4 9302433 SCHLEISZPLATTE WEAR.PLATE 7 1 ST 1 ST 15,00 X
4 9302435 SCHLEISZPLATTE WEAR PLATE
WEAR.PLATE 9 1 ST 1 ST 18 50
18,50 X
4 9304314 KONSOLE BRACKET 10 3 ST 3 ST 11,50 X
4 20080660 SCHRAUBE BOLT 11 12 ST 12 ST 0,06 X
4 20055527 SCHEIBE WASHER 12 12 ST 12 ST 0,03 X
4 20096918 MUTTER NUT 13 12 ST 168 ST 0,02 X
4 20007719 MUTTER NUT 15 18 ST 18 ST 0,02 X
3 9302437 ABDECKUNG COVER EVT 09302437 4 1 ST 1 ST 83,00
4 9302438 SCHUTZHAUBE PROTECTION.HOOD 1 1 ST 1 ST 12,00 X
4 9103354 STUETZE SUPPORT 9 4 ST 4 ST 3,90 X
4 9103359 STUETZE SUPPORT 10 1 ST 1 ST 3,40 X
2 9304318 LAGERUNG BEARING EVT 09304318 5 1 ST 1 ST 890,00
3 9304317 LAGERBOCK BEARING.BLOCK 1 28 ST 28 ST 31,00 X
2 9302427 REINIGER CLEANER EVT 09302427 6 1 ST 1 ST 495,00
3 9302428 REINIGER CLEANER EVT 09302428 1 13 ST 13 ST 26,00 X
4 9302429 TRAGROHR SUSPENSION.TUBE 1 13 ST 13 ST 22,00 X
4 20111881 STOPFEN PLUG 3 26 ST 26 ST 0,01 X
4 20096918 MUTTER NUT 5 156 ST 168 ST WT 0,02 X
insgesamt
Total No. of
installed Parts
3 9304315 HALTER SUPPORT 2 26 ST 26 ST 4,20 X

2 9306244 SCHMIERANLAGE LUBRICATION.SYSTEM EVT 09306244 7 1 ST 1 ST 53,00
3 27000045 PUMPE PUMP 6 1 ST 1 ST 15,00 X
3 20059387 PROGRESSIVER.SCHMIERSTOFFVERTEILER PROGRESSIVE.GREASE.DISTRIBUTOR 7 1 ST 1 ST 1,03 X
3 20059389 PROGRESSIVER.SCHMIERSTOFFVERTEILER PROGRESSIVE.GREASE.DISTRIBUTOR 8 2 ST 2 ST 1,60 X
3 10197142 VERROHRUNGSMATERIAL PIPPING.MATERIAL 9 1 ST 1 ST 30,00 X
Legende: Key:
ET - Ersatzteile SP - Spare Parts
VT - Verschleiszteile WP - Wear Parts
AnT - Anbauteile AnT - Attachements
Ersatz- und Verschleiszteile aus den Anbauteilen sind Spare and wear parts of the attachment can be
der Dokumentation zu entnehmen. Dichtringe sind auch found in the documentation. Seals are also generally
hier grundsätzlich Verschleiszteile. wear parts.
KG - Kilogramm KG - kilogram
ST - Stück ST - piece
M - Meter M - metre
Kategorie A - strategische Teile Category A - Strategic Parts

Kategorie B - für 2 Jahre Betriebszeit Category B - Part for 2 Years operation
Kategorie C - für Inbetriebnahme Category C - Commissioning Part
WT - Wiederholteil WT - Repeating Part
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
SONG HAU 1
THERMAL POWER PLANT
BOOK 13
P0EBD72
Manual 7
Add-on parts
FAM
39112 Magdeburg
Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

Hotline-Fax: +49 391 6380 10799

CONTENT
Manual 7 Add-on parts
7.1 Motor DRN112M4.4

Operating instructions
7.2 Gear box R87

Assembly and operating instructions
7.3 Coupling POLY-NORM ADR.85

POLY-NORM Operating and assembly instructions
7.4 Central Lubricating System

01 Lubrication scheme
02 System description
03 Installation and Servicing of Central Lubricating Systems
04 Principle of Operation of the Control Unit of a Progressive Centralized Lubrication
System
05 Data sheet for three-phase Squirrel-Cage-Motors 1LA7063-4AB12-Z
06 Operating instructions Pump FZ-B
07 Operating instructions Distributor PVB
08 Operating Instructions Distributor ZP-A
09 Level Switch 76951 – 6011 / Description for Programmer
10 Monitoring switch DATA SHEET 66925 - 1311
11 Pressure relief valve NU - A

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *21927189_0715*
Operating Instructions
AC Motors
DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315
Edition 07/2015 21927189/EN

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
Contents
Contents
1 General information.................................................................................................................. 6
1.1 About this documentation ............................................................................................... 6
1.2 Structure of the safety notes ........................................................................................... 6
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ............................................................................ 8
1.4 Exclusion of liability......................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Product names and trademarks...................................................................................... 8
1.6 Copyright notice .............................................................................................................. 8
1.7 Designation convention................................................................................................... 8
2 Safety notes .............................................................................................................................. 9

2.1 Preliminary information ................................................................................................... 9
2.2 General information ........................................................................................................ 9
2.3 Target group ................................................................................................................. 10
2.4 Functional safety (FS)................................................................................................... 11
2.5 Designated use ............................................................................................................. 11
2.6 Other applicable documentation ................................................................................... 12
2.7 Transport/storage.......................................................................................................... 12
2.8 Installation .................................................................................................................... 13
2.9 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................... 13
2.10 Startup/operation .......................................................................................................... 14
3 Motor structure ....................................................................................................................... 15

3.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 132/DRN80 – 132S........................................................... 15
3.2 Basic structure of DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 ..................................................... 16
3.3 Basic structure of DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 ........................................................ 17
3.4 Basic structure of DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 ........................................................ 18
3.5 Basic structure of DR..315, DRN315 ............................................................................ 19
3.6 Nameplate..................................................................................................................... 20
3.7 Designs and options ..................................................................................................... 24
4 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................................... 27

4.1 Before you start............................................................................................................. 27
4.2 Extended storage of motors.......................................................................................... 28
4.3 Motor installation notes ................................................................................................. 30
4.4 Installation tolerances ................................................................................................... 31
4.5 Assembling the input elements ..................................................................................... 31
4.6 HR/HF manual brake release ....................................................................................... 32
4.7 Non-SEW encoder mounting ........................................................................................ 34
4.8 Mounting the XV.. encoder mounting adapter for DR..71 – 225, DRN80 – 225 ........... 34
4.9 Mounting the encoder to the EV../AV mounting adapter to DR..250 – 280, DRN250 –
21927189/EN – 07/2015
280 motors ................................................................................................................... 36

4.10 Terminal box ................................................................................................................. 38
4.11 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet ..................................... 40
4.12 Options.......................................................................................................................... 43
5 Electrical installation.............................................................................................................. 47

5.1 Additional regulations.................................................................................................... 47
Operating Instructions – AC Motors 3

Contents
5.2 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams .................................................... 47

5.3 Wiring notes .................................................................................................................. 48
5.4 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter ............................................... 48
5.5 Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding................................................... 51
5.6 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding ............................................................ 52
5.7 Special aspects in switching operation ......................................................................... 56
5.8 Special aspects of torque motors and low-speed motors ............................................. 56
5.9 Special aspects of single-phase motors ....................................................................... 57
5.10 Ambient conditions during operation............................................................................. 59
5.11 Notes regarding the connection of the motor................................................................ 60
5.12 Connecting the motor via terminal block....................................................................... 61
5.13 Connecting the motor plug connector ........................................................................... 71
5.14 Connecting the motor via terminal strip ........................................................................ 76
5.15 Connecting the brake.................................................................................................... 78
5.16 Options.......................................................................................................................... 82
6 Startup ..................................................................................................................................... 93

6.1 Before startup ............................................................................................................... 94
6.2 Motors with reinforced bearing...................................................................................... 94
6.3 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop ............................................ 95
7 Inspection/maintenance......................................................................................................... 98
7.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals......................................................................... 100
7.2 Bearing lubrication ..................................................................................................... 101
7.3 Reinforced bearings.................................................................................................... 102
7.4 Corrosion protection.................................................................................................... 102
7.5 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work ...................................................... 103
7.6 Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 motors ................................ 114
7.7 Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors ....................... 121
7.8 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB.................................................... 144
7.9 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE.................................................... 148
8 Technical data ...................................................................................................................... 159

8.1 Work done, working air gap, braking torques ............................................................ 159
8.2 Braking torque assignment ......................................................................................... 161
8.3 Operating currents ...................................................................................................... 163
8.4 Resistors ..................................................................................................................... 166
8.5 Brake control system ................................................................................................. 170
8.6 Permitted rolling bearing types ................................................................................... 174
8.7 Lubricant tables........................................................................................................... 176
8.8 Order information for lubricants and anti-corrosion agents......................................... 176
21927189/EN – 07/2015
8.9 Encoders..................................................................................................................... 177
8.10 Diagnostic unit /DUE................................................................................................... 182
8.11 Characteristic values of functional safety.................................................................... 183
8.12 S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor .................................................................... 184
9 Malfunctions.......................................................................................................................... 185
9.1 Motor malfunctions...................................................................................................... 186
4 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Contents
9.2 Brake malfunctions .................................................................................................... 188

9.3 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter............................................... 190
9.4 Customer service ........................................................................................................ 191
9.5 Disposal ...................................................................................................................... 191
10 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 192

10.1 Wiring diagrams .......................................................................................................... 192
10.2 Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2.......................................................................................... 208
11 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 209
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 220

21927189/EN – 07/2015

1 General information
About this documentation
1.1 About this documentation
This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is intended
for all employees who perform assembly, installation, startup, and service work on the
product.
Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons respons-
ible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the device in-
dependently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you
are unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further in-
formation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
1.2 Structure of the safety notes

1.2.1 Meaning of signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety
notes.
Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

DANGER Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries.
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries.
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its
environment.
INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Simplifies
handling of the drive system.
1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes

Section-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actions
pertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazard
or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
• Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

General information
Structure of the safety notes 1
Meaning of the hazard symbols
The hazard symbols in the safety notes have the following meaning:
Hazard symbol Meaning

General hazard
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of hot surfaces
Warning of risk of crushing
Warning of suspended load
Warning of automatic restart
1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the de-
scription of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
• SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard.
– Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Rights to claim under limited warranty
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

Read the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operation
and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentation
before you start working with the unit!
1.4 Exclusion of liability

Read the information in this documentation, otherwise safe operation is impossible.
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to achieve the
specified product characteristics and performance features. SEW‑EURODRIVE as-
sumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting
from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases,
SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for defects.
1.5 Product names and trademarks

The brands and product names in this documentation are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective titleholders.
1.6 Copyright notice

© 2015 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized reproduction, modification, distribution or any other use of the whole or
any part of this documentation is strictly prohibited.
1.7 Designation convention

DR.. Stands for all motors of the DRS, DRE, DRP, DRL, DRK, DRM
series
DRN.. Stand for all motors of the DRN series
.. Stands for 71, 80, 90, 100, 112, 132, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280,
315
or
S, E, P, L, K, M, N
The ".." after "DR" is an omission and stands for either the motor type "S, E, P, L, K,
M, etc." and/or the omitted size.
• Examples: DR..80, DRS71
The ".." after "DRN" is an omission and stands for the omitted size.
21927189/EN – 07/2015
• Examples: DRN80, DRN..

Safety notes
Preliminary information 2
2 Safety notes
The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons
and damage to property. The user must ensure that the basic safety notes are read
and observed. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation,
as well as persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operat-
ing instructions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the in-
formation in this documentation, or if you require further information, please contact
SEW-EURODRIVE.
2.1 Preliminary information

The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of the following com-
ponents: DR../DRN.. AC motors. If you use gearmotors, also refer to the safety notes
in the corresponding operating instructions for: Gear units
Also observe the additional safety notes provided in the individual chapters of this doc-
ument.
2.2 General information
WARNING
During operation, the motors or gearmotors can have live, bare (in the event of open
connectors/terminal boxes) and movable or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces,
depending on their degree of protection.
Severe or fatal injuries.
• All work related to transportation, storage, installation, assembly, connection,
startup, maintenance and repair may only be carried out by qualified personnel,
in strict observance of the following points:
– The applicable detailed documentation(s)
– Warning and safety signs on the motor/gearmotor
– All the project planning documents, startup instructions and wiring diagrams
related to the drive
– System-specific regulations and requirements
– National/regional safety and accident prevention regulations.
• Never install damaged drives.
• Report any damage to the shipping company immediately.
Unauthorized removal of covers, improper use, or incorrect installation and operation

may result in severe injury to persons, or damage to machinery.
Refer to the following chapters for more information.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

2 Safety notes
Target group
2.3 Target group

Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qual-
ified personnel in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the
design, mechanical installation, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who pos-
sess the following qualifications:
• Training in mechanical engineering, e.g. as a mechanic or mechatronics technician
(final examinations must have been passed).
• They are familiar with these operating instructions.
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Quali-
fied electricians in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with electrical
installation, startup, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who possess the fol-
lowing qualifications:
• Training in electrical engineering, e.g. as an electrician, electronics or mechatron-
ics technician (final examinations must have been passed).
All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must be
carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Safety notes
Functional safety (FS) 2
2.4 Functional safety (FS)
Drives from SEW‑EURODRIVE can optionally be supplied with safety-related com-
ponents.
MOVIMOT®, encoders or brakes, or other accessories, can be integrated in the AC
motor as safety-related components either individually or in combination.
SEW‑EURODRIVE indicates such an integration by the FS logo and a number on the
nameplate (→ 2 20).
The number is a code that indicates which components in the drive are safety-related.
See the following code table for all products:
02
Functional Inverter (e.g. Brake Manual brake Brake monitoring Motor pro- Encoder
safety MOVIMOT®) release monit- tection
oring
02 x
04 x
11 x x
If the drive bears the FS logo on the nameplate, you must adhere to the information in
the following documents:
• "MOVIMOT® MM..D – Functional Safety" manual
• Addendum to the operating instructions "Safety-Rated Encoders – DR..71 – 315,
DRN80 – 315 AC Motors – Functional Safety"
• Addendum to the operating instructions "Safety-Rated Brakes – DR..71 – 315,
DRN80 – 315 AC Motors – Functional Safety"
You find the characteristic safety values of the following components in the technical
data (→ 2 183) section so you can determine the security level for systems and ma-
chines yourself:
• Characteristic safety values for brakes: B10d values
• Characteristic safety values for encoders: MTTFd values
The characteristic safety values of SEW‑EURODRIVE components are also available
on the homepage at www.sew‑eurodrive.de and in the SEW‑EURODRIVE library for
the BGIA Sistema software.
2.5 Designated use

DR../DRN.. AC motors are intended for industrial systems.
When installed in machines, startup (i.e. start of designated operation) is prohibited
until it is determined that the machine complies with the local laws and directives. In
the individual area of application, you must especially observe the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC as well as the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC. The EMC test specifications
EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-6 and EN 61000-6-2 must
21927189/EN – 07/2015
be taken into account during startup.

Using these products in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless spe-
cifically designated otherwise.
Air-cooled motors/gearmotors are dimensioned for ambient temperatures of -20 °C to
+40 °C and installation altitudes ≤ 1000 m above sea level. Any differing specifications
on the nameplate must be observed. The ambient conditions must comply with all the
specifications on the nameplate.

2 Safety notes
Other applicable documentation
2.6 Other applicable documentation

2.6.1 DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 AC motors
The following publications and documents have to be observed as well:
• Wiring diagrams provided with the motor
• "Gear Unit Series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W" operating instruc-
tions for gearmotors
• "AC Motors" catalog and/or
• "DRN.. AC Motors" catalog
• "DR.. Gearmotors" catalogs.
• Addendum to the operating instructions "Safety-Rated Brakes – DR..71 – 315,
DRN80 – 315 AC Motors – Functional Safety" if necessary
• Addendum to the operating instructions "Safety-Rated Encoders – DR..71 – 315,
DRN80 – 315 AC Motors – Functional Safety" if necessary
• "MOVIMOT® MM..D – Functional Safety" manual if necessary
2.7 Transport/storage
Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Report any
transport damage to the shipping company immediately. If necessary, suspend star-
tup.
Tighten the eyebolts securely. They are designed to only carry the weight of the gear
unit/motor/gearmotor; do not attach any additional loads.
The installed lifting eyebolts are in accordance with DIN 580. The loads and regula-
tions specified in that document must always be observed. If two or four lifting eyes or
eyebolts are attached to the gear unit/motor/gearmotor, all lifting eyes or eyebolts
must be used during transport. In this case, the tension force vector of the slings must
not exceed a 45° angle in accordance with DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment if necessary. Reattach these in the
case of further transportation.
If the gear unit/motor/gearmotor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry
and dust-free storage location. You must not store the gear unit/motor/gearmotor out-
doors or on the fan guard. The gear unit/motor/gearmotor can be stored for up to 9
months without requiring any special measures before startup.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Safety notes
Installation 2
2.8 Installation
Make sure that the supports are even, the foot and flange mounting is correct and if
there is direct coupling, align with precision. Resonances between the rotational fre-
quency and the double line frequency caused by the structure are to be avoided. Re-
lease the brake (if installed), turn rotor manually, check for unusual grinding noise.
Check the direction of rotation in decoupled state.
Only install or remove belt pulleys and couplings using suitable devices (heat up) and
cover with a touch guard. Avoid improper belt tension.
Make the pipe connections that may eventually be required. Mounting positions with
shaft ends pointing upwards should be equipped with a cover to prevent foreign ob-
jects from falling into the fan. Ensure that ventilation openings are not obstructed and
that exhaust air, including air from adjacent units, cannot be drawn in again straight
away.
Observe the notes in the "Mechanical installation" chapter.
2.9 Electrical connection

All work may only be carried out by qualified specialists. During work, the low-voltage
machine must be at standstill, enabled and safeguarded against an accidental restart.
This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e.g. anti-condensation heating or forced cooling
fan).
Ensure that the unit is de-energized.
Exceeding the tolerances in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, part 1) – voltage + 5%, fre-
quency + 2%, curve shape, symmetry – increases heating and influences electromag-
netic compatibility. Also observe the standard EN 50110 (and, if applicable, other na-
tional regulations, such as DIN VDE 0105 for Germany).
Observe the wiring information and differing data on the nameplate as well as the wir-
ing diagram in the terminal box.
The connection should be a permanent, secure electrical connection (no protruding
wire ends); use the cable end pieces intended for this purpose. Establish a secure
protective earth connection. When the motor is connected, the distances to non-insu-
lated and live parts must not be shorter than the minimum values according to IEC
60664 and national regulations. With low voltage, the distances should be no shorter
than the following values, in compliance with IEC 60664:
Nominal voltage VN Distance

≤ 500 V 3 mm
≤ 690 V 5.5 mm
The connection box must be free from foreign objects, dirt and moisture. Close un-
used cable entry openings and the box itself so they are dust and water proof. Secure
key for test run without output elements. When operating low-voltage machines with
brakes, check that the break is functioning correctly before startup.
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Observe the notes in the "Electrical installation" chapter.

2 Safety notes
Startup/operation
2.10 Startup/operation
Whenever changes to normal operation occur in the gear unit/motor/gearmotor, such
as increased temperatures, noise, vibrations, determine the cause. Consult the manu-
facturer if required. Never deactivate protection devices, even in test mode. Switch off
the motor if you are not sure.
Regularly clean air ducts in dusty or dirty environments.
2.10.1 Surface temperature during operation
CAUTION
The surfaces of the drive can be very hot during operation.
Risk of burns.
• Make sure that hot surfaces cannot be touched unintentionally or during normal
operation. Install covers or warning signs according to regulations.
• Let the unit cool down before you start working on it.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Basic structure of DR..71 – 132/DRN80 – 132S
Motor structure
3
3 Motor structure
INFORMATION
The following figures are block diagrams. Their purpose is to make it easier to assign
components to the spare parts lists. Deviations are possible depending on the motor
size and version.
3.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 132/DRN80 – 132S

[132]
[123]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[113]
[118] [115]
[116] [262]
[112]
[111] [134]
[129]
[707]
[9] [103] [100] [705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[42]
[22]
[41] [32]
[106]
[392]
[107] [13] [36]
[24] [3] [44]
[108] [11]
[109] [10]
[16]
[12]
[7] [1]
[2]
[91]
[93] [93]
[90] [90]
13369217931
[1] Rotor [30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [123] Hex head screw
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [107] Oil flinger [129] Screw plug with O-ring
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [108] Nameplate [131] Gasket for cover
[7] Flanged endshield [36] Fan [109] Grooved pin [132] Terminal box cover
[9] Screw plug [41] Shim washer [111] Gasket for lower part [134] Screw plug with O-ring
[10] Retaining ring [42] B-side endshield [112] Terminal box lower part [156] Information sign
[11] Deep groove ball bear- [44] Deep groove ball bear- [113] Pan head screw [262] Connection terminal,
21927189/EN – 07/2015
ing ing complete

[12] Retaining ring [90] Bed plate [115] Terminal board [392] Gasket
[13] Cap screw [91] Hex nut [116] Terminal yoke [705] Canopy
[16] Stator [93] Pan head screw [117] Hex head screw [706] Spacer
[22] Hex head screw [100] Hex nut [118] Lock washer [707] Pan head screw
[24] Eyebolt [103] Stud [119] Pan head screw

3 Motor structure
Basic structure of DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180
3.2 Basic structure of DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180

[117] [137]
[219] [262]
[616]
[123] [118]
[132] [116]
[131]
[119] [128]
[140]
[156]
[139]
[112]
[111] [134]
[115] [113] [129]
[390]
[109]
[108]
[24]
[12]
[9]
[7]
[106] [707]
[705]
[107] [706]
[35]
[715]
[30]
[19]
[41] [42] [22]
[17]
[91]
[90] [32]
[100]
[103] [94] [93]
[15] [16] [44]
[36]
[14] [31]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
[104]
[10]
18014399036804619
[1] Rotor [31] Key [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug with O-ring
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [111] Gasket for lower part [137] Screw
[7] Flange [36] Fan [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw
[9] Screw plug [41] Cup spring [113] Screw [140] Washer
[10] Retaining ring [42] Rear endshield [115] Terminal board [156] Information label
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [219] Hex nut
bearing
[12] Retaining ring [90] Foot [117] Stud [262] Connection terminal
[14] Washer [91] Hex nut [118] Washer [390] O-ring
[15] Hex head screw [93] Washer [119] Cap screw [616] Retaining plate
[16] Stator [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy
[17] Hex nut [100] Hex nut [128] Serrated lock washer [706] Spacer
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[19] Cap screw [103] Stud [129] Screw plug with O-ring [707] Hex head screw
[22] Hex head screw [104] Supporting ring [131] Gasket for cover [715] Hex head screw
[24] Eyebolt [106] Oil seal
[30] Sealing ring [107] Oil flinger

Basic structure of DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225
Motor structure
3
3.3 Basic structure of DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225
[117] [137]
[219] [262]
[123] [118] [616]
[116]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[119] [129]
[134]
[112]
[128]
[111] [140]
[113] [139]
[109] [390]
[108] [115]
[24]
[15]
[105]
[9]
[106]
[107]
[707]
[705]
[706]
[715]
[35]
[30]
[25]
[19] [26]
[22] [32]
[42] [36]
[40]
[93]
[90] [44] [43]
[21]
[94] [31]
[103] [7]
[100] [16] [1]
[3]
[11]
[2]
9007200332597387
[1] Rotor [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [137] Screw
[7] Flange [36] Fan [111] Gasket for lower part [139] Hex head screw
[9] Screw plug [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [113] Cap screw [156] Information label
[15] Hex head screw [43] Supporting ring [115] Terminal board [219] Hex nut
[16] Stator [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [262] Connection terminal
bearing
[19] Cap screw [90] Foot [117] Stud [390] O-ring
[21] Oil seal flange [93] Washer [118] Washer [616] Retaining plate
[22] Hex head screw [94] Cap screw [119] Cap screw [705] Canopy
[24] Eyebolt [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [706] Spacer bolt
[25] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [707] Hex head screw
[26] Shield ring [105] Cup spring [129] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [131] Gasket for cover
21927189/EN – 07/2015

3 Motor structure
Basic structure of DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280
3.4 Basic structure of DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280

[137] [262] [616] [156]
[219]
[118]
[123]
[116]
[132]
[117]
[131]
[119]
[112]
[139]
[140]
[111] [128]
[159]
[160]
[161] [19]
[115]
[113] [129] [134] [22]
[24] [1453]
[105]
[9]
[7]
[106]
[107]
[707]
[705]
[706]
[715]
[35] [32]
[26] [25] [40]
[36]
[30]
[42] [43]
[109] [44]
[108] [21]
[94] [31]
[93]
[90] [1]
[15]
[16] [3]
[100]
[103] [11]
[2]
9007206690410123
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [137] Screw
[3] Key [36] Fan [111] Gasket for lower part [139] Hex head screw
[7] Flange [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [113] Cap screw [156] Information sign
[11] Deep groove ball [43] Supporting ring [115] Terminal board [159] Connection piece
bearing
[15] Cap screw [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [160] Connection piece gasket
bearing
[16] Stator [90] Foot [117] Stud [161] Hex head screw
[19] Cap screw [93] Washer [118] Washer [219] Hex nut
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[21] Oil seal flange [94] Cap screw [119] Hex head screw [262] Connection terminal
[22] Hex head screw [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy
[24] Eyebolt [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [706] Spacer bolt
[25] Cap screw [105] Compression spring [129] Screw plug [707] Hex head screw
[26] Shield ring [106] Oil seal [131] Gasket for cover [715] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover [1453] Screw plug
[31] Key

Motor structure
Basic structure of DR..315, DRN315 3
3.5 Basic structure of DR..315, DRN315
[452]
[634]
[633]
[123] [151]
[117]
[132] [454]
[219]
[131] [118]
[119] [116]
[156] [128]
[112] [140]
[111] [139]
[113] [134] [607]
[115] [129]
[108] [109]
[24] [707]
[706]
[716]
[705] [715]
[30] [35]
[26] [25]
[22] [19] [40] [36]
[17] [42] [43]
[32]
[16] [94] [21] [44]
[93]
[15] [90] [1] [31]
[103] [609]
[7] [9] [608]
[11] [3]
[106] [250] [606] [604]
[105]
[107]
[2]
[100]
27021598116221579
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [111] Gasket for lower part [156] Information sign
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part [219] Hex nut
[3] Key [36] Fan [113] Cap screw [250] Oil seal
[7] Flange [40] Retaining ring [115] Terminal board [452] Terminal strip
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [454] Mounting rail
[11] Rolling bearing [43] Supporting ring [117] Stud [604] Lubrication ring
[15] Cap screw [44] Rolling bearing [118] Washer [606] Grease nipple
[16] Stator [90] Foot [119] Hex head screw [607] Grease nipple
[17] Hex nut [93] Washer [123] Hex head screw [608] Oil seal flange
[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [128] Serrated lock washer [609] Hex head screw
[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [129] Screw plug [633] End bracket
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [131] Gasket for cover [634] End plate
[24] Eyebolt [105] Cup spring [132] Terminal box cover [705] Canopy
[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [134] Screw plug [706] Spacer bolt
[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [139] Hex head screw [707] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [140] Washer [715] Hex nut
[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [151] Cap screw [716] Washer

3 Motor structure
Nameplate
3.6 Nameplate
The marks on the upper edge of the nameplate are only present when the motor has
been certified accordingly or when it includes the relevant components.
3.6.1 DRE.. motor nameplate

The following figure shows an example of a nameplate:
[1] DRE100M4/FF/TF
[2] 01.41027997602.0001.15 Inverter duty VPWM 3~IEC60034 [10]
[3] Hz 50 r/min 1425 V 230/400 Δ/Y
[4] kW 2.2 S1 A 8.0/4.6 eff% 85.4 IE2 [11]
[5] Cosφ 0.8 IP 55 [12]
[6] Th.Kl 155(F) [13]
[7] [14]
FF FF215 D250 WE 28X60

[8] IM B5
[9] kg 28.683 188 684 3 Made in Germany
9007212456365451
[1] Type designation

[2] Serial number
[3] Nominal frequency
[4] Nominal power/duty type
[5] Power factor for AC motors
[6] Thermal class
[7] Nominal speed
[8] Mounting position
[9] Weight
[10] Number of phases and underlying rating and performance standards
(IEC 60034-X and/or equivalent national standard)
[11] IE class and nominal efficiency for motors included in the scope of the
IEC 60034-30-1 standard
[12] Degree of protection according to IEC 60034-5
[13] Nominal voltage
[14] Nominal current
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Motor structure
Nameplate 3
3.6.2 DRE.. global nameplate
RF87 DRE100LC4BE5HF/TF/ES7S/Z/C
01.1808089014.0001.13 3~IEC60034
50 Hz rpm 1455/23 220-242Δ/380-420Y 54 TEFC
kW 3 S1 A 11.0/6.3 P.F. 0.81 eff % 86.3 IE2
kW 3 S1 A 9.2/5.3 P.F. 0.8 eff % 86.4 IE2
60 Hz rpm 1760/28 254-227Δ/440-480Y K.V.A.-Code L
Th.Kl. 130(B) S.F.1.0 M.L. 02 Design NEMA C IA/IN 7.5
Vbr 220-277AC
i 63.68 Nm 1250/1040 IM M1 Nm 40
CLP220 Miner.Oil/2.4l BGE1.5
kg 104.000 AMB C° -20...40 1885723DE Made in Germany
9007207468121227
3.6.3 Markings
The following table lists all marks that can occur on a nameplate or on the motor and
an explanation of what they mean.
Mark Meaning
CE mark to state compliance with European guidelines, such as the Low
Voltage Directive
ATEX mark to state compliance with the European Directive 94/9/EC
UR logo to confirm that UL (Underwriters Laboratory) is informed about the

registered components; register number by UL: E189357
DoE mark to confirm compliance with US-American efficiency limit values
for AC motors
UL logo to confirm that a component is UL (Underwriters Laboratory)

tested, also valid for CSA in conjunction with the register number
CSA mark to confirm the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) and the
market conformity of AC motors
CSAe mark to confirm compliance with the Canadian efficiency limit values
for AC motors
21927189/EN – 07/2015
CCC logo to confirm the adherence to the Chinese regulation for small ap-
s
pliances
VIK mark to confirm the compliance with the directive of the German Asso-
ciation of Energy and Power Industry (V.I.K.)

3 Motor structure
Nameplate
Mark Meaning
FS mark with code number to identify functional safety relevant compon-
ents
02
EAC mark (EurAsian Conformity)

Confirms compliance with the technical regulations of the economic and
customs union of Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Armenia.
UkrSEPRO mark (Ukrainian Certification of Products)
013
Confirms compliance with the technical regulations of the country Ukraine.
EU REGULATION 640/2009 Motors with this mark may only be operated with frequency inverter (VSD =
IE2 USE WITH VARIABLE
SPEED DRIVE ONLY! Variable Speed Drive) according to regulation 640/2009.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Motor structure
Nameplate 3
3.6.4 Type designation
DR.., DRN.. AC brakemotor type designation

The following diagram shows a type designation example:
DRN132M4/BE11/HR/FI/TF
DR Series
N Type designation
132 Size
M Length
4 Number of poles
/BE11 Brake
/HR Manual brake release
FI Output option
TF Thermal motor protection
Designation of the motors
Designation
DRS.. Standard motor, Standard efficiency IE1
DRE.. Energy-efficient motor, High Efficiency IE2
DRP.. Energy-efficient motor, Premium Efficiency IE3
DRN.. Energy-efficient motor, Premium Efficiency IE3
DRL.. Asynchronous servomotor
DRK.. Single-phase operation with running capacitor
DRM.. Torque motor: AC motor for operation at speed n = 0
DR..J Line start permanent magnet motor
71 – 315 Sizes:
71 / 80 / 90 / 100 / 112 / 132 / 160 / 180 / 200 / 225 / 315
K, S, M, L, Lengths
MC, LC,
ME, H, LS
2, 4, 6, 8/2, 8/4, 4/2, 12 Number of poles
21927189/EN – 07/2015

3 Motor structure
Designs and options
3.7 Designs and options

3.7.1 Output variants
Designation Option
/FI IEC foot-mounted motor
/F.A, /F.B Universal foot-mounted motor
/FG 7-series integral motor, as stand-alone motor
/FF IEC flange-mounted motor with bore holes
/FT IEC flange-mounted motor with threads
/FL General flange-mounted motor (other than IEC)
/FM 7-series integral motor with IEC feet
/FE IEC flange-mounted motor with bore and IEC feet
/FY IEC flange-mounted motor with threads and IEC feet
/FK General flange-mounted motor (deviating from IEC) with feet
/FC C-face flange-mounted motor, dimensions in inch
3.7.2 Mechanical attachments
Designation Option
/BE.. Spring-loaded brake with specification of size
/HR Manual brake release of the brake, automatic re-engaging
function
/HF Manual brake release, lockable
/RS Backstop
/MSW MOVI‑SWITCH®
/MM03 – MM40 MOVIMOT®
/MO MOVIMOT® option(s)
/MI Motor identification module for MOVIMOT®
3.7.3 Temperature sensor / temperature detection
Designation Option
/TF Temperature sensor (PTC thermistor or PTC resistor)
/TH Thermostat (bimetallic switch)
/KY 1 KTY84 – 130 sensor
/PT 1 / 3 PT100 sensor(s)
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Motor structure
Designs and options 3
3.7.4 Encoder
Designation Option
/ES7S /EG7S Add-on speed sensor with Sin/Cos interface
/EH7S /EV7S
/ES7R /EG7R Add-on speed sensor with TTL (RS-422) interface,
/EH7R V = 9 – 26 V
/EI7C /EI76 /EI72 Built-in incremental encoder with HTL interface and
/EI71 6 / 2 / 1 period(s)
/EI7C FS.. Safety-rated incremental encoder (marked with FS logo on the
motor nameplate)
For information, refer to the addendum to the operating instruc-
tions "Safety-Rated Encoders – DR..71 – 315, DRN80 315 AC
Motors – Functional Safety"
/AS7W /AG7W Add-on absolute encoder, RS-485 interface (multi-turn)
/AS7Y /AG7Y / Add-on absolute encoder, SSI interface (multi-turn)
AH7Y
/ES7A /EG7A Mounting adapter for speed sensors
/EV2T /EV2R Add-on incremental encoder with solid shaft
/EV2S /EV2C
/XV.A Mounting adapter for non-SEW speed sensors
/XV.. Mounted non-SEW speed sensor
/XH.. Mounting adapter for non-SEW hollow-shaft encoders
3.7.5 Connection alternatives
Designation Option
/IS Integrated plug connector
/ASE. HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with single locking
latch (cage clamp contacts on the motor side)
/ASB. HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with double locking
latch (cage clamp contacts on the motor side)
/ACE. HAN 10E plug connector on terminal box with single locking
latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
/ACB. HAN 10E plug connector on terminal box with double locking
latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
/AME. /ABE. HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with single
/ADE. /AKE. locking latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
/AMB. /ABB. HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with double
/ADB. /AKB. locking latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
21927189/EN – 07/2015
/KCC 6 or 10-pole terminal strip with cage clamp contacts

/KC1 C1-profile-compliant connection of the electrified monorail sys-
tem drive (VDI guideline 3643). Alternatively for more compact
connection area.
/IV Other industrial plug connectors according to customer spe-
cifications

3 Motor structure
Designs and options
3.7.6 Ventilation
Designation Option
/V Forced cooling fan
/VH Radial fan on fan guard
/Z Additional inertia (flywheel fan)
/AL Metal fan
/U Non-ventilated (without fan)
/OL Non-ventilated (closed B-side)
/C Protection canopy for fan guard
/LF Air filter
/LN Low noise fan guard
3.7.7 Bearing
Designation Option
/NS Lubrication device
/ERF Reinforced bearings on A-side with roller bearing
/NIB Insulated bearing B-side
3.7.8 Condition monitoring
Designation Option
/DUB Diagnostic unit brake = brake monitoring
/DUE Diagnostic Unit Eddy Current = Function and wear monitoring
of the brake
3.7.9 Other additional features
Designation Option
/DH Condensation drain hole
/RI Reinforced winding insulation
/RI2 Reinforced winding insulation with increased resistance
against partial discharge
/2W Second shaft end on the motor/brakemotor
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Mechanical installation
Before you start 4
4 Mechanical installation
INFORMATION
Observe the safety notes in chapter 2 of these operating instructions for the mechan-
ical installation.
If the nameplate of the drive bears the FS mark, also comply with the information on
mechanical installation in the associated addenda to the operating instructions and/or
the associated manual.
4.1 Before you start
NOTICE
The mounting position for installation must correspond to the specifications on the
nameplate.
Only install the drive if the following conditions are met:

• The data on the nameplate of the drive corresponds with the voltage supply sys-
tem or with the output voltage of the frequency inverter
• The drive is undamaged (no damage caused by transportation or storage)
• All transport protection has been removed
• You are certain that the following requirements have been met:
– Ambient temperature between −20°C and +40°C
Note that the temperature range of the gear unit may also be restricted (see
gear unit operating instructions)
Note that information on the nameplate may differ. It is essential that the operat-
ing conditions for the unit comply with the nameplate information.
– No oil, acid, gas, vapors, radiation, etc.
– Installation altitude max. 1000 m above sea level
Observe the chapter Installation altitude (→ 2 59)
– Note the limitations for encoders
– Special design: Drive configured in accordance with the ambient conditions
The above mentioned information refers to standard orders. The conditions might be
different when you order drives other than the standard. Observe any differing condi-
tions in the order confirmation.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Extended storage of motors
4.2 Extended storage of motors

• Note that the service life of the lubricant in the ball bearings is reduced by 10% per
year after the first year of storage.
• You should re-lubricate the lubrication devices on motors that have been in stor-
age for longer than 5 years before startup. Observe the information on the motor
lubricant plate.
• Check whether the motor has absorbed moisture as a result of being stored for a
long time. Measure the insulation resistance for this purpose (measuring voltage
500 V).
The insulation resistance (see the following figure) varies greatly depending on
the temperature. The motor must be dried if the insulation resistance is insuffi-
cient.
[M ]
100
10
0,1
0 20 40 60 80
[ ˚C ]
173323019
If the measured resistance, depending on the ambient temperature, is in a range

above the limit characteristic curve, the insulation resistance is sufficient. If the value
is below the limit characteristic curve, the motor must be dried.
4.2.1 Drying the motor

Heating the motor either with warm air or via an isolation transformer:
• With warm air
DR.. motors with rotor designation "J" may be dried with warm air only.
WARNING
The motor shaft may be subject to torque when drying via isolation transformer.
Possible injury.
• DR.. motors with rotor designation "J" may be dried with warm air only.
Connection with wiring diagram R13:

21927189/EN – 07/2015
[1]
2336250251
[1] Transformer

Extended storage of motors 4
[1]
V3 W3 U3
T8 T9 T7
V2 W2 U2
T5 T6 T4
V4 W4 U4
T11 T12 T10
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[2]
2343045259
[1] Motor terminal boards [2] Transformer
W2 W3 U2 U3 V2 V3 [1]
T6 T9 T4 T7 T5 T8
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[2]
2343047179
[1] Motor terminal boards [2] Transformer
The drying process is finished when the minimum insulation resistance has been ex-
ceeded.
Check terminal box for the following:
• The inside is clean and dry
• The connections and fixing parts are free from corrosion
• The gasket and sealing surfaces are in good condition
• The cable glands are tight, otherwise clean or replace them
• Using an isolation transformer
– Connect the windings in series (see following figures)
– Auxiliary AC voltage supply max. 10% of the nominal voltage with max. 20% of
the rated current
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Motor installation notes
4.3 Motor installation notes
CAUTION
Sharp edges due to open keyway.
Minor injuries.
• Insert key in keyway.
• Pull protective sleeve over shaft.
NOTICE
Improper assembly may damage the drive and corresponding components.
Possible damage to property.
• Observe the following notes.
• Motor shaft ends must be thoroughly cleaned of anti-corrosion agents, contamina-

tion or similar (use a commercially available solvent). Do not allow the solvent to
penetrate the bearings or sealing rings – this could damage the material.
• Only install the gearmotor in the specified mounting position on a level, vibration-
free and torsionally rigid support structure.
• Align the motor and the driven machine carefully in order to prevent the output
shaft from being exposed to unacceptable strain. Observe the permitted overhung
and axial forces.
• Do not jolt or hammer the shaft end.
• Use an appropriate cover, e.g. motor option /C "Canopy", to prevent objects or flu-
ids entering motors in vertical mounting positions (M4/V1).
• Check that there is sufficient clearance around the motor to provide for adequate
cooling air supply, and that the motor does not suck in warm air from other
devices.
• Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with a half key (motor
shafts are balanced with a half key).
• Existing condensation drain holes are sealed with closing plugs. If contam-
inated, the condensation drain holes must be checked for proper functioning
on a regular basis and cleaned if required.
• If using brakemotors with manual brake release, screw in either the hand lever
(with self-reengaging manual brake release) or the set screw (with lockable
manual brake release).
• Protect shaft again against corrosion, if necessary.
INFORMATION
DR..: To mount motors with a foot made of aluminum, you have to use washers with
at least twice the bolt diameter. Use bolts of strength class 8.8. Do not exceed the
21927189/EN – 07/2015
tightening torque according to VDI 2230-1.

DRN..: To mount motors with a foot made of aluminum, you have to use washers
with an outer diameter that is at least twice the bolt diameter (e.g. DIN EN ISO 7090).
Use bolts of strength class 8.8 up to max. 10.9. Tightening torque according to
VDI 2230-1. The maximum bolt length for DRN80 – 90 = M8×20, for DRN100 –
132S = M10×25.

Installation tolerances 4
4.3.1 Installation in damp locations or outdoors
• Use suitable cable glands for the incoming cable (use reducing adapters if neces-
sary) according to the installation instructions.
• If possible, arrange the terminal box in such a way that the cable entries are point-
ing downwards.
• Seal the cable entry properly.
• Clean the sealing surfaces of the terminal box and the terminal box cover carefully
before re-assembly; replace embrittled gaskets.
• If required, touch up the corrosion protection (especially at the eyebolts).
• Check the degree of protection.
• Protect the shaft against corrosion using a suitable anti-corrosion agent.
4.4 Installation tolerances

Shaft end Flanges
Diameter tolerance according to Centering shoulder tolerance in accord-
EN 50347 ance with EN 50347
• ISO j6 with Ø ≤ 28 mm • ISO j6 with Ø ≤ 250 mm
• ISO k6 with Ø ≥ 38 mm up to ≤ • ISO h6 with Ø ≥ 300 mm
48 mm
• ISO m6 at Ø ≥ 55 mm
• Center bore in accordance with
DIN 332, shape DR..
4.5 Assembling the input elements

Drive components that are installed on the motor shaft end, e.g. pinions, must be
warmed up prior to assembly in order to prevent damage, e.g. to the encoder of stand-
alone motors.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

HR/HF manual brake release
4.6 HR/HF manual brake release

4.6.1 HF manual brake release
You can use the optional lockable HF manual brake release to continuously mechan-
ically release the BE.. brake with a set screw and a releasing lever.
On delivery, the set screw is inserted far enough to not fall out and to not affect the
brake performance. The set screw is self-locking with a nylon coat in order to prevent
it from unintended further penetration or from falling out.
Proceed as follows to activate the lockable HF manual brake release:
• Screw in the set screw until there is no more clearance at the releasing lever. Ad-
ditionally, screw in the set screw by another 1/4 or 1/2 revolution in order to manu-
ally release the brake.
Proceed as follows to loosen the lockable HF manual brake release:
• Loosen the set screw at least until the floating clearance (see chapter Retrofitting
HR/HF manual brake release (→ 2 33)) of the manual brake release has com-
pletely returned.
WARNING
Lacking functionality of the manual brake release due to improper brake installation,
e.g. set screw inserted too far.
• Only qualified staff may perform work on the brake.
• Check the brake for proper function prior to startup.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

HR/HF manual brake release 4
4.6.2 Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
• Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power sup-
ply before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
• Carefully observe the steps described below.
1. Remove the following:

• Forced cooling fan and incremental encoder (if installed)
See chapter "Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 103).
• Fan guard or fan guard with encoder mounting [35], retaining ring [32] and fan
[36]
2. Installing manual brake release:
• For BE05 – BE11:
– Remove the sealing ring [95]
– Screw in and glue studs [56], insert sealing ring for manual brake release [95]
and hammer in parallel pin [59].
– Mount releasing lever [53], conical springs [57] and adjusting nuts [58].
• For B20 – BE122:
– Screw in studs [56].
– Mount releasing lever [53], conical springs [57] and adjusting nuts [58].
3. Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between the conical coil springs
(pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see the following figure).
The floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
177241867
Brake Floating clearance s

mm
21927189/EN – 07/2015
BE05, BE1, BE2, 1.5

BE5 1.7
BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE 60, BE62, 2
BE120, BE122
4. Reinstall the removed parts.

Non-SEW encoder mounting
4.7 Non-SEW encoder mounting

If a drive was ordered with a non-SEW encoder, SEW‑EURODRIVE will deliver the
drive with a coupling included. For operation without a non-SEW encoder, the coupling
must not be mounted.
4.8 Mounting the XV.. encoder mounting adapter for DR..71 – 225, DRN80 – 225
If you have ordered the XV.. encoder mounting adapter, the adapter and the coupling
are enclosed with the motor and are to be assembled by the customer.
The following figure shows how to assemble the coupling and the adapter:
[212]
[225]
[E] [D] [C] [B] [A]
[220] [269] [22] [361] / [170]
[F] [E] [D] [C] [B] [A]
[251] [232]
3633163787
[22] Screw [361] Extended fan guard

[170] Forced cooling fan guard [269] Grommet
[212] Fan guard with encoder mount [A] Adapter
[220] Encoder [B] Retaining screw
[225] Intermediate flange (not with XV1A) [C] Central retaining screw
[232] Screws (only with XV1A and XV2A) [D] Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)
[251] Conical spring washers (only with XV1A [E] Retaining screw
and XV2A) [F] Screw
1. If available, remove extended fan guard [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].
2. For XV2A and XV4A: Remove intermediate flange [225].
3. Screw in the coupling [D] into the encoder bore of the motor shaft with the screw
[C].
21927189/EN – 07/2015
DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: Tighten the screw [C] with a tightening torque of
3 Nm.
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225: Tighten the screw [C] with a tightening torque of
8 Nm.
4. Push the adapter [A] on the encoder [220] and tighten it with the retaining screw
[B] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.

Mounting the XV.. encoder mounting adapter for DR..71 – 225, DRN80 – 225 4
5. For XV2A and XV4A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] with the screw [F] with
a tightening torque of 3 Nm.
6. Push the encoder and the adapter on the coupling [D] and tighten the retaining
screw [E] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.
7. With XV1A and XV2A: Arrange conical spring washers [251] with retaining screws
[232] and place in annular groove of the encoder [220] and tighten with a tighten-
ing torque of 3 Nm.
8. For XV3A and XV4A: Installation by the customer via the bores in the encoder
plate.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Mounting the encoder to the EV../AV mounting adapter to DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors
4.9 Mounting the encoder to the EV../AV mounting adapter to DR..250 – 280,

DRN250 – 280 motors
If you have ordered the EV../AV.. encoder mounting adapter, the coupling is enclosed
with the motor and must be installed by the customer.
The following figure shows an example of how the coupling is installed:
[35]
[A]
[1458]
[233]
[225]
[226]
[220]
[251]
[232]
[269]
[361]
[22] [1496]
[1497]
[1498]
[1459] [1489]
[1460] [1461] [1462] [33]

[34]
9007206970704907
[22] Screw [361] Extended fan guard (normal/long)

[33] Washer [1458] Screw
[34] Screw [1459] Cage nut
[35] Fan guard [1460] Serrated lock washer
[220] Encoder [1461] Washer
[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [1462] Screw
[226] Screw [1489] Ground strap
[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A and .V2A) [1496] Serrated lock washer
[233] Coupling [1497] Washer
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed with .V1A [1498] Screw
and .V2A)
[269] Grommet [A] Encoder mounting adapter
1. Remove extended fan guard [361], if installed. Loosen screws [34].

• With /V forced cooling fan option: Remove forced cooling fan guard [170].
Loosen screws [22].
2. Push the coupling [233] with diameter 14 mm onto the pin of the encoder mounting
adapter [A]. Tighten the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] with 3 Nm
21927189/EN – 07/2015
through the slots in the encoder mounting adapter [A].

3. With option EV2/3/4/5/7A, AV2/3/4/5/7A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] to
the encoder mounting adapter [A] with screws [226]. The tightening torque must be
3 Nm.
4. Mount the conical spring washers [251] to the encoder mounting adapter [A] with
screws [232]. Do not tighten the screws [232] yet.

Mounting the encoder to the EV../AV mounting adapter to DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors 4
5. Mount the encoder [220] to the encoder mounting adapter [A] or intermediate
flange [225]. Insert the encoder shaft [220] into the coupling [233]. Insert the con-
ical spring washers into the socket of the encoder [220] and tighten the screws
[232] with 3 Nm. Tighten the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the en-
coder end with 3 Nm.
6. Pull the cable of the encoder [220] through the cable grommet [269]. Insert the
cable grommet [269] into the extended fan guard [361].
• With /V forced cooling fan option: Insert the cable grommet into the forced
cooling fan guard [170].
7. Mount the extended fan guard to the fan guard with screws [34] and washers [33].
• With /V forced cooling fan option: Mount the forced cooling fan guard [170]
with screws [22].
4.9.1 XH.. encoder mounting adapters

The XH1A, XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapters for hollow shaft encoders are
premounted on delivery.
Proceed according to chapter "Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary
work" (→ 2 103) to mount the encoder.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Terminal box
4.10 Terminal box

4.10.1 Turning the terminal box
The following figure shows the structure of the terminal box design with terminal
board:
[123]
[131]
[a]
[b]
[c]
[119]
[111]
7362206987
[111]Seal [a] Terminal

[119]Terminal box retaining screws (4 x) [b] Auxiliary terminal retaining
screws (2 x)
[123]Terminal box cover retaining screws (4 x) [c] Retaining plate
[131]Seal
Proceed as follows to turn the terminal box:

1. Loosen the screws [123] from the terminal box cover and remove the cover.
2. Remove the terminals [a], if available.
3. Unscrew the retaining screws [119] of the terminal box.
4. Clean the sealing surfaces at the stator shoulder as well as at the lower part and
the cover of the terminal box.
5. Check the gaskets [111 and 131] for damage and replace them if necessary.
6. Position the terminal box as desired. Refer to the appendix for the arrangement of
the auxiliary terminals.
7. Tighten the screws of the lower part of the terminal box with the following tighten-
ing torques:
21927189/EN – 07/2015
• DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: 5 Nm

• DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225: 25.5 Nm
Do not forget the retaining plate [c] if available.
8. Tighten the screws of the terminal box cover with the following tightening torques:
• DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: 4 Nm

Terminal box 4
• DR..160, DRN132M/L: 10.3 Nm
• DR..180 – 225, DRN160 – 225 (aluminum design): 10.3 Nm
• DR..180 – 225, DRN160 – 225 (gray cast iron design): 25.5 Nm
Make sure the gasket is seated properly.
4.10.2 Terminal box with NPT thread

In terminal boxes with NPT thread, cable glands cannot always be screwed in all the
way (up to the O-ring).
NPT
14949925387
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to seal the screw fitting with Teflon tape or Loctite®.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet
4.11 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet

The following figure shows a DR..280 motor with option /F.A (retrofit feet).
[16]
[90]
[1457]
18014406536422539
[16] Stator [1457] Set screw

[90] Foot Remove paint from marked surfaces
The tapped holes of the foot mounting surfaces are closed with set screws [1457]. The
contact surfaces at the feet [90] and stator [16] are painted.
1. Remove the set screws [1457]. Only remove the set screws from those threads into
which you will screw the foot screws [94]. For DR..250/280, DRN250/280, 4 set
screws, for DRN315, 6 set screws.
2. Remove the paint from the contact surfaces of the stator [16] (see marking in the
"Example illustration of DR..280" above). For DR..250/280. DRN250/280, there are
8 surfaces, for DRN315, 12 there are 12.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use a chisel or flat scraper for this purpose.
Remove the paint only from those surfaces to which the feet will be mounted. Refer
to the illustration "Terminal box positions" below for selecting the contact surfaces.
A thin layer of corrosion protection agent can be applied to the contact surfaces
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet 4
once the paint has been removed.
Possible terminal box positions are illustrated below:
0° 270° 180°
9007211165643403
3. Remove the paint from the contact surfaces of the feet [90] (see marking in the
"Example illustration of DR..280" above). SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use a
chisel or flat scraper for this purpose. A thin corrosion protection agent can be ap-
plied to the contact surfaces once the paint has been removed.
4. Attach the feet [90] to the motor using the screws [94] and washers [93]. The tight-
ening torque for the screws [94] must be 410 Nm. The screws are microencapsu-
lated. This is why you have to screw in and tighten the screws quickly.
5. If necessary, you can apply paint or corrosion protection at the joint after attaching
the feet [90].
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet
4.11.1 Changing the position of the motor feet
[16]
[90]
[93]
[94]
7741968395
[16] Stator [93] Washer

[90] Foot [94] Screw
When re-installing the feet in another position, observe the following:

• After removing the screws [94], check them for damage, e.g. to the thread.
• Remove the used microencapsulation.
• Clean the thread of the screws [94].
• Apply a high-strength thread locker to the screw threads [94] before inserting the
screws again.
• The set screws removed from the new mounting position can be reused for the
bores of the old mounting position. After inserting the set screw [1457] into the
open tapped holes in the stator [16], paint or corrosion protection can be applied
on the bare joining surfaces.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options 4
4.12 Options
4.12.1 Air filter LF
The air filter, a kind of fleece mat, is mounted in front of the fan grille. It can be easily
removed and mounted again for cleaning purposes.
The air filter avoids that dust and other particles drawn in by the air are distributed. It
also prevents the ducts between the cooling fins from becoming clogged with dust.
In very dusty environments, the air filter protects the cooling fins from dirt or from be-
coming clogged.
The air filter must be cleaned or replaced depending on the amount of dust in the en-
vironment. No maintenance intervals can be specified due to the individuality of each
drive and the environment where it is installed.
Technical data Air filter

Certifications All certifications
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +100 °C
Suitable for the following motor sizes: DR.71 – 132
Filter material Viledon PSB290SG4 fleece
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
4.12.2 Mounting adapter for measuring nipple

Depending on the respective order specifications, SEW‑EURODRIVE delivers the
drives as follows:
• with bore
• with bore and enclosed measuring nipples
The following figure shows a motor with bores and inserted measuring nipples [1]:
[1]
[1]
9007201960947467
[1] Bore with inserted measuring nipples
Proceed as follows to connect the customer measuring device:

• Remove the protective plugs from the bores.
• Insert the measuring nipple in the bores of the motor and screw in the measuring
nipple with a tightening torque of 15 Nm.
• Plug the mounting adapter of the measuring unit into the measuring nipple.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options 4
4.12.3 2nd shaft end with optional cover
SEW‑EURODRIVE supplies the optional equipment "2nd shaft end" with inserted key
(additional protection by means of a tape). As standard, no cover is supplied. It can be
ordered optionally for sizes DR.71 – 280, DRN80 – 280.
INFORMATION
The motor must only be operated with a suitably secured key.
The following figure shows the dimensions of the covers:
Standard for DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S, Standard for DR..160 – 225,
DR..250/280, DRN250/280 DRN132M – 225M
Optional for DR..160 – 225,
DRN132M – 225
[361]
EA
[4] [79]
L1
EA
DA
DA
[4] [83]
[1553]
[34] L3 L2
LB/LBS 1) X LB/LBS 1) L4
9007202774332939
[4] Keyway [361] Extended fan guard

[34] Tapping screw [1553] Cage nut
[79] Protective cap LB/LBS Length of the motor/brakemotor
[83] Hex head screw 1) Refer to the "AC Motors" catalog for dimensions
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
Dimensions
Motor size DA EA L1 L2 L3 L4 X
DR.. DRN..
DR..71 – 11 23 2 – 2 – 91.5
DR..71 /BE – – – 88
DR..80 DRN..80 14 30 2 – 2 – 95.5
DR..80 /BE DRN..80 /BE – – 94.5
DR..90 DRN..90 14 30 2 – 2 – 88.5
DR..90 /BE DRN..90 /BE – – 81
DR..100 DRN..100 14 30 2 – 2 – 87.5
DR..100 /BE DRN..100 /BE – – 81
DR..112 – 132 DRN..112 – 132S 19 40 3.5 – 3.5 – 125
DR..112 – 132 /BE DRN..112 – 132S /BE – – 120.5
DR..160 DRN..132M/L 28 60 4 122 3.5 124 193
DR..160 /BE DRN..132M/L /BE 187
DR..180 DRN..160 – 180 38 80 4 122 3.5 122 233
DR..180 /BE DRN..160 – 180 /BE 236
DR..200 – 225 DRN..200 – 225 48 110 5 122 5 122 230
DR..200 – 225 /BE DRN..200 – 225 /BE 246
DR..250/280 DRN..250/280 55 110 3 – 3 – 243.5
DR..250/280 /BE DRN..250/280 /BE
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Electrical installation
Additional regulations 5
5 Electrical installation
If the motor includes safety-relevant components, observe the following safety note:
WARNING
Disabling functional safety devices.
• Only qualified personnel is allowed to carry out work on functional safety com-
ponents.
• Any work on functional safety components must be carried out strictly in accord-
ance with the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respect-
ive addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under war-
ranty will become invalid.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to electric shock.
• It is essential to comply with the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation!

• Switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 to EN 60947-4-1 must be used for
switching the motor and the brake.
• Use switch contacts in utilization category DC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1 for
switching the brake with DC 24 V.
• When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instructions
issued by the inverter manufacturer.
• Observe the operating instructions of the inverter.
5.1 Additional regulations

The generally applicable installation regulations for low-voltage electric equipment
(such as DIN IEC 60364, DIN EN 50110) must be complied with when setting up elec-
trical machinery.
5.2 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams

Connect the motor only as shown in the wiring diagram(s) included with the motor. Do
not connect or start up the motor if the wiring diagram is missing. The applicable wir-
ing diagrams are available from SEW‑EURODRIVE free of charge.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Wiring notes
5.3 Wiring notes

Adhere to the safety notes during installation.
5.3.1 Protecting the brake control system against interference

Brake cables must always be routed separately from other unshielded power cables
with phased currents to prevent interference with brake control. In particular, power
cables with phased currents include:
• Output cables from frequency inverters and servo inverters, soft-start units and
brake units
• Incoming cables for braking resistors and similar options
For line-operated motors and when using AC and DC circuit cut-off, the connection
between the brake rectifier and the external switch contact must be in a different
power cable that is separate from the motor power supply.
5.3.2 Protecting the motor protection devices against interference

Adhere to the following points to protect SEW motor protection devices (TF temperat-
ure sensors) against interference:
• You may route separately shielded supply cables together with switched-mode
power cables in one cable.
• Do not route unshielded supply cables together with switched-mode power lines in
one cable.
5.4 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter

When motors are powered from inverters, you must observe the wiring instructions is-
sued by the inverter manufacturer. You must also observe the operating instructions
for the frequency inverter.
5.4.1 Motors with frequency inverters from SEW‑EURODRIVE

We have tested operation of the motor on SEW-EURODRIVE frequency inverters.
The required electric strength values of the motors were confirmed and the startup
routines adjusted to the motor data. You can operate the DR../DRN.. motor with any
frequency inverter from SEW‑EURODRIVE. To do this, start up the motor as de-
scribed in the operating instructions for the frequency inverter.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter 5
5.4.2 Motor with non-SEW inverter
Operating SEW‑EURODRIVE motors on non-SEW frequency inverters is permitted if
the pulse voltages at the motor terminals indicated in the following figure are not ex-
ceeded.
2.2
U LL [kV]
[1]
2.0 [2]
[8] 1.8
[3]
1.6
[4]
1.4
[5]
1.2 [6]
1.0
0.8
0.6
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4
[7] [µs]
9007203235332235
[1] Permitted pulse voltage for DR.., DRN.. AC motors with reinforced insulation
and increased resistance against partial discharge (/RI2)
[2] Permitted pulse voltage for DR.., DRN.. AC motors with reinforced insulation (/
RI)
[3] Permitted pulse voltage according to NEMA MG1 part 31, VN ≤ 500 V
[4] Permitted pulse voltage according to IEC 60034-25, limit value curve A for nom-
inal voltage VN ≤ 500 V, star connection
[5] Permitted pulse voltage according to IEC 60034-25, limit value curve A for nom-
inal voltage VN ≤ 500 V, delta connection
[6] Permitted pulse voltage according to IEC 60034-17
[7] Voltage rise time
[8] Permitted pulse voltage
The insulation class depends on the voltage.

• ≤ 500 V = standard insulation
• ≤ 600 V = /RI
• > 600 V – 690 V = /RI2
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter
INFORMATION
Compliance with the following limit values must be checked and considered:
• The supply voltage level at the non-SEW inverter
• The threshold of the brake chopper voltage
• The operating mode of the motor (motoring/regenerative operation)
→ If the permitted pulse voltage is exceeded, you must install limiting measures,
such as filters, chokes or special motor cables. Consult the manufacturer of the
frequency inverter.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding 5
5.5 Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding
In addition to the interior PE connection, a LF grounding cable can be attached to the
outside of the terminal box. LF grounding is not installed as standard.
LF grounding can be ordered as completely pre-installed at the factory. For this an
aluminum or gray cast iron terminal box designed for brake connections is required for
DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S motors. For DR..160 – 225 motors, DRN132M – 225,
this option can be combined with all terminal box types.
The option can be combined with HF grounding (→ 2 52).
INFORMATION
All parts of the LF grounding kit are made from stainless steel.
DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S
[1]
8024328587
[1] LF grounding at the terminal box
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225
[1]
21927189/EN – 07/2015
8026938379
[1] LF grounding at the terminal box

Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding
5.6 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding

For improved, low-impedance grounding at high frequencies, we recommend using
the following connections: SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use corrosion-resistant
connection elements.
HF grounding is not installed as standard.
The HF grounding option can be combined with LF grounding at the terminal box.
If you require LF grounding in addition to HF grounding, you can connect the con-
ductor to the same point.
The HF grounding option can be ordered as follows:
• Completely pre-installed at the factory, or as
• "Grounding terminal" kit for customer installation; part numbers listed in the follow-
ing table.
Motor size Part number of "Grounding ter-

minal" kit
DR..71S/M 1363 3953
DR..80S/M, DRN80
DR..90M/L, DRN90
DR..100M, DRN100LS
DR..100L – 132, DRN100L – 132S 1363 3945
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225
With aluminum terminal box
INFORMATION
All parts of the kit are made from stainless steel.
INFORMATION
For further information regarding the grounding, refer to the SEW publication "Drive
Engineering – Practical Implementation, EMC in Drive Engineering".
INFORMATION
If 2 or more ground straps are used, you have to attach them with a longer screw.
The specified tightening torques refer to a strap thickness of t ≤ 3 mm.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding 5
5.6.1 Sizes DR..71S/M, DR..80S/M and DRN80 with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
8026768011
[1] Use of the pre-cast bore at the [4] Ground strap (not included in the deliv-
stator housing ery)
[2] Serrated lock washer [5] Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 M6 × 16,
tightening torque 10 Nm
[3] Washer 7093
5.6.2 Sizes DR..90M/L, DRN90 with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
8026773131
21927189/EN – 07/2015
stator housing ery)
[3] Washer 7093

Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding
5.6.3 Size DR..100M, DRN100LS with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
18014402064551947
stator housing ery)
[3] Washer 7093 tightening torque 10 Nm
5.6.4 Sizes DR..100L – 132, DRN100L – 132S with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
18014402064551947
[1] Use of tapped hole for lifting eyes [4] Ground strap (not included in the deliv-
ery)
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[2] Serrated lock washer DIN 6798 [5] Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 × 18,
[3] Washer 7089 / 7090

Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding 5
5.6.5 Sizes DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
9007202821668107
[1] Use of the tapped holes at the terminal box

[2] Serrated lock washer DIN 6798
[3] Washer 7089 / 7090
[4] Ground strap (not included in the delivery)
[5] • Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 × 18 (with aluminum terminal boxes of size
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225), tightening torque 10 Nm
• Hex head screw ISO 4017 M10 × 25 (with gray cast iron terminal boxes of
size DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225), tightening torque 10 Nm
• Hex head screw ISO 4017 M12 x 30 (terminal boxes of size DR../DRN250 –
315), tightening torque 15.5 Nm
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Special aspects in switching operation
5.7 Special aspects in switching operation

When the motors are used in switching operation, possible interference of the
switchgear must be excluded by ensuring suitable wiring. According to EN 60204
(electrical equipment of machines), motor windings must have interference suppres-
sion to protect the numerical or programmable logic controllers. As it is primarily
switching operations that cause interference, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends in-
stalling protective circuit in the switching devices.
If the drive has been delivered with a suppressor circuit in the motor, you must ob-
serve the provided wiring diagram.
5.8 Special aspects of torque motors and low-speed motors

Due to the design of torque motors and low-speed motors, very high induction
voltages may be generated when they are switched off. Consequently,
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends using the varistor circuit shown below for protection.
The size of the varistors depends, among other factors, on the starting frequency –
note the project planning.
U U U
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
2454566155
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Special aspects of single-phase motors 5
5.9 Special aspects of single-phase motors
Scope of delivery and motor design

DRK.. AC motors are delivered with installed running capacitor in the terminal box.
Starting relay, centrifugal switch or start-up capacitor are not supplied.
[112]
[1160]
[1659]
[131]
[277 / 1667]
[132]
[123]
11937647627
[112] Terminal box [277]/[1667] Capacitor

[1660] Seal [132] Terminal box cover
[1659] Adapter piece [123] Screw
[131] Seal
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Special aspects of single-phase motors
5.9.1 Connecting the single-phase motor
WARNING
Electric shock due to charged capacitor.
Severe or fatal injuries
• After disconnection from the power supply, wait 5 seconds before opening the
terminal box.
The DRK.. single-phase motor is delivered with one or two installed and connected
running capacitors. The data specified in the chapter Technical Data (→ 2 184) apply.
INFORMATION
If a running capacitor installed by SEW‑EURODRIVE must be replaced, only use ca-
pacitors with the same technical data.
INFORMATION
A full-load start using only the running capacitors is not possible.
Parts which are not supplied must be ordered from specialist retailers and must be
connected according to the corresponding instructions and wiring dia-
grams (→ 2 207).
Proceed as follows during connection:
• Remove terminal box cover [132]
• Remove adapter piece [1659] with the running capacitors [277]/[1667]
• Connection according to supplied wiring diagrams.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Ambient conditions during operation 5
5.10 Ambient conditions during operation
5.10.1 Ambient temperature
The temperature range of -20 °C to +40 °C must be ensured unless specified other-
wise on the nameplate. Motors approved for use in higher or lower ambient temperat-
ures have specific designations on the nameplate.
5.10.2 Installation altitude

The rated data specified on the nameplate applies to an installation altitude of max-
imum 1000 m above sea level. Installation altitudes of more than 1000 m above sea
level must be taken into account for project planning of motors and gearmotors.
5.10.3 Hazardous radiation

Motors must not be subjected to hazardous radiation (such as ionizing radiation). Con-
sult SEW‑EURODRIVE, if necessary.
5.10.4 Hazardous gases, vapors and dusts

The DR../DRN.. AC motors are equipped with gaskets that are suitable for the desig-
nated use.
If the motor is operated in environments with high environmental impact, such as in-
creased ozone values, the DR../DRN.. motors can be optionally equipped with gaskets
of a higher quality. If you have doubts regarding the stability of the gaskets in connec-
tion with the respective environmental impacts, consult SEW‑EURODRIVE.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Notes regarding the connection of the motor
5.11 Notes regarding the connection of the motor
INFORMATION
It is essential to comply with the valid wiring diagram. Do not connect or start up the
motor if this wiring diagram is missing. The applicable wiring diagrams are available
from SEW‑EURODRIVE free of charge.
INFORMATION
The terminal box must be free from foreign objects, dirt and humidity. Unused cable
entry openings and the terminal box itself must be closed so they are dust and water-
proof.
Observe the following points when connecting the motor:

• Check cable cross section
• Arrange terminal links correctly
• Screw on the connections and the PE conductor correctly
• Make sure that the connection cables are not cramped to avoid damage to the
cable insulation.
• Observe air gaps, see chapter "Electrical connection"
• In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
• Perform the connection in accordance with the enclosed wiring diagram
• Avoid protruding wire ends
• Connect the motor according to the prescribed direction of rotation
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the motor via terminal block 5
5.12 Connecting the motor via terminal block
5.12.1 According to wiring diagram R13
Arrangement of terminal links with W connection
[1]
[2]
[3]
U1
V1
)
(T1
W1
(T2
)
(T3 [4]
[5]
9007199493673739
Arrangement of terminal links with m connection
Motor size DR..71 – 280, DRN80 – 280: Motor size DR../DRN250 – 315:
(Single-sided supply) (Double-sided supply)
[1] [6]
)
(T6
)
(T4
[1]
W2
)
U2
(T5
)
(T6
[2]
)
(T4
V2
W2
[3]
)
U2
(T5
U1
[2]
V1
V2
)
(T1
[3]
)
W1
(T2
[4]
U1
V1
)
(T3
)
(T1
W1
)
[4]
(T2
)
(T3
[5]
9007199493672075
[6]
9007199734852747
[1] Terminal link [4] Terminal board

[2] Terminal stud [5] Customer connection
[3] Flange nut [6] Customer connection with divided connec-
tion cable
21927189/EN – 07/2015
INFORMATION
For DR../DRN250 – 315 motors, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends a double-sided
supply for load currents higher than
• M12: 250 A
• M16: 315 A

Connecting the motor via terminal block
3
/W
/U3
W2
U2
T6/T [2]
/V3
9
V2
T4/
T7
U1
T5/T
V1
8
T1 [3]
W1
T2
[4]
T3
[5]
Arrangement of terminal links with WW connection
[1]
W2
[2]
U2
T6
V2
T4
U3
V3
T5
U1
V1
[3]
W3
T1
T7
T2
W1
T8
T3
T9 [4]
[5]
[1] Terminal link [4] Terminal board

[2] Terminal stud [5] Customer connection
[3] Flange nut
INFORMATION
Three winding lead ends must be rewired to change from high to low voltage:
The lines designated U3 (T7), V3 (T8) and W3 (T9) must be reconnected.
• U3 (T7) from U2 (T4) to U1 (T1)
• V3 (T8) from V2 (T5 ) to V1 (T2)
• W3 (T9) from W2 (T6) to W1 (T3)
→ Changing from low to high voltage is carried out in reverse order. In both cases,
21927189/EN – 07/2015
the customer connection is made to U1 (T1), V1 (T2) and W1 (T3). You can
change the direction of rotation by interchanging 2 supply cables.

V3/T
8 W3
/T9
/T5
U3/T
7
V2
/T4
U2
1
/T1
V4
[1]
[2]
[3]
0
/T1
V1/T
U4
1 [6]
V1/T
2 W1
/T3
[4]
[5]
18014400828555147
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Arrangement of terminal links with mm connection
Motor size DR..71 – 280, DRN80 – 280: Motor size DR../DRN250 – 315:
(Single-sided supply) (Double-sided supply)
L2 [5]
L3
V3/T L1
8W
3/T9
V3/T
8W
/T5
U3/T 3/T9
7
V2
/T5
T1 U3/T
7
V2
T1
/T4
U2
/T4
1
U2
/T1
V4
1
/T1
[1]
V4
[2] [1]
/T1
0
[3] [2]
V1/T
U4
[6] [3]
0
1
/T1
V1/T V1/T
U4
2 W1 L1 1 [6]
/T3 [4] V1/T
2W
1/T3
[4]
L2
[5]
L3
[5]
18014400845874315
9007208157343883
[1] Terminal link [6] Wiring designation plate

[2] Terminal stud L1 Conductor 1
[3] Flange nut L2 Conductor 2
[4] Terminal board L3 Conductor 3
[5] Customer connection
INFORMATION
For DR../DRN250 – 315 motors, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends a double-sided
supply for load currents higher than
• M10: 160 A
21927189/EN – 07/2015

5.12.4 Connection variants via terminal block
The motors are supplied and connected differently depending on the electrical design.
Arrange the terminal links as shown in the wiring diagram and screw them on firmly.
Observe the tightening torques specified in the following tables.
Motor size DR..71 – 100, DRN80 – 100
Terminal Tightening torque Connection Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE connec- PE design
studs hex nut tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M4 1.6 Nm ≤ 1.5 mm2 1a Conductor end Pre-assembled ter- M5 4
sleeve minal links
≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter-
minal links
≤ 6 mm2 1b Ring cable lug Pre-assembled ter-
minal links
≤ 6 mm2 2 Ring cable lug Connection ac-
cessories enclosed
M5 2.0 Nm ≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter-
Conductor end minal links
sleeve
minal links
cessories enclosed
M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac-
cessories enclosed
Motor size DR..112 – 132, DRN112 – 132S

Terminal Tightening torque Customer Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE connec- PE design
studs hex nut connection tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M5 2.0 Nm ≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter- M5 4
Conductor end minal links
sleeve
minal links
cessories enclosed
M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac-
cessories enclosed
Motor size DR..160, DRN132M/L

Terminal Tightening torque Customer Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE connec- PE design
stud hex nut connection tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac- M8 5
cessories enclosed
cessories enclosed
Motor size DR..180 – 225, DRN160 – 225

Terminal Tightening torque Customer Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE terminal PE design
21927189/EN – 07/2015
studs hex nut connection stud

Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
cessories enclosed
M10 10 Nm ≤ 95 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac- M10 5
cessories enclosed
cessories enclosed

Motor size DR../DRN250 – 280

Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M10 10 Nm ≤ 95 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac- M12 5
cessories enclosed
cessories enclosed
Motor size DR../DRN315

Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M12 15.5 Nm ≤ 95 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Premounted con- M12 5
M16 30 Nm ≤ 120 mm2 nection pieces
The designs in bold print apply to S1 operation for the standard voltages and standard
frequencies according to the data in the catalog. Other variants may have different
connections, for example, different terminal stud diameters and/or a different scope of
delivery.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Variant 1a
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
≥ 8 – 10 mm [4]
[5]
[6]
M4: > 2.5 mm2
M5: > 2.5 mm2
27021597853089931
[1] External connection [4] Terminal link

[2] Terminal stud [5] Terminal washer
[3] Flange nut [6] Winding connection with Stocko terminal
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Variant 1b:
[2] [1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
18014398598346763
[1] External connection with ring cable lug, [4] Terminal link
according to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234,
for example
[2] Terminal stud [5] Terminal washer
[3] Flange nut [6] Winding connection with Stocko
terminal
Variant 2
[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
[6] [4]
[7]
9007199440180363
[1] Terminal board [5] Bottom nut

[2] Flange nut [6] Terminal washer
[3] Terminal link [7] Winding connection
[4] External connection with ring cable lug, according to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234,
for example
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Variant 3
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
9007199454382091
[1] External connection with ring cable [5] Terminal link

lug, according to DIN 46237 or
DIN 46234, for example
[2] Terminal stud [6] Bottom nut
[3] Upper nut [7] Winding connection with ring cable lug
[4] Washer [8] Serrated lock washer
Variant 4
[5]
[4]
[5]
[2] [2] [4]
[3]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
9007200394347659
[1] Terminal box [4] Lock washer

21927189/EN – 07/2015
[2] Terminal clip [5] Hex head screw

[3] PE conductor

Variant 5
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[6]
1139608587
[1] Hex nut [4] Serrated lock washer

[2] Washer [5] Stud
[3] PE conductor on cable lug [6] Terminal box
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the motor plug connector 5
5.13 Connecting the motor plug connector
5.13.1 IS plug connector
1009070219
The lower part of the IS plug connector is completely wired at the factory including the
additional features such as brake rectifier. The IS plug connector top is included in the
delivery and must be connected according to the specifications in the wiring diagram.
WARNING
No grounding due to incorrect installation.
• It is essential to comply with the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation.
• Tighten the retaining screws of the IS plug connector properly with 2 Nm as
these screws also act as protective earth contacts.
The IS plug connector has CSA approval up to 600 V. Note for application according
to CSA regulations: Tighten the M3 clamping screws to a torque of 0.5 Nm. See the
following table for American Wire Gauge (AWG) cable cross sections.
Cable cross section

Make sure that the type of cable complies with the applicable regulations. The rated
currents are specified on the nameplate. The cable cross sections that can be used
are listed in the following table.
Without vari- With variable Link cable Double assignment

able terminal terminal link (Motor and brake/SR)
link
0.25 – 4.0 mm2 0.25 – 2.5 mm2 Max. 1.5 mm2 max. 1 x 2.5 and 1 x 1.5 mm2
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the motor plug connector
Wiring the upper section of the plug connector

• Loosen the housing cover screws:
– Remove the housing cover
• Loosen the screws from the upper section of the plug connection:
– Remove upper connector section from the cover
• Strip the insulation off the connection cable:
– Strip off about 9 mm of insulation
• Pass the cable through the cable gland
Wiring up as shown in wiring diagram R83

• Connect the lines as shown in the wiring diagram:
– Tighten the clamping screws carefully.
• Install the plug connector (see chapter Installing the connector (→ 2 74))
Wiring up as shown in wiring diagram R81

For W/ m startup:
• Connect with 6 lines:
– Tighten the clamping screws carefully.
– Motor contactors in the control cabinet
For W or m operation:
• Connect as shown in the wiring diagram
• Install the variable terminal link as shown in the following figures according to the
required motor operation (W or m).
9007200053347851
21927189/EN – 07/2015
9007200053349515

Brake control system BSR – preparing the variable terminal link
For W operation:
On the W side of the variable terminal link as shown in the following figure: Remove
only the bare metal pin of the marked prong horizontally – touch guard!
9007200053520139
For m operation:
On the m side of the variable terminal link as shown in the following figure: Com-
pletely remove two prongs horizontally.
9007200053518475
Wiring according to the R81 wiring diagram for W or m operation with double terminal assignment
• At terminal for double assignment:
– Connect the link cable
• When operation is as required:
– Insert the link cable in the variable terminal link
• Installing the variable terminal link
• At terminal for double assignment:
– Connect the motor lead above the variable terminal link
• Connect the other lines as shown in the wiring diagram
9007200053521803
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the motor plug connector
Installing the plug connector

The housing cover of the IS plug connector can be screwed onto the lower housing
part depending on the required position of the cable lead. The upper section of the
plug connector shown in the following figure must first be installed in the housing
cover so it will match the position of the lower section of the plug connector:
• Define the required mounting position
• Install the upper section of the plug connector into the housing cover in accord-
ance with the mounting position
• Close the plug connector
• Tighten the cable gland
9007200053719819
Mounting position of the upper section of the plug connector in the housing cover
21927189/EN – 07/2015
9007200053526155

5.13.2 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS.. plug connectors
1009065611
The installed AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.. and AS plug connector systems are based
on the plug connector systems made by Harting.
• AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.. Han Modular®
• AC.., AS.. Han 10E / 10ES
The connectors are located at the side of the terminal box. They are locked either us-
ing two clamps or one clamp on the terminal box.
UL approval has been granted for the plug connectors.
The mating connector (sleeve housing) with socket contacts is not included in
the delivery.
The degree of protection is only applied when the mating connector is mounted and
locked.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the motor via terminal strip
5.14 Connecting the motor via terminal strip

5.14.1 KCC terminal strip
• In accordance with the wiring diagram provided
• Check the max cable cross section:
– 4 mm2, rigid
– 4 mm2, flexible
– 2.5 mm2, flexible with conductor end sleeve
• In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
• Strip 10 – 12 mm of insulation
Arrangement of terminal links for W connection
18014399506064139
Arrangement of terminal links for m connection
21927189/EN – 07/2015
18014399506066059

Connecting the motor via terminal strip 5
5.14.2 KC1 terminal strip
• Perform the connection in accordance with the enclosed wiring diagram
• Check the maximum cable cross section:
– 2.5 mm2 rigid
– 2.5 mm2 flexible
– 1.5 mm2 flexible with conductor end sleeve
• Strip 8 – 9 mm of insulation
9007200257397387
9007200257399307
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the brake
5.15 Connecting the brake

The brake is released electrically. The brake is applied mechanically when the voltage
is switched off.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls.
• Comply with the applicable regulations issued by the relevant employer's liability
insurance association regarding phase failure protection and the associated cir-
cuit/circuit modification.
• Connect the brake according to the provided wiring diagram.
• In view of the DC voltage to be switched and the high level of current load, it is
essential to use either special brake contactors or AC contactors with contacts in
utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1.
5.15.1 Connecting the brake control

The DC disk brake is powered by a brake control system with protection circuit. It is
located in the terminal box/IS lower part or must be installed in the control cabinet.
• Check the cable cross sections – braking currents (see chapter Technical data
(→ 2 159))
• Connect the brake control according to the provided wiring diagram
• For motors in thermal class 180 (H), the brake rectifier and brake control systems
are usually installed in the control cabinet. If you have ordered a brakemotor with
insulating plate, it will be delivered with the terminal box isolated thermally from the
brakemotor. In this case, the brake rectifier and brake control can be installed in
the terminal box. The insulating plate increases the height of the terminal box by
9 mm.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the brake 5
5.15.2 Connecting diagnostic unit /DUB
Connect the diagnostic unit as shown in the wiring diagrams provided with the motor.
The maximum permitted connection voltage is AC 250 V with a maximum current of
6 A. With low voltage the maximum voltage is AC 24 V or DC 24 V with max. 0.1 A. A
subsequent change to low voltage is not permitted.
SF function monitoring Wear monitoring Function and wear monit-

oring
[1] [1] [1]
BK BK BK
[3]
[2] [2] [2]
BN1 BN1 BN1
BU1 BU1 BU1
BK [4]
BN2 [2]
BU2
[1] Brake [1] Brake [1] Brake

[2] Microswitch [2] Microswitch [2] Microswitch
MP321-1MS MP321-1MS MP321-1MS
[3] Function monitoring
[4] Wear monitoring
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting the brake
5.15.3 Connecting the diagnostic unit /DUE option for function and wear monitoring
The /DUE diagnostic unit (Diagnostic Unit Eddy Current) is a contactless measuring
system for function and wear monitoring of the brake and the continuous measure-
ment of the current working air gap.
The measuring system consists of:
• Sensor, integrated in the magnet body of the brake
• Evaluation unit in the motor terminal box that is supplied via a DC 24 V voltage.
If the diagnostic unit /DUE was ordered, the function and wear monitoring is installed
and calibrated at the factory. The customer must connect the diagnostic unit, see wir-
ing diagram. The switching point of the wear monitoring is preset to the maximally per-
mitted value. According to the "code table", a reduced value can be set.
For the state of the evaluation unit, refer to chapter "Status display of the evaluation
unit".
For information on retrofitting the diagnostic unit /DUE, refer to chapter "Retrofitting
the diagnostic unit /DUE for function and wear monitoring".
Designation of the components

The system comprises a sensor and single-channel evaluation unit. The function mon-
itoring of the brake is realized via a digital signal (NO contact). A digital output (NC
contact) signals if the wear limit was reached. Further, a current output allows for con-
tinuous monitoring of the brake wear.
[1]
11k
0k
DC 24V
1
[6] 9k
GND
8k
AGND 7k
6k
INF
ZERO
5k
WEAR1
4k
FCT1
OUT1
6s
5s
B1
4s
GND1
A1
[5]
09
11 956
2
[2]
0
-1 K-0
E
DU
[4]
[3]
14950549515
[1] Terminals 4k – 11k

21927189/EN – 07/2015
[2] LEDs for function and wear, brake

[3] DIP switches S1 – S5
[4] Fastening of terminal box (PE)
[5] Line clip
[6] Terminals 4s – 6s

Connecting the brake 5
The connection designation of the terminals are as follows:
Terminal Designation Description Color coding

4s A1 Sensor 1 connection 1 Brown (BN)
5s GND1 Sensor 1 shield Black (BK)
6s B1 Sensor 1 connection 2 White (WH)
Terminal Designation Description

4k OUT1 Analog output working air gap brake
5k FCT1 Digital output function brake
6k WEAR1 Digital output wear brake
7k ZERO Input calibration zero value
8k INF Input calibration infinite value
9k AGND Signal ground AGND
10k GND Ground potential GND
11k DC 24 V DC 24 V supply
The LEDs have the follow meaning:
LEDs Designation Description

Green [6] FCT1 The brake is open. Electromagnet is active. Pressure
plate is in contact with magnet body.
Red [6] WEAR1 The current working air gap of the brake reached or ex-
ceeded the preset maximum working air gap.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
5.16 Options
Connect the optional equipment as shown in the wiring connection diagrams provided
with the motor. Do not connect any optional equipment if the wiring diagram is
missing. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams free of charge from
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
5.16.1 Temperature sensor /TF
NOTICE
Destruction of the temperature sensor due to overheating if the voltage is too high.
The drive system might be damaged.
• Do not apply voltages > 30 V to the TF temperature sensor.
The PTC thermistors comply with DIN 44082.

Resistance measurement (measuring instrument with V ≤ 2.5 V or I < 1 mA):
• Standard measured values: 20 – 500 Ω, hot resistance > 4000 Ω
When using the temperature sensor for thermal monitoring, the evaluation function
must be activated to maintain reliable isolation of the temperature sensor circuit. If the
temperature reaches an excessive level, a thermal protection function must be
triggered immediately.
If there is a 2nd terminal box for the TF temperature sensor, this is where you must
connect the temperature sensor.
Observe the provided wiring diagram for the connection of the TF temperature sensor.
If the wiring diagram is missing, you can obtain it from SEW‑EURODRIVE free of
charge.
INFORMATION
The temperature sensor TF may not be subjected to voltages > 30 V.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options 5
Below figure shows the characteristic curve of the TF with reference to the nominal re-
sponse temperature (referred to as TNF).
R [Ω]
4000
1330
550
250
[T]
-20°C
TNF - 20 K
TNF - 5 K
TNF + 5 K
TNF + 15 K
TNF
5470153483
5.16.2 TH winding thermostats

The thermostats are connected in series and open when the permitted winding tem-
perature is exceeded. They can be connected in the drive monitoring loop.
VAC VDC
Voltage V in V 250 60 24
Current (cos ϕ = 1.0) in A 2.5 1.0 1.6
Current (cos ϕ = 0.6) in A 1.6
Contact resistance max. 1 Ω at DC 5 V / 1 mA
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
5.16.3 /KY temperature sensor (KTY84 – 130)
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature sensor as well as the motor winding.
• Avoid currents > 4 mA in the circuit of the KTY.
• Observe the correct connection of KTY to ensure correct evaluation of the tem-
perature sensor. Ensure correct polarity.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to
the motor temperature with a measuring current of 2 mA and correct pole connection.
3000
2500
2000
R [Ω] 1500
1000
500
0
-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 -250 300 350
T [°C]
1140975115
Technical data KTY84 – 130

Connection Red (+)
Blue (−)
Total resistance at 20 – 25 °C 540 Ω < R < 640 Ω
Test current < 3 mA 21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options 5
5.16.4 Temperature sensor /PT (PT100)
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature sensor as well as the motor winding.
• Avoid currents > 4 mA in the circuit of the PT100.
• Observe the correct connection of PT100 to ensure correct evaluation of the tem-
perature sensor. Ensure correct polarity.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to
the motor temperature.
300
250
200
R [Ω] 150
100
50
0
-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
T [°C]
1145838347
Technical data PT100

Connection Red-white
Resistance at 20 – 25 °C per PT100 107 Ω < R < 110 Ω
Test current < 3 mA
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
5.16.5 V forced cooling fan

• Connection in separate terminal box
• Max. connection cross section 3 × 1.5 mm2 (3 × AWG 15)
• Cable gland M16 × 1.5
Motor size Operating mode/connec- Frequency Voltage

tion Hz V
DR..71 – 132, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 50 100 – 127
DRN80 – 132S
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC W 50 175 – 220
DRN80 – 132S
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC m 50 100 – 127
DRN80 – 132S
DR..71 – 180, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 50 230 – 277
DRN80 – 180
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC W 50 346 – 500
DRN80 – 315
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC m 50 200 – 290
DRN80 – 315
1) Steinmetz circuit
Motor size Operating mode/connec- Frequency Voltage

tion Hz V
DR..71 – 132, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 60 100 – 135
DRN80 – 132S
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC W 60 175 – 230
DRN80 – 132S
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC m 60 100 – 135
DRN80 – 132S
DR..71 – 180, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 60 230 – 277
DRN80 – 180
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC W 60 380 – 575
DRN80 – 315
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC m 60 220 – 330
DRN80 – 315
1) Steinmetz circuit
Motor size Operating mode/connec- Voltage

tion
V
DR..71 – 132, DC 24 V 24
DRN80 – 132S
21927189/EN – 07/2015
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the V forced cooling fan, refer to the wiring dia-
gram (→ 2 205).

Options 5
5.16.6 UWU52A switched-mode power supply
The forced cooling fan type V for DC 24 V includes the UWU52A switched-mode
power supply, if you have ordered it. It can be ordered using the part number from
SEW‑EURODRIVE even after the order has been placed.
The following figure depicts the UWU52A switched-mode power supply:
76
101 38
111
576533259
Input: AC 110 – 240 V; 1.04 – 0.61 A; 50/60 Hz

DC 110 – 300 V; 0.65 – 0.23 A
Output: DC 24 V; 2.5 A (40 °C)
DC 24 V; 2.0 A (55 °C)
Connection: Screw terminals 1.5 – 2.5 mm2, separable
Degree of protec- IP20; attachment to EN 60715 TH35 mounting rail in the control cab-
tion: inet
Part number: 0188 1817
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
5.16.7 Overview of mount-on encoders

Refer to the wiring connection diagrams on information on how to connect add-on en-
coders:
En- Motor size Encoder Mounting Supply Signal Wiring dia-

coder type type in VDC gram
ES7S DR..71 – 132 Incremental Shaft- 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08

DRN80 – 132S centered
ES7R DR..71 – 132 Incremental Shaft- 7 – 30 TTL (RS422) 68179xx08

ES7C DR..71 – 132 Incremental Shaft- 4.5 – 30 HTL / TTL (RS422) 68179xx08

AS7W DR..71 – 132 Absolute Shaft- 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68181xx08

DRN80 – 132S value centered
AS7Y DR..71 – 132 Absolute Shaft- 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos + SSI 68182xx07

DRN80 – 132S value centered
EG7S DR..160 – 280 Incremental Shaft- 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08

DRN132M – 280 centered
EG7R DR..160 – 280 Incremental Shaft- 7 – 30 TTL (RS422) 68179xx08

EG7C DR..160 – 280 Incremental Shaft- 4.5 – 30 HTL / TTL (RS422) 68179 xx08
AG7W DR..160 – 280 Absolute Shaft- 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68181xx08

DRN132M – 280 value centered
AG7Y DR..160 – 280 Absolute Shaft- 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos + SSI 68182xx07
EH7S DR..315 Incremental Shaft- 10 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 08511xx08

DRN315 centered
EH7C DR..315 Incremental Shaft- 10 – 30 HTL 08511xx08

DRN315 centered
EH7R DR..315 Incremental Shaft- 10 – 30 TTL (RS422) 08511xx08

DRN315 centered
EH7T DR..315 Incremental Shaft- 5 TTL (RS422) 08511xx08

DRN315 centered
AH7Y DR..315 Absolute Shaft- 9 – 30 TTL (RS422) +SSI 08259xx07

21927189/EN – 07/2015
DRN315 value centered
AV1H DR..160 – 280 Absolute Flange 7 – 12 Hiperface® / 1 Vss –

value centered sin/cos
DRN132M – 280
AV1Y DR..160 – 280 Absolute Flange 10 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos + SSI –

Options 5
En- Motor size Encoder Mounting Supply Signal Wiring dia-
coder type type in VDC gram
EV2C DR..160 – 280 Incremental Flange 9 – 26 HTL –

EV2S DR..160 – 280 Incremental Flange 9 – 26 1 Vss sin/cos –

EV2R DR..160 – 280 Incremental Flange 9 – 26 TTL (RS422) –

EV2T DR..160 – 280 Incremental Flange 5 TTL (RS422) –

INFORMATION
• Maximum oscillation load for encoders ≤ 10 g ≈ 100 m/s2 (10 Hz to 2 kHz)
• Shock resistance = 100 g ≈ 1000 m/s2 for DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S motors
• Shock resistance = 200 g ≈ 2000 m/s2 for DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 motors
5.16.8 Overview of built-in encoders and visual feedback
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the built-in encoder, refer to the wiring diagram.
• Observe chapter "Wiring diagrams" for connection via terminal strip.
• Observe the enclosed wiring diagram for connection via M12 connectors.
Encoder Motor size Supply Signals

in VDC
1)
EI71 DR..71 – 132 9 – 30 HTL 1 period/revolu-
tion
DRN80 – 132S
EI721) HTL 2 periods/revolu-
tion
EI761) HTL 6 periods/revolu-
tion
EI7C1) HTL 24 periods/re-
volution
1) B in the type designation marks the unit generation of the encoder in the documentation. They are not
indicated on the nameplate.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
EI7. B – visual feedback

The EI7. encoders use 2 bi-colored LEDs (red + green each) for visual feedback on
the operating state.
LED H1 (at cable output of the encoder) – status and errors
The green LED indicates the status or the configuration of the encoder. It flashes. The
flashing frequency indicates the set number of periods.
LED H1 green
Frequency Status/configuration
LED off Encoder without voltage or faulty
0.6 Hz EI71 (1 period per revolution)
1.2 Hz EI71 (2 periods per revolution)
3 Hz EI76 (6 periods per revolution)
15 Hz EI7C (24 periods per revolution)
LED lit continuously Encoder defective
The red LED is lit when the encoder detects an error.
LED H1 red
Blinking code Meaning
10 s with 1 Hz and 2 s continu- No valid number of periods can be set
ous
Other Output driver signals a fault (e.g. short circuit or
overtemperature)
The H2 LED display gives visual feedback on the signal track status.
LED color Track A Track B Track A Track B

Orange (green and red) 0 0 1 1
Red 0 1 1 0
Green 1 0 0 1
Off 1 1 0 0
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options 5
5.16.9 Installation notes for encoders
When connecting the encoders to the inverters, observe the provided wiring diagrams
and the information in these operating instructions as well as the operating instruc-
tions/wiring diagrams of the respective inverter and the operating instructions/wiring
diagrams provided with the non-SEW encoder if applicable.
Proceed according to chapter "Motor and brake maintenance" to connect the en-
coders mechanically. Observe the following notes:
• Maximum line length (inverter to encoder):
– 100 m with a capacitance per unit length conductor – shield ≤ 110 nF/km
– 100 m with a capacitance per unit length conductor – conductor ≤ 85 nF/km
• Core cross section: 0.20 – 0.5 mm2 recommendation ≥ 0.25 mm2
• Use shielded cable with twisted pair conductors and apply shield over large area
on both ends:
– In the cable gland of the encoder connection cover or in the encoder connector
– To the inverter on the electronics shield clamp and to the housing of the D-sub
connector
• Install the encoder cables separately from the power cables, keeping a distance of
at least 200 mm.
• Compare the operating voltage with the permitted operating voltage range on the
encoder nameplate. Deviations in the operating voltage may overheat and damage
the encoder.
• SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends the use of stabilized voltage sources and separ-
ate supply systems for encoder or other sensor components and active compon-
ents such as switches and light barriers.
• Supplies with voltage transients and interferences higher than the supply voltage
UB are not permitted.
• Observe the clamping area of 5 to 10 mm of the cable gland of the connection
cover. If you use cables with a different cross section, you have to replace the
provided cable gland with another suitable EMC-compliant cable gland.
• The cable glands for the cable entry must meet the following conditions:
– Cramping area is suitable for the used cable(s)
– The IP level of the encoder connection is at least as high as the IP degree of
protection of the actual encoder
– The operating temperature range matches the designated ambient temperature
range.
• Check the flawless state and the proper seat of the connection cover gasket during
assembly.
• Tighten the screws of the connection cover with a tightening torque of 2 Nm.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Options
5.16.10 Anti-condensation heating

To protect a shutdown motor from freezing up (rotor blockage) or condensation inside
the motor, it can be equipped with an optional anti-condensation heating. The anti-
condensation heating consists of strip heaters that are integrated in the winding head
and supplied with voltage when the motor is switched off. The motor is heated by the
current flowing through the strip heaters.
The strip heaters are controlled according to the following principle:
Motor switched off → anti-condensation heating activated

Motor switched on → anti-condensation heating deactivated
Observe the permitted voltage according to the nameplate and the enclosed terminal
assignment diagram.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Startup
Options 6
6 Startup
INFORMATION
• Observe the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation.
• In case of problems, refer to the chapter "Malfunctions" (→ 2 185).
WARNING
ponents.
• Any work on functional safety components must be carried out strictly in accord-
ance with the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respect-
ive addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under war-
ranty will become invalid.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to electric shock.
• Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1 for
switching the motor.
• When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instruc-
tions issued by the inverter manufacturer.
• Observe the operating instructions of the inverter.
CAUTION
Risk of burns.
• Let the motor cool down before you start your work.
NOTICE
The specified maximum limit torque (Mpk) and the maximum current (Imax) may not be
exceeded, not even for acceleration.
• Limit the maximum current at the inverter.
21927189/EN – 07/2015
INFORMATION
Limit the maximum speed at the inverter. For information on the procedure, refer to
the documentation of the inverter.

6 Startup
Before startup
INFORMATION
When using the DR..250/280, DRN250/280 AC motor with the BE brake and an en-
coder, note the following:
• The brake must be used as a holding brake only.
• The brake may only be applied when the speed is ≤ 20 1/min. For higher speeds,
please contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Emergency stops from a higher motor speed are allowed.
6.1 Before startup

Prior to startup make sure that
• The drive is undamaged and not blocked.
• Any transport locks have been removed.
• The measures stipulated in chapter "Extended storage of motors" (→ 2 28) are
performed after extended storage periods.
• All connections have to be made correctly.
• The direction of rotation of the motor/gearmotor is correct
– Motor rotating clockwise: U, V, W (T1, T2, T3) to L1, L2, L3
• All protective covers are installed correctly.
• All motor protection equipment is active and set for the rated motor current.
• There are no other sources of danger.
• The lockable manual brake release is permitted.
• Loose elements like keys are appropriately secured.
6.2 Motors with reinforced bearing
NOTICE
Bearings might be damaged due to missing overhung load.
• Do not operate cylindrical roller bearings without overhung load.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop
Startup
6
6.3 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop
6.3.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 80, DRN80 with backstop
[78]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[77]
[75]
[190]
[62]
[74]
[48]
[42]
[392]
[44] [41]
9007200397599243
[35] Fan guard [44] Deep grooved ball bearing [77] Screw
[36] Fan [48] Spacing ring [78] Label
[37] Sealing ring [62] Retaining ring [190] Felt ring
[41] Cup spring [74] Sprag ring, complete [392] Gasket
[42] Backstop endshield [75] Sealing flange
6.3.2 Basic structure of DR..90 – 315, DRN90 – 315 with backstop

[78]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[703]
[702]
[190]
[62]
[74]
[48]
21927189/EN – 07/2015
9007200397597323
[35] Fan guard [62] Retaining ring [702] Backstop housing, complete
[36] Fan [74] Sprag ring, complete [703] Cap screw
[37] Sealing ring [78] Label
[48] Spacing ring [190] Felt ring

6 Startup
6.3.3 Changing the blocking direction

A backstop is used to block/preclude a direction of rotation of the motor. The direction
of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan guard of the motor or on the gearmotor
housing.
Observe the direction of rotation of the end shaft and the number of stages when you
mount the motor to the gear unit. Do not start up the motor in blocking direction (en-
sure correct connection of power supply with motor). For inspection purposes, you can
operate the backstop one time with half the motor voltage in the blocking direction:
WARNING
• Before starting work, isolate the motor and, if installed, the forced cooling fan
from the power supply.
• Safeguard against accidental startup.
• Carefully observe the following steps!
Proceed as follows to change the blocking direction:

1. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed.
See chapter "Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 103)
2. Remove flange cover or fan guard [35]
3. For the DR..71 – 80, DRN80: Remove the sealing flange [75].
For the DR../DRN90 – 315: Completely remove the backstop housing [702].
4. Loosen the retaining ring [62].
5. Remove the sprag ring [74] via screws in the forcing threads or using a puller.
6. Spacing ring [48], if provided, remains installed.
7. Turn around the sprag ring [74], check the old grease and replace according to the
specifications below and reinstall the sprag ring.
8. Install retaining ring [62].
9. For the DR..71 – 80, DRN80: Apply Hylomar to cover sealing flange [75] and in-
stall it. Replace felt ring [190] and sealing ring [37], if required.
For the DR../DRN90 – 315: Replace seal [901], felt ring [190] and sealing ring
[37], if required, and install the backstop housing [702].
10. Reinstall the removed parts.
11. Replace the label indicating the direction of rotation.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Startup
Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop 6
Lubricating the backstop
The backstop is greased at the factory with the corrosion protection low-viscosity
grease Mobil LBZ. If you want to use another grease, make sure it complies with NLGI
class 00/000 with a base oil viscosity of 42 mm2/s at 40 °C on a lithium saponified and
mineral oil base. The application temperature range is from -50 °C to +90 °C. See the
following table for the amount of grease required:
DR.. motor type 71 80 90/100 112/132 160 180 200/225 250/280 315
Motor type DRN.. – 80 90/100 112/132S 132M/L 160/180 200/225 250/280 315
Amount of grease 9 11 15 20 30 45 80 80 120
in g
The tolerance regarding the grease level is ± 30%.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7 Inspection/maintenance
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls or in the event of uncontrolled unit behavior.
• Secure or lower hoist drives (danger of falling)
• Safeguard and/or protect the driven machine against touching
• Only use genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid spare parts list.
• Always install a new brake control system at the same time as replacing the
brake coil.
WARNING
ponents.
• Any work on functional safety components must be carried out by strictly ob-
serving the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respective
addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under warranty
will become invalid.
CAUTION
Risk of burns.
NOTICE
Damage to the oil seals if the temperatures is too low during installation.
Possible damage to the oil seals.
• For assembly, the ambient temperature and the oil seals themselves may not be
colder than 0 °C.
INFORMATION
Apply grease with a grease depot (Klüber Petamo GHY133N) to the lip of the oil seal
21927189/EN – 07/2015
before assembly.
INFORMATION
Friction disks in the brakemotor may only be replaced by SEW‑EURODRIVE service
staff.

Inspection/maintenance
Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop 7
Only SEW‑EURODRIVE repair workshops, or SEW plants that provide the necessary
expertise may repair or modify the motor/brakemotor.
Before re-startup of the motor, make sure that all regulations are complied with and
document this with a label on the motor or a written test report.
Always perform safety and functional checks following all maintenance and repair
work (thermal protection).
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection and maintenance intervals
7.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals

The following table lists the inspection and maintenance intervals:
Unit / unit part Time interval What to do?

BE brake • If used as a working brake: Brake inspection
1)
At least every 3000 operating hours • Measure the brake disk thickness
• If used as a holding brake: • Brake disk, lining
Every 2 to 4 years, depending on operat- • Measure and adjust working air gap
ing conditions1)
• Pressure plate
• Driver/gearing
• Pressure rings
• Sucking off any abrasion
• Inspect the switch contacts and replace
them, if necessary (e.g. in case of burn-
out)
Motor • Every 10000 operating hours2) 3) Inspect the motor:
• Check rolling bearing and change if ne-
cessary.
• Replace the oil seal
• Clean cooling air ducts
3)
Drive • Different • Touch up or renew the surface/corro-
sion protection
• Check and clean the air filter.
• if applicable, clean condensation drain
hole at the bottom of the fan guard
• Clean clogged bores
1) The amount of wear depends on many factors and may be high. The machine designer must calculate the required inspection/main-
tenance intervals individually in accordance with the project planning documents (e.g. "Project Planning for Drives").
2) For the DR../DRN250 – 315 with relubrication device, note the shortened relubrication periods in the chapter "Bearing lubrication
DR../DRN250 – 315".
3) The interval depends on outer influences and can be very short, e.g. in the event of high dust concentration in the environment.
If you open the motor during inspection/maintenance, you have to clean it before you
close it.
7.1.1 Connection cables

Check the connection cable for damage at regular intervals and replace if necessary.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Bearing lubrication 7
7.2 Bearing lubrication
7.2.1 Bearing lubrication DR..71 – 280, DRN80 – 280
In standard design, the bearings are lubricated for life.
7.2.2 Bearing lubrication DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 with relubrication device /NS
Motors of sizes 250, 280, and 315 can be equipped with a relubrication device. The
following figure shows the positions of the lubrication devices.
375353099
[1] Lubrication device in type A in accordance with DIN 71412
Under normal operating conditions and at an ambient temperature between -20 °C to

+40 °C, SEW‑EURODRIVE uses ESSO Polyrex EM (K2P-20 DIN 51825), a polyurea-
based mineral high-performance, high-temperature grease for initial lubrication.
For motors in the low temperature range up to -40 °C SEW‑EURODRIVE uses SKF
GXN or LGHP2, which are also a polyurea-based mineral greases.
Relubrication
You can purchase the lubricants in 400 g cartridges from SEW‑EURODRIVE. Refer to
chapter Order information for lubricants and anti-corrosion agents (→ 2 176) for order
information.
INFORMATION
Only mix lubricants of the same thickness type, the same base oil and the same con-
sistency (NLGI class)!
Grease the motor bearings in accordance with the information on the lubricant plate.
The used grease collects inside the motor and should be removed every 6 to 8 re-
lubrication cycles during an inspection. Each time you relubricate, ensure that the
bearing is two-thirds full.
After relubricating the motors, you should startup slowly, if possible, so that the grease
21927189/EN – 07/2015
is distributed evenly.

Reinforced bearings
Re-lubrication period
The table below lists the bearing relubrication intervals for the following conditions:
• Ambient temperature -20 °C to +40 °C
• Rated speed that corresponds to that of a 4-pole AC motor
• normal load
At greater speeds, higher loads or higher ambient temperatures, the re-lubrication in-
tervals are shorter. Use 1.5 times the quantity for the initial filling.
Horizontal mounting Vertical mounting posi-

position tion
Motor type Duration Quantity Duration Quantity
DR../DRN250 – 315 /NS 5000 h 50 g 3000 h 70 g
DR../DRN250 – 315 /ERF /NS 3000 h 50 g 2000 h 70 g
7.3 Reinforced bearings

In the /ERF (reinforced bearings) option, cylindrical rolling bearings are installed on
the A-side.
NOTICE
Bearings might be damaged due to missing overhung load.
• Do not operate cylindrical roller bearings without overhung load.
The reinforced bearings are only offered with the /NS (relubrication) option so as to fa-
cilitate optimal lubrication of the bearing. Observe the notes on bearing lubrication in
chapter Bearing lubrication DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 with relubrication device /
NS (→ 2 101).
7.4 Corrosion protection

If a drive is equipped with the /KS corrosion protection option and IP56 or IP66, you
have to replace the Hylomar at the studs.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work 7
7.5 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work
WARNING
• Before starting work, isolate the motor, brake, and if installed, the forced cooling
fan from the power supply.
• Safeguard against accidental startup.
7.5.1 Removing the rotary encoder from DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the ES7. rotary en-
coder as an example:
[362] [733] [367] [619]
[B] [220] [A]
[35]
[34] [361]
3475618443
[34] Tapping screw [367] Retaining screw

[35] Fan guard [619] Encoder cover
[220] Encoder [733] Screws
[361] Extended fan guard [A] Screws
[362] Torque bracket [B] Cone
Removing ES7. and AS7. encoders

1. Remove the cover [361].
2. Unscrew and remove the connection cover [619]. Do not disconnect the encoder
connection cable.
3. Loosen screws [733].
4. Unscrew the central retaining screw [367] by about 2 to 3 turns and unfasten the
spread shaft cone by tapping lightly on the screw head.
Do not lose the cone [B].
21927189/EN – 07/2015
5. Carefully remove the expansion anchor of the torque bracket [362] from the cover
grid and the encoder form the rotor.

Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work
Re-assembly
Proceed as follows to re-assemble the encoder:
1. Tighten the central retaining screw [367] with a tightening torque of 2.9 Nm.
2. Tighten the screw [733] in the expansion anchor with a tightening torque of max.
2.0 Nm.
3. Assemble the encoder cover [619] and tighten the screws [A] with a tightening
torque of 2 Nm.
4. Install the extended fan guard [361] with the screws [34].
7.5.2 Removing the rotary encoder from DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. rotary en-
[715] [35] [1] [220] [232] [619] [706] [657] [707]
[361]
[367]
[34]
9007201646566283
[1] Rotor [367] Retaining screw

[34] Tapping screw [619] Connection cover
[35] Fan guard [657] Canopy
[220] Encoder [706] Spacer bolt
[232] Screws [707][715] Screws
[361] Extended fan guard [A] Screws
Removing EG7. and AG7. encoders

1. Loosen the screws [22] and remove the forced cooling fan guard [170].
2. Remove the cable grommet [269] with encoder cable from the forced cooling fan
21927189/EN – 07/2015
guard [170].
3. Loosen the screws [232] and [936] and remove the torque bracket [935].
4. Loosen the retaining screw [220] on the encoder and remove the encoder from the
rotor [1].

Re-assembly
1. Place the encoder onto the rotor [1] and attach it with the central retaining screw of
the encoder [A]. The tightening torque must be 8 Nm.
2. Place the torque bracket [935] on the spacing bushings [934] and tighten the
screws [936] with 11 Nm.
3. Attach the torque bracket of the encoder [A] to the torque bracket [935] using the
screws [232]. The tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
cable grommet [269] into the forced cooling fan guard [170].
5. Mount the forced cooling fan guard [170] and tighten the screws [22] with 28 Nm.
7.5.3 Removing the rotary encoder from a DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 315 motor with /V forced
cooling fan option
The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. rotary en-
[934]
[A]
[935]
[232]
[936]
[269]
[170]
[22]
[1]
7715961995
[22] Screw [935] Torque arm

[170] Forced cooling fan guard [936] Screw
[232] Screws [934] Spacer bushing
[269] Grommet [A] Encoder
Removing EG7. and AG7. encoders

21927189/EN – 07/2015
guard [170].
3. Loosen the screws [232] and [936] and remove the torque bracket [935].
4. Loosen the retaining screw [220] on the encoder and remove the encoder from the
rotor [1].

Re-assembly
1. Place the encoder onto the rotor [1] and attach it with the central retaining screw of
the encoder [A]. The tightening torque must be 8 Nm.
2. Place the torque bracket [935] on the spacing bushings [934] and tighten the
screws [936] with 11 Nm.
3. Attach the torque bracket of the encoder [A] to the torque bracket [935] using the
screws [232]. The tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
cable grommet [269] into the forced cooling fan guard [170].
5. Mount the forced cooling fan guard [170] and tighten the screws [22] with 28 Nm.
7.5.4 Removing the rotary encoder from DR..315, DRN315

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EH7. and AH7.
rotary encoders as an example:
[734] [367] [220]
[35] [1] [659] [657]

EH7.
AH7.
[748] [367] [220]

9007199662370443
[35] Fan guard [659] Screw

[220] Encoder [734] Nut
[367] Retaining screw [748] Screw
[657] Cover plate
Removing EH7. encoders

1. Remove the cover plate [657] by loosening the screws [659].
21927189/EN – 07/2015
2. Separate the encoder [220] from the fan guard by loosening the nut [734].
3. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on the encoder and remove the encoder [220]
from the rotor [1].

Removing AH7. encoders
1. Remove the protection cover [657] by loosening the screws [659].
2. Separate the encoder [220] from the fan guard by loosening the screws [748].
3. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on the encoder and remove the encoder [220]
from the shaft.
Re-assembly
1. Mount fan guard [35].
2. Push the encoder [220] on the shaft and fasten it with the retaining screw [367] ap-
plying a tightening torque according to the following table:
Encoder Tightening torque

EH7. 0.7 Nm
AH7. 3.0 Nm
3. Install the screw [748] and the nut [734].
4. Install the cover plate [657].
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.5.5 Mounting/removing the rotary encoder with XV.. mounting adapter for DR..71 – 225,
DRN80 – 225
The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a non-SEW encoder
as an example:
[212] [225] [220] [269] [22] [361] / [170]
[E] [D] [251] [232] [A] [B]
9007202887906699

[170] Forced cooling fan guard [269] Grommet
[212] Fan guard with encoder mount [A] Adapter
[220] Encoder [B] Clamping screw
[225] Intermediate flange (not with XV1A) [D] Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)
[232] Screws (enclosed with XV1A and XV2A) [E] Clamping screw
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed with
XV1A and XV2A)
Removing EV.., AV.., and XV. encoders

1. Remove the extended fan guard [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170] by loosen-
ing the screws [22].
2. Loosen the retaining screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] out-
wards.
3. Loosen the clamping screw [E] of the coupling.
4. Remove the adapter [A] and the encoder [220].
Re-assembly
21927189/EN – 07/2015
1. Proceed according to chapter "Connecting XV.. encoder mounting adapter to

DR..71 – 225, DRN80 – 225 motors (→ 2 34)" to mount the encoder.

7.5.6 Mounting/removing the rotary encoder with EV../AV.. mounting adapter for DR..250 – 280,
DRN250 – 280
as an example:
[35]
[A]
[1458]
[233]
[225]
[226]
[220]
[251]
[232]
[269]
[361]
[22] [1496]
[1497]
[1498]
[1459] [1489]
[1460] [1461] [1462] [33]

[34]
9007206970704907

[33] Washer [1458] Screw
[34] Screw [1459] Cage nut
[35] Fan guard [1460] Serrated lock washer
[220] Encoder [1461] Washer
[226] Screw [1489] Ground strap
[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A and .V2A) [1496] Serrated lock washer
[233] Coupling [1497] Washer
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed [1498] Screw
with .V1A and .V2A)
[269] Grommet [A] Encoder mounting adapter
Removing the encoder mounting adapter

1. Loosen the screws [34] and washers [33] at the extended fan guard. Remove the
extended fan guard [361].
2. Remove the encoder. For more details, see chapter "Removing the en-
coder." (→ 2 110)
3. Loosen the ground strap of the encoder mounting adapter [A] with serrated lock
21927189/EN – 07/2015
washer [1496], washers [1497], and screw [1498].

4. Loosen the screws [22] and remove the fan guard [35].

5. Loosen the encoder mounting adapter [A] with screw [1458] in the encoder bore of
the rotor and remove it.
If the encoder mounting adapter cannot easily be removed: Screw in an M6 set
screw with 20 – 35 mm length into the rotor bore (bore for screw [1458]) and
tighten it finger-tight. Screw in a set screw M8 with > 10 mm length or a screw M8
with min. 80 mm length into the same bore and push out the encoder mounting ad-
apter [A] from the rotor [1]. Then remove the set screw M6 from the rotor again.
Removing EV.., AV.. encoders

1. Loosen the screws [34] and remove the extended fan guard [361].
2. Remove the cable grommet [269] with encoder cable from the extended fan guard
[361].
3. Loosen the screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers of the encoder [220]
outwards. Loosen the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the encoder
end through the slots in the encoder mounting adapter [A].
4. Remove the encoder [220] from the encoder mounting adapter [A] or intermediate
flange [225].
Re-assembly
1. Proceed according to chapter "Connecting EV../AV.. encoder mounting adapter to
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors (→ 2 36)" to mount the encoder.
INFORMATION
When re-installing the fan guard [35], make sure that the torque is supported:
The damping elements [1486] on both sides of the encoder mounting adapter [A]
must engage with the ventilation grid (see figure below). The torque plate [935] must
protrude from the grid to the left and to the right of the damping element.
[1486] [35] [935]
21927189/EN – 07/2015
9007207498780299

7.5.7 Mounting/removing the rotary encoder with EV../AV../XV.. mounting adapter for DR..250 –
280, DRN250 – 280 with /V forced cooling fan option
as an example:
[934]
[A]
[936]
[226]
[220]
[251]
[232]
[269]
[170]
[22]
[935]
[1463]
[1458]
[233]
[225]
7715965835
[22] Screw [269] Grommet

[170] Forced cooling fan guard [934] Spacer bushing
[220] Encoder [935] Torque bracket
[226] Screw [1458] Screw
[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A and .V2A) [1463] Screw
[233] Coupling [A] Encoder mounting adapter
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed with .V1A
and .V2A)
Removing the encoder mounting adapter

2. Remove the cable grommet [269] from the fan guard [170].
3. Loosen the screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] to the side.
Loosen the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the encoder end and re-
move the encoder [220]. The intermediate flange [225] and screws [226] can re-
main at the encoder mounting adapter [A].
4. Loosen the screws [1458] and [936] and remove the encoder mounting adapter
[A]. The torque brackets [935] and screws [1463] can remain at the encoder
mounting adapter [A].
• If the encoder mounting adapter [A] cannot easily be removed: Screw in a set
21927189/EN – 07/2015
screw M6 with 20 – 35 mm length into the rotor bore (bore for screw [1458])
and tighten it finger-tight. Screw in a set screw M8 with > 10 mm length or a
screw M8 with min. 80 mm length into the same bore and push out the encoder
mounting adapter [A] from the rotor [1]. Then remove the set screw M6 from the
rotor again.

Removing EV.., AV.., and XV. encoders

guard [170].
3. Turn the conical spring washers of the encoder [220] outwards and loosen the
screws [232]. Loosen the screw of the coupling clamping hub [233] on the encoder
end.
4. Remove the encoder [220] from the encoder mounting adapter [A] or intermediate
flange [225].
Re-assembly
1. Proceed as described in chapter "Installing the EV.A / AV.A encoder mounting ad-
apter on DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors" (→ 2 36) to mount the encoder.
7.5.8 Installing/removing hollow shaft encoders from/to XH.. mounting adapter of DR..71 – 225,
DRN80 – 225
as an example:
Encoder mounting via XH1A mounting adapter Encoder mounting via XH7A and XH8A mounting adapter
[269] [361] / [170]
[E] [F]
[35] [1] [D] [220] [A] [B1] [C] [33] [34]

[35] [G] [1] [D] [220] [361] / [170]
3633161867
[1] Rotor [A] Retaining screw

[33] Tapping screw [B] Encoder cover
[34] Washer [C] Screw for torque bracket
[35] Fan guard [D] Nut of the torque bracket
[170] Forced cooling fan guard [E] Screw
[220] Encoder [F] Clamping ring
[269] Grommet [G] Nut of the torque bracket
[361] Extended fan guard
Removing hollow shaft encoders from XH1A mounting adapter

21927189/EN – 07/2015
1. Remove cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].

2. Loosen encoder cover [B] via screws [C].
3. Remove screw [A].
4. Loosen screw and nut of the torque bracket [D] and remove torque arm.
5. Remove encoder [220] from rotor [1].

Removing hollow shaft encoders from XH7A and XH8A mounting adapter
1. Remove cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].
2. Loosen screw [E] on clamping ring [F].
3. Remove nut of torque bracket [G].
4. Remove encoder [220] from rotor [1].
Reinstalling hollow shaft encoders to XH1A mounting adapter

1. Push encoder [220] on rotor [1].
2. Mount torque bracket via screws [D].
3. Fasten the encoder [220] via screw [A] with a tightening torque of 2.9 Nm.
4. Fasten encoder cover [B] via screws [C] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.
5. Install cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].
Reinstalling hollow shaft encoders to XH7A and XH8A mounting adapter

1. Push encoder [220] on rotor [1].
2. Mount torque bracket via nut [D] with a tightening torque of 10.3 Nm.
3. Fasten clamping ring [F] via screw [E] with a tightening torque of 5 Nm.
4. Install cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 motors
7.6 Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 motors

7.6.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 132/DRN80 – 132S
[132]
[123]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[113]
[118] [115]
[116] [262]
[112]
[111] [134]
[129]
[707]
[9] [103] [100] [705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[42]
[22]
[41] [32]
[106]
[392]
[107] [13] [36]
[24] [3] [44]
[108] [11]
[109] [10]
[16]
[12]
[7] [1]
[2]
[91]
[93] [93]
[90] [90]
13369217931
[1] Rotor [30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [123] Hex head screw
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [107] Oil flinger [129] Screw plug with O-ring
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [108] Nameplate [131] Gasket for cover
[7] Flanged endshield [36] Fan [109] Grooved pin [132] Terminal box cover
[9] Screw plug [41] Shim washer [111] Gasket for lower part [134] Screw plug with O-ring
[10] Retaining ring [42] B-side endshield [112] Terminal box lower part [156] Information sign
[11] Deep groove ball bear- [44] Deep groove ball bear- [113] Pan head screw [262] Connection terminal,
ing ing complete
[12] Retaining ring [90] Bed plate [115] Terminal board [392] Gasket
[13] Cap screw [91] Hex nut [116] Terminal yoke [705] Canopy
[16] Stator [93] Pan head screw [117] Hex head screw [706] Spacer
[22] Hex head screw [100] Hex nut [118] Lock washer [707] Pan head screw
[24] Eyebolt [103] Stud [119] Pan head screw
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 motors 7
7.6.2 Basic structure of DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180
[117] [137]
[219] [262]
[616]
[123] [118]
[132] [116]
[131]
[119] [128]
[140]
[156]
[139]
[112]
[111] [134]
[115] [113] [129]
[390]
[109]
[108]
[24]
[12]
[9]
[7]
[106] [707]
[705]
[107] [706]
[35]
[715]
[30]
[19]
[41] [42] [22]
[17]
[91]
[90] [32]
[100]
[103] [94] [93]
[15] [16] [44]
[36]
[14] [31]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
[104]
[10]
18014399036804619
[1] Rotor [31] Key [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug with O-ring
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [111] Gasket for lower part [137] Screw
[7] Flange [36] Fan [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw
[9] Screw plug [41] Cup spring [113] Screw [140] Washer
[10] Retaining ring [42] Rear endshield [115] Terminal board [156] Information label
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [219] Hex nut
bearing
[12] Retaining ring [90] Foot [117] Stud [262] Connection terminal
[14] Washer [91] Hex nut [118] Washer [390] O-ring
[15] Hex head screw [93] Washer [119] Cap screw [616] Retaining plate
[16] Stator [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy
[17] Hex nut [100] Hex nut [128] Serrated lock washer [706] Spacer
[19] Cap screw [103] Stud [129] Screw plug with O-ring [707] Hex head screw
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[22] Hex head screw [104] Supporting ring [131] Gasket for cover [715] Hex head screw
[24] Eyebolt [106] Oil seal
[30] Sealing ring [107] Oil flinger

7.6.3 Basic structure of DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225

[117] [137]
[219] [262]
[123] [118] [616]
[116]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[119] [129]
[134]
[112]
[128]
[111] [140]
[113] [139]
[109] [390]
[108] [115]
[24]
[15]
[105]
[9]
[106]
[107]
[707]
[705]
[706]
[715]
[35]
[30]
[25]
[19] [26]
[22] [32]
[42] [36]
[40]
[93]
[90] [44] [43]
[21]
[94] [31]
[103] [7]
[100] [16] [1]
[3]
[11]
[2]
9007200332597387
[1] Rotor [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [137] Screw
[7] Flange [36] Fan [111] Gasket for lower part [139] Hex head screw
[9] Screw plug [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [113] Cap screw [156] Information label
[15] Hex head screw [43] Supporting ring [115] Terminal board [219] Hex nut
[16] Stator [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [262] Connection terminal
bearing
[19] Cap screw [90] Foot [117] Stud [390] O-ring
[21] Oil seal flange [93] Washer [118] Washer [616] Retaining plate
[22] Hex head screw [94] Cap screw [119] Cap screw [705] Canopy
[24] Eyebolt [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [706] Spacer bolt
[25] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [707] Hex head screw
[26] Shield ring [105] Cup spring [129] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [131] Gasket for cover
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.6.4 Basic structure of DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280
[137] [262] [616] [156]
[219]
[118]
[123]
[116]
[132]
[117]
[131]
[119]
[112]
[139]
[140]
[111] [128]
[159]
[160]
[161] [19]
[115]
[113] [129] [134] [22]
[24] [1453]
[105]
[9]
[7]
[106]
[107]
[707]
[705]
[706]
[715]
[35] [32]
[26] [25] [40]
[36]
[30]
[42] [43]
[109] [44]
[108] [21]
[94] [31]
[93]
[90] [1]
[15]
[16] [3]
[100]
[103] [11]
[2]
9007206690410123
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [137] Screw
[3] Key [36] Fan [111] Gasket for lower part [139] Hex head screw
[7] Flange [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [113] Cap screw [156] Information sign
[11] Deep groove ball [43] Supporting ring [115] Terminal board [159] Connection piece
bearing
[15] Cap screw [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [160] Connection piece gasket
bearing
[16] Stator [90] Foot [117] Stud [161] Hex head screw
[19] Cap screw [93] Washer [118] Washer [219] Hex nut
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[21] Oil seal flange [94] Cap screw [119] Hex head screw [262] Connection terminal
[22] Hex head screw [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy
[24] Eyebolt [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [706] Spacer bolt
[25] Cap screw [105] Compression spring [129] Screw plug [707] Hex head screw
[26] Shield ring [106] Oil seal [131] Gasket for cover [715] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover [1453] Screw plug
[31] Key

7.6.5 Basic structure of DR..315, DRN315

[452]
[634]
[633]
[123] [151]
[117]
[132] [454]
[219]
[131] [118]
[119] [116]
[156] [128]
[112] [140]
[111] [139]
[113] [134] [607]
[115] [129]
[108] [109]
[24] [707]
[706]
[716]
[705] [715]
[30] [35]
[26] [25]
[22] [19] [40] [36]
[17] [42] [43]
[32]
[16] [94] [21] [44]
[93]
[15] [90] [1] [31]
[103] [609]
[7] [9] [608]
[11] [3]
[106] [250] [606] [604]
[105]
[107]
[2]
[100]
27021598116221579
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [111] Gasket for lower part [156] Information sign
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part [219] Hex nut
[3] Key [36] Fan [113] Cap screw [250] Oil seal
[7] Flange [40] Retaining ring [115] Terminal board [452] Terminal strip
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [454] Mounting rail
[11] Rolling bearing [43] Supporting ring [117] Stud [604] Lubrication ring
[15] Cap screw [44] Rolling bearing [118] Washer [606] Grease nipple
[16] Stator [90] Foot [119] Hex head screw [607] Grease nipple
[17] Hex nut [93] Washer [123] Hex head screw [608] Oil seal flange
[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [128] Serrated lock washer [609] Hex head screw
[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [129] Screw plug [633] End bracket
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [131] Gasket for cover [634] End plate
[24] Eyebolt [105] Cup spring [132] Terminal box cover [705] Canopy
[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [134] Screw plug [706] Spacer bolt
[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [139] Hex head screw [707] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [140] Washer [715] Hex nut
[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [151] Cap screw [716] Washer

7.6.6 Inspection steps for DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 motors
WARNING
• Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply be-
fore starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.

2. With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
Remove pinion and oil flinger [107].
3. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36].
4. Remove stator:
• Size DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: Remove cap screws [13] from flanged end-
shield [7] and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] from flanged endshield
[7].
• Size DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180: Loosen cap screws [19] and remove B-
side endshield [42]. Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove stator from
flanged endshield.
• Size DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225
– Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with the B-
side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side end-
shield [42].
• Size DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 without /ERF or /NS option
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7].
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the B-side endshield [42] together with the
rotor [1].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the B-side endshield [42] from the rotor
[1].
• Size DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 with /ERF or /NS option or DR../DRN315
– Unfasten cap screws [19] and [25], and remove B-side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7] together with the rotor [1].
– Loosen hex head screws [609] and remove the flange [7] from the rotor [1].
– Before disassembly, preferably protect the oil seal seat from damage using ad-
21927189/EN – 07/2015
hesive tape or a protective sleeve.

5. Visual inspection: Are there traces of gear oil or moisture inside the stator?
• If not, proceed with step 8.
• If there is moisture, proceed with step 6.
• If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop

6. If there is moisture inside the stator:

• With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
• With motors without a gear unit: Remove A-flange.
• Remove the rotor [1].
7. Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the mo-
tor" (→ 2 28)).
8. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types.
See chapter "Permitted rolling bearing types" (→ 2 174).
9. DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 with /ERF or /NS option or DR../DRN315
• Fill the rolling bearing with grease until it is two thirds full. See chapter "Bearing
lubrication" (→ 2 101).
• Note: Place the oil seal flange [608] and [21] onto the rotor shaft before in-
stalling the bearings.
• Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.
• Place the springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the
flange [7].
• Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide into the flange [7].
• Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head bolts [609].
10. Reseal the shaft:
• A-side: Replace the oil seal [106].
• B-side: Replace the oil seal [30].
Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klüber Petamo GHY 133).
11. Reseal the stator seat:
• Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound (operating temper-
ature -40 to +180 °C), such as "SEW L Spezial".
• For sizes DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: Replace sealing [392].
• For sizes DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: Change O-ring [1480] if it is deformed
or damaged. As an alternative, use e.g. "SEW L Spezial" instead of the O-ring.
12. Install the motor and optional equipment.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors
7
7.7 Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors
7.7.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 80, DRN80 brakemotors
[157]
[66]
[718]
[49]
[68]
[70]
[71]
[1]
[35]
[22]
[62]
[51]
[53]
[95]
[61]
[54]
[65]
[67]
[60]
[36]
[58]
[57]
[56]
[59]
[50]
9007199428941963
[1] Motor with brake endshield [54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring
[22] Hex head screw [56] Stud [68] Brake disk
[35] Fan guard [57] Conical spring [62] Retaining ring
[36] Fan [58] Adjusting nut [70] Driver
[49] Pressure plate [59] Parallel pin [71] Key
[50] Brake spring [60] Stud 3x [95] Sealing ring
[11] Complete magnet body [61] Hex nut [718] Damping plate
[51] Hand lever [65] Pressure ring
[53] Releasing lever [66] Sealing strip
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.2 Basic structure of DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S brakemotors

[35]
[22]
[36]
[51]
[53]
[95]
[550]
[900]
[62]
[70]
[901]
[71]
[62]
[1] [58]
[57]
[56]
[59]
9007199434722955
[1] Motor with brake endshield [53] Releasing lever [70] Driver
[22] Hex head screw [56] Stud [71] Key
[32] Retaining ring [57] Conical spring [95] Sealing ring
[35] Fan guard [58] Adjusting nut [550] Pre-assembled brake
[36] Fan [59] Parallel pin [900] Screw
[51] Hand lever [62] Retaining ring [901] Gasket
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7
7.7.3 Basic structure of DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280 brakemotors
[55]
[35]
[51]
[36]
[53]
[47]
[95]
[550]
[900]
[62]
[70]
[31]
[901]
[71]
[32] [22]
[1] [58]
[57]
[56]
[698]
9007199781964683
[1] Motor with brake endshield [51] Hand lever [70] Driver
[22] Hex head screw [53] Releasing lever [71] Key
[31] Key [55] Closing piece [95] Sealing ring
[32] Retaining ring [56] Stud [550] Pre-assembled brake
[35] Fan guard [57] Conical spring [698] Connector complete (only for BE20 –
BE122)
[36] Fan [58] Adjusting nut [900] Screw
[47] O-ring [62] Retaining ring [901] O-ring
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.4 DR.315 brakemotor – basic structure

[32]
[36]
[64] [56]
[53]
[37][47]
[550]
[900]
[62]
[70]
[31]
[71]
[1]
[55]
[35]
[22]
BE122
BE120
[57] [255] [256] [58]

353595787
[1] Motor with brake endshield [53] Releasing lever [71] Key
[22] Hex head screw [55] Closing piece [255] Conical seat
[31] Key [56] Stud [256] Spherical washer
[32] Retaining ring [57] Conical spring [550] Pre-assembled brake
[35] Fan guard [58] Adjusting nut [900] Screw
[36] Fan [62] Retaining ring [901] Gasket
[37] V-ring [64] Set screw
[47] O-ring [70] Driver
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance of DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors 7
7.7.5 Inspection steps for DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors
WARNING

2. With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
Remove pinion and oil flinger [107].
3. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36].
4. Remove stator:
• Size DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: Remove cap screws [13] from flanged end-
shield [7] and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] from flanged endshield
[7].
• Size DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180: Loosen cap screws [19] and remove B-
side endshield [42]. Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove stator from
flanged endshield.
• Size DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225
– Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with the B-
side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side end-
shield [42].
• Size DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 without /ERF or /NS option
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7].
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the B-side endshield [42] together with the
rotor [1].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the B-side endshield [42] from the rotor
[1].
• Size DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 with /ERF or /NS option or DR../DRN315
– Unfasten cap screws [19] and [25], and remove B-side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7] together with the rotor [1].
– Loosen hex head screws [609] and remove the flange [7] from the rotor [1].
– Before disassembly, preferably protect the oil seal seat from damage using ad-
21927189/EN – 07/2015
hesive tape or a protective sleeve.

5. Remove the brake cable:
• BE05 – 11: Remove the terminal box cover and unfasten the brake cable from
the rectifier.
• BE20 – 122: Loosen safety screws of the brake plug connector [698] and re-
move plug connector.

6. Push the brake off the stator and carefully lift it off.
7. Pull the stator back by about 3 to 4 cm.
8. Visual inspection: Are there traces of gear oil or moisture inside the stator?
• If not, proceed with step 11.
• If there is moisture, proceed with step 9.
• If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop
9. If there is moisture inside the stator:
• With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit
• With motors without a gear unit: Remove A-flange
• Remove the rotor [1]
10. Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the mo-
tor" (→ 2 28)).
11. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types.
See chapter "Permitted rolling bearing types" (→ 2 174).
12. DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 with /ERF or /NS option or DR../DRN315
• Fill the rolling bearing with grease until it is two thirds full. See chapter "Bearing
lubrication" (→ 2 101).
• Note: Place the oil seal flange [608] and [21] onto the rotor shaft before in-
stalling the bearings.
• Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.
• Place the springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the
flange [7].
• Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide into the flange [7].
• Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head bolts [609].
• Screw in the stator [16] and flange [7] with screws [15].
Note: Protect the winding overhang from damage.
• Before mounting the B-side endshield, screw in the M8 set screw approxim-
ately 200 mm into the oil seal flange [21].
• Before mounting the B-side endshield [42], feed the set screw in through a bore
for the screw [25]. Screw B-side endshield to stator [16] using cap screws [19]
and hex nuts [17]. Lift the oil seal flange [21] with the set screw, and fasten us-
ing 2 screws [25]. Remove the set screw and screw in the remaining screws
[25].
• Renew oil seals
– A-side: Replace oil seals [106], for gearmotors replace the oil flinger [107] and
oil seal [250].
With gearmotors, fill about two-thirds of the space between the two oil seals
with suitable grease. See chapter Order information for lubricants and anti-cor-
21927189/EN – 07/2015
rosion agents (→ 2 176).
– B-side: Insert the oil seal [30], and coat the sealing lip with the same grease.
• A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]
• B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]

Apply suitable grease to the sealing lip. See chapter Order information for lub-
ricants and anti-corrosion agents (→ 2 176).
14. Reseal the stator seat:
• Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound
(operating temperature –40 °C to +180 °C), e.g. "SEW L Spezial".
• For sizes DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S: Replace sealing [392].
15. Motor size DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280: Replace the O-ring [901] between
the B-side endshield [42] and the pre-assembled brake [550]. Install the pre-as-
sembled brake [550]
16. Apply suitable grease to the sealing ring [95]. See chapter Order information for
lubricants and anti-corrosion agents (→ 2 176).
17. Install the motor, the brake and optional equipment.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.6 Basic structure of BE05 – BE2 brakes (DR..71 – 80, DRN80)

[66]
[60] [61]
[718] [50]/[276] [54]
[49]
[67] [65]
[68]
[42] [73]
18014399037859723
[42] Brake endshield [61] Hex nut [73] Washer

[49] Pressure plate [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [718] Damping plate
[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring
[60] Stud 3x [68] Brake disk
7.7.7 Basic structure of BE1 – BE11 brakes (DR..90 – 160, DRN90 – 132S)

[66]
[60] [61]
[54]
[50/276]
[718]
[49]
[68] [65]
[69] [67]
[702]
18014398683684619
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[49] Pressure plate [61] Hex nut [68] Brake disk

[50] Brake spring (normal) [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)
[54] Magnet body, complete [66] Sealing strip [702] Friction disk
[60] Stud 3x [67] Counter spring [718] Damping plate

7.7.8 Basic structure of BE20 brakes (DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180)
[66]
[61]
[60]
[28]
[54]
[50/276]
[49]
[65]
[68]
[67]
[69]
[702]
9007200415803275
[28] Closing cap [61] Hex nut [69] Circular spring

[49] Pressure plate, complete [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [702] Friction disk
[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring
[60] Stud 3x [68] Brake disk
7.7.9 Basic structure of BE30 – BE32 brakes (DR..180 – 225, DRN180 – 225)
[28]
[50]/[276]
[68b] [49]
[69b]
[51]
[68] [67]
[702] [69]
[66]
[61]
[60]
[54]
18014399663204747
[28] Closing cap [60] Stud 3x [69] Circular spring

[49] Pressure plate [61] Hex nut [276] Brake spring (blue)
21927189/EN – 07/2015
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [718] Friction disk
[51] Brake plate [67] Setting sleeve
[54] Magnet body [68] Brake disk

7.7.10 Basic structure of BE60 – BE122 brakes (DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315)
[733]
[732]
[28]
[50/276]
[49]
[67]
[68b]
[69b]
[52b]
[68]
[69]
[702]
[66]
[61]
[60]
[54]
18014398863076107
[28] Closing cap [61] Hex nut [69b] Circular spring (BE122 only)
[49] Pressure plate [66] Sealing strip [276] Brake spring
[50] Brake spring [67] Counter spring [702] Friction disk
[52b] Brake plate (BE122 only) [68] Brake disk [732] Cover plate
[54] Magnet body, complete [68b] Brake disk (BE12 only) [733] Screw
[60] Stud 3x [69] Circular spring
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.11 Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122 brakes
WARNING

• Forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed.
• Fan guard with encoder mounting or fan guard [35]
2. Push the sealing strip [66] aside,
• Release the clamping strap, if necessary
• Sucking off any abrasion
3. Measure the brake disk [68]:
• Minimum brake disk thickness see chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 159).
• If necessary, replace brake disk according to chapter Replacing the brake disk
of BE05 – BE122 brakes (→ 2 133).
4. BE30 – 122: Unfasten the setting sleeve [67] by turning it towards the B-side end-
shield.
5. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)
(use a feeler gauge and measure at three points offset by 120°):
• For BE05 – 11: between pressure plate [49] and damping plate [718]
• For BE20 – 122: between pressure plate [49] and magnet body [54]
1
12
0°
21927189/EN – 07/2015
0°
12
3 2
120°
18014398689460619

• BE050 – 20: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is set correctly,
see chapter "Technical data".
• BE30 – 62: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is 0.25 mm.
• BE120 – 122: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is 0.30 mm.
• If you are mounting the BE32 in a vertical position, set the 3 springs of
the brake plate to the following dimension:
Mounting position X in mm
Brake at the top 7.3
Brake at the bottom 7.3
• If you are mounting the BE62 – 122 brakes in a vertical position, set the 3
springs on the brake plate to the following position:
Mounting position X in mm
Brake at the top 10.0
Brake at the bottom 10.0
[49]
[68b]
[52b]
X [68]
[900] X
18014398965440139
[49] Pressure plate [68b] Brake disk (BE32, BE62, BE122)

[52b] Brake plate (BE32, BE62, BE122) [900] Hex nut
[68] Brake disk
7. BE30 – 122: Screw the setting sleeves [67] to the magnet body until the working
air gap is correctly set, see chapter "Technical data (→ 2 159)".
8. Install the sealing strip back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.12 Replacing the brake disk of BE05 – BE122 brakes
In addition to the brake elements listed in column "BE brake", see chapter "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (→ 2 100), check the hex nuts [61] for wear when you re-
place the brake disk. You must always replace the hex nuts [61] when you replace the
brake disk.
WARNING
INFORMATION
• The brake of DR..71 – 80, DRN80 motor sizes cannot be removed from the motor
because the BE brake is directly installed on the brake endshield of the motor.
• The brake of DR..90 – 315, DRN90 – 315 motor sizes can be removed from the
motor for replacing the brake disk because the BE brake is pre-installed on the
brake endshield of the motor with a friction disk.

• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32/62] and fan
[36]
2. Remove the brake cable
the rectifier.
3. Remove the rubber sealing strip [66]
4. Remove manual brake release if necessary.
• Setting nuts [58], conical springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], spiral
dowel pin, if necessary [59], conical seat [255], spherical washer [256]
5. Loosen hex nuts [61], carefully pull off the magnet body [54] (brake cable!) and
take out the brake springs [50].
6. BE05 – 11: Remove the damping plate [718], pressure plate [49] and brake disk
[68]
BE20, BE30, BE60, BE120: Remove pressure plate [49] and brake disk [68]
21927189/EN – 07/2015
BE32, BE62, BE122: Remove pressure plate [49], brake disks [68] and [68b]
7. Clean the brake components.
8. Install new brake disk(s).

9. Brake parts are installed as described in chapter Inspection steps for DR..71 –
315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors (→ 2 125).
• Except for the fan and the fan guard, because the working air gap has to be set
first, see chapter "Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122
brakes (→ 2 131)".
10. In case of manual brake release: Use the setting nuts to adjust the floating clear-
ance "s" between the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see
following figure).
WARNING
No braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s".
• Set the floating clearance "s" correctly according to the following figure and table
so that the pressure plate can move up as the brake lining wears.
177241867
Brake Floating clearance s in mm

BE05, BE1, BE2, 1.5
BE5 1.7
BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62, 2
BE120, BE122
11. Put the sealing strip in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
• The lockable manual brake release (type HF) is already released when resistance
is encountered as the set screw is turned.
• The self-reengaging manual brake release (type HR) can be operated with normal
hand pressure.
• In brakemotors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the manual brake re-
lease lever must be removed after startup/maintenance! A bracket is provided for
storing the lever on the outside of the motor.
21927189/EN – 07/2015
INFORMATION
After replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque will be reached after sev-
eral cycles.

7.7.13 Changing the braking torque of BE05 – BE122 brakes
The braking torque can be altered in stages.
• By changing the type and number of brake springs
• By changing the complete magnet body (only possible for BE05 and BE1)
• By changing the brake (from motor size DR..90, DRN90).
• By changing to a double-disk brake (BE30 only)
For the possible braking torque steps, please refer to chapter "Technical
data" (→ 2 159).
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.14 Changing the brake spring of BE05 – BE122 brakes
WARNING

[36]
the rectifier.
3. Remove the sealing strip [66] and the manual brake release:
• Setting nuts [58], conical springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], spiral
dowel pin [59], conical seat [255], spherical washer [256]
4. Loosen hex nuts [61] and pull off the magnet body [54]
• By approx. 50 mm (watch the brake cable)
5. Replace or add brake springs [50/276/265]
• Arrange brake springs symmetrically
315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors (→ 2 125).
brakes (→ 2 131)".
following figure).
WARNING
21927189/EN – 07/2015

177241867

BE05, BE1, BE2, 1.5
BE5 1.7
BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62, 2
BE120, BE122
INFORMATION
Replace setting nuts [58] and hex nuts [61] if the removal procedure is repeated.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.15 Changing the magnet body of BE05 – BE122 brakes
WARNING

[36]
2. Remove the sealing strip [66] and the manual brake release:
• Setting nuts [58], conical coil springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], spiral
dowel pin [59]
the rectifier.
4. Loosen hex nuts [61], remove complete magnet body [54], remove brake springs
[50/276].
5. Install new magnet body with brake springs. For the possible braking torque steps,
please refer to chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 159).
315, DRN80 – 315 brakemotors (→ 2 125).
brakes (→ 2 131)".
following figure).
WARNING
21927189/EN – 07/2015

177241867

BE05, BE1, BE2 1.5
BE5 1.7
BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62, 2
BE120, BE122
9. Replace brake control in the event of an interturn short circuit or a short circuit to
frame.
INFORMATION
Replace setting nuts [58] and hex nuts [61] if the removal procedure is repeated.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.16 Changing the brake of DR..71 – 80, DRN80 motors
WARNING

• Flange cover or fan guard [35], circlip [32/62] and fan [36]
2. Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable from the rectifier. If ne-
cessary, attach trailing wire to brake cables.
3. Loosen machine screws [13] and remove brake endshield with brake from stator.
4. Insert the brake cable of the new brake into the terminal box.
5. Install the new brake, observing the alignment of the cams of the brake endshield.
• Replace the sealing ring [95]
• Apply grease to the sealing lip (see chapter "Order information for lubricants
and anti-corrosion agents" (→ 2 176)).
7. In case of manual brake release: Use the adjusting nuts to adjust the floating
clearance "s" between the conical springs (pressed flat) and the adjusting nuts
(see following figure).
WARNING
No braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s."
s
21927189/EN – 07/2015
177241867
Brakes Floating clearance s in mm

BE05, BE1, BE2 1.5

7.7.17 Changing the brakes for DR..90 – 225, DRN90 – 225
WARNING

[36]
the rectifier.
3. Unfasten screws [900] and remove brake from brake endshield.
4. DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S: Pay attention to the alignment of the gasket [901].
5. Connect the brake cables of the new brake.
6. Install the new brake, observing the alignment of the cams of the friction disk.
following figure).
WARNING
21927189/EN – 07/2015

177241867

BE05, BE1, BE2 1.5
BE5 1.7
BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32 2
21927189/EN – 07/2015

7.7.18 Changing the brakes for DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315
WARNING

• Flange cover or fan guard [35], circlip [32/62] and fan [36]
2. BE60 – 62: Remove the brake cable
• Remove the terminal box cover and unfasten the brake cable from the rectifier.
• Connect the brake cables of the new brake
3. BE120 – 122: Unfasten brake connector.
4. Unfasten screws [900] and remove brake from brake endshield.
5. Install the new brake, observing the alignment of the cams of the friction disk.
7. In case of manual brake release: Use the adjusting nuts to adjust the floating
clearance "s" between the conical springs (pressed flat) and the adjusting nuts
WARNING
No braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s."
21927189/EN – 07/2015
177241867
Brakes Floating clearance s in mm

BE60, BE62, BE120, BE122 2

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB
7.8 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB

7.8.1 Basic structure of diagnostic unit /DUB on DR..90 – 100 with BE2
[379]
[945]
[112]
[946]
[561]
[560]
[66] [49]
[556]
[559] [555] [562] [558]

9007200340056843
[49] Pressure plate for DUB [556] Angle bracket [561] Stud
[66] Sealing strip for DUB [557] Stud [562] Washer
[112] Terminal box lower part [558] Hex head screw [945] Countersunk screw
[379] Screw fitting [559] Pan head screw [946] Mounting plate complete
[555] Microswitch [560] Hex head screw
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB 7
7.8.2 Basic structure of diagnostic unit /DUB on DR..90 – 315 with BE5 – 122
[379]
[112]
[66] [49]
[562] [558]
[556]
[561] [557] [560] [555]

[559]
1085317771
[49] Pressure plate for /DUB [556] Mounting bracket [561] Stud
[66] Sealing strip for /DUB [557] Pin [562] Washer
[112] Terminal box lower part [558] Hex head screw
[379] Screw fitting [559] Pan head screw
[555] Microswitch [560] Hex head screw
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB
7.8.3 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB for function monitoring
WARNING
1. Check working air gap according to chapter "Setting the working air gap of BE05 –
BE122 brakes (→ 2 131)" and adjust it if necessary.
2. Screw the hex head screw [560] against the actuator of the microswitch [555] until
it trips (brown, blue contacts closed).
While screwing, install hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the
thread.
3. Turn hex head screw [560] back until microswitch [555] switches back (contacts
brown-blue open).
4. To ensure operational reliability, turn hex head screw [560] further back by one-
sixth of a revolution (0.1 mm).
5. Tighten hex nut [561], while doing so, hold hex head screw [560] to keep it in the
correct position.
6. Switch the brake on and off several times. Check whether the microswitch opens
and closes reliably in any motor shaft position. Therefore, turn the motor shaft
manually several times.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB 7
7.8.4 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB for wear monitoring
WARNING
1. Check and, if necessary, adjust the working air gap according to chapter "Setting
the working air gap for BE.. brake".
2. Screw the hex head screw [560] against the actuator of the microswitch [555] until
it trips (brown-blue contacts closed).
While screwing, install hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the
thread.
3. For BE2 – 5: Loosen hex head screw [560] by a 3/4 revolution towards the mi-
croswitch [555] (with BE2 by about 0.375 mm / with BE5 by about 0.6 mm).
For BE11 – 122: Loosen hex head screw [560] towards the microswitch [555] by a
whole revolution (about 0.8 mm).
4. Tighten hex nut [561], while doing so, hold hex head screw [560] to keep it in the
correct position.
5. If the brake lining reaches the wear limit, the microswitch automatically switches
back (contacts brown-blue open) and activates a relay or a signal.
7.8.5 Inspection/maintenance of the diagnostic unit /DUB for function and wear monitoring
If two diagnostic units /DUB are connected to one brake, both monitoring statuses can
be realized. In this case, set the diagnostic unit /DUB for wear monitoring before you
set the diagnostic unit /DUB for function monitoring.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE
7.9 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE

7.9.1 Disassembling the diagnostic unit /DUE
[378]
[379]
[1757]
[112]
[1727]
[1151]
[54]
14278188043
[54] Magnet body [1151] Sensor

[112] Terminal box lower part [1727] Grommet
[378] Screw plug [1757] Evaluation unit
[379] Cable gland
1. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed. See chapter "Motor and
brake maintenance – preliminary work (→ 2 103)".
2. First, remove the actuator elements [1191] from designs with manual brake re-
lease.
3. Remove the fan guard [35] or the forced cooling fan [170] by loosening the retain-
ing screws [22].
21927189/EN – 07/2015
4. If applicable: Remove the retaining ring [32] and the fan wheel [36] using a suitable
tool.
5. Loosen the screw [1154] for the cable fixture clamp [1153].
6. Loosen the union nut of the sensor screw fitting. The sensor cable is free.
7. Loosen the sensor [1151] on the mounting flange. Remove the sensor.

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE 7
7.9.2 Retrofitting diagnostic unit /DUE for function and wear monitoring
DANGER
• Disconnect the motor from the power supply and safeguard it against accidental
startup before starting work!
For the component designation of the evaluation unit, refer to chapter "Component
designation" (→ 2 80).
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Setting and installing the evaluation unit

The evaluation unit has a 5-pin DIP switch that is labeled with the numbers 1 to 5. Use
it to set the measuring range and the maximum permitted wear limit (maximum work-
ing air gap).
To activate the DIP switch ≙1, push the switch upwards. To deactivate the DIP switch
≙0, push the switch downwards.
The following table shows the DIP switch settings of the evaluation unit for the max-
imum working air gap.
1. Set the wear limit using the DIP switches.
INFORMATION
Set the DIP switch only in a de-energized state.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Wear limit BE1 – 2 BE5 BE 1 – 2 BE5 (FS)

(FS)
Sensor Ø 6 mm
0 0 0 0 0 1.2 mm
0 0 0 0 1 1.1 mm
0 0 0 1 0 1.0 mm
0 0 0 1 1 0.9 mm X
0 0 1 0 0 0.8 mm
0 0 1 0 1 0.7 mm X
0 0 1 1 0 0.6 mm X X
0 0 1 1 1 0.5 mm
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Wear limit BE11 – 122 BE11 – 30 (FS) BE32 (FS)

Sensor Ø 8 mm
1 0 0 0 0 1.2 mm X
1 0 0 0 1 1.1 mm
1 0 0 1 0 1.0 mm
1 0 0 1 1 0.9 mm
1 0 1 0 0 0.8 mm X
1 0 1 0 1 0.7 mm X
1 0 1 1 0 0.6 mm
1 0 1 1 1 0.5 mm
X= Factory setting
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Setting possible in addition

2. Screw the evaluation unit into the terminal box after consultation with
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
3. Connect the sensor. See chapter "Connecting the sensor (→ 2 153)".
4. Calibrate the infinite value. See chapter "Calibration of infinite value" (→ 2 155).
5. Install the sensor in the brake. See chapter "Installing the sensor (→ 2 156)".

6. Route the cable. See chapter "Cable routing" (→ 2 157).
7. Calibrate the zero value. See chapter "Calibration of zero value" (→ 2 157).
8. To check the function, measure the voltage via terminal 5k to 10k. Switch the brake
and check if 24 V are applied.
9. To check if the working air gap is within the permitted range, measure the current
between terminals 4k and 10k. Compare the value to the range in the diagram in
chapter "Output signals for function and wear monitoring (→ 2 154)".
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Connecting electronics
The function and wear monitoring is connected according to the following wiring dia-
gram. The maximum permitted cable cross section at the terminals "k" is 1.5 mm2 with
conductor end sleeve without plastic collar, 0.75 mm2 with conductor end sleeve. The
required cable cross section at the terminal "k" is 0.5 mm2 with conductor end sleeve
without plastic collar.
INFORMATION
Use shielded cables to wire the evaluation unit. Connect the shield at least at one
end to the GND.
A C
4k
(BN) 4s
(SR) 5k
5s
(WH)
6s 6k
B
7k
8k
9k
10k
11k
9007212783931659
[A] Brake [4k] Analog output wear 1 (air gap)

[B] Eddy current sensor [5k] Digital output function 1 (NO contact)
[C] Evaluation unit [6k] Digital output wear 1 (NC contact)
[7k] Input calibration zero value
[4s] Connection sensor A1 (brown [8k] Input calibration infinite value
cable)
[5s] Connection sensor GND 1 (shield) [9k] Signal ground AGND
[6s] Connection sensor B1 (white cable) [10k] Ground potential GND
[11k] 24 V DC supply
21927189/EN – 07/2015
The evaluation unit is supplied with DC 24 V via the terminals GND [10k] and DC24V
[11k].
Brake monitoring provides digital signals for:
• Function FCT1 [5k] and wear WEAR1 [6k] of the brake.

The working air gap can be monitored continuously via the analog signal (4 – 20 mA)
regarding the signal ground [9k]:
• Terminal OUIT1 [4k]
Use terminals ZERO [7k] and INF [8k] for calibration.
INFORMATION
If values deviate from the factory setting, the wear point setting must be adjusted.
See chapter "Setting and installing the evaluation unit" (→ 2 150).
Connecting the sensor

[1]
BN WH
4s 5s6s 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 11k
DC 24V
WEAR1
AGND
ZERO
OUT1
FCT1
GND1
GND
A1
B1
INF
1
OFF
DUE-1K-00 21195609
14975059851
[1] Brake sensor
The connection cross section of the sensor is 0.14 mm². The litz wires of the sensor
cables must be equipped with conductor end sleeves. The cable shield must be isol-
ated against other potentials using a heat shrink tubing. The litz wires can be pushed
into the terminals without using tools. Put the sensor cables in the provided line clip,
see figure in chapter "Calibration of infinite value" (→ 2 155). To remove the sensor
cables, use an insulated screwdriver to disengage the clips.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Output signals for function and wear monitoring

The diagnostic unit /DUE provides an analog signal (4 – 20 mA, DIN IEC 60381‑1) for
the current working air gap of the brake.
D6 D8
IOut [mA] IOut [mA]
20 20
13,6 13,6
10 10
[5] [4] [3] [5] [4] [3]

4 4
x [mm] x [mm]
0 x 0,9 1,5 0 x 1,2 2,0
U [V] U [V]
[1] [1]
24 24
FCT FCT
0 0
U [V] U [V]
[2] [2]
24 24
WEAR WEAR
0 0
14668091147 15221727499
[1] FCT: Digital output function (DC 24 V, DIN EN 61131-2)

[2] WEAR: Digital output wear (DC 24 V, DIN EN 61131-2)
[3] Measuring range of the sensor
[4] Max. working air gap of the brake (exemplary)
[5] Currently measured working air gap (exemplary)
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Calibration of infinite value
Before you can install the sensor in the brake, the electronics must be calibrated to the
actual cable length. During calibration of the infinite value, electronics is adjusted to
the sensor cable length. Electronics is reset and previous settings are overwritten.
The sensor must be removed from the brake for the following steps.
Procedure to calibrate the infinite value for the sensor:
1. Make sure that no metallic objects are within a 10 cm radius from the sensor head.
The mounting springs may be in contact with the back of the sensor head during
calibration.
2. Apply supply voltage to INF (8k) and AGND (9k) for 5 seconds. GND can be used
as reference potential instead of AGND. The evaluation unit is supplied via the cal-
ibration input during calibration.
Calibration of the infinite value was successful if the red LED flashes every second.
The corresponding wiring diagram for the calibration process.
+24 V GND
4s 5s6s 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 11k
DC 24V
WEAR1
AGND
ZERO
OUT1
FCT1
GND1
GND
A1
B1
INF
1
OFF
DUE-1K-00 21195609
14975067787
During calibration, the digital outputs WEAR1, FCT1 send a 0 signal which may lead
to error messages (wear limit reached).
The analog output OUT1 signals 0 mA during the calibration procedure. After success-
ful calibration, the output has 20 mA.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Installing the sensor

After calibration, the eddy current sensor can be installed in the magnet body of the
brake. When installing the sensor, make sure that the sensor head can be inserted in
the stepped bore without pressure being applied.
First install the lower part of the cable gland. Then mount the upper part of the cable
gland.
INFORMATION
To ensure that the sensor is correctly inserted in the stepped bore, twist the sensor
carefully with the cable before screwing in the cable gland. Protect the sensor cable
against damage.
[1]
15126940043
[1] Brake sensor
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Cable routing
Prevent the cable from colliding with the fan cable. If necessary, attach the cable to
the brake using a clip or similar.
Calibration zero value

During calibration of the zero value, the current working air gap with released (open)
brake is written in the evaluation unit. The electronics is reset and previous settings
are overwritten. You can save the zero value at any time without changing the infinite
value.
Procedure during calibration of the zero value:
1. Open the brake.
2. Apply the supply voltage to ZERO (7k) and AGND (9k) for approx. 3 seconds. Elec-
tronics is in calibration mode. You can use GND as reference potential instead of
AGND. The evaluation unit is supplied via the calibration input during calibration.
The evaluation unit saves the smallest working air gap of the brake. Each write pro-
cess is indicated by a brief flashing of the red LED.
The activated calibration mode is indicated by the following LED state:
LED State
Green [6] Off
Red [6] Flashing (2 Hz)
+24 V GND
4s 5s6s 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 11k

DC 24V
WEAR1
AGND
ZERO
OUT1
FCT1
GND1
GND
A1
B1
INF
1
OFF
DUE-1K-00 21195609
14977696651
During calibration, the digital outputs WEAR1, FCT1 send a 0 signal which may lead
to error messages (wear limit reached).
The analog output OUT1 signals 0 mA during the calibration procedure. After success-
ful calibration, the value is saved. The output has 4 mA with released brake. If a smal-
21927189/EN – 07/2015
ler value is available within 3 seconds, the last value is deleted and the new value is
saved. The 4 mA at the output remain unchanged.

Status messages of the evaluation unit

Brake Sensor Calibration LEDs and outputs
State
ZERO INF Green Red Green Red FCT WEAR OUT
Open Installed – – To Off To Off HI HI 3.6 – Brake open, no wear
5.6 mA
Closed Installed – – Off Off Off Off LO HI 6 – 20 mA Brake closed, no wear
Closed Installed – – Off To Off To LO LO 6 – 20 mA Brake closed, set wear limit
of brake reached
– – – – Off To Off To LO LO >20 mA Measuring range exceeded
or sensor not connected cor-
rectly
– Not in- – HI Off Blinking Off Blinking LO LO 0 mA Calibration of infinite value
stalled 1 Hz 1 Hz active
– Not in- – HI Off Flash- Off Flash- LO LO 20 mA Infinite calibration successful
stalled ing ing
1 Hz 1 Hz
– – – – Blinking Blinking Blinking Blinking Clock Clock 0 mA Not completely calibrated:
1 Hz 1 Hz 1 Hz 1 Hz 1 Hz 1 Hz • ZERO calibration missing
• Delivery state (both calib-
rations missing)
Open Installed HI – Off Blinking Off Blinking LO LO 0 mA Calibration of zero value act-
2 Hz 2 Hz ive
Open Installed HI – Off Blinking Off Blinking LO LO 4 mA First zero value successful
2 Hz 2 Hz
Open Installed HI – Off Flicker- Off Flicker- LO LO 4 mA Smaller zero value detected
ing ing and saved
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Work done, working air gap, braking torques 8
8 Technical data
8.1 Work done, working air gap, braking torques
If you use encoders and brakes with functional safety technology, the values for the
maximum working air gaps and the work done until maintenance are reduced. For the
new values, refer to the addendum to the operating instructions "Safety-Rated En-
coders/Safety-rated Brakes – DR..71 – 315, DRN80 315 AC Motors – Functional
Safety".
Brake Braking Working air Brake Part number Braking torque settings
Type work done gap disk damping
until main- min.1) Max. Min. plate/pole Braking Type and number of Purchase order number
tenance sheet torque Brake springs of
Brake springs
106 J mm mm Nm Normal blue white Normal Blue/white
BE05 120 0.25 0.6 9.0 13740563 5.0 3 – – 0135017X 13741373
3.5 – 6 –
2.5 – 4 –
1.8 – 3 –
BE1 120 0.25 0.6 9.0 13740563 10 6 – – 0135017X 13741373
7.0 4 2 –
5.0 3 – –
BE2 180 0.25 0.6 9.0 13740199 20 6 – – 13740245 13740520
14 2 4 –
10 2 2 –
7.0 – 4 –
5.0 – 3 –
BE5 390 0.25 0.9 9.0 13740695 55 6 – – 13740709 13740717
40 2 4 –
28 2 2 –
20 – – 6 13747738
14 – – 4
BE11 640 0.3 1.2 10.0 13741713 110 6 – – 13741837 13741845
80 2 4 –
55 2 2 –
40 – 4 –
13741713 + 28 – 3 –
13746995 20 – – 4 13741837 13747789
BE20 1000 0.3 1.2 10.0 – 200 6 – – 13743228 13742485
– 150 4 2 –
– 110 3 3 –
– 80 3 – –
13746758 55 – 4 –
40 – 3 –
BE30 1500 0.3 1.2 10.0 – 300 8 – – 01874551 13744356
– 200 4 4 –
– 150 4 – –
– 100 – 8 –
21927189/EN – 07/2015
– 75 – 6 –
BE32 1500 0.4 1.2 10.0 – 600 8 – – 01874551 13744356
– 500 6 2 –
– 400 4 4 –
– 300 4 – –
– 200 – 8 –
– 150 – 6 –
13746731 100 – 4 –

8 Technical data
Work done, working air gap, braking torques
Brake Braking Working air Brake Part number Braking torque settings
Type work done gap disk damping
until main- min.1) Max. Min. plate/pole Braking Type and number of Purchase order number
tenance sheet torque Brake springs of
Brake springs
106 J mm mm Nm Normal blue white Normal Blue/white
BE60 2500 0.3 1.2 10.0 – 600 8 – – 01868381 13745204
– 500 6 2 –
– 400 4 4 –
– 300 4 – –
– 200 – 8 –
BE62 2500 0.4 1.2 10.0 – 1200 8 – – 01868381 13745204
– 1000 6 2 –
– 800 4 4 –
– 600 4 – –
– 400 – 8 –
BE120 390 0.6 1.2 12.0 – 1000 8 – – 13608770 13608312
– 800 6 2 –
– 600 4 4 –
– 400 4 – –
BE122 300 0.8 1.2 12.0 – 2000 8 – – 13608770 13608312
– 1600 6 2 –
– 1200 4 4 –
– 800 4 – –
1) When checking the working air gap, note: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rise to deviations of ± 0.15 mm after a
test run.
The following table shows the brake spring layout:

BE05 – 11:
6 springs 3 + 3 springs 4 + 2 springs 2 + 2 springs 4 springs 3 springs
BE20:
6 springs 4 + 2 springs 3 + 3 springs 4 springs 3 springs
BE30 – 122:
8 springs 6 + 2 springs 4 + 4 springs 6 springs 4 springs
INFORMATION
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Due to the selected pivoted mounting position/pivoting angle, the values for braking
work are reduced by 50% compared to the values specified here.

Technical data
Braking torque assignment 8
8.2 Braking torque assignment
8.2.1 Motor sizes DR..71 – 100, DRN80 – 100
Motor type Brake Braking torque gradation in Nm
type
DR..71 BE05 1.8 2.5 3.5 5.0
BE1 5.0 7.0 10
DR..80 BE05 1.8 2.5 3.5 5.0
DRN80 BE1 5.0 7.0 10
BE2 7.0 10 14 20
DR..90 BE05 1.8 2.5 3.5 5.0
DRN90 BE1 5.0 7.0 10
BE2 5.0 7.0 10 14 20
BE5 14 20 28 40 55
DR..100 BE1 5.0 7.0 10
DRN100 BE2 5.0 7.0 10 14 20
BE5 14 20 28 40 55
8.2.2 Motor sizes DR..112 – 225, DRN112 – 225

Motor type Brake Braking torque gradation in Nm
type
DR..112 BE5 14 20 28 40 55
DRN112 BE11 20 28 40 55 80 110
DR..132
DRN132S
DR..160 BE11 20 28 40 55 80 110
DRN132M/L BE20 40 55 80 110 150 200
DR..180 BE20 40 55 80 110 150 200
DRN160 – BE30 75 100 150 200 300
180
BE32 100 150 200 300 400 500 600
DR..200/225 BE30 75 100 150 200 300
DRN200 – BE32 100 150 200 300 400 500 600
225
BE60 200 300 400 500 600
BE62 400 600 800 1000 1200
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Braking torque assignment
8.2.3 Motor size DR..250/280, DRN250/280

Motor type Brake type Braking torque gradation in Nm
DR..250/280 BE60 200 300 400 500 600
DRN250 – BE62 400 600 800 1000 1200
280
BE120 400 600 800 1000
BE122 800 1200 1600 2000
8.2.4 Motor sizes DR..315, DRN315

Motor type Brake type Braking torque gradation in Nm
DR..315 BE120 400 600 800 1000
DRN315 BE122 800 1200 1600 2000
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Operating currents 8
8.3 Operating currents
8.3.1 Brake BE05, BE1, BE2
The current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are r.m.s. values. Use only
appropriate instruments for measuring r.m.s. values. The inrush current (acceleration
current) IB only flows for a short time (ca. 160 ms) when the brake is released. There is
no increased inrush current if a BG or BMS brake rectifier is used or if there is a direct
DC voltage supply (only possible with brakes up to size BE2).
BE05, BE1 BE2

Maximum braking torque in 5/10 20
Nm
Braking power in W 32 43
Inrush current ratio IB/IH 4 4
Nominal voltage VN BE05, BE1 BE2

IH IG IH IG
VAC VDC AAC ADC AAC ADC
24 (23-26) 10 2.25 2.90 2.95 3.80
60 (57-63) 24 0.90 1.17 1.18 1.53
120 (111-123) 48 0.45 0.59 0.59 0.77
147 (139-154) 60 0.36 0.47 0.48 0.61
184 (174-193) 80 0.29 0.37 0.38 0.49
208 (194-217) 90 0.26 0.33 0.34 0.43
230 (218-243) 96 0.23 0.30 0.30 0.39
254 (244-273) 110 0.20 0.27 0.27 0.35
290 (274-306) 125 0.18 0.24 0.24 0.31
330 (307-343) 140 0.16 0.21 0.21 0.28
360 (344-379) 160 0.14 0.19 0.19 0.25
400 (380-431) 180 0.13 0.17 0.17 0.22
460 (432-484) 200 0.11 0.15 0.15 0.19
500 (485-542) 220 0.10 0.13 0.14 0.18
575 (543-600) 250 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.16
IB Acceleration current – brief inrush current

IH Holding current r.m.s. value in the supply cable to the SEW brake rectifier
IG Direct current with direct DC voltage supply
VN Nominal voltage (nominal voltage range)
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Operating currents
8.3.2 Brakes BE5, BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62

current) IB only flows for a short time (ca. 160 ms) when the brake is released. A sep-
arate voltage supply is not possible.
BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE60,

BE32 BE62
Maximum braking 55 110 200 300/600 600/1200
torque in Nm
Braking power in W 49 77 100 130 195
Inrush current ratio IB/IH 5.7 6.6 7 10 9.2
Nominal voltage VN BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE60,

BE32 BE62
IH IH IH IH IH
VDC AAC AAC AAC AAC AAC
60 (57-63) 1.28 2.05 2.55 – –
120 (111-123) 0.64 1.04 1.28 1.66 –
147 (139-154) 0.51 0.83 1.02 1.33 –
184 (174-193) 0.41 0.66 0.81 1.05 –
208 (194-217) 0.37 0.59 0.72 0.94 1.50
230 (218-243) 0.33 0.52 0.65 0.84 1.35
254 (244-273) 0.29 0.47 0.58 0.75 1.20
290 (274-306) 0.26 0.42 0.51 0.67 1.12
330 (307-343) 0.23 0.37 0.46 0.59 0.97
360 (344-379) 0.21 0.33 0.41 0.53 0.86
400 (380-431) 0.18 0.30 0.37 0.47 0.77
460 (432-484) 0.16 0.27 0.33 0.42 0.68
500 (485-542) 0.15 0.24 0.29 0.38 0.60
575 (543-600) 0.13 0.22 0.26 0.34 0.54

21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Operating currents 8
8.3.3 Brake BE120, BE122
current) IB only flows for a short time (ca. 400 ms) when the brake is released. A sep-
arate voltage supply is not possible.
BE120 BE122
Maximum braking torque in 1000 2000
Nm
Inrush current ratio IB/IH 4.9 4.9
Nominal voltage VN BE120 BE122

IH IH
VAC AAC AAC
230 (218-243) 1.80 1.80
254 (244-273) 1.60 1.60
290 (274-306) 1.43 1.43
360 (344-379) 1.14 1.14
400 (380-431) 1.02 1.02
460 (432-484) 0.91 0.91
500 (485-542) 0.81 0.81
575 (543-600) 0.72 0.72

21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Resistors
8.4 Resistors
8.4.1 Brake BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5
BE05, BE1 BE2

Maximum braking torque in Nm 5/10 20
Inrush current ratio IB/IH 4 4
Nominal voltage VN BE05, BE1 BE2

VAC VDC RB RT RB RT
24 (23-26) 10 0.77 2.35 0.57 1.74
60 (57-63) 24 4.85 14.8 3.60 11.0
120 (111-123) 48 19.4 59.0 14.4 44.0
147 (139-159) 60 30.5 94.0 23.0 69.0
184 (174-193) 80 48.5 148 36.0 110
208 (194-217) 90 61.0 187 45.5 139
230 (218-243) 96 77.0 235 58.0 174
254 (244-273) 110 97.0 296 72.0 220
290 (274-306) 125 122 372 91 275
330 (307-343) 140 154 469 115 350
360 (344-379) 160 194 590 144 440
400 (380-431) 180 244 743 182 550
460 (432-484) 200 308 935 230 690
500 (485-542) 220 387 1178 290 870
575 (543-600) 250 488 1483 365 1100
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Resistors 8
8.4.2 Brakes BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62
BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62

Maximum brak- 55 110 200 300/600 600/1200
ing torque in
Nm
Braking power 49 77 100 130 195
in W
Inrush current 5.7 6.6 7.5 8.5 9.2
ratio IB/IH
Nominal BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60,

voltage VN BE62
VAC RB RT RB RT RB RT RB RT RB RT
60 (57-63) 2.20 10.5 1.22 7.0 0.9 5.7 – – – –
120 (111-123) 8.70 42.0 4.90 28.0 3.4 22.8 2.3 17.2 – –
147 (139-159) 13.8 66 7.7 44.0 5.4 36.1 3.7 27.3 – –
184 (174-193) 22.0 105 12.3 70 8.5 57.2 5.8 43.2 – –
208 (194-217) 27.5 132 15.5 88 10.7 72.0 7.3 54.4 4.0 32.6
230 (218-243) 34.5 166 19.5 111 13.5 90.6 9.2 68.5 5.0 41.0
254 (244-273) 43.5 210 24.5 139 17.0 114.1 11.6 86.2 6.3 51.6
290 (274-306) 55.0 265 31.0 175 21.4 143.6 14.6 108.6 7.9 65.0
330 (307-343) 69.0 330 39.0 220 26.9 180.8 18.4 136.7 10.0 81.8
360 (344-379) 87.0 420 49 280 33.2 223 23.1 172.1 12.6 103
400 (380-431) 110 530 62 350 42.7 287 29.1 216.6 15.8 130
460 (432-484) 138 660 78 440 53.2 357 35.1 261.8 19.9 163
500 (485-542) 174 830 98 550 67.7 454 45.2 336.4 25.1 205
575 (543-600) 220 1050 123 700 83.5 559 56.3 419.2 31.6 259
8.4.3 Resistance measurement BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62
Cut-off in the AC circuit

The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cut-off in the AC cir-
cuit.
RD
RB
WH
21927189/EN – 07/2015
RT
BU
BU
RD
WH
9007199497350795

8 Technical data
Resistors
Cut-off in the DC and AC circuits

The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cut-off in the DC and
AC circuits.
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
BU
RD
WH
18014398752093451
BS Accelerator coil RD Red

TS Coil section WH white
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 °C in Ω BU blue
RT Coil section resistance at 20 °C in Ω
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section RT or the accelerator coil RB, re-
move the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected, the internal
resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Resistors 8
8.4.4 Brake BE120, BE122
BE120, BE122
Maximum braking torque in Nm 1000/2000
Braking power in W 250
Inrush current ratio IB/IH 4.9
Nominal voltage VN BE120, BE122

VAC RB RT
230 (218-243) 8.0 29.9
254 (244-273) 10.1 37.6
290 (274-306) 12.7 47.4
360 (344-379) 20.1 75.1
400 (380-431) 25.3 94.6
460 (432-484) 31.8 119.0
500 (485-542) 40.1 149.9
575 (543-600) 50.5 188.7
8.4.5 Resistance measurement BE120, BE122

The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with BMP 3.1.
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
RD WH BU
BS Accelerator coil RD Red

TS Coil section WH white
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 °C in Ω BU blue
RT Coil section resistance at 20 °C in Ω
21927189/EN – 07/2015
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section RT or the accelerator coil RB, re-
move the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected, the internal
resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.

8 Technical data
Brake control system
8.5 Brake control system

8.5.1 Permitted combinations
The table below shows the standard and optional combinations of brakes and brake
rectifiers.
BE05 BE1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE60, BE120,

BE32 BE62 BE122
BG BG 1.4 X3 X3 X3 − − − − − −
1 1 1
BG 1.5 X X X • − − − − −
BG 3 X2 X2 X2 − − − − − −
3 3 3 3 3
BGE BGE 1.4 o o o X X X X X −
BGE 1.5 • • • X1 X1 X1 X1 X −
2 2 2 2
BGE 3 • • • X X X X X −
BS BS 24 X X X • − − − − −
BMS BMS 1.4 o o o − − − − − −
BMS 1.5 • • • − − − − − −
BMS 3 • • • − − − − − −
BME BME 1.4 o o o o o o o o −
BME 1.5 • • • • • • • X −
BME 3 • • • • • • • X −
BMH BMH 1.4 o o o o o o o – −
BMH 1.5 • • • • • • • − −
BMH 3 • • • • • • • − −
BMK BMK 1.4 o o o o o o o o −
BMK 1.5 • • • • • • • − −
BMK 3 • • • • • • • − −
BMKB BMKB 1.5 • • • • • • • − −
BMP BMP 1.4 o o o o o o o o −
BMP 1.5 • • • • • • • − −
BMP 3 • • • • • • • − −
BMP 3.1 − − − − − − − − X
BMV BMV 5 • • • • • • − − −
BSG BSG • • • X X X − − −
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Brake control system 8
BE05 BE1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE60, BE120,
BE32 BE62 BE122
BSR BGE 1.4 + o o o o o o o o −
SR 15
BGE 3 + • • • • • − − − −
SR 11
BGE 3 + • • • • • • • − −
SR 15
BGE 1.5 + • • • • • − − − −
SR 11
BGE 1.5 + • • • • • • • − −
SR 15
BUR BGE 3 + • • • • − − − − −
UR 11
BGE 1.5 + • • • • • • • − −
UR 15
X Standard version
X1 Standard design with nominal brake voltage of 150 - 500 VAC
X2 Standard design with nominal brake voltage of 24/42 - 150 VAC
X3 Standard design with nominal brake voltage of 575 VAC
• Can be selected
o Can be selected with 575 VAC nominal brake voltage
– Not permitted
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Brake control system
8.5.2 Wiring space of the motor

The following table lists the technical data of brake control systems for installation in
the motor wiring space and the assignments with regard to motor size and connection
technology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make them
easier to distinguish.
Type Function Voltage Holding Type Part num- Color

current ber code
IHmax in A
BG One-way rectifier AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BG 1.5 8253846 Black
AC 24 – 500 V 3.0 BG 3 8253862 Brown
BGE One-way rectifier with AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BGE 1.5 8253854 Red
electronic switching
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BGE 3 8253870 Blue
BSR Half-wave rectifier + cur- AC 150 – 500 V 1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR 11 8253854
rent relay for switch-off in 8267618
the DC circuit
1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR 15 8253854
8267626
AC 42 – 150 V 1.0 BGE 3 + SR11 8253870
8267618
1.0 BGE 3 + SR15 8253870
8267626
BUR Half-wave rectifier + AC 150 – 500 V 1.0 BGE 1.5 + UR 15 8253854
voltage relay for switch- 8267596
off in the DC circuit
AC 42 – 150 V 1.0 BGE 3 + UR 11 8253870
8267588
BS Varistor protection circuit DC 24 V 5.0 BS24 8267634 Water
blue
BSG Electronic switching DC 24 V 5.0 BSG 8254591 White
1)
BMP Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 2.8 BMP 3.1 8295077
electronic switching, in-
tegrated voltage relay for
switch-off in the DC cir-
cuit
1) Only sizes 280M, 315
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Brake control system 8
8.5.3 Control cabinet
The following table lists the technical data of brake control systems for installation in
the control cabinet and the assignments with regard to motor size and connection
technology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make them
easier to distinguish.
Type Function Voltage Holding Type Part num- Color

current ber code
IHmax in A
BMS One-way rectifier as BG AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMS 1.4 8298300 Black
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMS 1.5 8258023 Black
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMS 3 8258031 Brown
BME One-way rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BME 1.4 8298319 Red
electronic switching as
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BME 1.5 8257221 Red
BGE
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BME 3 825723X Blue
BMH One-way rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMH 1.4 8298343 Green
electronic switching and
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMH 1.5 825818X Green
heating function
AC 42 – 150 V 3 BMH 3 8258198 Yellow
BMP One-way rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMP 1.4 8298327 White
electronic switching, in-
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMP 1.5 8256853 White
tegrated voltage relay for
switch-off in the DC circuit AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMP 3 8265666 Light
blue
AC 230 – 575 V 2.8 BMP 3.11) 8295077
BMK One-way rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMK 1.4 8298335 Water
electronic switch mode, blue
DC 24 V control input and
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMK 1.5 8264635 Water
separation in the DC cir-
blue
cuit
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMK 3 8265674 Bright
red
BMV Brake control unit with DC 24 V 5.0 BMV 5 13000063 White
electronic switching,
DC 24 V control input and
fast switch-off
1) Only sizes 280M, 315
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Permitted rolling bearing types
8.6 Permitted rolling bearing types

8.6.1 Rolling bearing types for motor sizes DR..71 – 315
Motor type A-side bearing B-side bearing

IEC motor Gearmotor AC motor Brakemotor
DR..71 6204-2Z-J-C3 6303-2Z-J-C3 6203-2Z-J-C3 6203-2RS-J-C3
DR..80, 6205-2Z-J-C3 6304-2Z-J-C3 6304-2Z-J-C3 6304-2RS-J-C3
DR..90 – 100 6306-2Z-J-C3 6205-2Z-J-C3 6205-2RS-J-C3
DR..112 – 132 6308-2Z-J-C3 6207-2Z-J-C3 6207-2RS-J-C3
DR..160 6309-2Z-J-C3 6209-2Z-J-C3 6209-2RS-J-C3
DR..180, DRN180 6312-2Z-J-C3 6213-2Z-J-C3 6213-2RS-J-C3
DR..200 – 225 6314-2Z-J-C3 6314-2Z-J-C3 6314-2RS-J-C3
DR..250 – 280 6317-2Z-J-C4 6315-2Z-J-C3 6315-2RS-J-C3
8.6.2 Rolling bearing types for motor sizes DRN80 – 315

IEC motor Gearmotor AC motor Brakemotor
DRN80 6205-2Z-J-C3 6304-2Z-J-C3 6304-2Z-J-C3 6304-2RS-J-C3
E2.6205-2Z-C3-K24 E2.6304-2Z-C3-K24
DRN90 6305-2Z-J-C3 6205-2Z-J-C3 6205-2RS-J-C3
DRN100 6306-2Z-J-C3 6205-2Z-J-C3 6205-2RS-J-C3
DRN112 6308-2Z-J-C3 6207-2Z-J-C3 6207-2RS-J-C3
DRN132S 6308-2Z-J-C3 6308-2Z-J-C3 6207-2Z-J-C3 6207-2RS-J-C3
E2.6308-2Z-C3-K24 E2.6207-2Z-C3-K24
DRN132M/L 6308-2Z-J-C3 6309-2Z-J-C3 6209-2Z-J-C3 6209-2RS-J-C3
DRN225 6314-2Z-J-C3 6314-2Z-J-C3 6314-2RS-J-C3
DRN250 – 280 6317-2Z-J-C4 6315-2Z-J-C3
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Permitted rolling bearing types 8
8.6.3 Rolling bearing types for motor sizes DR..315, DRN315

IEC motor Gearmotor IEC motor Gearmotor
DR..315K, 6319-J-C3 6319-J-C3 6319-J-C3 6319-J-C3
DRN315S
DR..315S,
DRN315M
DR..315M, 6319-J-C3 6322-J-C3 6319-J-C3 6322-J-C3
DRN315L
DR..315L,
DRN315H
8.6.4 Motors with /ERF reinforced bearings for motor sizes DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315

IEC motor Gearmotor
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 NU317E-C3 6315-J-C3
DR..315K, DRN315S NU319E 6319-J-C3 6319-J-C3
DR..315S, DRN315M
DR..315M, DRN315L 6322-J-C3
DR..315L, DRN315H
8.6.5 /NIB current-insulated rolling bearings for motor sizes DR..200 – 315, DRN200 – 315
Motor type B-side bearing

AC motor Gearmotor
DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 6314-J-C3-EI 6314-J-C3-EI
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 6315-Z-J-C3-EI 6315-Z-J-C3-EI
DR..315K, DRN315S 6319-J-C3-EI 6319-J-C3-EI
DR..315S, DRN315M
DR..315M, DRN315L 6322-J-C3-EI
DR..315L, DRN315H
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Lubricant tables
8.7 Lubricant tables

8.7.1 Lubricant table for rolling bearings
INFORMATION
Using the wrong bearing greases could cause bearing damage.
Motors with sealed bearings

The bearings are 2Z or 2RS closed bearings and cannot be re-lubricated. They are
used for the sizes DR..71 – 280, DRN80 – 280.
Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type DIN designation

Motor rolling bear- -20 °C – +80 °C Esso Polyrex EM1) K2P-20
ings 2)
+20 °C – +100 °C Klüber Barrierta L55/2 KX2U
-40 °C – +60 °C Kyodo Yushi Multemp SRL2) K2N-40
1) Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)
2) Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based roller bearing grease)
Motors with open bearings

Motors of the size DR..250/280, 315, DRN250/280, 315 have open bearings and can
be equipped with a relubrication device.
Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type DIN designation

1)
Motor rolling bear- -20 °C – +80 °C Esso Polyrex EM K2P-20
ings
-40 °C – +60 °C SKF GXN1) K2N-40
1) Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)
8.8 Order information for lubricants and anti-corrosion agents

Lubricants and anti-corrosion agents can be ordered directly from SEW‑EURODRIVE
using the following order numbers.
Use Manufacturer Type Quantity Purchase or-

der number
Lubricant for rolling bear- Esso Polyrex EM 400 g 03259420
ings
SKF GXN 400 g 09101276
Lubricant for sealing rings
Material: NBR/FKM Klüber Petamo GHY 133N 10 g 04963458
Material: EPDM Klüber Klübersynth BLR 46-122 10 g 03252663
21927189/EN – 07/2015
®
Corrosion protection and SEW‑EURODRIVE NOCO fluid 5.5 g 09107819
lubricant

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.9 Encoders
8.9.1 ES7. and EG7.
Encoder type ES7S EG7S ES7R EG7R ES7C EG7C
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280 DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280 DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – DRN80 – 132S DRN132M –
280 280 280
Supply voltage UB DC 7 V – 30 V DC 7 – 30 V DC 4.75 – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS 160 mARMS 250 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency fmax 150 kHz 120 kHz 120 kHz
Periods per revolution A, B 1024 1024 1024
C 1 1 1
Output amplitude per track Uhigh 1 VSS ≥ DC 2.5 V ≥ DC 2.5 V
Ulow ≤ DC 0.5 V ≤ DC 1.1 V
Signal output Sin/Cos TTL HTL
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS 25 mARMS 60 mARMS
Pulse duty factor Sin/Cos 1: 1 ± 10% 1: 1 ± 10%
Phase angle A : B 90° ± 3° 90° ± 20° 90° ± 20°
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s² ≤ 100 m/s² ≤ 200 m/s² ≤ 100 m/s²
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s² ≤ 2000 m/s² ≤ 1000 m/s² ≤ 2000 m/s² ≤ 1000 m/s² ≤ 2000 m/s²
Maximum speed nmax 6000 rpm 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Degree of protection IP66 IP66 IP66
Connection Terminal box on incremental encoder
8.9.2 EH7.
Encoder type EH7R EH7T EH7C EH7S
For motors DR..315
DRN315
Supply voltage UB DC 10 V – 30 V DC 5 V DC 10 V - 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mA 225 mA 140 mA
Max. pulse frequency fmax kHz 300 180
Periods per revolution A, B 1024
C 1
Output amplitude Uhigh ≥ 2.5 V VB -3 V 1 Vss
Ulow ≤ 0.5 V ≤ 2.5 V
Signal output TTL (RS-422) HTL Sin/Cos
Output current per track Iout 20 mA 30 mA 10 mA
Pulse duty factor 1: 1 ± 20% 90° ± 10°
Phase angle A : B 90° ± 20° -
Vibration resistance at 10 Hz ≤ 100 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-6)
– 2 kHz
Shock resistance ≤ 2000 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-27)
Maximum speed nmax rpm 6000, 2500 at 60°C
Degree of protection IP65 (EN 60529)
Connection 12-pin plug connector
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Encoders
8.9.3 AS7Y and AG7Y

Encoder type AS7Y AG7Y
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – 280
Supply voltage UB DC 7 – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 150 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency fmax 200 kHz
C -
Output amplitude per track Uhigh 1 VSS
Ulow
Signal output Sin/Cos
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS
Pulse duty factor Sin/Cos
Phase angle A : B 90° ± 3°
Scanning code Gray Code
Single-turn resolution 4096 increments/revolution
Multi-turn resolution 4096 revolutions
Data transmission synchronous-serial
Serial data output Driver to EIA RS-422
Serial pulse input Recommended receiver to EIA RS-422
Clock frequency Permitted range: 100 – 2000 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
Clock-pulse space period 12 – 30 µs
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s²
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s² ≤ 2000 m/s²
Maximum speed nmax 6000 rpm
Degree of protection IP66
Connection Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.9.4 AS7W and AG7W
Encoder type AS7W AG7W
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – 280
Supply voltage UB DC 7 – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS
C –
Output amplitude per track Uhigh 1 VSS
Ulow
Signal output Sin/Cos
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS
Pulse duty factor Sin/Cos
Scanning code Binary code
Data transmission RS485
Serial pulse input Recommended driver to EIA RS-422
Clock frequency 9600 Bd
Clock-pulse space period – –
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s² ≤ 200 m/s²
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s² ≤ 2000 m/s²
Connection Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
21927189/EN – 07/2015

8 Technical data
Encoders
8.9.5 AH7Y
Encoder type AH7Y
For motors DR..315
DRN315
Supply voltage UB DC 9 V – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 160 mA
C –
Output amplitude Uhigh ≥ 2.5 VSS
Ulow ≤ 0.5 VSS
Max. pulse frequency 120 kHz
Signal output TTL (RS-422)
Output current per track Iout 20 mA
Pulse duty factor 1: 1 ± 20%
Absolute encoder scanning code Gray Code
Data transmission of absolute value Synchronous, serial (SSI)
Serial pulse input Optocoupler, recommended driver to EIA RS-485
Clock frequency Permitted range: 100 – 800 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
Clock-pulse space period 12 ms – 30 ms
Vibration resistance at 10 Hz – 2 kHz ≤ 100 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-6)
Shock resistance ≤ 2000 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-27)
Maximum speed nmax nmax 3500 rpm
Degree of protection IP56 (EN 60529)
Connection Terminal strip on encoder
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.9.6 EI7. B
Encoder type EI7C EI76 EI72 EI71
For motors DR..71 – 132
DRN80 – 132S
Supply voltage VB DC 9 – 30 V
Max. current consumption (with Imax 120 mARMS
no load)
Max. pulse frequency at nmax fmax 1.44 kHz
Periods per revolution A, B 24 6 2 1
(signal tracks) C –
Output amplitude per track Vhigh ≥ VB -3.5 V
Vlow ≤ 3 V
Signal output HTL
Maximum output current per track Iout_max 60 mARMS
Pulse duty factor 30 – 70% (typically: 50%)
(DIN IEC 60469-1)
t = tlog_1/(tperiod)
n = constant
Phase offset A: B 70°– 110° (typically: 90°)
φphase, A:B
n = constant
Vibration resistance 10 g (98.1 m/s2); 5 – 2000 Hz (EN 60068-2-6:2008)
Shock resistance 100 g (981 m/s2); 6 ms (EN 60068-2-27:2009)
Permitted magnetic interference Bextmax 25mT
field on the outer contour of the Hextmax 20kA/m
motor
Maximum speed nmax 3600 min-1
Connection Terminal strip in the terminal box or M12 (4- or 8-pin)
8.9.7 EV2.
Encoder type EV2T EV2S EV2R EV2C
For motors DR..71 – DR..225
DRN80 – 225
Supply voltage UB DC 5 V DC 9 V – 26 V
Max. current consumption Iin 160 mARMS 120 mARMS 160 mARMS 250 mARMS
C 1
Output amplitude per track Uhigh ≥ 2.5 V 1 VSS ≥ 2.5 V ≥ VB - 3.5 V
Ulow ≤ 0.5 V ≤ 0.5 V ≤ 3 V
Signal output TTL Sin/Cos TTL HTL
Output current per track Iout 25 mARMS 10 mARMS 25 mARMS 60 mARMS
Pulse duty factor 1: 1 ± 20% Sin/Cos 1: 1 ± 20%
Phase angle A : B 90° ± 20° 90° 90° ± 20°
Data memory –
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s²
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s² ≤ 3000 m/s² ≤ 1000 m/s²
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Weight m 0.36 kg
Connection Terminal box on incremental encoder

8 Technical data
Diagnostic unit /DUE
8.10 Diagnostic unit /DUE

Sensors Ø 6 mm Ø 8 mm
DUE-d6-00 DUE-d8-00
Measuring range (MB) mm 1.5 2.0
Protection class IP66 IP66
Operating temperature -50 to +150 °C -50 to +150 °C
(sensor and cable)
Evaluation unit DUE-1 K-00

Part number 21195609
Signal outputs (1 channel) Out1: 4 – 20 mA
FCT1: DC 24 V (150 mA)
WEAR1: DC 24 V (150 mA)
Current consumption Max. mA 190
Min. mA 40
Supply voltage DC 24 V (± 15%)
Electromagnetic compatibility DIN EN 61800‑3
Operating temperature (evaluation unit) -40 to +105 °C
Humidity ≤ 90% rF
Protection class IP20 (in the closed terminal box up to IP66)
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Technical data
Characteristic values of functional safety 8
8.11 Characteristic values of functional safety
8.11.1 Characteristic safety values of the brakes BE05 – BE122
Definition of the characteristic safety value B10d:
The value B10d specifies the number of cycles at which 10% of components have
failed dangerously (definition according to standard EN ISO 13849-1). Failed danger-
ously means in this context that the brake is not applied when required. This means
the brake does not deliver the necessary braking torque.
Size B10d
Switching cycles
BE05 16,000,000
BE1 12,000,000
BE2 8,000,000
BE5 6,000,000
BE11 3,000,000
BE20 2,000,000
BE30 1,500,000
BE32 1,500,000
BE60 1,000,000
BE62 1,000,000
BE120 250,000
BE122 250,000
In addition to the brakes listed above, SEW also offers safety-rated brakes up to size
32. For detailed information, refer to the addendum to the operating instructions
"Safety-Rated Brakes – Functional Safety for AC Motors."
8.11.2 Safety characteristics of safety-rated encoders

Definition of the characteristic safety value MTTFd:
The value MTTFd (Mean Time To Failure) specifies the mean time to dangerous fail-
ure / component fault.
Motor size Designation MTTFd1) Service life

In years
DR..71 – 132 ES7S 61 20
DRN80 – 132S AS7W 41 20
AS7Y 41 20
EI7C FS 202 20
21927189/EN – 07/2015
DR..160 – 315 EG7S 61 20

DRN132M – 315 AG7W 41 20
AG7Y 41 20
1) Referring to an ambient temperature of 40°C

8 Technical data
S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor
8.12 S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor

The following section describes the data for DRK.. single-phase motor in S1 continu-
ous duty
The specified starting torques result from the connection of a running capacitor or a
running capacitor with start-up capacitor connected in parallel respectively.
S1 duty at 1500 / 1800 rpm (230 V)

MA / MN with CB CA for MA/MN
Motor PN nN IN cos φ CB 100% 150%
type
Hz kW rpm A μF μF μF
DRK71S4 50 0.18 1450 1.53 0.81 20 0.5 14 25
60 1755 1.38 0.87 18 0.45 14 25
DRK71M4 50 0.25 1455 2.05 0.80 25 0.45 16 35
60 1760 1.80 0.89 25 0.5 14 30
DRK80S4 50 0.37 1420 2.40 0.98 18 0.5 12 25
60 1730 2.45 0.94 15 0.45 12 20
DRK80M4 50 0.55 1430 3.45 0.97 25 0.5 12 30
60 1740 3.45 0.94 20 0.5 12 25
DRK90M4 50 0.75 1430 4.75 0.93 15+15 0.5 20 40
60 1740 4.80 0.90 25 0.5 18 35
DRK90L4 50 1.1 1415 6.6 0.97 20+25 0.5 30 70
60 1725 6.8 0.93 15+20 0.55 30 50
CB Running capacitor
CA Start-up capacitor
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Malfunctions
S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor 9
9 Malfunctions
WARNING
• De-energize the motor before you start working on the unit.
• Secure the motor against unintended power-up.
CAUTION
Risk of burns.
NOTICE
Improper troubleshooting measures may damage the drive.
• Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid spare parts list.
• Strictly observe the safety notes in the individual chapters.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

9 Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions
9.1 Motor malfunctions

Fault Possible cause Measure
Motor does not start up Supply cable interrupted Check the connections and (intermediate) ter-
minal points, correct if necessary
Brake does not release See chapter "Brake malfunctions"
Supply cable fuse has blown Replace fuse
Motor protection (switch) has Check that the motor protection (switch) is set
triggered correctly; current specification is on the name-
plate
Motor protection does not trip Check motor protection control
Malfunction in control or in the Observe the switching sequence; correct if
control process necessary
Motor only starts with Motor power designed for delta Correct the connection from star to delta; fol-
difficulty or does not connection but connected in star low the wiring diagram
start at all
Motor power designed for star-star Correct the connection from star to star-star;
connection but only connected in follow the wiring diagram
star
Voltage or frequency differs con- Provide better power supply system; reduce
siderably from the setpoint, at the power supply load;
least when switching on the motor
Check cross section of supply cable, replace
with cable of larger cross section if necessary
Motor does not start in Star connection does not provide If the delta inrush current is not too high (ob-
star connection, only in sufficient torque serve the regulations of the power supplier),
delta connection start up directly in delta;
Check the project planning and use a larger
motor or special design if necessary. Contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Contact fault on star/delta switch Check the switch, replace if necessary;
Check the connections
Incorrect direction of Motor connected incorrectly Swap two phases of the motor supply cable
rotation
Motor hums and has Brake does not release See chapter "Brake malfunctions"
high current consump-
Winding defective Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
tion
Rotor rubbing
Fuses blow or motor Short circuit in the motor supply Eliminate short circuit
protection trips immedi- cable
ately
Supply cables connected incor- Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram
rectly
Short circuit in the motor Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Ground fault on motor

Severe speed loss un- Motor overload Measure power, check project planning and
der load use larger motor or reduce load if necessary
Voltage drops Check cross section of supply cable, replace
with cable of larger cross section if necessary

Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions 9
Motor heats up excess- Overload Measure power, check project planning and
ively (measure temper- use larger motor or reduce load if necessary
ature)
Insufficient cooling Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling
air passages, retrofit forced cooling fan if ne-
cessary. Check the air filter, clean or replace if
necessary
Ambient temperature too high Observe the permitted temperature range, re-
duce the load if necessary
Motor in delta connection instead Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram
of star connection as intended
Loose contact in supply cable (one Tighten loose contact, check connections, ob-
phase missing) serve wiring diagram
Fuse blown Look for and rectify cause (see above); re-
place fuse
Line voltage deviates from the Adjust motor to line voltage
rated motor voltage by more than
5% (range A) / 10% (range B).
Nominal duty cycle (S1 to S10, Adjust the nominal duty cycle of the motor to
DIN 57530) exceeded, e.g. caused the required operating conditions; consult a
by excessive starting frequency professional to determine the proper drive, if
necessary
Excessively loud Ball bearing compressed, dirty or Re-align motor and the driven machine, in-
damaged spect rolling bearing and replace if necessary.
See chapter "Permitted rolling bearing
types" (→ 2 174).
Vibration of rotating parts Look for the case, possibly an imbalance; cor-
rect the cause, observe method for balancing
Foreign objects in cooling air ducts Clean cooling air ducts
For DR.. motors with rotor desig- Reduce load
nation "J": Load too high
21927189/EN – 07/2015

9 Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions
9.2 Brake malfunctions

Brake does not re- Incorrect voltage on brake control Apply the correct voltage; brake voltage specified
lease unit on the nameplate
Brake control unit failed Install a new brake control, check resistors and in-
sulation of the brake coils (see "Resistors" chapter
for resistance values)
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Max. permitted working air gap ex- Measure and set working air gap.
ceeded because brake lining worn See the following chapters:
down
• Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122
brakes (→ 2 131)
brakes
If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.
See the following chapters:
• Replacing the brake disk of BE05 – BE122
brakes (→ 2 133)
brakes
Voltage drop along supply cable > Provide correct connection voltage: brake voltage
10% specifications on the nameplate. Check the cross
section of the brake supply cable; increase cross
section if necessary
Inadequate cooling, brake over- Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling air
heats passages, check air filter, clean or replace if ne-
cessary. Replace type BG brake rectifier with type
BGE
Brake coil has interturn short circuit Check resistors and insulation of the brake coils
or a short circuit to frame (see "Resistors" chapter for resistance values);
Replace complete brake and brake control (spe-
cialist workshop),
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Rectifier defective Replace rectifier and brake coil; it may be more
economical to replace the complete brake
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions 9
Brake does not Working air gap not correct Measure and set working air gap.
brake See the following chapters:
brakes (→ 2 131)
brakes
If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.
brakes (→ 2 133)
brakes
Brake lining worn Replace entire brake disk.
brakes (→ 2 133)
brakes
Incorrect braking torque Check the project planning and change the brak-
ing torque if necessary; see chapter "Work done,
working air gap, braking torques" (→ 2 159)
• by changing the type and number of brake
springs.
– Changing the braking torque of BE05 –
BE122 brakes (→ 2 135)
– Changing the braking torque of BE120 –
BE122 brakes
• by selecting a different brake
See chapter "Braking torque assign-
ment" (→ 2 161)
21927189/EN – 07/2015

9 Malfunctions
Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter

Brake does not Working air gap so large that set- Set the working air gap.
brake ting nuts for the manual brake re- See the following chapters:
lease come into contact
brakes (→ 2 131)
brakes
Manual brake release device not Set the adjusting nuts for the manual brake re-
set correctly lease correctly
• Changing the braking torque of BE05 – BE122
brakes (→ 2 135)
• Changing the braking torque of BE120 –
BE122 brakes
Brake locked by manual brake re- Loosen the set screw, remove if necessary
lease HF
Brake is applied Brake is switched only on AC Switch both the DC and AC circuits (e.g. by retro-
with time lag voltage side fitting a SR current relay to BSR or a UR voltage
relay to BUR); observe wiring diagram
Noises in vicinity Gearing wear on the brake disk or Check the project planning, replace the brake disk
of brake the driver caused by jolting startup if necessary
brakes (→ 2 133)
brakes
Have a specialist workshop replace the driver
Alternating torques due to incor- Check correct setting of frequency inverter ac-
rectly set frequency inverter cording to its operating instructions, correct if ne-
cessary.
9.3 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter

The symptoms described in the "Motor malfunctions" chapter may also occur when
the motor is operated with a frequency inverter. Please refer to the frequency inverter
operating instructions for the meaning of the problems that occur and to find informa-
tion about rectifying the problems.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Malfunctions
Customer service 9
9.4 Customer service
Have the following information available if you require customer service assist-
ance:
• Nameplate data (complete)
• Nature and extent of the problem
• Time the failure occurred and any accompanying circumstances
• Assumed cause
• Ambient conditions e.g.:
– Ambient temperature
– Humidity
– Installation altitude
– Dirt
– etc.
9.5 Disposal
Dispose of the motors in accordance with the material structure and the regulations in
force:
• Iron
• Aluminum
• Copper
• Plastics
• Electronic parts
• Oil and grease (not mixed with solvents)
21927189/EN – 07/2015

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10 Appendix
10.1 Wiring diagrams
INFORMATION
The motor should be connected as shown in the connection wiring diagram or the ter-
minal assignment diagram, which are supplied with the motor. The following chapter
only shows a selection of the common types of connections. You can obtain the rel-
evant wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
10.1.1 Delta and star connection in wiring diagram R13

For all motors with one speed, direct on-line or W/m start-up.
Delta connection
The following figure shows m connection for low voltage.
[1] [2]
W2 U2 V2
U2 V2 W2
(T6) (T4) (T5)
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3) U1 V1 W1
[3] (T1) (T2) (T3)
L1 L2 L3
9007199497344139
[1] Motor winding [3] Incoming cables

[2] Motor terminal board
Star connection
The following figure shows W connection for high voltage.
[1] [2]
U2 V2 W2 W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6) (T6) (T4) (T5)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
U1 V1 W1
[3] (T1) (T2) (T3)
21927189/EN – 07/2015
L1 L2 L3
9007199497339147

Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 – L2

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.2 Delta connection with wiring diagram R72 (68192 xx 09)
For all motors with one speed and direct power-on.
Delta connection, Double-delta connection

The following figure shows m connection for high voltages and m m connection for
low voltages.
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
U2 V2 W2
T4 T5 T6
[1]
U3 V3 W3
T7 T8 T9
U4 V4 W4
T10 T11 T12
[2] [2]
V3 W3 U3 V3 W3 U3
T8 T9 T7 T8 T9 T7
V2 W2 U2 V2 W2 U2
T5 T6 T4 T5 T6 T4
V4 W4 U4
T11 T12 T1 V4 W4 U4
T11 T12 T10
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3 U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[3] L1 L2 L3 [3]
L1 L2 L3
9007201560668427
[1] Motor winding

[3] Incoming cables
Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 – L2

21927189/EN – 07/2015

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10.1.3 Star connection with wiring diagram R76 (68043 xx 06)

For all motors with one speed and direct power-on.
Star connection, double-star connection

The following figure shows W connection for high voltages and W W connection for low
voltages.
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[1]
U2 V2 W2
T4 T5 T6
U3 V3 W3
T7 T8 T9
[4]
W2 U2 V2 W2 W3 U2 U3 V2 V3
T6 T4 T5 [2] T6 T9 T4 T7 T5 T8 [2]
U1 U3 V1 V3 W1 W3 U1 V1 W1
T1 T7 T2 T8 T3 T9 T1 T2 T3
[3] L1 L2 L3 [3] L1 L2 L3
2305925515

[2] Motor terminal board [4] Star point connected in motor
Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 - L2
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.4 Motor protection with TF or TH for DR..71 – 280, DRN80 – 280
TF/TH
The following figures show the connection of motor protection with TF PTC thermistor
sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats.
Either a two-pin connection terminal or a five-pin terminal strip is available for connect-
ing to the trip switch.
Example: TF/TH to a two-pin terminal strip
1b
2b
9007199728684427
1b 2b
TF/TH TF/TH
Example: 2xTF/TH to a five-pin terminal strip
18014398983427083
1b 2b 3b 4b 5b
1.TF/TH 1.TF/TH 2nd TF/TH 2nd TF/TH –
2xTF/TH with anti-condensation heating

The following illustration shows the connection of the motor protection with 2 TF PTC
thermistor sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats and Hx anti-condensation heating.
1b
2b
9007199728684427
1b 2b
Hx Hx
21927189/EN – 07/2015
18014398983427083
1b 2b 3b 4b 5b
1.TF/TH 1.TF/TH 2nd TF/TH 2nd TF/TH –

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10.1.5 Motor protection using TF or TH with DR..315, DRN315
TF/TH
The following figures show the connection of motor protection with TF PTC thermistor
sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats.
Depending on the version, an "x-pin" terminal strip is available for connection to the
trip switch.
Example: TF/TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/
1.TH 1.TH
473405707
Example: 2xTF/TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/ 2.TF/ 2.TF/

1.TH 1.TH 2.TH 2.TH
473410187
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.6 EI7.B built-in encoder
Connection via terminal strip

The encoder is equipped with a 10-pin terminal strip for connection:
a
c
d
b
1 10 1 4
9007207579353739
INFORMATION
The ranges 1a – 10a, 1c – 4c und 1d – 4d have been pre-configured by
SEW‑EURODRIVE. The must not be changed.
Range 1b – 10b is intended for customer adjustments.
Basic connection:
Connections 1a – 10a, 1c – 4c and 1d – 4d lead to the encoder or to the motor.
Connections 1b – 10b lead to the cable gland.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4
a TF11) TF11) TF21) TF21) +UB1) GND1) A1) A1) B1) B1) see below c
Opt. Opt. (GY) (PK) (BN) (WH) (YE) (GN)
b TF1 TF1 TF2 TF2 +UB GND A A B B see below d
Opt. Opt.
1) Pre-configured by SEW‑EURODRIVE. Do not alter the setting!
Pin assignment EI7C B Pin assignment EI76 B

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GND1) n. c.1) n. c.1) n. c.1) c GND1) n. c.1) n. c.1) n. c.1) c
(BU) (BU)
EI7C1) n. c.1) n. c.1) n. c.1) d n. c.1) EI761) n. c.1) n. c.1) d
(RD) (RD)
Pin assignment EI72 B Pin assignment EI71 B

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
GND n. c. n. c. n. c. c GND n. c. n. c. n. c.1) c
(BU) (BU)
21927189/EN – 07/2015
n. c.1) n. c.1) EI721) n. c.1) d n. c.1) n. c.1) n. c.1) EI711) d

(RD) (RD)

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Connection via M12 plug connector

A 8-pin or a 4-pin M12 plug connector is available for the connection.
4-pin M12 plug connector AVSE 8-pin M12 plug connector AVRE
• A coded Pin 1: +UB • A coded Pin 1: +UB
• Male Pin 2: B • Male Pin 2: GND
Pin 3: GND 2 1
Pin 3: A
2 1
3 7
3 4 Pin 4: A 8 6 Pin 4: A
4 5
Pin 5: B
Pin 6: B
Pin 7: TF1
Pin 8: TF1
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.7 Brake control BGE; BG; BSG; BUR
BE brake
BGE, BG, BSG, BUR brake control;
Apply voltage to release the brake (see nameplate).
Contact rating of the brake control: AC3 in accordance with EN 60947-4-1.
The voltage can be distributed as follows:
• Through a separate supply cable
• From the motor terminal board
This does not apply to pole-changing and frequency-controlled motors.
BG / BGE
The following illustration shows the wiring for BG and BGE brake rectifiers for the AC-
side shut-off as well as the DC and AC-side shutoff.
DC
AC AC
BGE BGE
BG BG
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
WH RD BU WH RD
[1] [1]
BU
U AC U AC
242604811
[1] Brake coil

21927189/EN – 07/2015

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
BSG
The following illustration shows the DC 24 V connection of the BSG control unit
BSG
1 2 3 4 5
WH RD BU
[1]
- +
24V DC
242606475
[1] Brake coil
BUR
WARNING
Malfunction caused by incorrect connection for frequency operation.
Possible damage to the drive system.
• Do not connect the brake to the terminal board of the motor.
The following figure shows the wiring for BUR brake control:
BGE
BG
1 2 3 4 5
RD
[4]
[1]
U~ WH RD BU
(VAC ) BU
[3] [3] [2]

BN / BK
BN / BK
21927189/EN – 07/2015
242608139
[1] Brake coil BN = UR 11 (42 – 150 V)

[2] UR11/UR15 voltage relay BK = UR 15 (150 – 500 V)

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.8 BSR brake control
BE brake
BSR brake control
Brake voltage = Phase-to-neutral voltage
The white connecting leads are the ends of a converter loop and, depending on the
motor connection, must be connected to the motor terminal block instead of them or
W bridge prior startup.
Factory set to star in wiring diagram R13

The following illustration shows the factory wiring for the BSR brake control
Example
Motor: AC 230 V / AC 400 V
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE BGE
BG BG
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
WH RD WH RD
[1] [1]
RD BU RD BU
BU BU
[2] [2]
WH WH WH WH
W2 U2 V2
W2 U2 V2 (T6) (T4) (T5)
(T6) (T4) (T5) W1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 (T3)
(T1) (T2) (T3) (T1) (T2)
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
9007199497340811
[1] Brake coil

21927189/EN – 07/2015
[2] SR11/15 current relay

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Factory set to start in wiring diagram R76

Example
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
1 2 3 4 5
WH
RD
[3]
BU
RD BU
[4] [1]
U2 (T4) V2 (T5)
WH WH W3 (T9) U3 (T7) V3 (T8)
U1 (T1) V1 (T2) W1 (T3)

[5]
W2 L1 L2 L3
(T6)
[2]
2319077003

[2] Incoming cables
[3] Brake coil
[5] Auxiliary terminal
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
Alternative connection: Factory set to double-star with wiring diagram R76
Example
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
1 2 3 4 5
WH
RD
[3]
BU
RD BU
[4] [1]
(T4) (T5)
U2 V2
WH WH
U3 (T7) V3(T8) W3 (T9)

U1 (T1) V1(T2) W1 (T3)
[5]
W2 L1 L2 L3
(T6)
[2]
2337824139

[2] Incoming cables
[3] Brake coil
[5] Auxiliary terminal
21927189/EN – 07/2015

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10.1.9 BMP3.1 brake control in the terminal box

Brake BE120, BE122
BMP3.1 brake control
Apply voltage to release the brake (see nameplate).
Contact rating of the brake control: AC3 in accordance with EN 60947-4-1.
Separate supply cables are required for the voltage supply.
BMP3.1
The following illustration shows the wiring for the BMP3.1 brake rectifier for the AC-
side shut-off as well as the DC and AC-side shutoff.
U AC U AC
1 2 3 DC 1 2 3
AC AC
BMP3.1 BMP3.1
13 14 15 13 14 15
RD WH BU RD WH BU
[1] [1]
365750411
[1] Brake coil
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.10 V forced cooling fan
Delta-Steinmetz
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for delta-Steinmetz
connection for 1-phase operation
PE L1 N
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
U2 V2 W2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
L N
9007199778089483
Star connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for star connection.
PE L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
U2 V2 W2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
L1 L2 L3
9007199778091147
Delta connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for delta connection.
PE L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
21927189/EN – 07/2015
U2 V2 W2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
L1 L2 L3
18014399032833803

10 Appendix
Wiring diagrams
DC 24 V connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the /V forced cooling fan for DC 24 V.
[3]
BU RD
[2]
M [1]
=
+ -
DC 24 V
9007201648125067
[1] Forced cooling fan A Factory

[2] Terminal strip B Customer wiring
[3] Polarity reversal protection diode
INFORMATION
Observe the polarity.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.11 DRK... single-phase motor
ER10 wiring dia- [4] [5]
gram U1 Z1
[1]
U1 Z2 U1 Z2
U2 Z2 [2] [2]
Z1 U2
Z1 U2
[8] [8]
[7] CB [3] [3] CB
[7]
CA CA [6]
[6]
[9] [9]
11919510027
[1] Motor winding [6] Starting capacitor, switchable

[2] Motor terminal [7] Running capacitor
[3] Incoming cables [8] Further running capacitors (if avail-
[4] Counterclockwise rotation able)
[5] CW rotation, connected at factory [9] All-pole power switch
ER11 wiring dia- [4] [5]

gram W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
[2] [2]
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
[1]
U2 V2 W2
T4 T5 T6
[7] [7]
[6] [6]
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[3] CA [3] CA
[8] [8]
11919511947
[1] Motor winding [5] CW rotation, connected at factory

21927189/EN – 07/2015
[2] Motor terminal board [6] Starting capacitor, switchable

[3] Incoming cables [7] Running capacitor
[4] Counterclockwise rotation [8] All-pole power switch

10 Appendix
Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2
10.2 Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2

The following figure shows the arrangement of the auxiliary terminals for the different
terminal box positions.
Terminal box position 2 and X, here X1) Terminal box position 1 and 3, here 3
[2]
[A]
[1] [3]
[B]
[x]
3572208523
1) If auxiliary terminal 2 is not provided, you can install auxiliary terminal 1 in the same position.
[1] Terminal box position 1 [X] Terminal box position X

[2] Terminal box system 2 [A] Auxiliary terminal 1
[3] Terminal box system 3 [B] Auxiliary terminal 2
Regardless of the terminal box position, auxiliary terminal 1 must always be mounted
parallel to the terminal board.
The terminal structure can vary depending on the terminal box design.
21927189/EN – 07/2015

Address list
11
11 Address list
Algeria
Sales Algiers REDUCOM Sarl Tel. +213 21 8214-91
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue http://www.reducom-dz.com
16200 El Harrach Alger info@reducom-dz.com
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial Garín http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Prov. de Buenos Aires sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Vienna SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service A-1230 Wien http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Bangladesh
Sales Bangladesh SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED Tel. +88 01729 097309
345 DIT Road salesdhaka@seweurodrivebangladesh.com
East Rampura
Dhaka-1219, Bangladesh
Belarus
Sales Minsk Foreign Enterprise Industrial Components Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58
RybalkoStr. 26 Fax +375 17 298 47 54
BY-220033 Minsk http://www.sew.by
sales@sew.by
Belgium
Assembly Brussels SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 16 386-311
Sales Researchpark Haasrode 1060 Fax +32 16 386-336
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
BE-3001 Leuven info@sew-eurodrive.be
Service Competence Industrial SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 84 219-878
Center Gears Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Brazil
Production São Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3835-8000
Sales Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – Rodovia sew@sew.com.br
Service Santos Dumont Km 49
Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP
Assembly Rio Claro SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3522-3100
Sales Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172 Fax +55 19 3524-6653
Service Condomínio Industrial Conpark montadora.rc@sew.com.br
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Caixa Postal: 327

13501-600 – Rio Claro / SP
Joinville SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 47 3027-6886
Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba Fax +55 47 3027-6888
89239-270 – Joinville / SC filial.sc@sew.com.br
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
BG-1606 Sofia bever@bever.bg

11 Address list
Cameroon
is supported by Germany.
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Tilbury Industrial Park Fax +1 604 946-2513
7188 Honeyman Street b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA Tel. +56 2 2757 7000
Sales Chile Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 2757 7001
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
LAMPA ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25323273
Sales Tianjin 300457 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
Service info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267922
East Section of GETDD guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Taiyuan SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd. Tel. +86-351-7117520
No.3, HuaZhang Street, Fax +86-351-7117522
TaiYuan Economic & Technical Development taiyuan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
ShanXi, 030032
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478388
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478389
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
430056 Wuhan
Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Sales Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Service Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Hong Leong Industrial Complex contact@sew-eurodrive.hk

No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Colombia
Assembly Bogota SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá sew@sew-eurodrive.com.co

Address list
11
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service Zeleni dol 10 Fax +385 1 4613-158
HR 10 000 Zagreb kompeks@inet.hr
Czech Republic
Assembly Hostivice SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Sales Floriánova 2459 Fax +420 235 350 613
Service 253 01 Hostivice http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Drive Service +420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW) Service
Hotline / 24 Tel. +420 255 709 632
Hour Service Fax +420 235 358 218
servis@sew-eurodrive.cz
Denmark
Assembly Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 95 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +20 222566299
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +20 2 22594-757
33 EI Hegaz ST http://www.copam-egypt.com
Heliopolis, Cairo copam@copam-egypt.com
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
EE-75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa http://www.alas-kuul.ee
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Finland
Assembly Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2 http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Service Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Keskikankaantie 21 Fax +358 3 780-6211
FIN-15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears Oy Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Santasalonkatu 6, PL 8 Fax +358 201 589-310
FI-03620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
France
Production Hagenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54 route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone industrielle
Technopôle Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Brumath SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 48
1 rue de Bruxelles
21927189/EN – 07/2015
F-67670 Mommenheim
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin

11 Address list
France
Nantes SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Parc d’activités de la forêt Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Étang
Gabon
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales D-76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Postfach 3023 – D-76642 Bruchsal
Production / Industrial Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Gears Christian-Pähr-Str. 10 Fax +49 7251 75-2970
D-76646 Bruchsal
Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251-2970
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 – D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Östringen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, Werk Tel. +49 7253 9254-0
Östringen Fax +49 7253 9254-90
Franz-Gurk-Straße 2 oestringen@sew-eurodrive.de
D-76684 Östringen
Service Competence Mechanics / SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Center Mechatronics Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf scc-mechanik@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
D-76646 Bruchsal scc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Technology Cen- North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
ter Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
D-30823 Garbsen (Hannover) dtc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
D-08393 Meerane (Zwickau) dtc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
D-85551 Kirchheim (München) dtc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
D-40764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf) dtc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Center Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 306331131-30
Alexander-Meißner-Straße 44 Fax +49 306331131-36
D-12526 Berlin dc-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75 3759
c/o BASF SE Fax +49 7251 75 503759
Gebäude W130 Raum 101 dc-ludwigshafen@sew-eurodrive.de
D-67056 Ludwigshafen
Saarland SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 6831 48946 10
Gottlieb-Daimler-Straße 4 Fax +49 6831 48946 13
21927189/EN – 07/2015
D-66773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler dc-saarland@sew-eurodrive.de

Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7348 9885-0
Dieselstraße 18 Fax +49 7348 9885-90
D-89160 Dornstadt dc-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de
Würzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 931 27886-60
Nürnbergerstraße 118 Fax +49 931 27886-66
D-97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld dc-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service +49 800 SEWHELP
+49 800 7394357

Address list
11
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales DeVilliers Way Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service Trident Park http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Normanton info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
West Yorkshire
WF6 1GX
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service Tel. 01924 896911
Greece
Sales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
12, K. Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136 http://www.boznos.gr
GR-18545 Piraeus info@boznos.gr
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service Csillaghegyí út 13. Fax +36 1 437 06-50
H-1037 Budapest http://www.sew-eurodrive.hu
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Iceland
Sales Reykjavik Varma & Vélaverk ehf. Tel. +354 585 1070
Knarrarvogi 4 Fax +354 585)1071
IS-104 Reykjavík http://www.varmaverk.is
vov@vov.is
India
Registered Office Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 3045200
Assembly Plot No. 4, GIDC Fax +91 265 3045300
Sales POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
Service Gujarat salesvadodara@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 44 37188888
Sales Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II Fax +91 44 37188811
Service Mambakkam Village saleschennai@seweurodriveindia.com
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 21 35301400
Plant: Plot No. D236/1, salespune@seweurodriveindia.com
Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II,
Warale, Tal- Khed,
Pune-410501, Maharashtra
Indonesia
Sales Jakarta PT. Cahaya Sukses Abadi Tel. +62 21 65310599
Komplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99, Fax +62 21 65310600
Sunter csajkt@cbn.net.id
Jakarta 14350
Jakarta PT. Agrindo Putra Lestari Tel. +62 21 2921-8899
JL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra In- Fax +62 21 2921-8988
dustri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III, aplindo@indosat.net.id
Blok E No. 27 http://www.aplindo.com
Jakarta 14470
Medan PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari Tel. +62 61 687 1221
Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri Medan Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61 6871458 / +62
II 61 30008041
Medan 20252 sil@serumpunindah.com
serumpunindah@yahoo.com
http://www.serumpunindah.com
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Surabaya PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI Tel. +62 31 5990128

Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi Permai Fax +62 31 5962666
G6 No. 11 sales@triagri.co.id
Surabaya 60111 http://www.triagri.co.id
Surabaya CV. Multi Mas Tel. +62 31 5458589
Jl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18 Fax +62 31 5317220
Surabaya 60174 sianhwa@sby.centrin.net.id
http://www.cvmultimas.com

11 Address list
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate http://www.alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 info@alperton.ie
Israel
Sales Tel Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Italy
Assembly Solaro SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 9801
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 79 97 81
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +225 21 21 81 05
Ivory Coast Fax +225 21 25 30 47
Rue des Pècheurs, Zone 3 info@sew-eurodrive.ci
26 BP 916 Abidjan 26 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ci
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373814
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
hamamatsu@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Kazakhstan
Sales Almaty SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156
291-291A, Tole bi street Fax +7 (727) 350 5156
050031, Almaty http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411

Representative office in Uzbekistan Fax +998 71 2359412
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street, http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
Tashkent, 100084 sew@sew-eurodrive.uz
Ulaanbaatar SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +976-77109997
Representative office in Mongolia Fax +976-77109997
Suite 407, Tushig Centre http://www.sew-eurodrive.mn
Seoul street 23, sew@sew-eurodrive.mn
Sukhbaatar district,
Ulaanbaatar 14250
Kenya
is supported by Tanzania.
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 6 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 6 7139386
LV-1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.lv
info@alas-kuul.com
Lebanon
Sales Lebanon Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 510 532
B. P. 80484 Fax +961 1 494 971
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut ssacar@inco.com.lb

Sales / Jordan / Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Tel. +961 1 494 786
Kuwait / Saudi Ara- Sin El Fil. Fax +961 1 494 971
bia / Syria B. P. 55-378 http://www.medrives.com
Beirut info@medrives.com

Address list
11
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Statybininku 106C Fax +370 315 56175
LT-63431 Alytus http://www.irseva.lt
irmantas@irseva.lt
Luxembourg
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu
Macedonia
Sales Skopje Boznos DOOEL Tel. +389 23256553
Dime Anicin 2A/7A Fax +389 23256554
1000 Skopje http://www.boznos.mk
Madagascar
Sales Antananarivo Ocean Trade Tel. +261 20 2330303
BP21bis. Andraharo Fax +261 20 2330330
Antananarivo oceantrabp@moov.mg
101 Madagascar
Malaysia
Assembly Johor SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
West Malaysia
Mexiko
Assembly Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Quéretaro scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 76220
Quéretaro, México
Mongolia
Technical Office Ulaanbaatar SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +976-77109997
Ulaanbaatar 14250
Morocco
Sales Mohammedia SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +212 523 32 27 80/81
Service 2 bis, Rue Al Jahid Fax +212 523 32 27 89
28810 Mohammedia http://www.sew-eurodrive.ma
sew@sew-eurodrive.ma
Namibia
Sales Swakopmund DB Mining & Industrial Services Tel. +264 64 462 738
Einstein Street Fax +264 64 462 734
Strauss Industrial Park anton@dbminingnam.com
Unit1
Swakopmund
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam SEW-EURODRIVE B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552

Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam Service: 0800-SEWHELP
Postbus 10085 http://www.sew-eurodrive.nl
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam info@sew-eurodrive.nl
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz

11 Address list
New Zealand
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
30 Lodestar Avenue, Wigram Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Nigeria
Sales Lagos EISNL Engineering Solutions and Drives Ltd Tel. +234 1 217 4332
Plot 9, Block A, Ikeja Industrial Estate ( Ogba http://www.eisnl.com
Scheme) team.sew@eisnl.com
Adeniyi Jones St. End
Off ACME Road, Ogba, Ikeja, Lagos
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service N-1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Pakistan
Sales Karachi Industrial Power Drives Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area, seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Paraguay
Sales Fernando de la SEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.L Tel. +595 991 519695
Mora De la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva Asunción Fax +595 21 3285539
Departamento Central sewpy@sew-eurodrive.com.py
Fernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C. Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales Los Calderos, 120-124 Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Philippines
Sales Makati P.T. Cerna Corporation Tel. +63 2 519 6214
4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. Cruz Fax +63 2 890 2802
Makati City 1205 mech_drive_sys@ptcerna.com
http://www.ptcerna.com
Poland
Assembly Łódź SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 293 00 00
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 293 00 49
Service PL-92-518 Łódź http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Service Tel. +48 42 293 0030 24 Hour Service
Fax +48 42 293 0043 Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 86 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service P-3050-379 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
Sales Bucharest Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Service str. Brazilia nr. 36 Fax +40 21 230-7170

011783 Bucuresti sialco@sialco.ro
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142
Sales P.O. Box 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service RUS-195220 St. Petersburg http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru

Address list
11
Sambia
is supported by South Africa.
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque http://www.senemeca.com
B.P. 3251, Dakar senemeca@senemeca.sn
Serbia
Sales Belgrade DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393
Ustanicka 128a Fax +381 11 347 1337
PC Košum, IV floor office@dipar.rs
SRB-11000 Beograd
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201
Rybničná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
SK-831 06 Bratislava http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
SK-040 01 Košice Mobile +421 907 671 976
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
SLO - 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 248-7289
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 info@sew.co.za
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens bgriffiths@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 902 3815
48 Prospecton Road Fax +27 31 902 3826
Isipingo cdejager@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Nelspruit 1200
South Korea
Assembly Ansan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Sales 7, Dangjaengi-ro, Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service Danwon-gu, http://www.sew-eurodrive.kr
Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839 master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com

11 Address list
South Korea
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil, Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-gu,
Busan, Zip 618-820
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax +34 94 43184-71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sri Lanka
Sales Colombo SM International (Pte) Ltd Tel. +94 1 2584887
254, Galle Raod Fax +94 1 2582981
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Swaziland
Sales Manzini C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd Tel. +268 2 518 6343
PO Box 2960 Fax +268 2 518 5033
Manzini M200 engineering@cgtrading.co.sz
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 34 42 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 34 42 80
Service S-55 303 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-55 003 Jönköping jonkoping@sew.se
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Taiwan
Sales Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 2 27383535
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2 Fax +886 2 27368268
Tung Huw S. Road Telex 27 245
Taipei sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 49 255353
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road Fax +886 49 257878
Industrial District sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
Nan Tou 540 http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Tanzania
Sales Daressalam SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA Tel. +255 0 22 277 5780
Plot 52, Regent Estate Fax +255 0 22 277 5788
PO Box 106274 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Dar Es Salaam central.mailbox@sew.co.tz
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Chonburi 20000
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2 Fax +216 79 40 88 66
21927189/EN – 07/2015
Lot No. 39 http://www.tms.com.tn

2082 Fouchana tms@tms.com.tn
Turkey
Assembly Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE Hareket Tel. +90 262 9991000 04
Sales Sistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. Sti Fax +90 262 9991009
Service Gebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 401 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
41480 Gebze Kocaeli sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr

Address list
11
Ukraine
Assembly Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв» Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Sales ул.Рабочая, 23-B, офис 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
Service 49008 Днепропетровск http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
United Arab Emirates

Sales Sharjah Copam Middle East (FZC) Tel. +971 6 5578-488
Service Sharjah Airport International Free Zone Fax +971 6 5578-499
P.O. Box 120709 copam_me@eim.ae
Sharjah
Uruguay
Assembly Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A. Tel. +598 2 21181-89
Sales Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina Corumbe Fax +598 2 21181-90
CP 12000 Montevideo sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
USA
Production Southeast Re- SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly gion 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Production +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly Northeast Re- SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales gion Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest Re- SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
gion 2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 332-0038
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest Re- SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
gion 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western Re- SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
gion 30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service in USA provided on request!
Uzbekistan
Technical Office Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411
Venezuela
Assembly Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Tel. +58 241 832-9804
Sales Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Fax +58 241 838-6275
Service Zona Industrial Municipal Norte http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve
Valencia, Estado Carabobo ventas@sew-eurodrive.com.ve
sewfinanzas@cantv.net
Vietnam
Sales Ho Chi Minh Nam Trung Co., Ltd Tel. +84 8 8301026
City Huế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials Fax +84 8 8392223
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town, khanh-nguyen@namtrung.com.vn
Binh Duong Province http://www.namtrung.com.vn
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
21927189/EN – 07/2015
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City

Hanoi MICO LTD Tel. +84 4 39386666
Quảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except Fax +84 4 3938 6888
Construction Materials nam_ph@micogroup.com.vn
8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao Duy http://www.micogroup.com.vn
Anh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Index
Index
Icons Control cabinet ............................................. 173
Motor wiring space ....................................... 172
/DUB (Diagnostic Unit Brake) ............................ 146
Brake malfunctions ............................................ 188
A Brake rectifier combinations .............................. 170
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors 75 Brake replacement
Add-on encoders ................................................. 88 DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 .................... 143
AG7. .................................................................... 88 DR..71 – 80, DRN80 .................................... 140
AH7. .................................................................... 88 DR..90 – 225, DRN90 – 225 ........................ 141
Ambient conditions .............................................. 59 Brakemotor inspection
Hazardous radiation ....................................... 59 DR.71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 ......................... 125
Ambient temperature ........................................... 59 Brakemotor structure
Anti-condensation heating ................................... 92 DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280 ................. 123
AS7...................................................................... 88 DR..71 – 80, DRN80 .................................... 121
Assembly DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S ...................... 122
Tolerances...................................................... 31 DR.315 ......................................................... 124
Auxiliary terminals, arrangement ....................... 208 Braking torques ......................................... 159, 161
Braking work...................................................... 159
B Built-in encoder ................................................. 197
Backstop.............................................................. 95 Built-in encoders.................................................. 89
BE – 11.............................................................. 128 C
BE05 – 2............................................................ 128
BE20.................................................................. 129 Cable gland
BE30 – 32.......................................................... 129 NPT ................................................................ 39
BE60 – 122........................................................ 130 Changing the blocking direction .......................... 95
Bearing lubrication............................................. 101 Changing the brake disk
Bearings BE05 – 122................................................... 133
Reinforced .............................................. 94, 102 Changing the brake spring
Brake BE05 – 122................................................... 136
BE05 – 2....................................................... 128 Changing the braking torque
BE1 – 11....................................................... 128 BE05 – 122................................................... 135
BE20............................................................. 129 Changing the magnet body
BE30 – 32..................................................... 129 BE05 – 122................................................... 138
BE60 – 122................................................... 130 Condensation drain holes.................................... 30
Braking torques ............................................ 159 Connecting diagnostic unit .................................. 79
Braking work................................................. 159 Connecting diagnostic unit /DUE....................... 152
Working air gap ............................................ 159 Connecting the motor .......................................... 60
Brake connection................................................. 78 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors
75
Brake control ......................................... 48, 78, 170
IS plug connector ........................................... 71
21927189/EN – 07/15
BG ................................................................ 199
KC1 terminal strip........................................... 77
BGE.............................................................. 199
KCC terminal strip .......................................... 76
BMP3.1......................................................... 204
Terminal box....................................... 61, 62, 63
BSG.............................................................. 199
via plug connector .......................................... 71
BSR .............................................................. 201
via terminal board........................................... 61
BUR.............................................................. 199

Index
via terminal strip ............................................. 76 AG7. ............................................................... 88

Connection AH7. ............................................................... 88
Cable ............................................................ 100 AS7................................................................. 88
Encoder .......................................................... 91 EG7. ............................................................... 88
Variants .......................................................... 25 EH7. ............................................................... 88
Copyright notice .................................................... 8 EI7. ................................................................. 89
Corrosion protection .......................................... 102 ES7................................................................. 88
Customer service .............................................. 191 Non-SEW encoder mounting.......................... 34
D Technical data .............................................. 177
Encoder connection............................................. 91
Delta connection Encoder mounting adapter ............................ 34, 36
R13............................................................... 192 Equipment, optional............................................. 82
R72............................................................... 193 ES7...................................................................... 88
Design Exclusion of liability ............................................... 8
Brakemotor................................... 121, 122, 123 Extended fan guard ............................................. 45
DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280 with BE .... 123 Extended storage ................................................ 28
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 .............. 18, 117
F
DR..315, DRN315 .................................. 19, 118
DR..71 – 132 .......................................... 15, 114 Forced cooling fan
DR..71 – 80, DRN80 with BE ....................... 121 Wiring diagram ............................................. 205
DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S with BE......... 122 Forced cooling fan V ........................................... 86
Motor .......................... 15, 18, 19, 114, 117, 118 Frequency inverter operation .............................. 48
Designated use ................................................... 11 Functional safety ............................................... 183
Diagnostic unit /DUB ........................................... 79 G
Diagnostic unit /DUE ......................................... 150
Disassembly Gases .................................................................. 59
Diagnostic unit /DUE .................................... 148 General safety notes ............................................. 9
Drive components, installation ............................ 31 Grounding............................................................ 52
DRK ..................................................................... 57 at the terminal box.......................................... 51
DRK.. single-phase motor NF................................................................... 51
S1 duty type ................................................. 184 H
DRK... single-phase motor
Hazard symbols
Wiring diagram ............................................. 207
Meaning............................................................ 7
Drying the motor .................................................. 28
Hollow shaft rotary encoder................................. 37
Dusts ................................................................... 59
I
E
Improving the grounding...................................... 52
EG7. .................................................................... 88
Inspection ............................................................ 98
EH7. .................................................................... 88
/DUB for wear monitoring ............................. 147
EI7 ..................................................................... 197
DUB for function and wear monitoring ......... 147
21927189/EN – 07/15
EI7. ...................................................................... 89

Inspection intervals............................................ 100
Electrical connection ........................................... 13
Inspection/
Electrical installation ............................................ 47
DUB for function monitoring ......................... 146
Embedded safety notes......................................... 7
Installation ..................................................... 13, 30
EMC..................................................................... 52
Electrical......................................................... 47
Encoder ......................................................... 25, 88

Index
In damp locations or outdoors ........................ 31 DR..71 – 132 .......................................... 15, 114
Mechanical ..................................................... 27 Motor designation ................................................ 23
Installation altitude............................................... 59 Motor feet
Installation notes Retrofitting / modifying motor feet .................. 40
Encoder .......................................................... 91 Motor inspection
Installation regulations......................................... 47 DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 ........................ 119
Installation tolerances.......................................... 31 Motor malfunctions ............................................ 186
Installation, conditions ......................................... 27 Motor protection ........................................ 195, 196
Insulation resistance............................................ 28 TF ......................................................... 195, 196
Insulation, reinforced ........................................... 49 TH......................................................... 195, 196
Intervals for inspection and maintenance .......... 100 Motor protection device ....................................... 48
IS plug connector ................................................ 71 Motor structure
Isolation transformer............................................ 28 DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 ........... 16, 115
K DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 .............. 17, 116
Mounting.............................................................. 30
KC1 terminal strip ................................................ 77 Measuring nipple ............................................ 44
KCC terminal strip ............................................... 76 XH.. encoder mounting adapter ..................... 37
KTY84-130 .......................................................... 84 XV.. encoder mounting adapter...................... 34
L Mounting adapter .......................................... 34, 36
Measuring nipple ............................................ 44
LF ........................................................................ 43
XH.. .............................................................. 112
LF air filter ........................................................... 43
XV................................................. 108, 109, 111
Low-speed motors ............................................... 56
Mounting XH........................................................ 37
Low-voltage equipment ....................................... 47
Mounting XV.. ...................................................... 34
Lubricant table ................................................... 176
Lubrication ......................................................... 101 N
M Nameplate ........................................................... 20
Non-SEW encoder mounting............................... 34
Maintenance ........................................................ 98
Notes
Maintenance intervals ....................................... 100
Designation in the documentation .................... 6
Malfunctions ...................................................... 185
Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 7
Malfunctions when operating with a frequency in-
verter ............................................................ 190 O
Measuring nipple mounting adapter .................... 44
Operating currents............................................. 163
Mechanical installation ........................................ 27
Operation with frequency inverter ....................... 48
Motor
Options ................................................................ 24
Connect via terminal board ............................ 61
Electrical......................................................... 82
Connecting the terminal strip.......................... 76
Mechanical ..................................................... 43
Connecting via plug connector ....................... 71
Other applicable documentation.......................... 12
Connection ..................................................... 60
Drying ............................................................. 28 P
21927189/EN – 07/15
Extended storage ........................................... 28 Plug connector .................................................... 71

Installation ...................................................... 30 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS...................... 75
Motor design........................................................ 15 IS .................................................................... 71
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 .............. 18, 117 Preliminary work for motor and brake maintenance .
DR..315, DRN315 .................................. 19, 118 103

Index
Product names ...................................................... 8 Structure of the section-related ........................ 6

PT100 .................................................................. 85 Transport ........................................................ 12
PT100 temperature detection .............................. 85 Safety, functional ............................................... 183
Pulse voltages ..................................................... 49 Second shaft end ................................................ 45
R Section-related safety notes .................................. 6
Setting the working air gap
Reinforced bearings .................................... 94, 102 BE05 – 122................................................... 131
Relubrication ..................................................... 101 Signal words in the safety notes............................ 6
Relubrication device .......................................... 101 Single-phase motor ............................................. 57
Relubrication intervals ....................................... 102 Special design ..................................................... 27
Removing rotary encoder .......................... 103, 104 Special features
EG7. and AG7. ............................................. 104 Low-speed motors.......................................... 56
ES7. and AS7............................................... 103 Switching operation ........................................ 56
Removing the absolute encoder........ 108, 109, 111 Torque motors ................................................ 56
Removing the encoder ..... 103, 104, 105, 106, 108, Star connection
109, 111, 112
R13............................................................... 192
EG7. and AG7. ..................................... 104, 105
R76............................................................... 194
EH7. and AH7. ............................................. 106
Startup ................................................................. 93
ES7. and AS7............................................... 103
Status message evaluation unit ........................ 158
EV.., AV.., and XV.. ...................... 108, 109, 111
Storage, extended ............................................... 28
Removing the hollow shaft encoder .................. 112
Structure
Removing the incremental encoder... 108, 109, 111
/DUB............................................................. 145
EV.., AV.., and XV.. ...................... 108, 109, 111
Brakemotor................................................... 124
Removing the rotary encoder .................... 105, 106
DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 ........... 16, 115
EG7. and AG7. ............................................. 105
DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 .............. 17, 116
EH7. and AH7. ............................................. 106
DR.315 with BE ............................................ 124
Removing the special encoder .......... 108, 109, 111
DUB.............................................................. 144
Resistance measurement of the brake...... 167, 169
Motor ........................................ 16, 17, 115, 116
Resistances ....................................................... 166
Switching operation ............................................. 56
Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release ........... 33
Retrofitting the HR/HF manual brake release ..... 32 T
Rights to claim under limited warranty .................. 8 Technical data ................................................... 159
Rolling bearing types ......................................... 174 ASI absolute encoder ................................... 179
RS ....................................................................... 95 Incremental rotary encoders with plug-in shaft....
S 177
Incremental rotary encoders with solid shaft 181
Safety characteristics ........................................ 183 Incremental rotary encoders with spread shaft ...
Safety notes .......................................................... 9 177
Designated use .............................................. 11 SSI absolute encoder ................................... 178
Designation in the documentation .................... 6 Temperature sensor KTY84-130 ......................... 84
21927189/EN – 07/15
Electrical connection ...................................... 13 Terminal arrangement ....................................... 208

General information.......................................... 9 Terminal board .................................................... 61
Installation ...................................................... 13 Terminal box
Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 7 Turning ........................................................... 38
Operation........................................................ 14 Terminal box positions ...................................... 208
Structure of embedded..................................... 7 Terminal strip....................................................... 76

Index
KC1 ................................................................ 77 U

KCC................................................................ 76
UWU51A switched-mode power supply .............. 87
TF ........................................................ 82, 195, 196
TF temperature sensor ........................................ 82 V
TH........................................................ 83, 195, 196 V forced cooling fan............................................. 86
TH winding thermostats....................................... 83 Vapors ................................................................. 59
Torque motors ..................................................... 56 Visual feedback ................................................... 89
Trademarks ........................................................... 8
Transport ............................................................. 12
W
Type designation ................................................. 23 Waste disposal .................................................. 191
Output types;Output types.............................. 24 Wear .................................................................. 100
Temperature detection ................................... 24 Wiring diagram
Type designation DR BG ................................................................ 199
Encoder .......................................................... 25 BGE.............................................................. 199
Mechanical mount-on components ................ 24 BMP3.1......................................................... 204
Type designation DR.. BSG.............................................................. 200
Bearings ......................................................... 26 R13 delta connection............................ 192, 193
Condition monitoring ...................................... 26 R13 star connection ..................................... 192
Connection variants........................................ 25 R76 star connection ..................................... 194
Other additional features ................................ 26 Wiring diagrams ................................................ 192
Temperature sensor and temperature detection . BSR .............................................................. 201
24 TF ......................................................... 195, 196
Ventilation....................................................... 26 TH......................................................... 195, 196
Types Working air gap ................................................. 159
Overview ........................................................ 24
21927189/EN – 07/15

SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

P.O. Box 3023
76642 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com
Schaltbild/ Circuit diagram/ Schéma de branchement 68 151 04 06
Drehstrommotor / AC Motor / Moteur triphasé DE,EN,FR Seite/Page 1/2
Eine Drehzahl / Single-speed / Une vitesse PSRM-M 14.07.16
Motorschutz / Motor protection / Protection du moteur
R13T
Für alle Motoren mit einer Drehzahl, For all single-speed motors, direct Pour tous les moteurs mono vitesse,
direkte Einschaltung oder YΔ-Anlauf on-line starting or star delta starting démarrage direct ou démarrage YΔ
Niedere Spannung, Δ Schaltung Low voltage, delta-connection Basse tension, branchement Δ
[1] [2]
W2 U2 V2
U2 V2 W2
U1 V1 W1
U1 V1 W1
[3]
L1 L2 L3
68151 XX 06 01 01
Hohe Spannung, Y-Schaltung High voltage, star-connection Haute tension, branchement Y
[1] [2]
U2 V2 W2 W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1
U1 V1 W1
[3]
L1 L2 L3
68151 XX 06 02 00
[1] Motorwicklung [1] Motor winding [1] Bobinage moteur

[2] Motorklemmenplatte [2] Motor terminal board [2] Plaque à bornes du moteur
[3] Zuleitungen [3] Supply leads [3] Alimentation
Drehrichtungsumkehr: Vertauschen To reverse: Interchange 2 supply Changement du sens de rotation

von 2 Zuleitungen (L1-L2) leads (L1-L2) Inverser deux conducteurs
d’alimentation (L1-L2)
Für diese technischen Unterlagen behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor / Copyright reserved / Tous droits de modification réservés
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023  D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. ( 07251 ) 75-0  Fax ( 07251 ) 75-1970  http://www.sew.de
Schaltbild/ Circuit diagram/ Schéma de branchement 68 151 04 06
Drehstrommotor / AC Motor / Moteur triphasé DE,EN,FR Seite/Page 2/2
Eine Drehzahl / Single-speed / Une vitesse PSRM-M 14.07.16
Motorschutz / Motor protection / Protection du moteur
R13T
Belegungsplan / Terminal assignment diagram / Affectation des bornes 66 000 xx 06 ML
Motorschutz mit PTC-Widerstand Motor protection with PTC-resistance Protection du moteur par résistance
(TF) oder Bimetallschalter (TH/TS) (TF) or bimetallic switch (TH/TS) PTC (TF) ou relais bilame (TH/TS)
1b 1b 2b
oder/or/ou
1B 2B
2b TF/TH/TS TF/TH/TS
68151 XX 06 03 01
alternativ alternative alternatif
Thermische Motorinformation mit Thermal motor information with Information thermique de moteur
KY(KTY84-130), PT(Pt100) oder KY(KTY84-130), PT(Pt100) or avec KTY84-130 (KY), PT(Pt100) ou
PK(Pt1000) PK(Pt1000) PK(Pt1000)
1b 2b
1b
PK (RD) PK(BK)
1B 2B oder/or/ou
2b PT (RD) PT (WH)
KY+ (RD) KY- (BU)
68151 XX 06 04 02
BU blau / blue / bleu RD rot / red / rouge WH weiß / white / blanc

BK schwarz / black / noir
alternativ alternative alternatif
Stillstandsheizung Heater Préchauffage à l’arrêt
1b 1b 2b
1B 2B oder/or/ou
2b Hx Hx
68151 XX 06 05 01
BK : schwarz / black / noir TF : 100°C – RD TS : 100°C – GN/BK

BN : braun / brown / brun 130°C – BU 130°C – YE/BK
BU : blau / blue / bleu 150°C – BK 150°C – VT/BK
GN : grün / green / vert-jaune
170°C – WH/GN 170°C – BN/BK
GY : grau / grey / gris
OG : orange / orange / orange
PK : rosa / pink / rose TH : 100°C – GN Hx : 230V ±10% - WH/OG
RD : rot / red / rouge 130°C – YE 115V ±10% - WH/GY
VT : violett / violet / violet 150°C – VT
WH : weiß / white / blanc 170°C – BN
YE : gelb / yellow / jaune
Für diese technischen Unterlagen behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor / Copyright reserved / Tous droits de modification réservés
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023  D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. ( 07251 ) 75-0  Fax ( 07251 ) 75-1970  http://www.sew.de
Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *21932786_0515*
Assembly and Operating

Instructions
Gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W
Edition 05/2015 21932786/EN

Table of contents
Table of contents
1 General information .................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 About this documentation ............................................................................................... 5
1.2 Structure of the safety notes .......................................................................................... 5
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ........................................................................... 6
1.4 Exclusion of liability ........................................................................................................ 7
1.5 Product names and trademarks ..................................................................................... 7
1.6 Copyright notice ............................................................................................................. 7
2 Safety notes ............................................................................................................................... 8

2.1 Preliminary information .................................................................................................. 8
2.2 General information ........................................................................................................ 8
2.3 Target group ................................................................................................................... 9
2.4 Designated use .............................................................................................................. 9
2.5 Other applicable documentation .................................................................................... 9
2.6 Transportation/storage ................................................................................................... 9
2.7 Installation .................................................................................................................... 10
2.8 Startup/operation .......................................................................................................... 10
2.9 Inspection/maintenance ............................................................................................... 10
3 Gear unit structure .................................................................................................................. 11

3.1 Basic structure of helical gear units ............................................................................. 11
3.2 Basic structure of parallel-shaft helical gear units ........................................................ 12
3.3 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..19/K..29 ................................................. 13
3.4 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..39/K..49 ................................................. 14
3.5 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..37 – K..187 ............................................ 15
3.6 Basic structure of helical-worm gear units ................................................................... 16
3.7 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 – W..30 .......................................... 17
3.8 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 – W..47 .......................................... 18
3.9 Nameplate/type designation ......................................................................................... 19
4 Mechanical installation ........................................................................................................... 22

4.1 Prerequisites for installation ......................................................................................... 22
4.2 Installing the gear unit .................................................................................................. 24
4.3 Gear unit with solid shaft .............................................................................................. 31
4.4 Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units ................................................................... 33
4.5 Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft .................................... 38
4.6 Shaft-mounted gear unit with shrink disk ..................................................................... 44
4.7 Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC® .................................................................... 47
4.8 Mounting the cover ....................................................................................................... 59
4.9 Coupling of AM adapters .............................................................................................. 61
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.10 AQ. adapter coupling ................................................................................................... 65

4.11 EWH adapters .............................................................................................................. 68
4.12 AD Input shaft assembly .............................................................................................. 70
4.13 Accessory equipment ................................................................................................... 74
5 Startup ...................................................................................................................................... 83
5.1 Checking the oil level ................................................................................................... 83
Assembly and Operating Instructions – Gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W 3
Table of contents
5.2 Pseudo-leakage at shaft seals ..................................................................................... 84

5.3 Helical-worm gear units and SPIROPLAN® W gear units ............................................ 85
5.4 Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units .................................................... 85
5.5 Gear units with backstop .............................................................................................. 86
5.6 Components made of elastomers with fluorocarbon rubber ........................................ 86
6 Inspection/maintenance.......................................................................................................... 88
6.1 General information ...................................................................................................... 88
6.2 Wearing parts ............................................................................................................... 90
6.3 Inspection/maintenance intervals ................................................................................. 92
6.4 Lubricant change intervals ........................................................................................... 93
6.5 Maintenance of AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapter ................................................................... 93
6.6 AD input shaft assembly maintenance ......................................................................... 94
6.7 Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit ..................................................................... 95
7 Mounting positions ............................................................................................................... 110

7.1 Designation of the mounting positions ....................................................................... 110
7.2 Churning losses ......................................................................................................... 111
7.3 Mounting position MX ................................................................................................. 111
7.4 Universal mounting position M0 ................................................................................. 111
7.5 Mounting positions of SPIROPLAN® gear units ......................................................... 112
7.6 Mounting position sheets ........................................................................................... 112
8 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 146

8.1 Extended storage ...................................................................................................... 146
8.2 Lubricants ................................................................................................................... 148
9 Malfunctions .......................................................................................................................... 157

9.1 Gear units ................................................................................................................... 158
9.2 Adapters AM/AQ./AL/EWH ........................................................................................ 159
9.3 AD input shaft assembly ............................................................................................ 159
9.4 Customer service ...................................................................................................... 160
9.5 Waste disposal ........................................................................................................... 160
10 Address list ............................................................................................................................ 161
Index ....................................................................................................................................... 172

21932786/EN – 05/2015
4 Assembly and Operating Instructions – Gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W
General information
About this documentation 1
1.1 About this documentation
This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is intended
for all employees who perform assembly, installation, startup, and service work on the
product.
Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons respon-
sible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the device
independently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you
are unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further infor-
mation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
1.2 Structure of the safety notes

1.2.1 Meaning of signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety
notes.
Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

DANGER Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries.
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries.
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its
environment.
INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Simplifies
handling of the drive system.
1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes

Section-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actions
pertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazard
or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of hazard.
• Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Rights to claim under limited warranty
Meaning of the hazard symbols

The hazard symbols in the safety notes have the following meaning:
Hazard symbol Meaning

General hazard
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of hot surfaces
Warning of risk of crushing
Warning of suspended load
Warning of automatic restart
1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the de-
scription of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
• SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard.
– Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

Read the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operation
and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentation
before you start working with the unit!
21932786/EN – 05/2015
General information
Exclusion of liability 1
1.4 Exclusion of liability
Read the information in this documentation, otherwise safe operation is impossible.
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to achieve the
specified product characteristics and performance features. SEW‑EURODRIVE as-
sumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting
from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases,
SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for defects.
1.5 Product names and trademarks

The brands and product names in this documentation are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective titleholders.
1.6 Copyright notice

© 2015 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized reproduction, modification, distribution, and
use of this document, in whole or in part.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
2 Safety notes
Preliminary information
2 Safety notes
2.1 Preliminary information
The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons
and damage to property. The user must ensure that the basic safety notes are read
and observed. Ensure that persons responsible for the machinery and its operation as
well as persons who work on the unit independently have read through the documen-
tation carefully and understood it. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation, or if you require further information, please contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of the unit described in
these operating instructions. If you use other components from SEW‑EURODRIVE, al-
so refer to the safety notes for these particular components in the corresponding docu-
mentation.
Also observe the additional safety notes provided in the individual chapters of this
document.
WARNING
Danger of fatal injury or risk of injury during the operation of motors or gearmotors
caused by live, bare (in the event of open connectors/terminal boxes) and movable
or rotating parts.
Danger of fatal injury.
• All work related to transport, storage, installation, assembly, connection, startup,
maintenance and repair may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
• For transport, storage, installation, assembly, connection, startup, maintenance
and repair note the following documents:
– Warning and safety signs on the motor/gearmotor
– All the project planning documents, startup instructions and wiring diagrams
related to the drive
– System-specific regulations and requirements
– National/regional regulations governing safety and the prevention of acci-
dents.
• Never install damaged products.
• Never operate or energize the unit without the necessary protection covers or
housing.
• Use the unit only for its intended purpose.
• Make sure installation and operation are correct.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
INFORMATION
Submit any complaint to the shipping company immediately in the event of transpor-
tation damage.
Safety notes
Target group 2
2.3 Target group
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel.
Qualified personnel in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the
design, mechanical installation, troubleshooting and servicing of the product, who pos-
sess the following qualifications:
• Training in mechanical engineering, e.g. as a mechanic or mechatronics technician
(final examinations must have been passed).
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately skilled person (electrically).
Skilled person (electrically) in the context of this documentation are persons familiar
with electrical installation, startup, troubleshooting and servicing of the product, who
possess the following qualifications:
• Training in electrical engineering, e.g. as an electrician, electronics or mechatron-
ics technician (final examinations must have been passed).
All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must be
carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4 Designated use

The gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W is intended for use in
industrial systems.
The gear units may only be used according to the specifications in the technical docu-
mentation from SEW-EURODRIVE as well as the specifications on the nameplate.
They fulfill the applicable standards and regulations.
When installed in machines, startup (i.e. start of designated operation) is prohibited
until it is determined that the machine complies with the local laws and directives. In
the individual area of application, you must especially observe the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC as well as the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC. The EMC test specifications
EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-6 and EN 61000-6-2 must
be taken into account during startup.
Using these products in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless specif-
ically designated otherwise.
2.5 Other applicable documentation

Observe the corresponding documentation for all connected devices.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
2.6 Transportation/storage
Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Inform the ship-
ping company immediately about any damage. If necessary postpone motor startup.
Tighten attached lifting eyes securely. The lifting eyes are designed to carry only the
weight of the motor/gear unit/gearmotor. Do not apply any additional loads.
2 Safety notes
Installation
The installed lifting eyebolts are in accordance with DIN 580. Observe the loads and
regulations specified there. If the motor/gear unit/gearmotor has 2 lifting eye lugs or
lifting eyebolts, then you should also use both lifting eye lugs for attaching transport
ropes. In this case, the tension force vector of the slings must not exceed a 45° angle
in accordance with DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment, that can be used for further trans-
port.
In case the motor/gear unit/gearmotor is not installed immediately store it dry, free of
dust and not outdoors. Do not store the motor/gearmotor on the fan guard. The motor/
gear unit/gearmotor can be stored for up to 9 months without requiring any special
measures before startup.
2.7 Installation
NOTICE
Danger due to static overdetermination if gear units with foot (e.g. KA19/29B,
KA127/157B or FA127/157B) are mounted both via the torque arm and via the foot
plate.
Risk of injuries and damage to property.
• Especially with the KA.9B/T design, it is not permitted to use the foot plates and
the torque arm at the same time.
• Attach the KA 9B/T design only via the torque arm.
• Attach the K.9 or KA.9B design only via the foot plate.
• If you want to use foot plates and torque arms for mounting, contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Observe the notes in chapter "Mechanical installation (→ 2 22)".
2.8 Startup/operation
Check the oil level before startup as described in chapter Inspection/Mainte-
nance (→ 2 88).
Check for proper direction of rotation in decoupled state. Listen out for unusual grind-
ing noises as the shaft rotates.
Secure the key for the test run without output elements. Do not deactivate monitoring
and protection devices even for a test run.
Switch off the gearmotor if in doubt whenever changes occur in relation to normal op-
eration (e.g. increased temperature, unusual noise, vibration). Determine the cause. It
may be necessary to contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
2.9 Inspection/maintenance
Observe the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance"!
Gear unit structure
Basic structure of helical gear units 3
3 Gear unit structure
INFORMATION
The following figures are block diagrams. Their purpose is only to make it easier to
assign components to the spare parts lists. Discrepancies may occur depending on
the gear unit size and version.
3.1 Basic structure of helical gear units
[59]
[20]
[24]
[515] [101]
[516]
[517] [100]
[47] [1]
[102]
[2] [45]
[59]
[43]
[181]
[42] [3]
[41]
[6] [25]
[88]
[22]
[11] [17]
[12]
[9]
[19]
[521]
[522]
[8] [7] [523]
[59]
[31] [30]
[32]
[34] [4]
[5]
[37]
[506]
[39] [507]
[131] [508]
9007199273935243
[1] Pinion [19] Key [42] Rolling bearing [507] Shim

[2] Gear [20] Breather valve [43] Key [508] Shim
[3] Pinion shaft [22] Gear unit housing [45] Rolling bearing [515] Shim
[4] Gear [24] Eyebolt [47] Retaining ring [516] Shim
21932786/EN – 05/2015
[5] Pinion shaft [25] Rolling bearing [59] Screw plug [517] Shim
[6] Gear [30] Rolling bearing [88] Retaining ring [521] Shim
[7] Output shaft [31] Key [100] Inspection cover [522] Shim
[8] Key [32] Spacer tube [101] Hex head screw [523] Shim
[9] Oil seal [34] Rolling bearing [102] Gasket
[11] Rolling bearing [37] Rolling bearing [131] Closing cap
[12] Retaining ring [39] Retaining ring [181] Closing cap
[17] Spacer tube [41] Retaining ring [506] Shim
Basic structure of parallel-shaft helical gear units
3.2 Basic structure of parallel-shaft helical gear units
[2] [45] [20]

[515] [59]
[516] [43] [22] [1]
[517]
[3]
[41] [42]
[181] [161]
[4] [30]
[32] [59]
[31]
[5]
[506] [37]
[507] [39] [183] [165]
[131] [508]
[160]
[19]
[102]
[88]
[94]
[25] [521] [100]
[92] [522]
[93]
[91] [523] [101]
[7]
[59]
[17]
[6]
[9]
[11]
[81]
[14]
[16]
9007199274039051
[1] Pinion [22] Gear unit housing [91] Retaining ring [506] Shim
[2] Gear [25] Rolling bearing [92] Washer [507] Shim
[3] Pinion shaft [30] Rolling bearing [93] Lock washer [508] Shim
[4] Gear [31] Key [94] Hex head screw [515] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [32] Spacer tube [100] Inspection cover [516] Shim
[6] Gear [37] Rolling bearing [101] Hex head screw [517] Shim
[7] Hollow shaft [39] Retaining ring [102] Gasket [521] Shim
[9] Oil seal [41] Retaining ring [131] Closing cap [522] Shim
[11] Rolling bearing [42] Rolling bearing [160] Closing plug [523] Shim
[14] Hex head screw [43] Key [161] Closing cap
[16] Output flange [45] Rolling bearing [165] Closing plug
[17] Spacer tube [59] Screw plug [181] Closing cap
[19] Key [81] Shield ring [183] Oil seal
[20] Breather valve [88] Retaining ring
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit structure
Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..19/K..29 3
3.3 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..19/K..29
[95]
[94]
[93]
[92]
[91]
[183]
[521]
[522] [88]
[523]
[25]
[6]
[19]
[7]
[518] [11]
[519]
[520]
[12]
[9]
[159]
[168]
[20]
[59] [538]
[22] [537]
[167] [44] [536]
[1]
[26]
[36] [43] [5]
[48] [532]
[193] [531]
[42] [530]
[141]
[45]
[163]
[2] [115]
9007206676351499
[1] Pinion [26] Housing 1. Stage [94] Hex head screw [520] Shim
[2] Gear [36] Stud [95] Protection cap [521] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [42] Tapered roller bearing [115] Retaining ring [522] Shim
[6] Gear [43] Key [141] Bushing [523] Shim
[7] Hollow shaft [44] Gasket [159] Closing plug [530] Shim
21932786/EN – 05/2015
[9] Oil seal [45] Tapered roller bearing [163] Supporting ring [531] Shim
[11] Rolling bearing [50] Bevel gear set [167] Closing plug [532] Shim
[12] Retaining ring [59] Screw plug [168] Protection cap [536] Shim
[19] Key [88] Retaining ring [183] Oil seal [537] Shim
[20] Breather valve [91] Retaining ring [193] Closing plug [538] Shim
[22] Gear unit housing [92] Washer [518] Shim
[25] Deep groove ball bear- [93] Lock washer [519] Shim
ing
Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..39/K..49
3.4 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..39/K..49

[521] [89]
[522] [88]
[523]
[6] [25]
[7]
[518]
[17]
[519] [11]
[520]
[12] [19]
[101]
[10]
[9] [8]
[20]
[100]
[102] [5]
[48] [1]
[45]
[43]
[59]
[22] [536]
[537] [42]
[538]
[113]
[2]
14457456395
[1] Pinion [12] Retaining ring [48] Supporting ring [518] Shim
[2] Gear [17] Spacer tube [50] Bevel gear set [519] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [19] Key [59] Screw plug [520] Shim
[6] Gear [20] Breather valve [88] Retaining ring [521] Shim
[7] Hollow shaft [22] Gear unit housing [89] Closing cap [522] Shim
[8] Key [25] Deep groove ball bear- [100] Inspection cover [523] Shim
ing
[9] Oil seal [42] Tapered roller bearing [101] Hex head screw [536] Shim
[10] Oil seal [43] Key [102] Gasket [537] Shim
[11] Deep groove ball bear- [45] Tapered roller bearing [113] Slotted nut [538] Shim
ing
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit structure
Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..37 – K..187 3
3.5 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units K..37 – K..187
[100] [102]
[3] [20]
[536]
[43] [537] [533] [59]
[538] [534] [22]
[535]
[45] [2]
[114]
[101]
[113]
[42] [119] [59]
[116]
[523] [89] [59]
[522]
[521][88]
[25]
[84] [1]
[19]
[7] [59]
[8]
[6] [59]
[83] [17]
[11]
[12]
[9] [161]
[132]
[133]
[31]
[30] [542]
[543]
[135] [544]
[4]
[5]
[131] [37]
[506]
[507]
[137] [508]
[39]
9007199274042123
[1] Pinion [25] Rolling bearing [102] Gasket [522] Shim

[2] Gear [30] Rolling bearing [113] Slotted nut [523] Shim
[3] Pinion shaft [31] Key [114] Multi-tang washer [533] Shim
[4] Gear [37] Rolling bearing [116] Thread lock [534] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [39] Retaining ring [119] Spacer tube [535] Shim
[6] Gear [42] Rolling bearing [131] Closing cap [536] Shim
[7] Output shaft [43] Key [132] Retaining ring [537] Shim
[8] Key [45] Rolling bearing [133] Supporting ring [538] Shim
21932786/EN – 05/2015
[9] Oil seal [59] Screw plug [135] Shield ring [542] Shim
[11] Rolling bearing [83] Shield ring [137] Supporting ring [543] Shim
[12] Retaining ring [84] Shield ring [161] Closing cap [544] Shim
[17] Spacer tube [88] Retaining ring [506] Shim
[19] Key [89] Closing cap [507] Shim
[20] Breather valve [100] Inspection cover [508] Shim
[22] Gear unit housing [101] Hex head screw [521] Shim
Basic structure of helical-worm gear units
3.6 Basic structure of helical-worm gear units
[59]
[101] [20]
[506] [100]
[131] [507]
[39] [137]
[37] [102]
[22]
[5]
[43] [30] [2] [61] [59]
[1]
[19]
[89]
[59]
[523] [88]
[25] [522]
[521]
[7]
[6]
[11]
[520]
[12] [519]
[518]
[9]
9007199274045195
[1] Pinion [20] Breather valve [88] Retaining ring [518] Shim
[2] Gear [22] Gear unit housing [89] Closing cap [519] Shim
[5] Worm [25] Rolling bearing [100] Inspection cover [520] Shim
[6] Worm gear [30] Rolling bearing [101] Hex head screw [521] Shim
[7] Output shaft [37] Rolling bearing [102] Gasket [522] Shim
[9] Oil seal [39] Retaining ring [131] Closing cap [523] Shim
[11] Rolling bearing [43] Key [137] Supporting ring
[12] Retaining ring [59] Screw plug [506] Shim
[19] Key [61] Retaining ring [507] Shim
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit structure
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 – W..30 3
Basic
structure
SPIROPLA
N®
– gear
units of
W..10
W..30
3.7 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 – W..30
[100] [101]
[65]
[66]
[102] [68]
[71] [143]
[72]
[1]
[22]
[89]
[88]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[25]
[6]
[19] [250]
[251]
[17]
[8]
[7]
[11]
[518]
[519]
[12] [520]
[9]
9007199274048267
[1] Pinion [19] Key [88] Retaining ring [518] Shim

[6] Gear [22] Gear unit housing [89] Closing cap [519] Shim
[7] Output shaft [25] Rolling bearing [100] Inspection cover [520] Shim
[8] Key [65] Oil seal [101] Hex head screw [521] Shim
[9] Oil seal [66] Rolling bearing [102] Gasket [522] Shim
[11] Rolling bearing [68] Retaining ring [143] Supporting ring [523] Shim
[12] Retaining ring [71] Supporting ring [250] Retaining ring
[17] Spacer tube [72] Retaining ring [251] Retaining ring
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 – W..47
Basic
structure
SPIROPLA
N®
– gear
units of
W..37
W..47
3.8 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 – W..47
[521]
[89]
[522]
[523] [88]
[6] [25]
[22]
[19]
[7]
[8]
[59] [5]
[518] [33]
[519] [11]
[520] [32]
[12]
[9] [59]
[44] [133] [1]
[506] [37]
[5]
[31]
[30]
[137]
[2]
[61]
[26] [36]
18014399115354379
[1] Pinion [22] Gear unit housing [59] Screw plug [521] Shim
[2] Gear [25] Deep groove ball [61] Retaining ring [522] Shim
bearing
[5] Pinion shaft [26] Housing stage 1 [88] Retaining ring [523] Shim
[6] Gear [30] Deep groove ball [89] Closing cap
bearing
[7] Output shaft [31] Key [133] Shim
[8] Key [32] Spacer tube [137] Shim
[9] Oil seal [33] Retaining ring [506] Shim
[11] Deep groove ball bear- [36] Hex head screw [518] Shim
ing
[12] Retaining ring [37] Deep groove ball [519] Shim
bearing
[19] Key [44] O-ring [520] Shim
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit structure
Nameplate/type designation 3
3.9 Nameplate/type designation
3.9.1 Gear unit nameplate
The following figure shows an example of a nameplate for a helical-bevel gear unit
with input cover:
76646 Bruchsal/Germany
[1] K87 AD4
[2] 01.0123456789.0001.14 IM M1A
na r/min 1400/20 i 70,46
Mamax Nm 2700 Memax Nm 41 kg 105
Made in Germany
CLP HC 220 Synth. Öl / 3,71l 0641 591 1 DE
9007203726759691
[1] Type designation of the gear unit

[2] Serial number
na r/min Maximum permitted output speed
Mamax Nm Maximum permitted output torque i
Memax Nm Maximum permitted input torque
i Gear unit ratio
IM Mounting position
Explanation for serial number:
01. 0123456789. 0001. 14

Sales organization Order number Item number Year of
manu-
facture
3.9.2 Type designation of the gear unit

A helical-bevel gear unit with AQA adapter, for example has the following type desig-
nation:
Example: K37/R AQA 80 /1

Gear unit type K Helical-bevel gear units
Gear unit size 37 19 – 49; 37 – 187
Option /R e.g. option /R for servo drives:
Reduced rotational clearance
Adapter AQA e.g. adapter for servo drives:
AQA: Adapter with keyway
AQH: Adapter with clamping ring
21932786/EN – 05/2015
hub
Flange key figure 80
Variants /1
Nameplate/type designation
3.9.3 DRN.. gearmotor nameplate

The following figure shows an example of the nameplate of a DRN.. gearmotor.
[16]
76646 Bruchsal/Germany
[1] R67 DRN90L4/BE2
[2] 01.1207730226.0001.14 Inverter duty VPWM 3~IEC60034
[3] Hz 50 r/min 1461/21 V 230/400 / [11]

[4] kW 1.5 S1 A 5.9/3.4 eff% 85.6 IE3
[5] Cosφ 0.74 IP65 [12]
[6] Th.Kl.155(F)
[7] Vbr 230 AC [13]
[8] 69.75 Nm 685
i IM M1 Nm 20 [14]
[9] CLP 220 Miner.Öl/1.1l BG1.5 [15]
[10] kg 54.000 188 578 2 Made in Germany
[17]
18014411882555659
[1] Type designation gearmotor

[2] Serial number
[3] Hz Line frequency
[4] kW Motor power
[5] Power factor
[6] Temperature class
[7] Nm Maximum output torque
[8] Gear unit ratio
[9] Oil type and oil fill volume
[10] kg Weight
[11] V Clamping connection
[12] Degree of protection
[13] V Brake voltage
[14] Nm Braking torque
[15] Brake control
[16] Inverter operation
[17] Mounting position
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit structure
Nameplate/type designation 3
3.9.4 Type designation gearmotor
The type designation of the gearmotor starts from the component on the output end.
For instance, a multi-stage helical-bevel gearmotor with temperature sensor in the mo-
tor winding has the following type designation:
Example: K107R77DRN100M4 /TF

Gear unit type K 1. Gear unit
Gear unit size 107
Gear unit series R 2. Gear unit
Gear unit size 77
Motor series DRN.. Motor
Motor size 100
Length M
Number of poles 4
Motor option temperature /TF Option
sensor
Example: DRN.. double gearmotor
K107 R77 DRN100M4/TF

13368182539
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Prerequisites for installation
4.1 Prerequisites for installation
NOTICE
Damage to the gear unit/gearmotor due to improper installation.
Damage to property.
Make sure that the following requirements are met before you start installing the unit:
• The drive has not been damaged during transportation or storage.
• The entries on the nameplate of the gearmotor match the voltage supply system.
• In case of abrasive ambient conditions, the output end oil seals must be protected
against wear.
• Output shafts and flange surfaces must be completely free from anti-corrosion
agent and any kind of pollution. Use a commercially available solvent to clean the
flange surfaces. Note that solvent damages the oil seal. Do not let the solvent
come into contact with the sealing lips of the oil seals.
• For standard drives:
– Check if the gear unit/gearmotor is designed for the ambient temperatures. For
the application limits refer to the technical documentation, the nameplate or the
lubricant table (see chapter "Lubricant table (→ 2 149)").
– Make sure the environment contains no hazardous substances (oils, acids,
gases, vapors, dusts,...) or radiation.
• For special designs:
– Check if the gear unit/gearmotor is designed for the ambient temperatures. You
find the application limits on the nameplate.
• With helical-worm/SPIROPLAN®gear units:
– Note that no large external mass moments of inertia must be present, which
could exert a retrodriving load on the gear unit.
– Note the self-locking at η’ (retrodriving) < 0.5.
Calculation of η’: η’ = 2- 1/η
• Servomotor mounting:
– The drive may only be mounted if it is ensured that after the mounting the drive
will be sufficiently ventilated. Ventilation prevents heat build-up.
4.1.1 Required tools/resources

The following tools and resources are required for the mechanical installation:
• Wrench
21932786/EN – 05/2015
• Torque wrench for:

– Gear unit mounting
– Shrink disks
– Motor adapter AQH or EWH
– Input shaft assembly with centering shoulder
Prerequisites for installation 4
• Mounting device
• Compensation elements (shims and spacing rings)
• Fasteners for input and output elements
• Lubricant (e.g. NOCO® fluid)
• Threadlocker compound for input cover with centering shoulder (e.g. Loctite® 243)
INFORMATION
Standard parts are not included in the delivery.
4.1.2 Installation tolerances
Shaft end Flanges

Diameter tolerance according to DIN 748 Centering shoulder tolerance to DIN
42948
• ISO k6 for solid shafts with Ø ≤ 50 mm
• ISO j6 with b1 ≤ 230 mm
• ISO m6 for solid shafts with Ø > 50 mm
• ISO h6 with b1 > 230 mm
• ISO H7 for hollow shafts
• Centering bore in accordance with DIN
332, shape DR
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Installing the gear unit
4.2 Installing the gear unit
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to improper installation/disassembly
Severe personal injury and damage to property.
• Work on the gear unit only when the machine is not in use.
• Secure the drive unit against unintentional power-up.
• Prevent heavy component parts (e.g. shrink disks) against falling during installa-
tion/disassembly.
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to protruding gear unit parts.
Severe injuries
• Keep a sufficient safety distance to the gear unit/gearmotor.
NOTICE
Danger due to static overdetermination if gear units with foot (e.g. KA19/29B,
KA127/157B or FA127/157B) are mounted both via the torque arm and via the foot
plate.
Risk of injuries and damage to property.
• Especially with the KA.9B/T design, it is not permitted to use the foot plates and
the torque arm at the same time.
• Attach the KA 9B/T design only via the torque arm.
• Attach the K.9 or KA.9B design only via the foot plate.
• If you want to use foot plates and torque arms for mounting, contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
NOTICE
Damage to gear unit/gearmotor due to cold air currents. Condensed water in the
gear unit can cause damage.
Damage to property.
• Protect the gear unit from direct cold air currents.
INFORMATION
When installing the gear unit, make sure that the oil level and drain plugs as well as
the breather plugs are easily accessible!
Mounting position The gear unit or gearmotor is only allowed to be installed in the specified mounting po-
21932786/EN – 05/2015
sition. Observe the information on the nameplate. SPIROPLAN® gear units of sizes
W10-W30 do not depend on a particular mounting position.
Installing the gear unit 4
Oil fill volume Check the oil fill depending on the mounting position (for information on the fill quantity
refer to the nameplate or chapter "Lubricant fill quantities" (→ 2 151)). Control the oil
fill level at this opportunity. See chapter "Inspection/maintenance for the gear
unit" (→ 2 95). The gear units are filled with the required oil quantity at the factory.
There may be slight deviations at the oil level plug as a result of the mounting position,
which are permitted within the manufacturing tolerances.
Adjust the lubricant fill volumes and the position of the breather valve accord-
ingly in the event of a change of mounting position. Observe chapter "Lubricant fill
quantities" (→ 2 151) and chapter "Mounting Positions" (→ 2 110).
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of K
gear to M5 or M6 or between M5 and M6.
Please contact our SEW customer service if you want to change the mounting position
of size S47 – S97 helical-worm gear units to mounting position M2 or M3.
Submounting The support structure must have the following characteristics:
• Level
• Vibration damping
• Torsionally rigid
The following table shows the maximally permitted flatness defect for foot- and flange-
mounting (guide values based on DIN ISO 1101):
Gear unit size Flatness defect

≤ 67 max. 0.4 mm
77 – 107 max. 0.5 mm
137/147 max. 0.7 mm
157 – 187 max. 0.8 mm
Do not twist housing legs and mounting flanges against each other. Observe the per-
mitted overhung and axial forces. Observe chapter "Project Planning" in the Gear unit/
gearmotor catalog for calculating the permitted overhung and axial loads.
Screw quality Secure the gearmotors listed in the following table using quality 10.9 screws. Use suit-
able washers.
Gear unit Flange Ø in mm

RF37/R37F 120
RF47/R47F 140
RF57/R57F 160
FF/FAF77/KF/KAF77 250
RF147 450
RF167 550
RZ37 – RZ87 60ZR – 130ZR
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Secure the gearmotors not listed in the table using quality 8.8 screws.
Corrosion protec- Use plastic inserts (2 – 3 mm thick) if there is a risk of electrochemical corrosion be-
tion for screw con- tween the gear unit and the driven machine. The material used must have an electrical
nections leakage resistance < 109 Ω. Electrochemical corrosion can occur between various
metals, for example, cast iron and stainless steel. Also fit the screws with plastic
washers. Additionally ground the housing. Use grounding screws on the motor.
4.2.1 Tightening torques for retaining screws

Mount the gearmotors with the following tightening torques:
Screw/nut Tightening torque ± 10%
Strength class 8.8
Nm
M6 11
M8 25
M10 48
M12 86
M16 210
M20 410
M24 710
M30 1450
M36 2500
M42 4600
M48 6950
M56 11100
Mount the specified gearmotors in flange-mounted design with the following increased
tightening torques:
Flange Ø Gear unit Screw/nut Tightening torque ± 10%
mm Strength class 10.9
Nm
120 RF37 M6 16.5
140 RF37/RF47 M8 40.1
160 RF57 M8 40.1
450 RF147 M20 661
550 RF167 M20 661
60ZR RZ37 M8 40
70ZR RZ47 M8 40
80ZR RZ57 M10 79
95ZR RZ67 M10 79
110ZR RZ77 M10 79
130ZR RZ87 M12 137
250 FF77/KF77/ FAF77/KAF77 M12 137
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.2.2 Gear unit mounting
INFORMATION
If you use the gear unit in flange-mounted design or foot/flange-mounted design with
VARIGEAR® variable speed gear units, use screws of 10.9 quality and suitable wash-
ers for flange mounting on customer side.
To improve the friction contact between flange and mounting surface,
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends anaerobic gaskets or anaerobic glue.
Foot-mounted gear unit

The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units in foot-mounted design
depending on the gear unit type and size:
Gear unit type

Screw R/R..F RX F/FH..B/ K/KH..B/KV..B/ S W
FA..B KA..B
M6 07 - - 19 - 10/20
M8 17/27/37 - 27/37 29 37 30/37/47
M10 - 57 47 37/39/47/49 47/57 -
M12 47/57/67 67 57/67 57/67 67 -
M16 77/87 77/87 77/87 77 77 -
M20 97 97/107 97 87 87 -
M24 107 - 107 97 97 -
M30 137 - 127 107/167 - -
M36 147/167 - 157 127/157/187 - -
Gear unit with B14 flange-mounted design and/or hollow shaft

The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B14 flange and/or
hollow shaft depending on the gear unit type and size:
Screw Gear unit type
RZ FZ/FAZ/FHZ/ KZ/KAZ/KHZ/KVZ SA/SAZ/SHZ WA
FVZ
M6 07/17/27 – – 37 10/20/301)
M8 37/47 27/37/47 37/47 47/57 37
M10 57/67 – – – 47
M12 77/87 57/67/77 57/67/77 67/77 –
M16 – 87/97 87/97 87/97 –
M20 – 107/127 107/127 – –
M24 – 157 157 – –
1) For W30 gear units mounted directly to a CMP motor or mounted via an EWH.. adapter, the thread size
21932786/EN – 05/2015
is M8.
Gear unit with B5 flange

The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B5 flange depending
on the gear unit type, size and flange diameter:
Gear unit type

Flange Ø Screw RF/R..F/RM FF/FAF/ KF/KAF/ SF/SAF/SHF WF/WAF/
FHF/FVF KHF/KVF WHF
mm
80 M6 - - - - 10
110 M8 - - - - 20
120 M6 07/17/27 - - 37 10/20/30/37
120 M8 - - 19 - -
140 M8 07/17/27/37/47 - - - -
160 M8 07/17/27/37/47 27/37 19/37 37/47 30/37/47
160 M10 - - 29/39 - -
200 M10 37/47/57/67 47 29/47 57/67 -
200 M12 - - 49 - -
250 M12 57/67/77/87 57/67 57/67 77 -
300 M12 67/77/87 77 77 - -
350 M16 77/87/97/107 87 87 87 -
450 M16 97/107/137/147 97/107 97/107 97 -
550 M16 107/137/147/167 127 127 - -
660 M20 147/167 157 157 - -
4.2.3 Installation in damp locations or outdoors

Drives are supplied in corrosion-resistant designs with an according surface protection
coating for use in damp areas or outdoors.
• Repair damage to the paint work e.g. at the breather valve or the lifting eyes (see
"Painting the gear unit" (→ 2 30)).
• When mounting the motors onto AM, AQ adapters and to AR, AT start-up and fric-
tion couplings, seal the flange areas with a suitable sealant (e.g. Loctite® 574).
• Units installed outdoors must be protected from the sun. Provide for suitable pro-
tective devices such as covers or roofs. Avoid heat build-up.
• The system operator must ensure that no foreign objects (e.g. falling objects or
coverings) affect the operation of the gear unit.
4.2.4 Gear unit venting

21932786/EN – 05/2015
NOTICE
Dirt and dust in the environment affect the function of the breather valve.
• Check the breather valve function regularly and replace it if necessary.
• In case of high dirt and dust load use a breather filter instead of a breather valve.
The following table lists gear units that do not require venting:
Gear unit Mounting position

R..07 M1/M2/M3/M5/M6
R..17/R..27/F..27 M1/M3/M5/M6
W..10/W..20/W..30 M1– M6
W..37/W..47/ M1/M2/M3/M5/M6
K..19/K..29 M1/M2/M3/M5/M6
All other gear units are delivered with a breather valve suitable to the mounting posi-
tion and activated.
Exceptions:
1. The following gear units are delivered with a screw plug on the provided breather
hole:
• Gear units with pivoted mounting positions, if possible
• Gear units for inclined mounting
Before startup, replace the highest screw plug in the terminal box of the motor with
the breather valve provided.
2. For gear head units venting on the input end, a breather valve is supplied in a
plastic bag.
3. Enclosed gear units are delivered without a breather valve.
4. In some countries, the breather valve is installed, but not activated due to possible
pressure fluctuations during transport. In such cases the transport protection must
be removed. This activates the breather valve (see chapter "Activating the breather
valve" (→ 2 29)).
Activating the breather valve

Check whether the breather valve is activated. If the breather valve has not been acti-
vated, you must remove the transport protection device from the breather valve before
starting up the gear unit!
9007199466060043
Breather valve with transport protection

21932786/EN – 05/2015
211316875
Removing the transport protection
211314699
Activated breather valve
4.2.5 Painting the gear unit
NOTICE
Paint can block the breather valve and damage the sealing lips of the oil seals.
Damage to property.
• Thoroughly cover the breather valve and sealing lip of the oil seals with strips pri-
or to painting/re-painting.
• Remove the strips after painting.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit with solid shaft 4
4.3 Gear unit with solid shaft
4.3.1 Information about assembly
INFORMATION
Assembly of the shaft is easier if you first apply lubricant to the output element or
heat it up briefly (80 °C – 100 °C).
4.3.2 Assembling input and output elements
NOTICE
Damage to bearing, housing or shafts due to incorrect mounting
• Only use a mounting device for installing input and output elements (see chapter
"Using the mounting device" (→ 2 31)). Use the threaded centering bore at the
shaft end.
• Never force belt pulleys, couplings, pinions, etc. onto the shaft end by hitting
them with a hammer.
• In the case of belt pulleys, make sure the belt is tensioned correctly in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions.
• Make sure the transmission elements are balanced after fitting and do not give
rise to any impermissible radial or axial forces. For the approved values, refer to
the catalog "Gearmotors" or "Explosion-Proof Drives".
Using a mounting device

The following figure shows a mounting device for installing couplings or hubs on gear
unit or motor shaft ends. Should you be able to tighten the screw without any prob-
lems, you may not need the thrust bearing on the mounting device.
[1] [2]
[3]
211368587
[1] Gear shaft end [3] Coupling hub

[2] Thrust bearing
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Gear unit with solid shaft
Avoiding excessive overhung loads

To avoid high overhung loads, mount gears and sprockets according to figure B.
[1] [1]
[A] [B]
211364235
[1] Hub FX1 Overhung load at point X1

[A] Incorrect assembly [B] Correct assembly
4.3.3 Mounting of couplings
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to moving drive elements, such as belt pulleys or couplings, during
operation.
Risk of jamming and crushing.
• Equip the input and output elements with a touch guard.
Adjust the following misalignments according to the coupling manufacturer's specifica-

tions when mounting couplings:
a) Maximum and minimum clearance
b) Axial misalignment
c) Angular misalignment
a) b) c)
211395595
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units 4
4.4 Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
NOTICE
Damage to gear unit due to improper installation.
Damage to the gear unit
• Do not place torque arms under strain during installation.
• Always use bolts of quality 8.8 to fasten torque arms.
4.4.1 Mounting torque arms for parallel-shaft helical gear units

The following figure shows the toque support for parallel-shaft helical gear units.
c
[4] [3]
a ΔL
[1]
ød
[2]
øb +0.5
18014398720848395
[1] Screw a Washer width

[2] Washer b Rubber buffer inner diameter
[3] Nuts c Rubber buffer length in loose state
[4] Rubber buffer d Rubber buffer diameter
ΔL Rubber buffer preload in loose state
Proceed as follows:
1. Use screws [1] and washers [2] according to the following table.
2. Secure the screw connection with a nut [3].
3. Tighten the screw [1] until the preload "Δ L" of the rubber buffers is reached ac-
cording to the table:
Gear unit Washer Rubber buffer
a d b c ΔL
mm mm mm mm mm
F..27 /G 5 40 12.5 20 1
F..37 /G 5 40 12.5 20 1
F..47 /G 5 40 12.5 20 1.5
F..57 /G 5 40 12.5 20 1.5
F..67 /G 5 40 12.5 20 1.5
21932786/EN – 05/2015
F..77 /G 10 60 21.0 30 1.5

F..87 /G 10 60 21.0 30 1.5
F..97 /G 12 80 25.0 40 2
F..107 /G 12 80 25.0 40 2
F..127 /G 15 100 32.0 60 3
F..157 /G 15 120 32.0 60 3
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4.4.2 Mounting torque arms for helical-bevel gear unit K..19 – K..49
The following figure shows the torque support for the helical-bevel gear units
K..19 – K..49:
45°
B A
[1]
9007206972372491
[1] Bushing A Connection side

B Connection side
Observe the following points during assembly:
• Apply bearings to both sides of the bushing [1].
• Mount connection side B so that it mirrors side A.
• Use screws and tightening torques according to the following table:
Gear unit Screws Tightening torque ± 10 %

Nm
K..19 /T 4 x M8 × 20 – 8.8 25
K..29 /T 4 x M8 × 22 – 8.8 25
K..39/T 4 x M10 × 30 – 8.8 48
K..49/T 4 x M12 × 35 – 8.8 86
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.4.3 Mounting torque arms for helical-bevel gear unit K..37 – K..157
The following figure shows the torque support for the helical-bevel gear units K..37 –
K..157.
B A
[1]
9007199466103051
[1] Bushing A Connection side

B Connection side
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply bearings to both sides of the bushing [1].
2. Mount connection side B so that it mirrors side A.
3. Use screws and tightening torques according to the following table:
Nm
K..37 /T 4 × M10 × 25 – 8.8 48
K..47 /T 4 × M10 × 30 – 8.8 48
K..57 /T 4 × M12 × 35 – 8.8 86
K..67 /T 4 × M12 × 35 – 8.8 86
K..77 /T 4 × M16 × 40 – 8.8 210
K..87 /T 4 × M16 × 40 – 8.8 210
K..97 /T 4 × M20 × 50 – 8.8 410
K..107 /T 4 × M24 × 60 – 8.8 710
K..127 /T 4 × M36 × 130 – 8.8 2500
K..157 /T 4 × M36 × 130 – 8.8 2500
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4.4.4 Mounting torque arms for helical-worm gear units

The following figure shows the toque support for helical-worm gear units.
45º
[1]
9007199466232715
[1] Bushing
Proceed as follows:
Nm
S..37 /T 4 x M6 × 16 – 8.8 11
S..47 /T 4 x M8 × 25 – 8.8 25
S..57 /T 6 x M8 × 25 – 8.8 25
S..67 /T 4 x M12 × 35 – 8.8 86
S..77 /T 4 x M12 × 35 – 8.8 86
S..87 /T 4 x M16 × 45 – 8.8 210
S..97 /T 4 x M16 × 50 – 8.8 210
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.4.5 Mounting torque arms for SPIROPLAN® W gear units
The following figure shows the toque support for SPIROPLAN® W gear units.
45º
[1]
9007199466230539
[1] Bushing
Proceed as follows:
Nm
W..10 /T 4 x M6 × 16 - 8.8 11
W..20 /T 4 x M6 × 16 - 8.8 11
W..30 /T 4 x M6 × 16 - 8.8 11
W..37 /T 4 x M8 × 20 - 8.8 25
W..47 /T 4 x M10 × 20 - 8.8 48
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4.5 Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
INFORMATION
Concerning the configuration of the customer shaft, please also refer to the design
notes in the "Gearmotors" catalog.
4.5.1 Mounting the shaft-mounted gear unit

Proceed as follows:
1. Apply NOCO® fluid. Spread carefully.
®
O
C
O I
N U
L
F
®
O
C
O I
N U
L
F
9007199466257163
2. Install the shaft and secure it axially. For easier mounting, use a mounting device.
Following a description of the 3 mounting types, depending on the scope of deliv-
ery.
• Mount customer shaft (standard scope of delivery):
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
9007199466259339
[1] Short retaining screw [3] Washer

(standard scope of delivery) [4] Retaining ring
[2] Lock washer [5] Customer shaft
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft 4
• Mount customer shaft with contact shoulder using the SEW‑EURODRIVE as-
sembly/disassembly kit:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
9007199466261515
[1] Retaining screw [4] Retaining ring

[2] Lock washer [5] Customer shaft with contact shoulder
[3] Washer
• Mount customer shaft without contact shoulder using the SEW‑EURODRIVE

assembly/disassembly kit:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
9007199466263691

[2] Lock washer [5] Spacer tube
[3] Washer [6] Customer shaft without contact shoulder
3. Tighten the retaining screw to the appropriate torque. Observe the tightening tor-
ques specified in the following table.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
9007199466265867
Screw Tightening torque

Nm
M5 5
M6 8
M10/12 20
M16 40
M20 80
M24 200
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends that the customer shaft
should be lathed down between the 2 contact surfaces.
4.5.2 Remove the shaft-mounted gear unit

This description is only applicable when the gear unit was assembled using the
SEW‑EURODRIVE assembly/disassembly kit (see step 2 of "Mount the shaft-mounted
gear unit" (→ 2 38)).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
9007199466268043

[3] Washer [6] Customer shaft
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the retaining screw [1].
2. Remove parts [2] to [4] and, if applicable, the spacer tube [5].
3. Insert the forcing washer [8] and the fixed nut [7] from the SEW‑EURODRIVE as-
sembly/disassembly kit between the customer shaft [6] and the retaining ring [4]
(see "SEW‑EURODRIVE assembly/disassembly kit" (→ 2 42)).
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4. Re-install the retaining ring [4].
5. Re-install the retaining screw [1]. Press the gear unit off the shaft by tightening the
screw.
[1]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[6]
9007199466270219
[1] Retaining screw [7] Fixed nut

[4] Retaining ring [8] Forcing washer
[6] Customer shaft
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.5.3 Assembly/disassembly kit by SEW‑EURODRIVE
INFORMATION
The depicted assembly kit for attaching the customer shaft is a recommendation by
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• You must always check whether this design can compensate the present axial
loads.
• In particular applications (e.g. mounting agitator shafts), a different design may
have to be used to secure the shaft axially. You can use your own devices to se-
cure the shaft axially, if you ensure that these designs do not cause potential sour-
ces of combustion according to DIN EN 13463 (e.g. impact sparks).
The following figure shows the SEW‑EURODRIVE assembly/disassembly kit.
[1]
[7]
[8] [7]
[1]
9007199466272395
[1] Retaining screw [8] Forcing washer

[7] Locked nut for removal
For the assembly/disassembly kit part numbers necessary to order, refer to the follow-
ing table:
Gear unit type DH7 M1) C4 C5 C6 U-0.5 T-0.5 D3-0.5 L4 Part number of the
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm installation/
removal kit
WA..10 16 M5 5 5 12 4.5 18 15.7 50 643 712 5
WA..20 18 M6 5 6 13.5 5.5 20.5 17.7 25 643 682 X
KA..19, SA..37, WA..20, WA..30, WA..37, 20 M6 5 6 15.5 5.5 22.5 19.7 25 643 683 8
FA..27, KA..29, SA..47, WA..47, 25 M10 5 10 20 7.5 28 24.7 35 643 684 6
FA..37, KA..29, KA..37, KA..39, SA..47, 30 M10 5 10 25 7.5 33 29.7 35 643 685 4
21932786/EN – 05/2015
SA..57, WA..47
FA..47, KA..39, KA..47, KA..49, SA..57 35 M12 5 12 29 9.5 38 34.7 45 643 686 2
FA..57, FA..67, KA..49, KA..57, KA..67, SA..67 40 M16 5 12 34 11.5 41.9 39.7 50 643 687 0
SA..67 45 M16 5 12 38.5 13.5 48.5 44.7 50 643 688 9
FA..77, KA..77, SA..77 50 M16 5 12 43.5 13.5 53.5 49.7 50 643 689 7
FA..87, KA..87, SA..77, SA..87 60 M20 5 16 56 17.5 64 59.7 60 643 690 0
FA..97, KA..97, SA..87, SA..97 70 M20 5 16 65.5 19.5 74.5 69.7 60 643 691 9
FA..107, KA..107 80 M20 5 20 75.5 21.5 85 79.7 70 106 8211 2
Gear unit type DH7 M1) C4 C5 C6 U-0.5 T-0.5 D3-0.5 L4 Part number of the
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm installation/
removal kit
FA..107, KA..107, SA..97 90 M24 5 20 80 24.5 95 89.7 70 643 692 7
FA..127, KA..127 100 M24 5 20 89 27.5 106 99.7 70 643 693 5
FA..157, KA..157 120 M24 5 20 107 31 127 119.7 70 643 694 3
1) Retaining screw
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Shaft-mounted gear unit with shrink disk
4.6 Shaft-mounted gear unit with shrink disk

4.6.1 Mounting the shaft-mounted gear unit
NOTICE
Deformation of the hollow shaft due to tightening the clamping screws without first
installing the shaft.
Damages to the hollow shaft.
• Never tighten the screws without the shaft installed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Slightly loosen the locking screws. Do not remove the locking screws completely.
A B
9007199466274571
2. Carefully degrease the hollow shaft bore and the input shaft using a commercial
solvent.
9007199466276747
®
3. Only apply NOCO fluid to the input shaft around the bushing.
NOTICE
21932786/EN – 05/2015
The hollow shaft mounting system is without function if NOCO® fluid is applied di-
rectly to the bushing. When the input shaft is installed, NOCO® fluid can get into the
clamping area of the shrink disk.
Possible damage to property
• Never apply NOCO® fluid directly to the bushing. The clamping area of the shrink
disk must be absolutely free of grease.
Shaft-mounted gear unit with shrink disk 4
9007199466281099
4. Install the input shaft. Proceed as follows:

• Make sure that the outer rings of the shrink disk are plane-parallel.
• In case of a gear unit jousing with shaft shoulder, mount the shrink disk to stop at
the shaft shoulder.
• In case of a gear unit without shaft shoulder, mount the shrink disk with a distance
of 1 mm to 2 mm from the gear unit housing.
• Tighten the clamping screws with the specified tightening torque according to the
following table. Tighten the screws in several turns. Tighten screws one after the
other, not in diametrically opposite sequence.
1-2mm s>0mm
211542283
INFORMATION
The exact values for the tightening torques are shown on the shrink disk.
Gear unit type Clamping screws 10.9 Tightening torque

ISO 4014 / ISO 4017 Nm
21932786/EN – 05/2015
KH19/29 FH27 SH37 WH37 M5 5

KH37/47/ FH37/47/ SH47/57/
WH47 M6 12
57/67/77 57/67/77 67/77
KH87/97 FH87/97 SH87/97 – M8 30
KH107 FH107 – – M10 59
KH127/157 FH127/157 – – M12 100
KH167 M16 250
KH187 M20 470
Shaft-mounted gear unit with shrink disk
5. After installation, make sure the remaining gap "s" between the outer rings of the
shrink disk is > 0 mm.
6. To prevent corrosion, grease the outside of the hollow shaft around the shrink disk.

Proceed as follows:
1. To prevent the outer rings from jamming, loosen the clamping screws for a quarter
turn, one after the other.
2. Steadily loosen the clamping screws one after the other, but do not remove the
clamping screws completely.
3. If rust has formed on the shaft in front of the hub, remove the rust.
4. Remove the shaft or pull the hub off the shaft.
5. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
4.6.3 Cleaning and lubricating shaft-mounted gear units
INFORMATION
There is no need to dismantle removed shrink disks before they are reinstalled.
Proceed as follows:
1. If the shrink disk is dirty, clean and lubricate the shrink disk.
2. Lubricate the tapered surfaces. Use one of the following solid lubricants:
Lubricant (Mo S2) Sold as
Molykote 321 (lube coat) Spray
Molykote spray (powder spray) Spray
Molykote G Rapid Spray or compound
Aemasol MO 19P Spray or compound
Aemasol DIO-sétral 57 N (lube coat) Spray
3. Grease the clamping screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Shaft-mounted gear unit with TorqLOC 4
Shaft-
mounted
gear
with unit
TorqLOC
4.7 Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC®

4.7.1 Mounting a customer shaft without contact shoulder
Proceed as follows:
1. Clean the customer shaft and the inside of the hollow shaft. Ensure that all traces
of grease or oil are removed.
2. Install the stop ring and the bushing on the customer shaft.
211941003
3. Attach the Torque arm to the drive unit. Note the information in chapter "Torque
arm for shaft-mounted gear units" (→ 2 33).
5128549131
®
4. Apply NOCO fluid to the bushing. Spread carefully.
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
211938827
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Shaft-mounted gear unit with TorqLOC
5. Push the gear unit onto the customer shaft.
9007199466677643
6. Preassemble the torque arm. Do not firmly tighten the screws.
K..7
F..
S../ W .. /K..9
27021597976166155
7. Push the busing into the gear unit up to the stop.
9007199466686347
21932786/EN – 05/2015
8. Secure the bushing with the stop ring. Attach the stop ring to the bushing with the
respective tightening torque. Refer to the following table for the suitable tightening
torque.
9007199466741899
Type Tightening torque Nm
KT/FT ST/WT Nickel-plated (standard) Stainless steel
– 37 10 10
37 47 10 10
39/47 57 10 10
49/57/67 67 25 25
77 77 25 25
87 87 25 25
97 97 25 25
107 – 38 38
127 – 65 65
157 – 150 150
9. Make sure that all screws are loosened and slide the shrink disk onto the hollow
shaft.
9007199466744075
21932786/EN – 05/2015
10.Slide the counter bushing onto the customer shaft and into the hollow shaft.
UID O
®
FL OC
N
9007199466746251
11.Until the shrink disk is properly seated.

12.Tap lightly on the flange of the counter bushing to ensure that the socket is fitted
securely in the hollow shaft.
9007199466748427
13.Make sure that the customer shaft is seated in the counter bushing.
9007199466750603
21932786/EN – 05/2015
14.Manually tighten the screws of the shrink disk. Make sure that the outer rings of the
shrink disk are plane-parallel.
9007199466752779
15.Tighten the clamping screws with the specified tightening torque according to the
following table. Tighten the screws by working round several times from one bolt to
the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence).
> 0mm
18014398721495947
INFORMATION
Gear unit type Clamping screws 10.9 Tightening torque Nm

ISO 4014 / ISO 4017
Nickel-plated (standard) Stainless
steel
– – ST37 WT37 M5 4 5
KT37 FT37 ST47 WT47 M6 12 12
KT39/47/
FT47/57/67 ST57/67 - M6 12 12
49/57/67
KT77/87/97 FT77/87/97 ST77/87/97 – M8 30 30
KT107 FT107 – – M10 59 59
KT127 FT127 – – M12 100 100
KT157 FT157 – – M12 100 100
21932786/EN – 05/2015
16.After mounting, make sure the remaining gap "s" between the outer rings of the
17.Make sure, that the remaining gap between counter bushing and hollow shaft end,
as well as between bushing and stop ring is > 0 mm.
> 0 mm
> 0 mm
s
> 0 mm
18014400858143115
18.Tighten the torque arm. Note the information in chapter "Torque arm for shaft-
mounted gear units" (→ 2 33).
5129142283
4.7.2 Installation notes for customer shaft with contact shoulder

1. Clean the customer shaft and the inside of the hollow shaft. Ensure that all traces
of grease or oil are removed.
2. Attach the Torque arm to the drive unit. Note the information in chapter "Torque
21932786/EN – 05/2015
5128549131
3. Slide the bushing onto the customer shaft.
0 mm
2349377035
®
4. Apply NOCO fluid to the bushing. Spread carefully.
O
C
®
O D
N UI
L
F
2349367435
5. Push the gear unit onto the customer shaft.
5129650443
21932786/EN – 05/2015
6. Ensure that all screws have been loosened. Slide the shrink disk onto the hollow
shaft.
9007199466744075
7. Slide the counter bushing onto the customer shaft and into the hollow shaft.
UID O
®
FL OC
N
9007199466746251
8. Until the shrink disk is properly seated.

9. Tap lightly on the flange of the counter bushing to ensure that the socket is fitted
securely in the hollow shaft.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
9007199466748427
10.Make sure that the customer shaft is seated in the counter bushing.
9007199466750603
11.Manually tighten the screws of the shrink disk. Make sure that the outer rings of the
shrink disk are plane-parallel.
9007199466752779
12.Tighten the clamping screws with the specified tightening torque according to the
following table. Tighten the screws by working round several times from one bolt to
the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence).
INFORMATION
> 0mm
21932786/EN – 05/2015
18014398721495947
Tightening torque
in Nm
Gear unit type Clamping screws Nickel-plated Stainless steel
10.9 (standard)
ISO 4014 / ISO 4017
- - ST37 WT37 M5 4 5
KT37 FT37 ST47 WT47 M6 12 12
KT39/47/49/
FT47/57/67 ST57/67 - M6 12 12
57/67
KT77/97 FT77/97 ST77/97 - M8 30 30
KT107 FT107 - - M10 59 59
KT127 FT127 - - M12 100 100
KT157 FT157 - - M12 100 100
13.After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings of the
14.Make sure, that the remaining gap between counter bushing and hollow shaft end,
as well as between bushing and stop ring is > 0 mm.
> 0 mm
> 0 mm
s
> 0 mm
18014400858143115
15.Mount the torque arm and firmly tighten it. Note the information in chapter "Torque
21932786/EN – 05/2015
5129142283
CAUTION
Risk of burns caused by hot surfaces
Severe injuries
• Let the units cool down before working on them.
Proceed as follows:
1. To prevent the outer rings from jamming, loosen the clamping screws for a quarter
turn, one after the other.
2903644171
2. Unscrew the clamping screws evenly one after the other. Do not remove the
clamping screws completely.
3. Dismantle the conical steel bushing. If required, use the outer rings as pullers. Pro-
ceed as follows:
• Remove all the locking screws.
• Screw the respective number of screws in the tapped holes of the shrink disk.
• Support the inner ring against the gear unit housing.
• Pull off the conical steel bushing by tightening the screws.
4. Remove the gear unit from the shaft.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
2903780235
5. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
4.7.4 Cleaning and lubricating shaft-mounted gear units

There is no need to dismantle removed shrink disks before they are reinstalled.
• If the shrink disk is dirty, clean and lubricate the shrink disk.
• Lubricate the tapered surfaces with one of the following solid lubricants:
Lubricant (Mo S2) Sold as

Molykote 321 (lube coat) Spray
Molykote spray (powder spray) Spray
Molykote G Rapid Spray or compound
Aemasol MO 19P Spray or compound
Aemasol DIO-sétral 57 N (lube coat) Spray
• Grease the clamping screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting the cover 4
4.8 Mounting the cover
CAUTION
Injury due to assembly work during operation.
Injury
• Before you begin working on the unit, disconnect the motor from the power sup-
ply. Safeguard the drive against unintentional restart.
4.8.1 Mounting the rotating cover
1
662284299
1. Slide the rotating cover onto the shrink disk until it snaps in.
4.8.2 Mounting the fixed cover
1 2
21932786/EN – 05/2015
18497547
1. To fasten the cover, remove the plastic plug on the gear unit housing (see figure 1)
2. Use the delivered screws to mount the cover to the gear unit housing (see figure
2).
Mounting the cover
4.8.3 Operation without cover

In certain application cases, e.g. with a through-shaft, a cover cannot be installed. The
cover is not necessary if the system or unit manufacturer provides corresponding com-
ponents to guarantee for compliance with the required degree of protection. If this re-
sults in additional maintenance, the manufacturer has to describe this in the operating
instructions for the system or component.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Coupling of AM adapters 4
4.9 Coupling of AM adapters
4.9.1 Mounting the IEC adapter AM63 – 280/NEMA adapter AM56 – 365
NOTICE
Damage to adapter due to ingression of moisture when mounting a motor to the
adapter.
Damage to the adapter
• Seal the adapter with an anaerobic fluid seal.
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to apply NOCO® fluid to
the motor shaft before mounting the coupling half.
479
481
484
491⃰
A
A IEC AM63 – 280
NEMA ≥ AM182 NEMA ≤ AM145
18014398721581963
[1] Motor shaft [484] Key

[479] Coupling half [491] Spacer tube
[481] Set screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Clean the motor shaft and flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Remove the key from the motor shaft. Replace the key from the motor shaft with
the supplied key [484] (not AM63 and AM250).
21932786/EN – 05/2015
3. Heat the coupling half [479] to approx. 80 °C – 100 °C and push the coupling half
onto the motor shaft. Position as follows:
• IEC adapter AM63 – 225 until stop at motor shaft shoulder.
• IEC adapter AM250 – 280 to distance "A". The values for the distance "A" are lis-
ted in the following table.
• NEMA adapter with spacer tube [491] to distance "A." The values for the distance
"A" are listed in the following table.
Coupling of AM adapters
4. Secure the key and coupling half using the set screw [481] on the motor shaft. Re-
fer to the following table for the required tightening torque "TA".
5. Check the position of the coupling half. The values for the distance "A" are listed in
the following table.
6. Seal the contact surfaces between the adapter and motor using a suitable sealing
compound.
7. Mount the motor on the adapter. Ensure that the coupling claws of the adapter
shaft are engaged in the plastic cam ring.
IEC AM 63/71 80/90 100/112 132 160/180 200 225 250/280
A 24.5 31.5 41.5 54 76 78.5 93.5 139
TA 1.5 1.5 4.8 4.8 10 17 17 17
Thread M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
NEMA AM 56 143/145 182/184 213/215 254/256 284/286 324/326 364/365
A 46 43 55 63.5 78.5 85.5 107 107
TA 1.5 1.5 4.8 4.8 10 17 17 17
Thread M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Coupling of AM adapters 4
4.9.2 Permitted loads
NOTICE
Damages to gear unit due to impermissibly high loads when mounting a motor.
Damage to gear unit
• Note that the load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
FR
9007199273254411
Motor's center of gravity FR Overhung load

X Distance from adapter flange to the mid-
dle of the motor
Permitted loads for gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, and S..7:
Adapter type FR1) in N

IEC NEMA x1) in mm IEC adapter NEMA adapter
AM63/71 AM56 77 530 410
AM80/90 AM143/145 113 420 380
AM100/112 AM182/184 144 2000 1760
AM1322) AM213/21522) 1600 1250
186
AM132.. AM213/215 4700 3690
AM160/180 AM254/286 251 4600 4340
AM200/225 AM324-AM365 297 5600 5250
AM250/280 - 390 11200 –
1) As the center of gravity distance x increases, the maximum permitted weight of

the attached motor R_max must be reduced linearly. If this center of gravity distance
x is reduced, the maximum permitted weight FR_max cannot be increased.
2) Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Coupling of AM adapters
Permitted loads for gear unit series SPIROPLAN® W37 – W47
Adapter type FR1) in N

IEC NEMA x1) in mm IEC adapter NEMA adapter
AM63/71 AM56 115 140 120
AM80/90 AM143/145 151 270 255
1) As the center of gravity distance x increases, the maximum permitted weight of

the attached motor R_max must be reduced linearly. If this center of gravity distance
x is reduced, the maximum permitted weight FR_max cannot be increased.
4.9.3 AM adapter with AM../RS backstop

Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. In case of a
wrong direction of rotation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation. Backstops have a minimum lift-off
speed depending on the size (see following table).
NOTICE
If the speed is below the minimum lift-off speed of the drive, the backstop is subject
to wear and heats up.
• In nominal operation the lift-off speed of the drive must not drop below the speci-
fied minimum.
• During startup or braking, the lift-off speed of the drive may drop below the mini-
mum levels.
Type Maximal locking torque of the back- Minimum lift-off speed

stop in Nm in 1/min
AM80/90/RS, 65 820
AM143/145/RS
AM100/112/RS, 425 620
AM182/184/RS
AM132/RS, 850 530
AM213/215/RS
AM160/180/RS, 1450 480
AM254/286/RS
AM200/225/RS, 1950 450
AM324-365/RS
AM250/280/RS 1950 450
21932786/EN – 05/2015
AQ. adapter coupling 4
4.10 AQ. adapter coupling
4.10.1 Mount adapter AQA80 – 190 (with keyway)/Adapter AQH80 – 190 (without keyway)
NOTICE
Damage to adapter due to ingression of moisture when mounting a motor to the
adapter.
Damage to the adapter
• Seal the adapter with an anaerobic fluid seal.
INFORMATION
For AQA: To avoid contact corrosion, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to apply NO-
CO® fluid to the motor shaft before mounting the coupling half.
For AQH: Using NOCO® fluid is not approved.
AQA AQH
[479]
[479]
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
A A
9007199466855947
[1] Motor shaft [479] Coupling half

[3] Washer [6] Customer shaft
Proceed as follows:
1. Clean the motor shaft and flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Design AQH: Loosen the screws of the coupling half [479] and loosen the conical
connection.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
3. AQA/AQH design: Heat the coupling half to approx. 80 °C – 100 °C and push the
coupling half onto the motor shaft until distance "A". The values for the distance "A"
are listed in the table in chapter "Setting standards and tightening tor-
ques (→ 2 66)".
4. Design AQH: Tighten the screws of the coupling half evenly in diametrically oppo-
site sequence, working around several times. The values for the tightening torque
"TA" are listed in the table in chapter "Setting standards and tightening tor-
ques (→ 2 66)".
AQ. adapter coupling
5. AQA design: Secure the coupling half using the set screw (see figure).
6. Check the position of the coupling half. The values for the distance "A" are listed in
the table in chapter "Setting standards and tightening torques (→ 2 66)".
7. Mount the motor onto the adapter, making sure that the claws of the two coupling
halves engage in each other.
ð The force that must be applied when joining the two coupling halves is dissipa-
ted after final assembly, so there is no risk of any axial load being applied to ad-
jacent bearings.
4.10.2 Setting standards and tightening torques

Type Coupling size Distance A Screws Tightening torque TA
mm Nm
AQA AQH AQA AQH
AQA /AQH 80 /1 /2 /3 44.5
AQA /AQH 100 /1 /2 39
19 M5 6 x M4 2 4.1
AQA /AQH 100 /3 /4 53
AQA /AQH 115 /1 /2 62
AQA /AQH 115 /3 62
24 M5 4 x M5 2 8.5
AQA /AQH 140 /1 /2 62
AQA /AQH 140 /3 /4 74.5
AQA /AQH 160 /1 28 74.5 M8 8 x M5 10 8.5
AQA /AQH 190 /1 /2 76.5
AQA /AQH 190 /3 38 100 M8 8 x M6 10 14
CAUTION
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
• The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
The following figure shows the permitted force application points for the permitted
maximum weights:
X
21932786/EN – 05/2015
FR
9007199273254411

X Distance from adapter flange -
motor center
AQ. adapter coupling 4
Type x1) FR1)
mm N
AQ80 77 370
AQ100/1/2 113 350
AQ100/3/4 113 315
AQ115 113 300
AQ140/1/2 144 1550
AQ140/3 144 1450
AQ160 144 1450
AQ190/1/2; Flange Ø: 160 186 1250
AQ190/3; Flange Ø: 160 186 1150
AQ190/1/2 186 3750
AQ190/3 186 3400
1) Maximum load values for connection screws of strength class 8.8. As the center
of gravity distance x increases, the maximum permitted weight of the attached
motor R_max must be reduced linearly. As the center of gravity distance x decrea-
ses, the maximum permitted weight FR_max must not be increased.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
EWH adapters
4.11 EWH adapters

4.11.1 Adapter EWH01 – 03
[479]
[229]
[230]
°
60
[1]
4557485195
[1] Motor shaft [230] Motor shaft sleeve

[229] Clamping screws [479] Coupling half
1. Clean and de-grease the hollow shaft hole of the coupling half [479], the motor
shaft sleeve [230], and the motor shaft [1].
2. Insert the motor shaft sleeve [230] into the coupling half [479] so that the slot of the
motor shaft sleeve [230] is at a 60° angle to the two clamping screws [229].
3. Push the coupling half [479] on the shoulder of the motor shaft to the stop.
4. Tighten the clamping screws [229] one after the other with a suitable torque
wrench, first to 25% of the tightening torque specified in the following table.
5. Tighten the two clamping screws [229] to the full specified tightening torque.
Adapter type Motor shaft Number of clamping Tightening torque of Wrench size
diameter screws the clamping screw
in mm in Nm in mm
EWH01 9 2 5.6 3
EWH01 11 2 10 4
21932786/EN – 05/2015
EWH02 11; 14; 16 2 10 4

EWH03 11; 14; 16 2 10 4
EWH adapters 4
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
• The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
maximum weights:
X
FR
9007199273254411

dle of the motor
Type x1) FR1)

mm N
EWH01 113 40
EWH02 120 56
EWH03 120 56
21932786/EN – 05/2015
AD Input shaft assembly
4.12 AD Input shaft assembly

Observe section "Mounting the input and output components" (→ 2 31) when installing
input components.
4.12.1 Mounting the cover with motor platform AD../P
212119307
[1] Motor platform [4] Nut

[2] Threaded bolt (only AD6/P / AD7/P) [5] Threaded column
[3] Support (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
To mount the motor and to adjust the motor platform proceed as follows:
1. Set the motor platform [1] to the required mounting position by evenly tightening
the adjusting nuts [4].
2. If necessary, remove the eyebolt/lifting eye of the helical gear unit to reach the low-
est adjustment position. Touch up any damage to the paint work.
3. Align the motor on the motor platform [1], so that the shaft ends are in line. Attach
the motor.
4. Mount the drive component onto the input side shaft end and the motor shaft.
5. Align drive component, shaft end and motor shaft. If necessary correct the motor
position again.
6. Put on the traction elements (V-belt, chain, etc.) and apply a preload by evenly ad-
justing the motor platform [1]. Do not stress the motor platform and the columns
against each other when doing this.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
7. To fasten the threaded columns [5] tighten the nuts [4] that are not used for adjust-
ment.
AD Input shaft assembly 4
4.12.2 Special aspects of AD6/P and AD7/P
Proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the nuts on the threaded bolts [2] before adjustment, to allow the threa-
ded bolts [2] to move axially in the support [3] without restriction.
2. Only tighten the nuts, when the final adjustment position is reached.
INFORMATION
Do not adjust the motor platform [1] via the support [3].
4.12.3 AD../ZR input shaft assembly with centering shoulder

Mounting applications on the input shaft assembly with centering shoulder.
1. Prepare screws of a suitable length for attaching the application. The following fig-
ure shows the screw length l= t + a. Round off the result to the next smaller
standard length.
9007199466862475
a Thickness of the application s Retaining thread (see table)

t Screw-in depth (see table)
2. Remove the retaining screw from the centering shoulder.

3. Clean the contact surface and the centering shoulder.
4. Clean the threads of the new screws and apply a threadlocker compound (e.g.
Loctite® 243) to the first few threads.
5. Place the application on the centering shoulder. Tighten the retaining screws with
the specified tightening torque "TA" (see table).
Type Screw-in Retaining Tightening torque TA

depth t thread s for connection screws
of strength class 8.8
mm
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Nm
AD2/ZR 25.5 M8 25
AD3/ZR 31.5 M10 48
AD4/ZR 36 M12 86
AD5/ZR 44 M12 86
AD6/ZR 48.5 M16 210
AD Input shaft assembly
Type Screw-in Retaining Tightening torque TA

depth t thread s for connection screws
of strength class 8.8
mm
Nm
AD7/ZR 49 M20 410
AD8/ZR 42 M12 86
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Damage to gear unit due to impermissibly high loads when mounting a motor.
Damage to gear unit
• Note that the load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
maximum weights:
x
FR
9007199466864651

dle of the motor
Type x1) FR1)

mm N
AD2/ZR 193 330
AD3/ZR 274 1400
21932786/EN – 05/2015
AD4/ZR2) 1120
361
AD4/ZR 3300
AD5/ZR 487 3200
AD6/ZR 567 3900
AD7/ZR 663 10000
AD Input shaft assembly 4
Type x1) FR1)
mm N
AD8/ZR 516 4300
2) Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
4.12.4 Cover with backstop AD../RS

Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. In case of a
wrong direction of rotation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation. Backstops have a minimum lift-off
speed depending on the size (see following table).
NOTICE
If the speed is below the minimum lift-off speed of the drive, the backstop is subject
to wear and heats up.
• In nominal operation the lift-off speed of the drive must not drop below the speci-
fied minimum.
• During startup or braking, the lift-off speed of the drive may drop below the mini-
mum levels.
Type Maximum locking torque of the Minimum lift-off speed

backstop 1/min
Nm
AD2/RS 65 820
AD3/RS 425 620
AD4/RS 850 530
AD5/RS 1450 480
AD6/RS 1950 450
AD7/RS 1950 450
AD8/RS 1950 450
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Accessory equipment
4.13 Accessory equipment

4.13.1 AR.. and AT.. centrifugal and friction couplings
AR.. friction coupling

Drives with a slip clutch consist of a standard gear unit and motor/variable speed gear-
motor with an adapter installed between them. This adapter accommodates the slip
clutch. In gearmotors with a double gear unit, the slip clutch may be located between
the first and second gear units. On delivery, the slip torque is set individually according
to the drive selection.
The following figure shows a drive with slip clutch and W speed monitor:
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
1901048587
[1] Trip cam [4] Friction lining [7] Friction hub

[2] Incremental encoder [5] Cup spring [8] Speed monitor
[3] Driving disk [6] Slotted nut
W speed monitor:
The speed monitor is used with constant-speed gearmotors and is connected to the
incremental encoder in the adapter.
WS slip monitor:
The slip monitor is used with the following components:
• Speed-controlled motors with speed sensor
• VARIGEAR® variable-speed gear units
INFORMATION
For further information about the AR.. coupling, refer to the "Start-up coupling and
slip clutch AR.. and AT.." operating instructions.
AT.. hydraulic centrifugal coupling

Hydraulic centrifugal couplings are fluid couplings based on the Föttinger principle.
They consist of 2 hinged hemispheres with blades separated by a tight gap.
The applied torque is transmitted by the inertial force of the streaming fluid. This fluid
21932786/EN – 05/2015
circulates within a closed circuit, between the pump wheel (primary side) [12] on the
driving shaft (motor shaft) and the turbine wheel (secondary side) [9] on the driven
shaft (gear unit input shaft).
Accessory equipment 4
The following figure shows the structure of a drive with hydraulic centrifugal coupling:
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[15]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
9007201155884683
[1] Gear unit [6] Extended housing com- [11] Operating fluid (hydraulic oil)
plete
[2] Basic flange complete [7] Motor [12] Pump wheel
[3] Backstop (optional) [8] Filler plug [13] Elastic components
[4] Intermediate flange [9] Turbine wheel [14] Flexible connection coupling
INFORMATION
For detailed information about the AT.. coupling, refer to the "Start-up coupling and
slip clutch AR.. and AT.." operating instructions.
4.13.2 Diagnostic units DUV and DUO
Diagnostic unit DUV

The DUV30A diagnostic unit evaluates vibration signals using frequency analysis
methods. A micromechanical acceleration sensor is used in the unit. Data can be re-
corded, processed and evaluated locally without any expert knowledge.
The DUV30A diagnostic unit is suitable for early recognition of rolling bearing damage
or imbalance. The continuous monitoring function represents a reliable and cost-effec-
tive solution compared to intermittent methods.
The DUV30A has been designed as a combined sensor that can be used as normal-
speed unit or slow-speed unit. The only difference is the measuring time in the firm-
ware and the resulting frequency range.
The following figure depicts the diagnostic unit DUV30A:
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4428331403
Accessory equipment
INFORMATION
For further information on the evaluation unit, refer to the manual "DUV30A Diagnos-
tic Unit".
Diagnostic unit DUO

DUO10A comprises a diagnostic unit and a temperature sensor. The temperature sen-
sor (PT100 or PT1000 resistance sensor) is positioned in the gear unit oil to record the
oil's temperature. The diagnostic units uses the oil temperature values to calculate the
remaining service life of the oil.
The diagnostic unit continuously records the gear unit temperature and calculates the
remaining service life for the selected oil type immediately. For this purpose, the diag-
nostic unit must be supplied with a 24 V voltage supply. Times when the diagnostic
unit is switched off are not included in the forecast.
The following figure shows the DUO10A diagnostic unit:
4719800843
INFORMATION
For further information on the evaluation unit, refer to the manual "DUV30A Diagnos-
tic Unit".
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.13.3 Gear unit heater for gear unit series R..7, F..7, and K..7
An oil heating can be required in order to allow for a smooth startup in the event of a
cold start at low ambient temperatures. An oil heating is available with an external or
an integrated thermostat depending on the gear unit design.
The heater is screwed into the gear unit housing and is controlled via a thermostat.
The limit temperature of the thermostat below which the oil must be heated, is set de-
pending on the respective lubricant.
The following figure shows a gear unit with heater and external thermostat:
[1]
[2]
2060553483
[1] Thermostat [2] Heater
INFORMATION
For further information regarding gear unit heaters, refer to the addendum "Gear unit
heaters for gear unit series R..7, F..7 and K..7" to the operating instructions "Gear
unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W".
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Accessory equipment
4.13.4 Flange coupling

Flange couplings [1] are rigid couplings for connecting 2 shafts [2].
Flange couplings are suitable for operation in both directions of rotation, but cannot
compensate any shaft misalignments.
Torque between shaft and coupling is transmitted via a cylindrical interference fit. The
two coupling halves are mounted together at the flanges. The couplings are equipped
with several disassembly bores [3] for removing the interference fit hydraulically.
[2] [1] [2]
[3]
27021601961007627
[1] Rigid flange coupling [3] Disassembly bores

[2] Customer and gear shaft
INFORMATION
For detailed information about the rigid flange coupling, refer to the "Gear Unit Series
R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, and SPIROPLAN® W – Rigid flange coupling" addendum to the
operating instructions.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.13.5 Regreasing the labyrinth seal
Labyrinth seals are used to protect the oil seal in case of very high dust load or other
abrasive substances.
Output shaft
The following figure shows an example of a regreasable radial labyrinth seal (tacon-
ite).
• Single oil seal with radial labyrinth seal
• Used in very dusty environments with abrasive particles
9007204406135947
INFORMATION
The gear shaft must rotate during relubrication.
Position of greasing points

Regreasable sealing systems are usually equipped with taper greasing nipples ac-
cording to DIN 71412 A. Relubrication must be carried out at regular intervals. The
greasing points are located near the output shaft, see following figure:
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4986644747
Accessory equipment
Refilling grease
Regreasable sealing systems can be refilled with lubricating grease. Use moderate
pressure to force grease into each lubrication point until new grease leaks out of the
sealing gap.
Used grease, including contaminants and sand, is in this way pressed out of the seal-
ing gap.
INFORMATION
Immediately remove the old grease that leaked out.
Inspection and maintenance intervals

Observe the following inspection and maintenance intervals for the regreasing of laby-
rinth seals:
Time interval What to do?

Every 3000 operating hours, at Fill regreasable sealing systems with grease.
least every 6 months
Technical data
Sealing and rolling bearing grease

The table shows the greases recommended by SEW‑EURODRIVE for an operating
temperature of -40 °C to +80 °C:
Manufacturer Grease
Fuchs Renolit CX TOM 15 OEM
Aral Eural Grease EP2
Aral
Aral Aralube BAB EP2
Aral Oil
INFORMATION
If a customer wants to use a grease that is not listed in the above table, the customer
has to make sure that it is suitable for the intended application.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
4.13.6 Oil drain valve
The gear unit is equipped with an oil drain plug as standard. An oil drain valve can op-
tionally be installed, that enables attaching a drain pipe for changing the gear unit oil.
4984750475
4.13.7 Oil expansion tank

The oil expansion tank equalizes oil volume fluctuations in the system due to changing
temperatures. If the gear unit temperature rises, part of the expanding oil volume can
flow into the oil expansion tank. If the gear unit temperature falls again, the oil flows
back into the system. Thus the gear unit is completely filled with oil in all operating
states.
The following figure shows an example of a gearmotor in mounting position M4:
4986667147
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Accessory equipment
4.13.8 Oil-air cooler for splash lubrication /OAC

If the thermal rating of the naturally cooled gear unit is not sufficient, an oil-air cooling
system can be used.
The cooling system is delivered without electrical wiring and piping as a complete unit
on a base frame for separate installation.
The standard scope of delivery of the cooling system includes:
• Pump with directly mounted asynchronous motor
• Oil-air heat exchanger
• Temperature switch with 2 switching points
SEW‑EURODRIVE uses oil-air cooling systems for standard gear units in sizes OAC
005 and OAC 010.
The following figure shows an example of a standard parallel-shaft helical gear unit
next to an oil-air cooler.
[5]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[4] [3]
[1]
9007208235792395
[1] Motor for pump and fan [4] Suction pipe connections
[2] Oil-air heat exchanger [5] Pressure pipe connections
[3] Temperature switch with 2 switch- [6] Option: Oil expansion tank connection
ing points
INFORMATION
For more information on the cooling system, refer to the addendum to the operating
instructions "Gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7 and SPIROPLAN® W: Oil-air
cooler for splash lubrication /OAC".
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Startup
Checking the oil level 5
5 Startup
CAUTION
Damage to the gear unit due to improper startup.
• Before startup, always check that the oil level is correct. Refer to the unit's name-
plate for lubricant fill quantities.
• The oil level plugs and oil drain plugs, as well as the breather plugs and breather
valves must be freely accessible.
• The most important technical data is provided on the nameplate. Additional data
relevant for operation is available in drawings and the order confirmation.
• After having gear unit setup, ensure that all retaining screws are tight.
• Make sure that the alignment has not changed after tightening the mounting ele-
ments.
• Prior to startup, ensure that rotating shafts as well as couplings are equipped with
suitable protective covers.
• If the gear unit has an oil sight glass to monitor the oil level, the oil sight glass must
be protected against damage.
• It is essential that there is no open fire or risk of sparks when working on the gear
unit.
• Protect the gear unit from falling objects.
• Remove transport protection prior to startup.
• Strictly observe the safety notes in the individual chapters.
5.1 Checking the oil level

Before startup, make sure that the oil level corresponds to the mounting position. Ob-
serve section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" (→ 2 95).
If the gear unit is equipped with an oil sight glass, you can also determine the oil level
at the oil sight glass.
NOTICE
Damage to the gear unit due to oil leaking from the damaged oil sight glass.
Possible damage to the unit.
• Attach a protective device to prevent the oil sight glass from being damaged by
mechanical impacts.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
1. Observe the notes in chapter "General information (→ 2 88)".

2. Check the oil level at the oil sight glass according to the following figure:
5 Startup
Pseudo-leakage at shaft seals
[1]
4158756363
[1] The oil level must be within this range.
3. Proceed as follows if the oil level is too low:
• Open the respective oil fill plug, see chapter "Inspection/maintenance for the
gear unit (→ 2 95)".
• Fill in new oil of the same type through the oil fill plug up to the mark.
• Screw in the oil fill plug.
Before startup, make sure that the oil level corresponds to the mounting position. Ob-
serve section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" (→ 2 95).
5.2 Pseudo-leakage at shaft seals

Due to their operating principle, seals between moving surfaces at shaft passages
cannot be completely tight, as a lubricant film must form during operation. The lubri-
cant film between shaft and sealing lip keeps the development of heat and wear on
the sealing system to a minimum and ensures the intended service life. The optimum
sealing properties are only achieved after the run-in phase.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Helical-worm gear units and SPIROPLAN® W gear units
Startup
5
Helical-
worm gear
N® Wand
SPIROPLA
units
5.3 Helical-worm gear units and SPIROPLAN® W gear units

5.3.1 Run-in period
SPIROPLAN® and helical-worm gear units require a run-in period of at least 48 h be-
fore reaching their maximum efficiency. A separate run-in period applies for each di-
rection of rotation if the gear unit is operated in both directions of rotation. The table
shows the average power reduction during the run-in period.
Helical-worm gear units
Worm
i range η reduction
1-start Approx. 50 ... 280 About 12 %
4-start - -
SPIROPLAN® gear units
W10 / W20 / W30 W37 / W47

i range η reduction i range η reduction
Approx. 35 ... 75 About 15 %
Approx. 20 ... 35 About 10 %
Approx. 10 ... 20 About 8 % Approx. 30...70 About 8 %
About 8 About 5 % Approx. 10 ... 30 About 5%
About 6 About 3 % Approx. 3...10 About 3%
5.4 Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units

No special startup instructions are required for helical, parallel shaft helical and heli-
cal-bevel gear units providing the gear units have been installed in accordance with
section "Mechanical Installation" (→ 2 22).
21932786/EN – 05/2015
5 Startup
Gear units with backstop
5.5 Gear units with backstop
NOTICE
Operating the motor in the blocking direction could destroy the backstop.
Possible damage to property
• Do not start up the motor in the blocking direction. Before motor startup, make
sure the current supply of the motor for the direction of rotation is connected ac-
cordingly.
• For control purposes, operation in blocking direction with half the output torque is
permitted once.
The purpose of a backstop is to prevent unwanted directions of rotation. During opera-

tion, the backstop permits rotation only in the specified direction.
CCW CW
A
CW
CCW
659173899
The direction of rotation is specified as viewed onto the output shaft (LSS):
• CW rotation
• CCW rotation
The permitted direction of rotation is indicated on the housing.
5.6 Components made of elastomers with fluorocarbon rubber
CAUTION
Health risk due to dangerous gases, vapors, and residue created by heating fluoro-
carbon rubber to > 200 °C.
Damage to health.
• Make sure that components made of fluorocarbon rubber are not exposed to
temperatures > 200 °C. Remove the components, if necessary.
• Avoid inhaling fluorocarbon rubber gases and vapors as well as skin and eye
21932786/EN – 05/2015
contact.
• Avoid contact with the cooled-down fluorocarbon rubber, as dangerous residue
has formed it was heated.
Startup
Components made of elastomers with fluorocarbon rubber 5
Under normal operating conditions and at temperatures up to 200 °C, fluorocarbon
rubber is very stable and safe. However, when heated to more than 300 °C, e.g. by
fire or the flame of a cutting torch, fluorocarbon rubber forms harmful gases and va-
pors as well as residue.
The following components of R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, and SPIROPLAN® W gear
units can contain elastomers made of fluorocarbon rubber:
• Oil seals
• Breather valve
• Screw plugs
The user is responsible for safe handling during the service life including eco-friendly
disposal.
SEW‑EURODRIVE is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
General information
Observe the following notes regarding inspection/maintenance work at the gear unit:
WARNING
• Disconnect the gearmotor from the power supply before you start working on the
unit.
• Prevent the gearmotor from starting up unintentionally (for example, by locking
the key switch or removing the fuses from the current supply).
WARNING
Risk of injury if preloaded shaft connections are loosened.
• Before releasing any shaft connections, make sure there is no active torsional
torque present that could lead to tension within the system.
WARNING
Risk of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries
• Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it.
• Carefully remove the oil level plug and the oil drain plug.
NOTICE
Loss of lubricant qualities due to filling of wrong gear unit oil.
• Do not mix different synthetic lubricants and do not mix synthetic and mineral lu-
bricants.
• As standard lubricant use mineral oil.
NOTICE
Ingression of water at the sealing lip of the oil seal due to cleaning the gear unit with
a high-pressure cleaning device.
Damage to oil seals
• Do not clean the variable-speed gear unit with a high-pressure cleaning device.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
General information 6
NOTICE
Damage to gear unit due to ingress of foreign objects during maintenance and in-
spection work.
Destruction of the gear unit.
• Prevent foreign particles from entering into the gear unit during maintenance and
inspection work.
NOTICE
Damage to gear unit due to improper inspection and maintenance work.
• It is important that you observe the notes in this chapter.
INFORMATION
• Maintain the inspection and maintenance intervals. This is necessary to ensure
operational safety.
• The position of the oil level plug, oil drain plug and the breather valve depends on
the mounting position. Refer to the mounting position sheets in chapter "Mounting
positions".
• Perform safety and functional check following all maintenance and repair work.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Wearing parts
6.2 Wearing parts

Gearing If the SEW‑EURODRIVE design criteria and the intervals for inspection and mainte-
nance are observed, the gearing components are wear-free after the run-in period.
The worm gearing is an excepted from this for constructional reasons. The amount of
material abrasion on the worm gear tooth flanks varies depending on the operating
conditions. The main influencing factors are:
• Speed
• Load
• Operating temperature
• Lubricant (type, viscosity, additives, pollution)
• Operating frequency
For information on the worm gearing service life under certain operating conditions,
contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Rolling bearing Rolling bearing, adapter and input shaft assembly have a limited service life, even un-
der ideal operating conditions. This nominal bearing service life is a solely statistical
value. The actual service life of an individual bearing may deviate greatly from this val-
ue. The main influencing factors are:
• Speed
• Equivalent bearing load
• Operating temperature
• Lubricant supply of the bearing
• Misalignment under operating load
Therefore the rolling bearings must be inspected regularly. Note the respective inspec-
tion and maintenance intervals in chapters Inspection/maintenance inter-
vals (→ 2 92), Lubricant change intervals (→ 2 93), Maintenance of
AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapter (→ 2 93) and AD input shaft assembly mainte-
nance (→ 2 94).
For information on the nominal bearing service life under certain operating conditions,
contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Lubricants Lubricants are subject to aging. Their service life is limited depending on the load con-
ditions.
The service life significantly depends on the oil operating temperature. The dependen-
cy of lubricant change intervals and operating temperature is depicted in the figure in
chapter Lubricant change intervals (→ 2 93).
Oil seals Oil seals are contact seals that are used to seal unit housings at emerging elements,
such as shafts, from the environment. Oils seals are wear parts with a service life that
is influenced by various factors, such as:
• Shaft speed and circumferential velocity at the sealing lip
• Ambient conditions (temperature, dust, humidity, pressure, chemicals, radiation)
21932786/EN – 05/2015

• Surface quality of the sealing
• Lubricant supply of the sealing
• Oil seal material
Wearing parts 6
Due to the various influencing factors it is not possible to predict the service life.
Therefore the oil seals must be inspected regularly. Note the respective inspection
and maintenance intervals in chapters Inspection/maintenance intervals (→ 2 92),
Lubricant change intervals (→ 2 93), Maintenance of AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapt-
er (→ 2 93) and AD input shaft assembly maintenance (→ 2 94).
Cam ring/ The couplings used in the AM, AL, AQ. and EWH adapters are designed to be posi-
Coupling ring tive, puncture-proof and low-maintenance claw couplings. They have a an impact and
vibration-absorbing cam ring (AM, EWH) or coupling ring (AQ., AL). The service life of
cam ring/coupling ring is influenced by various factors, such as:
• Ambient conditions (temperature, chemicals, radiation)
• Operational conditions (starting frequency, impact characteristics)
Note the respective inspection and maintenance intervals in chapters Maintenance of
AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapter (→ 2 93).
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Inspection/maintenance intervals
6.3 Inspection/maintenance intervals

The following gear units are lubricated for life:
• Helical gear units R07, R17, R27
• Parallel-shaft helical gear unit F27
• SPIROPLAN® gear units
If necessary touch up or renew the surface protection/ corrosion protection coating.
The following table lists the obligatory intervals and the corresponding measures:

• Every 3000 hours of operation, at least • Check oil and oil level
every 6 months • Check running noise for possible
bearing damage
• Visual inspection of the seals for
leakage
• For gear units with a torque arm:
Check and replace the rubber buf-
fers, if necessary
• Depending on the operating conditions • Change mineral oil
(see illustration below), every 3 years at
• Replace rolling bearing grease (rec-
the latest
ommendation)
• according to oil temperature
• Replace oil seal (do not install it in
the same track)
• Depending on the operating conditions • Change synthetic oil
(see illustration below), every 5 years at
• Replace rolling bearing grease (rec-
the latest
ommendation)
• according to oil temperature
• Replace oil seal (do not install it in
the same track)
• Varying (depending on external factors) • Touch up or renew the surfaces/anti-
corrosion coating
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Lubricant change intervals 6
6.4 Lubricant change intervals
The following image depicts the change intervals for standard gear units under normal
ambient conditions. In case of special designs under severe/aggressive ambient con-
ditions change the lubricant more frequently.
30000
[h]
25000
[3]
20000
15000
[4]
[1]
10000
[5]
5000
0
70 80 90 100 110 115 120
[2] [°C]
9007199273470603
[1] Operating hours [3] CLP PG

[2] Sustained oil bath tempera- [4] CLP HC / HCE (food grade lubricants for the
ture food industry)
• Average value per oil type [5] CLP / HLP / E (lubricants made of biodegrada-
at 70 °C ble oils for agriculture, forestry, and water man-
agement)
6.5 Maintenance of AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapter


• Every 3000 hours of opera- • Check the running noises to detect possible bear-
tion, at least every 6 ing damage.
months • Visually check the adapter for leakage.
• After 10000 operating • Check the rotational clearance.
hours • Visual check the cam ring (AM, EWH) or coupling
ring (AQ., AL).
21932786/EN – 05/2015
• Change the bearing grease.

• Change the oil seal. Do not mount it in the same
track.
AD input shaft assembly maintenance
6.6 AD input shaft assembly maintenance


• Every 3000 hours of opera- • Check the running noises to detect possible bear-
tion, at least every 6 ing damage.
months • Visually check the adapter for leakage.
• After 10000 operating • Change the bearing grease.
hours • Change the oil seal. Do not mount it in the same
track.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit 6
6.7 Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6.7.1 Checking the oil level and changing the oil
The procedure when checking the oil level and changing the oil depends on gear unit
type, size and mounting position. Determine the key letter (A, B, C, D or E) in the fol-
lowing table in regard of gear unit type and size. The key letter indicates the procedure
for the respective gear unit, that can be found in the second table.
Gear unit Size Code letter for chapter "Checking the oil level and changing the oil"
type
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
R..07 – 27 B
R..37 / R..67 A
R R..47 / R..57 A B A
R..77 – 167 A
RX..57– 107 A
F..27 B
F
F..37 – 157 A
K..19 / K..29 C
K K..39 / K49 A
K..37 – 187 A
S..37 C
S
S..47 – 97 A
W..10 – 30 B
W
W..37 – 47 D E D
Code letter Chapter "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" Reference
• Helical gear units...
• Parallel-shaft helical gear units...
A: • Helical-bevel gear unit ...K..39 / K..49, K..37 – 187 (→ 2 96)
• Helical-worm gear units... S..47 – 97
With oil level plug
• Helical gear units...
• Parallel-shaft helical gear units...
B: (→ 2 98)
• SPIROPLAN® gear units...
Without oil level plug, with cover plate
21932786/EN – 05/2015
• Helical-worm gear units S..37

C: • Helical-bevel gear units K..19 / K..29 (→ 2 102)
Without oil level plug, without cover plate
• SPIROPLAN® W..37 / W..47
D: (→ 2 105)
In mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
Code letter Chapter "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" Reference
®
• SPIROPLAN W..37 / W..47...
E: (→ 2 107)
In mounting position M4 without oil level plug and cover plate
For notes on the mounting positions, refer to chapter "Mounting Positions (→ 2 110)".
You cannot check the oil level of gear units in pivoted mounting position. The gear
units are delivered with the correct oil level. Observe the designations and fill quanti-
ties on the nameplate if you have to change the oil.
6.7.2 A: Helical, parallel-shaft helical, helical-bevel and helical-worm gear units with oil level plug
Checking the oil level at the oil level plug

Proceed as follows to check the oil level of the gear unit:
1. Observe the notes in chapter "Information on gear unit inspection/mainte-
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Determine the position of the oil level plug and the breather valve using the mount-
ing position sheets. See chapter "Mounting positions" (→ 2 110).
3. Place a container underneath the oil level plug.
4. Slowly remove the oil level plug. Small amounts of oil may leak out as the permit-
ted maximum oil level is higher than the lower edge of the oil level bore.
5. Check the oil level according to the following figure and the corresponding table.
[1]
[2]
Ø
Oil X max.
min. X
634361867
[1] Oil level bore X min/max oil level

[2] Ideal oil level
Ø oil level bore Approved oil level fluctuation x

mm
M10 x 1 1.5
M12 x 1.5 2
M22 x 1.5 3
M33 x 2 4
21932786/EN – 05/2015
M42 x 2 5
6. Proceed as follows if the oil level is too low:
• Fill in fresh oil of the same type (contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary) via
the breather bore, up to the lower edge of the oil level bore.
• Re-insert the breather valve.
7. Screw in the oil level plug again.
Checking the oil via the oil drain plug

Proceed as follows to check the gear unit oil:
1. Observe the notes in section "Information on gear unit inspection/mainte-
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug using the mounting position sheets. See
chapter "Mounting positions" (→ 2 110).
3. Remove a little oil from the oil drain plug.
4. Check the oil consistency:
• Viscosity
• If you can see that the oil is heavily contaminated, SEW‑EURODRIVE recom-
mends to change the oil even if this is outside the service intervals specified in
"Inspection and maintenance intervals" (→ 2 92).
5. Check the oil level. See section "Checking the oil level via the oil level
plug" (→ 2 96).
Changing the oil via the oil drain plug and the breather valve
WARNING
Severe injuries.
• Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it. Due to the better flow-
ability, the gear unit oil should still be warm so that the gear unit can be drained
best.

nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug, the oil level plug and the breather valve
using the mounting position sheets. See chapter "Mounting positions" (→ 2 110).
3. Place a container underneath the oil drain plug.
4. Remove the oil level plug, the breather valve and the oil drain plug.
5. Drain the oil completely.
6. Re-insert the oil drain plug.
7. Fill in fresh oil of the same type (contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary) via the
breather bore. Do not mix different synthetic lubricant.
• Observe the oil quantity according to the specifications on the nameplate or ac-
cording to the mounting position. See chapter "Lubricant fill quantities".
• Check the oil level at the oil level plug.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
8. Re-insert the oil level plug and the breather valve.
6.7.3 B: Helical, parallel shaft helical, SPIROPLAN® gear units without oil level plug with cover
plate
Checking the oil level via the cover plate

For gear units without oil level bore, the oil level is checked via the cover plate open-
ing. Proceed as follows:
1. Observe the notes in section "Information on gear unit inspection/mainte-
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. To position the cover plate on the top, place the gear unit in the following mounting
position:
• R07 - R57 in M1 mounting position
• F27 in M3 mounting position
• W10 - W30 in M1 mounting position
3. Loosen the screws [1] of the cover plate [2] and remove the cover plate [2] and the
corresponding gasket [3] (see following figure).
[1] [2]
[3]
9007199273384203
4. Determine the vertical distance "x" between oil level and sealing surface of the
gear unit housing (see following figure).
90°
X
21932786/EN – 05/2015
9007199273387275
5. Compare the determined value "x" to the max. distance between oil level and seal-
ing surface of the gear unit housing specified in the following table. Adjust the fill
level if required.
Gear unit type Max. distance x in mm between oil level and sealing sur-
face of the gear unit housing for mounting position
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
R07 2-stage 52 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1
3-stage 49 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1
R17 2-stage 63 ± 1 18 ± 1 46 ± 1 18 ± 1 46 ± 1 46 ± 1
3-stage 58 ± 1 11 ± 2 40 ± 2 11 ± 2 40 ± 2 40 ± 2
R27 2-stage 74 ± 1 22 ± 1 45 ± 1 22 ± 1 45 ± 1 45 ± 1
3-stage 76 ± 1 19 ± 1 42 ± 1 19 ± 1 42 ± 1 42 ± 1
R47 2-stage – – – – 39 ± 1 –
3-stage – – – – 32 ± 1 –
R57 2-stage – – – – 32 ± 1 –
3-stage – – – – 28 ± 1 –
F27 2-stage 78 ± 1 31 ± 1 72 ± 1 56 ± 1 78 ± 1 78 ± 1
3-stage 71 ± 1 24 ± 1 70 ± 1 45 ± 1 71 ± 1 71 ± 1
Irrespective of mounting position
W10 12 ± 1
W20 19 ± 1
W30 31 ± 1
6. Close the gear unit after the oil level check:
• Re-attach the gasket of the cover plate. Make sure that the sealing surfaces are
clean and dry.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
• Screw on the cover plate. Tighten the cover plate screw connections working
from the inside to the outside. Tighten the cover plate screw connections in the
sequence depicted in the following figure. Tighten the cover plate screw con-
nections with the specified tightening torque according to the following table.
Repeat the tightening procedure until the screws are properly tightened. To
avoid damaging the cover plate, use only impulse wrenches or torque wrench-
es. Do not use impact screwdrivers.
7 8
1 2
5 6 1 2 6 8
7 5
2
3 4
1 2
1 2 1
3 4 3
3 4 4 3 5 4
5 6
A B C D E
9007199273390731
Gear unit type Figure Retaining Tightening Minimum tighten-

thread torque TN ing torque Tmin
Nm Nm
R/RF07 E M5 6 4
R/RF17/27 D
R/RF47/57 A M6 11 7
F27 B
W10 C M5 6 4
W20 C
M6 11 7
W30 A
Checking the oil via cover plate

Proceed as follows to check the gear unit oil:
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil level
via the cover plate" (→ 2 98).
3. Take an oil sample via the cover plate opening.
4. Check the oil consistency.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
• Viscosity
5. Check the oil level. See section "Checking the oil level via the cover
plate" (→ 2 98).
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according
to section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate".
Changing the oil via the cover plate
WARNING
Severe injuries.
best.

nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to chapter "Checking the oil level
via the cover plate".
3. Completely drain the oil into a container via the cover plate opening.
cover plate. Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
• Pour in the oil as specified on the nameplate or in accordance with the mount-
ing position. See chapter "Lubricant fill quantities".
5. Check the oil level.
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according
to chapter "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (→ 2 98).
21932786/EN – 05/2015
6.7.4 C: Helical-worm gear units S..37 and helical-bevel gear units K..19/K..29 without oil level
plug and cover plate
Checking the oil level via screw plug

The gear units S..37, K..19, and K..29 are not equipped with an oil level plug or a cov-
er plate. This is why the oil level is checked via the control bore.
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Place the gear unit in the mounting position stated in the following table. Thus the
control bore always points upwards.

S..37 M5/M6
K19/29 M6
3. Remove the screw plug [1] as shown in the following figure.
[1]
18655371
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the
gear unit housing. Vertically pull the dipstick out of the control bore, as shown in
the following figure.
90°
21932786/EN – 05/2015
18658699
5. Determine the size of the section "x" of the dipstick covered with lubricant using a
slide-gauge as depicted in the following figure.
18661771
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting
position specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick

type M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
K..19 33 ± 1 33 ± 1 33 ± 1 35 ± 1 33 ± 1 33 ± 1
K..29 50 ± 1 50 ± 1 50 ± 1 63 ± 1 50 ± 1 50 ± 1
S..37 10 ± 1 24 ± 1 34 ± 1 37 ± 1 24 ± 1 24 ± 1
7. Re-insert and tighten the screw plug.
Checking the oil via the screw plug

nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Open the screw plug of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil level
via screw plug".
3. Take an oil sample via the screw plug bore.
• Viscosity
5. Check the oil level. See previous section.
Changing the oil via the screw plug
WARNING
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Severe injuries.
best.

nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Open the screw plug of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil level
via screw plug".
3. Completely drain the oil via the screw plug bore.
control bore. Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
• Observe the oil quantity specified on the nameplate or according to the mount-
ing position. Observe section "Lubricant fill quantities".
5. Check the oil level.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
6.7.5 D: SPIROPLAN® W..37/W..47 in mounting position M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug

Proceed as follows to check the oil level of the gear unit:
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Set up the gear unit in M1 mounting position.
3. Slowly remove the oil level plug (see following figure). Small amounts of oil may
leak out.
787235211
4. Check the oil level according to the following figure.

[1]
[2]
Ø
Oil X max.
min. X
634361867
[1] Oil level bore [2] Ideal oil level
Ø oil level bore Fluctuation x for minimum and maximum

fill level in mm
M10 x 1 1.5
5. In case the oil level is too low, fill in fresh oil of the same type (contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary) via the oil level bore, up to the lower edge of the
oil level bore.
6. Screw in the oil level plug again.
21932786/EN – 05/2015

Proceed as follows to check the oil of the gear unit:
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Remove some oil at the oil level plug.

• Viscosity
Changing the oil at the oil level plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
best.

nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position. See chapter "Mounting posi-
tions" (→ 2 110).
3. Place a container underneath the oil level plug.
4. Remove the oil level plugs on the A and B-side of the gear unit.
6. Re-insert the lower oil level plug.
upper oil level plug. Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
• Observe the oil quantity according to the specifications on the nameplate or ac-
cording to the mounting position. See chapter "Lubricant fill quantities".
• Check the oil level according to chapter "Checking the oil level via oil level
plug".
8. Re-insert the upper oil level plug.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
6.7.6 E: SPIROPLAN® W..37 / W..47 in mounting position M4 without oil level plug and cover plate
Checking the oil level via screw plug

The W37 / W47 gear units are not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This
is why the oil level is checked via the control bore.
nance" (→ 2 88).
tions" (→ 2 110).
3. Remove the screw plug.
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the
gear unit housing. Mark the point on the dipstick where it exits the gear unit. Pull
out the dipstick vertically (see following figure).
A B
784447371
5. Determine the section "x" between the wetted part and the marking using a caliper
9007200039761803
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting
position specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x mm of the dipstick

21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting position during check

Gear unit type M5 M6
Lying on the A-side Lying on the B-side
W37 in M4 mounting posi- 37 ± 1 29 ± 1
tion
Oil level = wetted section x mm of the dipstick

Mounting position during check
Gear unit type M5 M6
Lying on the A-side Lying on the B-side
W47 in M4 mounting posi- 41 ± 1 30 ± 1
tion
Checking the oil via the screw plug

Proceed as follows to check the oil of the gear unit:
nance" (→ 2 88).
2. Remove a little oil at the oil screw plug.
3. Check the oil consistency:
• Viscosity
Changing the oil via the screw plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
best.

nance" (→ 2 88).
tions" (→ 2 110).
3. Place a container underneath the screw plug.
4. Remove the screw plugs on the A and B-side of the gear unit.
6. Re-insert the lower screw plug.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
upper screw plug. Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.

• For the required oil quantity, refer to the nameplate or chapter "Lubricant fill
quantities".
• Check the oil level according to chapter "Checking the oil level via oil level
plug".
8. Re-insert the upper screw plug.
6.7.7 Replacing the oil seal
NOTICE
Damage to oil seal when mounted below 0 °C.
Damage to oil seal.
• Store oil seals at ambient temperatures over 0 °C.
• If necessary, heat the oil seal before mounting it.
Proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that there is a sufficient grease reservoir between the dust lip and sealing
lip, depending on the gear unit design.
2. If you use double oil seals, the space has to be filled with grease for one third.
6.7.8 Painting the gear unit
NOTICE
Ingress of paint at breather valve and sealing lips of the oil seal during painting or re-
painting of the gear unit.
Damage to oil seal and breather valve.
• Thoroughly cover the breather valve and sealing lip of the oil seals with strips pri-
or to painting.
• Remove the strips after painting.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
7 Mounting positions
Designation of the mounting positions
7.1 Designation of the mounting positions
SEW‑EURODRIVE distinguishes between the gear unit mounting positions M1 – M6.
The following figure shows the gearmotor in the 6 mounting positions:
M6
M6
M2 M2
M1 M1
M5 M5
M4 M4
M3 M3
R..
M6 M6
M1 M1
M2 M2
M5 M5
M4 M4
M3 M3
F..
M2 M2
M1
M1
M6 M6
M5 M5
M4 M4
21932786/EN – 05/2015
K..
M3 M3
S..
W..
45035996292514699
Mounting positions
Churning losses 7
7.2 Churning losses
Churning losses may occur in some mounting positions. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE
*(→ XY) in case of the following combinations:
Mounting position Gear unit type Gear unit size Input speed
rpm
M2, M4 R 97 ... 107 > 2500
> 107 >1500
M2, M3, M4, M5, F 97 ... 107 > 2500
M6
> 107 > 1500
K 77 ... 107 > 2500
> 107 > 1500
S 77 ... 97 > 2500
7.3 Mounting position MX

Mounting position MX is available for all gear units of the R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7
and SPIROPLAN® W series.
For mounting position MX, the gear units are delivered with the maximally possible
amount of oil and sealed with oil screw plugs. A breather valve is included with each
drive. The oil fill volume must be adapted according to the mounting position of the
gear unit. Customers will also have to mount the enclosed breather valve at the proper
location depending on the mounting position (see section "Mounting position
sheets (→ 2 112)").
Check for the correct oil level, as described in chapter "Oil level check and oil
change" (→ 2 95).
7.4 Universal mounting position M0

SPIROPLAN® W10 – W30 gearmotors can be ordered with M0 universal mounting po-
sition as an option. Gear units with mounting position M0 are filled with the standard
oil quantity.
These gear units are entirely enclosed due to their small size and have no breather
valve. Customers can use the gear unit universally in every mounting position (M1 –
M6) without having to take any measures prior to startup.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions of SPIROPLAN® gear units
Mounting
positions
gear of
SPIROPLA
N®
units
7.5 Mounting positions of SPIROPLAN® gear units
NOTICE
SPIROPLAN® gearmotors of sizes W10 – W30 cannot be equipped with breather
valves, oil level plugs or oil drain plugs.
INFORMATION
SPIROPLAN® gearmotors are independent on the mounting position, except for W37
– W47 in M4 mounting position. However, mounting positions M1 to M6 are also
shown for SPIROPLAN® gearmotors for a complete overview.
7.6 Mounting position sheets

7.6.1 Key
The following table shows the symbols used in the mounting position sheets and what
they mean:
Icon Meaning
Breather valve
Oil level plug
Oil drain plug
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
Mounting position sheets 7
7.6.2 Mounting positions of helical gearmotors
RX57-RX107
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
Mounting position sheets
RXF57-RXF107
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
Mounting positions
R07-R167
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
RF07-RF167, RZ07-RZ87
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
Mounting positions
R07F-R87F
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
7.6.3 Mounting positions of parallel-shaft helical gearmotors
F/FA..B/FH27B-157B, FV27B-107B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
Mounting positions
FF/FAF/FHF/FZ/FAZ/FHZ27-157, FVF/FVZ27-107
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
FA/FH27-157, FV27-107, FT37-97
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
Mounting positions
7.6.4 Mounting positions of helical-bevel gearmotors
K/KA..B/KH19B-29B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
KF..B/KAF..B/KHF19B-29B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
KA..B/KH19B-29B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
KF/KAF/KHF19-29
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
KA/KH19-29
21932786/EN – 05/2015
K39-49
For front-end mounting:

21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
KF/KAF39-49
21932786/EN – 05/2015
KA/KT39-49
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
K/KA..B/KH37B-157B, KV37B-107B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
K167-187, KH167B-187B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
Mounting positions
KF/KAF/KHF/KZ/KAZ/KHZ37-157, KVF/KVZ37-107
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
KA/KH37-157, KV37-107, KT37-97
* (→ 2 111)
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
KH167-187
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
7.6.5 Mounting positions of helical-worm gearmotors
S37
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
S47-S97
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
SF/SAF/SHF37
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
SF/SAF/SHF/SAZ/SHZ47-97
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
SA/SH/ST37
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
SA/SH/ST47-97
21932786/EN – 05/2015
* (→ 2 111)
7.6.6 Mounting positions of SPIROPLAN® gearmotors
W10-30
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
WF10-30
21932786/EN – 05/2015
WA10-30
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
W/WA..B/WH37B-47B
21932786/EN – 05/2015
WF/WAF/WHF37-47
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Mounting positions
WA/WH/WT37-47
21932786/EN – 05/2015
8 Technical data
Extended storage
8 Technical data
8.1 Extended storage
INFORMATION
For storage periods longer than 9 months, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends the "ex-
tended storage" gear unit type. Gear units in this design are designated with a corre-
sponding label.
For gear units of the "extended storage" design, the following measures are taken:
• A VCI anti-corrosion agent (volatile corrosion inhibitors) is added to the lubricant.
Please note that this VCI anti-corrosion agent is only effective in a temperature
range of -25 °C to +50 °C.
• The flange contact surfaces and shaft ends are also treated with an anti-corrosion
agent.
Observe the storage conditions specified in the following table for extended storage.
8.1.1 Storage conditions

Observe the storage conditions specified in the following table for extended storage:
Climate zone Packaging1) Storage2) Storage duration

• Packed in contain-
ers Up to 3 years with regu-
• Roofed lar checks of the pack-
• With desiccant and • Protected against rain and snow aging and moisture indi-
moisture indicator cator (rel. humidity
sealed in the plas- • Shock-free
< 50%)
Temperate tic wrap
(Europe, USA, • Under roof and enclosed at constant
Canada, China temperature and atmospheric humid- 2 years or more with
and Russia, ex- ity (5 °C < ϑ < 50 °C, < 50% relative regular inspections
cluding tropical humidity) • Check for cleanness
zones) • No sudden temperature variations and mechanical
Open
damage during the
• Controlled ventilation with filter (free
inspection
from dust and dirt)
• Check corrosion pro-
• No aggressive vapors
tection
• No shocks
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Technical data
Extended storage 8
Climate zone Packaging1) Storage2) Storage duration
• Packed in contain-
ers
• With desiccant and
Up to 3 years with regu-
moisture indicator • Roofed lar checks of the pack-
sealed in the plas-
• Protected against rain and snow aging and moisture indi-
tic wrap
• Shock-free cator (rel. humidity
• Protected against < 50%)
Tropical insect damage and
(Asia, Africa, mildew by chemi-
Central and cal treatment
South America, • Under roof and enclosed at constant
Australia, New temperature and atmospheric humid-
Zealand exclud- ity (5 °C < ϑ < 50 °C, < 50% relative 2 years or more with
ing temperate humidity) regular inspections
zones) • Check for cleanness
• No sudden temperature variations
and mechanical
Open • Controlled ventilation with filter (free damage during the
from dust and dirt) inspection
• No aggressive vapors • Check corrosion pro-
• No shocks tection
• Protected against insect damage
1) The packaging must be carried out by an experienced company using the packaging materials that have been explicitly specified for
the particular application.
2) SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to store the gear units according to the mounting position.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
8 Technical data
Lubricants
8.2 Lubricants
Unless a special arrangement is made, SEW‑EURODRIVE supplies the drives with a
lubricant fill adapted for the specific gear unit and mounting position. The mounting po-
sition (M1 – M6, see chapter "Mounting positions (→ 2 110)") must be specified in the
order. You must adapt the lubricant fill in case of any subsequent changes made to
the mounting position, see chapter "Lubricant fill quantities (→ 2 151)".
8.2.1 Bearing greases

The gear unit rolling bearings are given a factory-fill with the greases listed below.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends re-greasing the rolling bearings with a grease filling
at the same time as changing the oil.
Ambient temperature Manufactur- Type

er
Gear unit rolling -40 °C to +80 °C Fuchs Renolit CX-TOM 151)
bearings
-40 °C to +80 °C Klüber Petamo GHY 133 N
-40 °C to +40 °C Castrol Castrol Optileb GR
FS 2
-20 °C to +40 °C Fuchs Plantogel 2S
Oil
1) Bearing grease based on semi-synthetic base oil.
INFORMATION
The following grease quantities are required:
• For fast-running bearings (gear unit input side): Fill the cavities between the
rolling elements one-third full with grease.
• For slow-running bearings (gear unit output end): Fill the cavities between the
rolling elements two-thirds full with grease.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Technical data
Lubricants 8
8.2.2 Lubricant table
The lubricant table on the following page shows the permitted lubricants for
SEW‑EURODRIVE gear units.
Key to lubricant table
CLP PG = Polyglycol (W gear units, conforms to USDA-H1)

CLP HC = Synthetic hydrocarbons
E = Ester oil (water hazard class 1 (German regulation – "WKG")
HCE = Synthetic hydrocarbons + ester oil (USDA - H1 certification)
HLP = Hydraulic oil
= Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic roller bearing grease)
1) Helical-worm gear units with PG oil: please consult SEW-EURODRIVE

2) Special lubricant for SPIROPLAN® gear units only
3) Use SEW fB ≥ 1.2
4) Pay attention to critical starting behavior at low temperatures.
5) Low-viscosity grease
6 Ambient temperature
7) Bold
Lubricant for the food industry (food grade oil)
Biodegradable oil (lubricant for agriculture, forestry, and fisheries)

Oil
21932786/EN – 05/2015
150
8
6)
Oil ISO,NLGI Mobil®
°C -50 0 +50 +100 DIN (ISO) Tribol Optimol TO T A L
Standard Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala BP Energol Klüberoil Tribol Optigear BM 220 Renolin
R.. -15 +40 CLP (CC) VG 220 Meropa 220 Carter EP 220
XP 220 S2 G 220 GR-XP 220 GEM 1-220 N 1100/220 CLP 220
Lubricants
Mobil Shell Omala BP Enersyn Klübersynth Synlube Tribol Renolin

-20 +80 CLP PG VG 220 Optiflex A 220 Carter SY 220
Glygoyle 220 S4 WE 220 SG-XP 220 GH 6-220 CLP 220 800/220 PG 220
Mobil Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Tribol Optigear Renolin Unisyn
K37-187 -20 +60 CLP HC VG 220 Synthetic X 220 Carter SH 220
SHC 630 S4 GX 220 GEM 4-220 N EP 220 1510/220 CLP 220
Lubricant table
(HK..) Mobil Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Optigear

4) -40 +40 CLP HC VG 150
Renolin Unisyn Carter SH 150
SHC 629 S4 GX 150 GEM 4-150 N EP 150 Synthetic X 150 CLP 150
Technical data
-20
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala BP Energol Klüberoil Tribol Optigear Renolin
+25 CLP (CC) VG 150 Meropa 150 Carter EP 150
XP 150 S2 G 150 GR-XP 150 GEM 1-150 N 1100/150 BM 100 CLP 150
Mobil Shell Omala Renolin Unisyn
-40 +20 CLP HC VG 68
SHC 626 S4 GX 68 CLP 68
F..
Mobil Klüber-Summit Cetus
-40 +0 CLP HC VG 32 Optilieb HY 32 Renolin Unisyn Dacnis SH 32
SHC 624 HySyn FG-32 PAO 46 OL 32
Standard Klübersynth
K..19 - 4) +60 CLP PG VG 460
-20 GH 6-460
K..49 4) -20 +60 H1 PG VG 460 Klübersynth
UH1 6-460
Standard Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala BP Energol Klüberoil Tribol Optigear Renolin
0 +40 CLP (CC) VG 680 Meropa 680 Carter EP 680
XP 680 S2 G 680 GR-XP 680 GEM 1-680 N 1100/680 BM 680 SEW 680
Mobil Glygoyle Shell Omala BP Enersyn Klübersynth Synlube Tribol Optiflex Renolin
1) -20 +80 CLP PG VG 680 680 S4 WE 680 SG-XP 680 GH 6-680 CLP 680 800/680 A 680 PG 680
S..(HS..)
Mobil Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Optigear Renolin Unisyn
-20 +60 CLP HC VG 460
CLP 460
Carter SH 460
SHC 634 S4 GX 460 GEM 4-460 N EP 460 Synthetic X 460
INFORMATION
4) Mobil Shell Omala Klübersynth Pinnacle Optigear Renolin Unisyn
-40 +30 CLP HC VG 150 Carter SH 150
SHC 629 S4 GX 150 GEM 4-150 N EP 150 Synthetic X 150 CLP 150
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala BP Energol Klüberoil Tribol Optigear Renolin

-20 +10 CLP (CC) VG 150 Meropa 150 Carter EP 150
XP 150 S2 G 150 GR-XP 150 GEM 1-150 N 1100/150 BM 150 CLP 150
1) Mobil Shell Omala BP Enersyn Klübersynth Synlube Tribol Renolin Carter SY 220
-20 +40 CLP PG VG 220 Optiflex A 220
Glygoyle 220 S4 WE 220 SG-XP 220 GH 6-220 CLP 220 800/220 PG 220
-40 +20 Mobil Shell Omala Renolin Unisyn

CLP HC VG 68
SHC 626 S4 GX 68 CLP 68
Mobil Klüber-Summit Cetus
-40 0 CLP HC VG 32 Alphasyn T32 Renolin Unisyn Dacnis SH 32
SHC 624 HySyn FG-32 PAO 46 OL 32
+40 CLPHC Klüberoil Optileb Cassida

R.. -10 VG 460
NSF H1 4UH1-460 N GT 460 Fluid GL 460
K37-187 Klüberoil Optileb Cassida
-20 +30 VG 220
(HK..) 4UH1-220 N GT 220 Fluid GL 220
0
Klüberoil Optileb Cassida
F.. -40 VG 68 4UH1-68 N HY 68 Fluid HF 68
S..(HS..) Klüberbio Plantogear
-20 +40 E VG 460
Oil CA2-460 460 S
may be necessary to contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.

W..(HW..) 2) Standard SEW Klüber SEW
-20 +40 VG 460
PG HT-460-5
Mobil Synth
SAE 75W90
4) -40 +10 API GL5 Gear Oil
(~VG 100) 75 W90
Klübersynth
3) -20 +60 H1 PG VG 460
UH1 6-460
PS.F.. -20 +80 CLP PG VG 220
GH 6-220
H1 PG Klübersynth
-20 +60 VG 460
UH1 6-460
CLP HC VG 32 Mobil
-40 0 SHC 624
Assembly and Operating Instructions – Gear unit series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W
Standard Mobilgear 600
-10 +40
CLP (CC) VG 220
PS.C.. XP 220
5) DIN NLGI 00 Mobillux
-20 +40 51 818 EP 004
DIN Klübersynth
-20 +40 NLGI 1 UH1 14-151
51 818
Mobil
-40 0 CLP HC VG 32
SHC 624
BS.F.. -20 +60 CLP PG VG 220 GH 6-220
Klübersynth
+60 H1 PG
54043198373448075
-20 VG 460
This lubricant recommendation in no way represents a guarantee as to the quality of

the lubricant delivered by each respective supplier. Each lubricant manufacturer is re-
sponsible for the quality of their product. Thus the lubricant table is not binding. It
UH1 6-460
01 751 09 04
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Technical data
Lubricants 8
8.2.3 Lubricant fill quantities
INFORMATION
The specified fill quantities are only given as a guideline. The precise values vary
depending on the number of stages and gear ratio. When filling, it is essential to
check the oil level plug since it indicates the precise oil volume.
The following tables show guide values for lubricant fill quantities in relation to the
mounting position M1 – M6.
Helical (R) gear units

R.., R..F
Gear unit Fill quantity in liters
M11) M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
R07 0.12 0.20
R17 0.25 0.55 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.40
R27 0.25/0.40 0.70 0.50 0.70 0.50
R37 0.30/0.95 0.85 0.95 1.05 0.75 0.95
R47 0.70/1.50 1.60 1.50 1.65 1.50
R57 0.80/1.70 1.90 1.70 2.10 1.70
R67 1.10/2.30 2.40 2.80 2.90 1.80 2.00
R77 1.20/3.00 3.30 3.60 3.80 2.50 3.40
R87 2.30/6.0 6.4 7.2 6.3 6.5
R97 4.60/9.8 11.7 13.4 11.3 11.7
R107 6.0/13.7 16.3 16.9 19.2 13.2 15.9
R137 10.0/25.0 28.0 29.5 31.5 25.0
R147 15.4/40.0 46.5 48.0 52.0 39.5 41.0
R167 27.0/70.0 82.0 78.0 88.0 66.0 69.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil quantity.
RF.., RZ..
M11) M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
RF07 0.12 0.20
RF17 0.25 0.55 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.40
RF27 0.25/0.40 0.70 0.50 0.70 0.50
RF37 0.35/0.95 0.90 0.95 1.05 0.75 0.95
RF47 0.65/1.50 1.60 1.50 1.65 1.50
RF57 0.80/1.70 1.80 1.70 2.00 1.70
RF67 1.20/2.50 2.50 2.70 2.80 1.90 2.10
RF77 1.20/2.60 3.10 3.30 3.60 2.40 3.00
RF87 2.40/6.0 6.4 7.1 7.2 6.3 6.4
RF97 5.1/10.2 11.9 11.2 14.0 11.2 11.8
RF107 6.3/14.9 15.9 17.0 19.2 13.1 15.9
RF137 9.5/25.0 27.0 29.0 32.5 25.0
RF147 16.4/42.0 47.0 48.0 52.0 42.0 42.0
21932786/EN – 05/2015
RF167 26.0/70.0 82.0 78.0 88.0 65.0 71.0

8 Technical data
Lubricants
RX..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
RX57 0.60 0.80 1.30 0.90
RX67 0.80 1.70 1.90 1.10
RX77 1.10 1.50 2.60 2.70 1.60
RX87 1.70 2.50 4.80 2.90
RX97 2.10 3.40 7.4 7.0 4.80
RX107 3.90 5.6 11.6 11.9 7.7
RXF..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
RXF57 0.50 0.80 1.10 0.70
RXF67 0.70 0.80 1.50 1.40 1.00
RXF77 0.90 1.30 2.40 2.00 1.60
RXF87 1.60 1.95 4.90 3.95 2.90
RXF97 2.10 3.70 7.1 6.3 4.80
RXF107 3.10 5.7 11.2 9.3 7.2
Parallel-shaft helical (F) gear units

F.., FA..B, FH..B, FV..B
Gear units Fill quantity in liters
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
F..27 0.60 0.80 0.65 0.70 0.60
F..37 0.95 1.25 0.70 1.25 1.00 1.10
F..47 1.50 1.80 1.10 1.90 1.50 1.70
F..57 2.60 3.50 2.10 3.50 2.80 2.90
F..67 2.70 3.80 1.90 3.80 2.90 3.20
F..77 5.9 7.3 4.30 8.0 6.0 6.3
F..87 10.8 13.0 7.7 13.8 10.8 11.0
F..97 18.5 22.5 12.6 25.2 18.5 20.0
F..107 24.5 32.0 19.5 37.5 27.0
F..127 40.5 54.5 34.0 61.0 46.3 47.0
F..157 69.0 104.0 63.0 105.0 86.0 78.0
FF..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
FF27 0.60 0.80 0.65 0.70 0.60
FF37 1.00 1.25 0.70 1.30 1.00
FF47 1.60 1.85 1.10 1.90 1.50 1.70
FF57 2.80 3.50 2.10 3.70 2.90 3.00
FF67 2.70 3.80 1.90 3.80 2.90 3.20
FF77 5.9 7.3 4.30 8.1 6.0 6.3
FF87 10.8 13.2 7.8 14.1 11.0 11.2
21932786/EN – 05/2015
FF97 19.0 22.5 12.6 25.6 18.9 20.5

FF107 25.5 32.0 19.5 38.5 27.5 28.0
FF127 41.5 55.5 34.0 63.0 46.3 49.0
FF157 72.0 105.0 64.0 106.0 87.0 79.0
Technical data
Lubricants 8
FA.., FH.., FV.., FAF.., FAZ.., FHF.., FZ.., FHZ.., FVF.., FVZ.., FT..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
F..27 0.60 0.80 0.65 0.70 0.60
F..37 0.95 1.25 0.70 1.25 1.00 1.10
F..47 1.50 1.80 1.10 1.90 1.50 1.70
F..57 2.70 3.50 2.10 3.40 2.90 3.00
F..67 2.70 3.80 1.90 3.80 2.90 3.20
F..77 5.9 7.3 4.30 8.0 6.0 6.3
F..87 10.8 13.0 7.7 13.8 10.8 11.0
F..97 18.5 22.5 12.6 25.2 18.5 20.0
F..107 24.5 32.0 19.5 37.5 27.0
F..127 39.0 54.5 34.0 61.0 45.0 46.5
F..157 68.0 103.0 62.0 104.0 85.0 79.5
Helical-bevel (K) gear units
INFORMATION
All K..9 gear have a universal mounting position, which means that K..9 gear units of
the same design are filled with the same oil quantity independent of the mounting po-
sition. An exception to this is the M4 mounting position.
K.., KA..B, KH..B, KV..B

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
K..19 0.4 0.45 0.4
K..29 0.7 0.85 0.7
K..39 0.86 1.65 1.54 2.13 1.53 1.31
K..49 1.64 3.35 2.82 4.18 3.13 2.77
K..37 0.50 1.00 1.25 0.95
K..47 0.80 1.30 1.50 2.00 1.60
K..57 1.10 2.20 2.80 2.30 2.10
K..67 1.10 2.40 2.60 3.45 2.60
K..77 2.20 4.10 4.40 5.8 4.20 4.40
K..87 3.70 8.0 8.7 10.9 8.0
K..97 7.0 14.0 15.7 20.0 15.7 15.5
K..107 10.0 21.0 25.5 33.5 24.0
K..127 21.0 41.5 44.0 54.0 40.0 41.0
K..157 31.0 62.0 65.0 90.0 58.0 62.0
K..167 33.0 95.0 105.0 123.0 85.0 84.0
K..187 53.0 152.0 167.0 200 143.0
21932786/EN – 05/2015
8 Technical data
Lubricants
KF..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
KF19 0.4 0.45 0.4
KF29 0.7 0.85 0.7
KF39 0.86 1.65 1.54 2.13 1.53 1.31
KF49 1.64 3.35 2.82 4.18 3.13 2.77
KF37 0.50 1.10 1.50 1.00
KF47 0.80 1.30 1.70 2.20 1.60
KF57 1.20 2.20 2.40 3.15 2.50 2.30
KF67 1.10 2.40 2.80 3.70 2.70
KF77 2.10 4.10 4.40 5.9 4.50
KF87 3.70 8.2 9.0 11.9 8.4
KF97 7.0 14.7 17.3 21.5 15.7 16.5
KF107 10.0 21.8 25.8 35.1 25.2
KF127 21.0 41.5 46.0 55.0 41.0
KF157 31.0 66.0 69.0 92.0 62.0
KA.., KH.., KV.., KAF.., KHF.., KVF.., KZ.., KAZ.., KHZ.., KVZ.., KT..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
K..19 0.4 0.45 0.4
K..29 0.7 0.85 0.7
K..39 0.86 1.65 1.54 2.13 1.53 1.31
K..49 1.64 3.35 2.82 4.18 3.13 2.77
K..37 0.50 1.00 1.40 1.00
K..47 0.80 1.30 1.60 2.15 1.60
K..57 1.20 2.20 2.40 3.15 2.70 2.40
K..67 1.10 2.40 2.70 3.70 2.60
K..77 2.10 4.10 4.60 5.9 4.40
K..87 3.70 8.2 8.8 11.1 8.0
K..97 7.0 14.7 15.7 20.0 15.7
K..107 10.0 20.5 24.0 32.4 24.0
K..127 21.0 41.5 43.0 52.0 40.0
K..157 31.0 66.0 67.0 87.0 62.0
K..167 33.0 95.0 105.0 123.0 85.0 84.0
K..187 53.0 152.0 167.0 200 143.0
Helical-worm (S) gear units

S..
M1 M2 M31) M4 M5 M6
S37 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.40
S47 0.35 0.80 0.70/0.90 1.00 0.80
S57 0.50 1.20 1.00/1.20 1.45 1.30
S67 1.00 2.00 2.20/3.10 3.10 2.60 2.60
S77 1.90 4.20 3.70/5.4 5.9 4.40
21932786/EN – 05/2015
S87 3.30 8.1 6.9/10.4 11.3 8.4

S97 6.8 15.0 13.4/18.0 21.8 17.0
Technical data
Lubricants 8
SF..
M1 M2 M31) M4 M5 M6
SF37 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.40
SF47 0.40 0.90 0.90/1.05 1.05 1.00
SF57 0.50 1.20 1.00/1.50 1.55 1.40
SF67 1.00 2.20 2.30/3.00 3.20 2.70
SF77 1.90 4.10 3.90/5.8 6.5 4.90
SF87 3.80 8.0 7.1/10.1 12.0 9.1
SF97 7.4 15.0 13.8/18.8 22.6 18.0
SA.., SH.., SAF.., SHZ.., SAZ.., SHF.., ST..

M1 M2 M31) M4 M5 M6
S..37 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.40
S..47 0.40 0.80 0.70/0.90 1.00 0.80
S..57 0.50 1.10 1.00/1.50 1.50 1.20
S..67 1.00 2.00 1.80/2.60 2.90 2.50
S..77 1.80 3.90 3.60/5.0 5.8 4.50
S..87 3.80 7.4 6.0/8.7 10.8 8.0
S..97 7.0 14.0 11.4/16.0 20.5 15.7
SPIROPLAN® (W) gear units
INFORMATION
SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 to W..30 have a universal mounting position, which
means that gear units of the same design are filled with the same amount of oil inde-
pendent of the mounting position.
The oil fill quantity of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 and W..47 in mounting position
M4 is different from that of the other mounting positions.
W.., WA..B, WH..B

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
W..10 0.16
W..20 0.24
W..30 0.40
W..37 0.50 0.70 0.50
W..47 0.90 1.40 0.90
WF..
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
21932786/EN – 05/2015
WF10 0.16
WF20 0.24
WF30 0.40
WF37 0.50 0.70 0.50
WF47 0.90 1.55 0.90
8 Technical data
Lubricants
WA.., WAF..,WH.., WT.., WHF..

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
W..10 0.16
W..20 0.24
W..30 0.40
W..37 0.50 0.70 0.50
W..47 0.80 1.40 0.80
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Malfunctions
Lubricants 9
9 Malfunctions
WARNING
• De-energize the motor before you start working on the unit.
• Secure the motor against unintended power-up.
CAUTION
Severe injuries.
• Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it.
• Carefully remove the oil level plug and the oil drain plug.
NOTICE
Damage to gear unit due to improper operation.
Damage to the gear unit/gearmotor.
• Repair works at SEW‑EURODRIVE gear units may only be performed by quali-
fied personnel. I the context of this documentation, qualified personnel are per-
sons who are familiar with the "Technical regulations on operating safety"
(TRBS).
• Drive and motor may only be disconnected by qualified personnel.
• Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
9 Malfunctions
Gear units
9.1 Gear units

Unusual, regular run- • Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing • Check oil consistency, change bearings
ning noise damage
• Knocking noise: Irregularity in the • Consult SEW‑EURODRIVE
gearing
• Deformation of the housing upon • Check the gear unit mounting for possi-
tightening ble deformation and correct if necessary
• Noise generated by insufficient • Reinforce the gear unit foundation
stiffness of the gear unit founda-
tion
Unusual, irregular run- • Foreign objects in the oil • Checking the oil consistency
ning noises • Stop the drive, contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE
Oil leaking from inspec- • Seal of the inspection cover leak- • Tighten the screws of the inspection
tion cover ing cover and observe the gear unit. Con-
tact SEW‑EURODRIVE if oil is still leak-
ing.
• Seal defective • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Small amounts of oil • Function-related pseudo-leakage • There is no fault. Remove with soft, lint-
leak from the oil seal free cloth and keep monitoring it.
during run-in phase.
Film of moisture around • Function-related pseudo-leakage • There is no fault. Remove with soft, lint-
the dust lip of the oil free cloth and keep monitoring it.
seal
Oil leaking from the oil • Oil seal leaking/defective • Check sealing system. It may be neces-
seal. sary to contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Oil leaking from motor • Too much oil • Check oil level, correct if necessary
(e.g. terminal box or
• Gear unit not ventilated • Vent gear unit
fan)
• Oil seal leaking/defective • Check sealing system. It may be neces-
sary to contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Oil leaking from flange • Flange gasket leaking/defective • Check sealing system. It may be neces-
sary to contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Too much oil • Check oil level, correct if necessary
• Gear unit not ventilated • Vent gear unit
Oil leaking from breath- • Too much oil. • Check oil quantity, correct if necessary
er valve.
• Function-related oil mist • There is no fault.
• Drive not installed in proper • Install breather valve correctly and ad-
21932786/EN – 05/2015
mounting position. just the oil level.

• Frequent cold starts (oil foaming) • Install oil expansion tank.
and/or high oil level.
Output shaft does not • Shaft-hub connection in the gear • Send in the gear unit/gearmotor for re-
turn although the motor unit interrupted. pair
is running or the input
shaft is rotated.
Malfunctions
Adapters AM/AQ./AL/EWH 9
9.2 Adapters AM/AQ./AL/EWH
Unusual, regular run- • Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
ning noise damage
Oil leaking. • Seal defective • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Output shaft does not • Shaft-hub connection in the gear • Send in the gear unit/gearmotor for re-
turn although the motor unit interrupted. pair.
is running or the input
shaft is rotated.
Change in running • Ring gear wear, short-term torque • Change the ring gear.
noise and/or vibrations transmission through metal con-
tact
• Screws to secure hub axially are • Tighten the screws
loose
Premature wear in girth • Contact with aggressive fluids/ • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
gear oils; ozone influence; excessive
ambient temperatures, etc. that
can change the physical proper-
ties of the ring gear.
• Impermissibly high ambient/ • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
contact temperature for the girth
gear; maximum permitted tem-
perature: -20 °C to +80 °C.
• Overload • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
9.3 AD input shaft assembly

Unusual, regular run- • Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
ning noise. damage.
Oil is leaking. • Seal defective. • Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Output shaft does not • Shaft-hub connection in gear unit • Send the gear unit to
turn although the input or cover interrupted. SEW‑EURODRIVE for repair.
shaft is rotated.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
9 Malfunctions
Customer service
9.4 Customer service

If you require customer service, include the following information:
• Nameplate data (complete)
• Nature and extent of the problem
• Time the failure occurred and any accompanying circumstances
• Presumed cause
• A digital picture of the failure, if possible.
9.5 Waste disposal

Dispose gear units in accordance with the material structure and the regulations in
force:
• As steel scrap
– Housing parts
– Gears
– Shafts
– Rolling bearing
• Parts of the worm gears are made of non-ferrous metals. Dispose of the worm
gears appropriately.
• Collect used oil and dispose of it according to the regulations in force.
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Address list
10
10 Address list
Algeria
Sales Algiers REDUCOM Sarl Tel. +213 21 8214-91
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue http://www.reducom-dz.com
16200 El Harrach Alger info@reducom-dz.com
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial Garín http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Prov. de Buenos Aires sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Vienna SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service A-1230 Wien http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Bangladesh
Sales Bangladesh SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED Tel. +88 01729 097309
345 DIT Road salesdhaka@seweurodrivebangla-
East Rampura desh.com
Dhaka-1219, Bangladesh
Belarus
Sales Minsk Foreign Enterprise Industrial Components Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58
RybalkoStr. 26 Fax +375 17 298 47 54
BY-220033 Minsk http://www.sew.by
sales@sew.by
Belgium
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
Service Competence Industrial SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 84 219-878
Center Gears Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Brazil
Production São Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3835-8000
Sales Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – Rodovia sew@sew.com.br
Service Santos Dumont Km 49
Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP
Assembly Rio Claro SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3522-3100
Sales Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172 Fax +55 19 3524-6653
Service Condomínio Industrial Conpark montadora.rc@sew.com.br
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Caixa Postal: 327

13501-600 – Rio Claro / SP
Joinville SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 47 3027-6886
Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba Fax +55 47 3027-6888
89239-270 – Joinville / SC filial.sc@sew.com.br
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
BG-1606 Sofia bever@bever.bg
10 Address list
Cameroon
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Tilbury Industrial Park Fax +1 604 946-2513
7188 Honeyman Street b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA Tel. +56 2 2757 7000
Sales Chile Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 2757 7001
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
LAMPA ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25323273
Sales Tianjin 300457 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
Service info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267922
East Section of GETDD guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Taiyuan SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd. Tel. +86-351-7117520
No.3, HuaZhang Street, Fax +86-351-7117522
TaiYuan Economic & Technical Development taiyuan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
ShanXi, 030032
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478388
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478389
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
430056 Wuhan
Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Sales Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Service Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Hong Leong Industrial Complex contact@sew-eurodrive.hk

No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Colombia
Assembly Bogota SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá sew@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Address list
10
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service Zeleni dol 10 Fax +385 1 4613-158
HR 10 000 Zagreb kompeks@inet.hr
Czech Republic
Assembly Hostivice SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Sales Floriánova 2459 Fax +420 235 350 613
Service 253 01 Hostivice http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Drive Service +420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW) Service
Hotline / 24 Tel. +420 255 709 632
Hour Service Fax +420 235 358 218
servis@sew-eurodrive.cz
Denmark
Assembly Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 95 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +20 222566299
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +20 2 22594-757
33 EI Hegaz ST http://www.copam-egypt.com
Heliopolis, Cairo copam@copam-egypt.com
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
EE-75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa http://www.alas-kuul.ee
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Finland
Assembly Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2 http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Service Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Keskikankaantie 21 Fax +358 3 780-6211
FIN-15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears Oy Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Santasalonkatu 6, PL 8 Fax +358 201 589-310
FI-03620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
France
Production Hagenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54 route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone industrielle
Technopôle Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Brumath SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 48
1 rue de Bruxelles
F-67670 Mommenheim
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00

Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
10 Address list
France
Nantes SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Parc d’activités de la forêt Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Étang
Gabon
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales D-76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Postfach 3023 – D-76642 Bruchsal
Production / Industrial Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Gears Christian-Pähr-Str. 10 Fax +49 7251 75-2970
D-76646 Bruchsal
Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251-2970
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 – D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Östringen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, Werk Tel. +49 7253 9254-0
Östringen Fax +49 7253 9254-90
Franz-Gurk-Straße 2 oestringen@sew-eurodrive.de
D-76684 Östringen
Service Competence Mechanics / SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Center Mechatronics Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf scc-mechanik@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
D-76646 Bruchsal scc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Technology North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Center Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
D-30823 Garbsen (Hannover) dtc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
D-08393 Meerane (Zwickau) dtc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
D-85551 Kirchheim (München) dtc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
D-40764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf) dtc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Center Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 306331131-30
Alexander-Meißner-Straße 44 Fax +49 306331131-36
D-12526 Berlin dc-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75 3759
c/o BASF SE Fax +49 7251 75 503759
Gebäude W130 Raum 101 dc-ludwigshafen@sew-eurodrive.de
D-67056 Ludwigshafen
Saarland SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 6831 48946 10
Gottlieb-Daimler-Straße 4 Fax +49 6831 48946 13
21932786/EN – 05/2015
D-66773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler dc-saarland@sew-eurodrive.de

Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7348 9885-0
Dieselstraße 18 Fax +49 7348 9885-90
D-89160 Dornstadt dc-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de
Würzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 931 27886-60
Nürnbergerstraße 118 Fax +49 931 27886-66
D-97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld dc-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service +49 800 SEWHELP
+49 800 7394357
Address list
10
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales DeVilliers Way Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service Trident Park http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Normanton info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
West Yorkshire
WF6 1GX
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service Tel. 01924 896911
Greece
Sales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
12, K. Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136 http://www.boznos.gr
GR-18545 Piraeus info@boznos.gr
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service Csillaghegyí út 13. Fax +36 1 437 06-50
H-1037 Budapest http://www.sew-eurodrive.hu
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Iceland
Sales Reykjavik Varma & Vélaverk ehf. Tel. +354 585 1070
Knarrarvogi 4 Fax +354 585)1071
IS-104 Reykjavík http://www.varmaverk.is
vov@vov.is
India
Registered Office Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 3045200
Assembly Plot No. 4, GIDC Fax +91 265 3045300
Sales POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
Service Gujarat salesvadodara@seweurodrivein-
dia.com
Assembly Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 44 37188888
Sales Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II Fax +91 44 37188811
Service Mambakkam Village saleschennai@seweurodriveindia.com
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 21 35301400
Plant: Plot No. D236/1, salespune@seweurodriveindia.com
Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II,
Warale, Tal- Khed,
Pune-410501, Maharashtra
Indonesia
Sales Jakarta PT. Cahaya Sukses Abadi Tel. +62 21 65310599
Komplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99, Fax +62 21 65310600
Sunter csajkt@cbn.net.id
Jakarta 14350
Jakarta PT. Agrindo Putra Lestari Tel. +62 21 2921-8899
JL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra In- Fax +62 21 2921-8988
dustri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III, aplindo@indosat.net.id
Blok E No. 27 http://www.aplindo.com
Jakarta 14470
Medan PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari Tel. +62 61 687 1221
Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri Medan Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61
II 6871458 / +62 61 30008041
Medan 20252 sil@serumpunindah.com
serumpunindah@yahoo.com
http://www.serumpunindah.com
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Surabaya PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI Tel. +62 31 5990128

Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi Permai G6 Fax +62 31 5962666
No. 11 sales@triagri.co.id
Surabaya 60111 http://www.triagri.co.id
Surabaya CV. Multi Mas Tel. +62 31 5458589
Jl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18 Fax +62 31 5317220
Surabaya 60174 sianhwa@sby.centrin.net.id
http://www.cvmultimas.com
10 Address list
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate http://www.alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 info@alperton.ie
Israel
Sales Tel Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Italy
Assembly Solaro SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 9801
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 79 97 81
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +225 21 21 81 05
Ivory Coast Fax +225 21 25 30 47
Rue des Pècheurs, Zone 3 info@sew-eurodrive.ci
26 BP 916 Abidjan 26 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ci
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373814
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
hamamatsu@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Kazakhstan
Sales Almaty SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156
291-291A, Tole bi street Fax +7 (727) 350 5156
050031, Almaty http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411

Ulaanbaatar SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +976-77109997
Ulaanbaatar 14250
Kenya
is supported by Tanzania.
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 6 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 6 7139386
LV-1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.lv
info@alas-kuul.com
Lebanon
Sales Lebanon Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 510 532
B. P. 80484 Fax +961 1 494 971
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut ssacar@inco.com.lb

Sales / Jordan / Ku- Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Tel. +961 1 494 786
wait / Saudi Arabia / Sin El Fil. Fax +961 1 494 971
Syria B. P. 55-378 http://www.medrives.com
Beirut info@medrives.com
Address list
10
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Statybininku 106C Fax +370 315 56175
LT-63431 Alytus http://www.sew-eurodrive.lt
irmantas@irseva.lt
Luxembourg
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu
Macedonia
Sales Skopje Boznos DOOEL Tel. +389 23256553
Dime Anicin 2A/7A Fax +389 23256554
1000 Skopje http://www.boznos.mk
Madagascar
Sales Antananarivo Ocean Trade Tel. +261 20 2330303
BP21bis. Andraharo Fax +261 20 2330330
Antananarivo oceantrabp@moov.mg
101 Madagascar
Malaysia
Assembly Johor SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
West Malaysia
Mexiko
Assembly Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Quéretaro scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 76220
Quéretaro, México
Mongolia
Technical Office Ulaanbaatar SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +976-77109997
Ulaanbaatar 14250
Morocco
Sales Mohammedia SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +212 523 32 27 80/81
Service 2 bis, Rue Al Jahid Fax +212 523 32 27 89
28810 Mohammedia http://www.sew-eurodrive.ma
sew@sew-eurodrive.ma
Namibia
Sales Swakopmund DB Mining & Industrial Services Tel. +264 64 462 738
Einstein Street Fax +264 64 462 734
Strauss Industrial Park anton@dbminingnam.com
Unit1
Swakopmund
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam SEW-EURODRIVE B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552

Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam Service: 0800-SEWHELP
Postbus 10085 http://www.sew-eurodrive.nl
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam info@sew-eurodrive.nl
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
10 Address list
New Zealand
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
30 Lodestar Avenue, Wigram Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Nigeria
Sales Lagos EISNL Engineering Solutions and Drives Ltd Tel. +234 1 217 4332
Plot 9, Block A, Ikeja Industrial Estate ( Ogba http://www.eisnl.com
Scheme) team.sew@eisnl.com
Adeniyi Jones St. End
Off ACME Road, Ogba, Ikeja, Lagos
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service N-1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Pakistan
Sales Karachi Industrial Power Drives Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area, seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Paraguay
Sales Fernando de la SEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.L Tel. +595 991 519695
Mora De la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva Asunción Fax +595 21 3285539
Departamento Central sewpy@sew-eurodrive.com.py
Fernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C. Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales Los Calderos, 120-124 Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Philippines
Sales Makati P.T. Cerna Corporation Tel. +63 2 519 6214
4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. Cruz Fax +63 2 890 2802
Makati City 1205 mech_drive_sys@ptcerna.com
http://www.ptcerna.com
Poland
Assembly Łódź SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 293 00 00
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 293 00 49
Service PL-92-518 Łódź http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Service Tel. +48 42 293 0030 24 Hour Service
Fax +48 42 293 0043 Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW
SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 86 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service P-3050-379 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Sales Bucharest Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328

Service str. Brazilia nr. 36 Fax +40 21 230-7170
011783 Bucuresti sialco@sialco.ro
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142
Sales P.O. Box 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service RUS-195220 St. Petersburg http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Address list
10
Sambia
is supported by South Africa.
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque http://www.senemeca.com
B.P. 3251, Dakar senemeca@senemeca.sn
Serbia
Sales Belgrade DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 /
Ustanicka 128a +381 11 288 0393
PC Košum, IV floor Fax +381 11 347 1337
SRB-11000 Beograd office@dipar.rs
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201
Rybničná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
SK-831 06 Bratislava http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
SK-040 01 Košice Mobile +421 907 671 976
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
SLO - 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 248-7289
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 info@sew.co.za
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens bgriffiths@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 902 3815
48 Prospecton Road Fax +27 31 902 3826
Isipingo cdejager@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Nelspruit 1200
South Korea
Assembly Ansan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Sales 7, Dangjaengi-ro, Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service Danwon-gu, http://www.sew-eurodrive.kr
Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839 master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com
10 Address list
South Korea
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil, Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-gu,
Busan, Zip 618-820
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax +34 94 43184-71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sri Lanka
Sales Colombo SM International (Pte) Ltd Tel. +94 1 2584887
254, Galle Raod Fax +94 1 2582981
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Swaziland
Sales Manzini C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd Tel. +268 2 518 6343
PO Box 2960 Fax +268 2 518 5033
Manzini M200 engineering@cgtrading.co.sz
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 34 42 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 34 42 80
Service S-55 303 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-55 003 Jönköping jonkoping@sew.se
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Taiwan
Sales Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 2 27383535
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2 Fax +886 2 27368268
Tung Huw S. Road Telex 27 245
Taipei sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 49 255353
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road Fax +886 49 257878
Industrial District sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
Nan Tou 540 http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Tanzania
Sales Daressalam SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA Tel. +255 0 22 277 5780
Plot 52, Regent Estate Fax +255 0 22 277 5788
PO Box 106274 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Dar Es Salaam central.mailbox@sew.co.tz
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Chonburi 20000
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2 Fax +216 79 40 88 66
21932786/EN – 05/2015
Lot No. 39 http://www.tms.com.tn

2082 Fouchana tms@tms.com.tn
Turkey
Assembly Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE Hareket Tel. +90 262 9991000 04
Sales Sistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. Sti Fax +90 262 9991009
Service Gebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 401 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
41480 Gebze Kocaeli sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
Address list
10
Ukraine
Assembly Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв» Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Sales ул.Рабочая, 23-B, офис 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
Service 49008 Днепропетровск http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
United Arab Emirates

Sales Sharjah Copam Middle East (FZC) Tel. +971 6 5578-488
Service Sharjah Airport International Free Zone Fax +971 6 5578-499
P.O. Box 120709 copam_me@eim.ae
Sharjah
Uruguay
Assembly Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A. Tel. +598 2 21181-89
Sales Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina Corumbe Fax +598 2 21181-90
CP 12000 Montevideo sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
USA
Production Southeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly Region 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Production +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly Northeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales Region Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
Region 2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 332-0038
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Region 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
Region 30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service in USA provided on request!
Uzbekistan
Technical Office Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411
Venezuela
Assembly Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Tel. +58 241 832-9804
Sales Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Fax +58 241 838-6275
Service Zona Industrial Municipal Norte http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve
Valencia, Estado Carabobo ventas@sew-eurodrive.com.ve
sewfinanzas@cantv.net
Vietnam
Sales Ho Chi Minh Nam Trung Co., Ltd Tel. +84 8 8301026
City Huế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials Fax +84 8 8392223
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town, khanh-nguyen@namtrung.com.vn
Binh Duong Province http://www.namtrung.com.vn
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
21932786/EN – 05/2015
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City

Hanoi MICO LTD Tel. +84 4 39386666
Quảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except Fax +84 4 3938 6888
Construction Materials nam_ph@micogroup.com.vn
8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao Duy http://www.micogroup.com.vn
Anh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam
Index
Index
A E
AD Input shaft assembly ...................................... 70 Efficiency.............................................................. 85
Adapter EWH ....................................................... 68 Elastomers ........................................................... 86
Adjustment in mounting position .......................... 25 Embedded safety notes ......................................... 6
AM adapter........................................................... 61 EWH adapter........................................................ 68
AM IEC adapter.................................................... 61 Exclusion of liability ................................................ 7
AM NEMA adapter ............................................... 61 Extended storage ............................................... 146
Ambient conditions............................................... 86 F
Amount of oil ...................................................... 151
AQ adapter........................................................... 65 Failure
Permitted loads ............................................... 66 Running noise ....................................... 158, 159
Setting standards and tightening torques ....... 66 Failures .............................................................. 157
AQ adapter coupling ............................................ 65 Features ............................................................... 74
AR.. slip clutch ..................................................... 74 Flatness defect..................................................... 25
AT.. start-up coupling ........................................... 74 Fluid couplings ..................................................... 74
Fluorocarbon rubber............................................. 86
B
Föttinger principle................................................. 74
Backstop .............................................................. 86 G
Bearing greases ................................................. 148
Breather valve ...................................................... 25 Gaskets ............................................................. 0
Gear unit heating.................................................. 77
C
Gear unit mounting............................................... 27
Change in mounting position................................ 25 Gear unit painting................................................. 30
Changing the mounting position......................... 148 Gear unit structure ............................................... 11
Checking the oil level ..................................... 83, 95 Helical gear units ............................................ 11
At the breather plug ...................................... 102 Helical-bevel gear units K..7 ........................... 15
At the breather plug. ..................................... 107 Helical-bevel gear units K..9 ..................... 13, 14
At the cover plate ............................................ 98 Helical-worm gear units .................................. 16
At the oil level plug.......................................... 96 Parallel-shaft helical gear units ....................... 12
At the oil level plug........................ 105, 106, 108 SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 – W..30 ......... 17
Copyright notice ..................................................... 7 SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 – W..47 ......... 18
Coupling of AM adapter ....................................... 61 Gear unit venting.................................................. 28
Coupling, rigid flange coupling ............................. 78 Gear unit with solid shaft...................................... 31
Cover AD.............................................................. 70 General safety notes .............................................. 8
Customer service ............................................... 160 Grease filling ...................................................... 148
D H
Designated use ...................................................... 9 Hazard symbols
21932786/EN – 05/15
Diagnostic unit Meaning ............................................................ 6

DUO ................................................................ 76 Heater .................................................................. 77
DUV ................................................................ 75 Helical gear units.................................................. 11
DUO, diagnostic unit ............................................ 76 Helical gearmotors
DUV, diagnostic unit............................................. 75 Mounting positions ........................................ 113
Helical-bevel gear units.................................. 13, 14
Index
Helical-bevel gear units K..7 ................................ 15 Checking the oil level ...................................... 95
Helical-bevel gearmotors Gear unit ......................................................... 95
Mounting positions ........................................ 121 Oil change....................................................... 95
Helical-worm gear units........................................ 16 Malfunctions ....................................................... 157
Helical-worm gearmotors AD Input shaft assembly ............................... 159
Mounting positions ........................................ 134 Adapters AM/AQ. /AL/EWH .......................... 159
I Gear unit ....................................................... 158
Mechanical installation ......................................... 22
Input and output elements Mounting position
High overhung loads ....................................... 32 M0 ................................................................. 111
Mounting ......................................................... 31 MX................................................................. 111
Using a mounting device................................. 31 Mounting position sheets ................................... 110
Inspection............................................................. 88 Mounting positions ............................................. 110
Inspection intervals Designation ................................................... 110
Gear unit ......................................................... 92 For SPIROPLAN® gear units......................... 112
Inspection work Helical gearmotors ........................................ 113
AD Input shaft assembly ................................. 94 Helical-bevel gearmotors .............................. 121
AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapter ............................... 93 Helical-worm gearmotors .............................. 134
Checking the oil .............................................. 95 Icons ............................................................. 112
Checking the oil level ...................................... 95 Key................................................................ 112
Gear unit ......................................................... 95 Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors................... 118
Oil change....................................................... 95 SPIROPLAN® gearmotors............................. 140
Installation MX mounting position......................................... 111
Couplings ........................................................ 32
N
Input and output elements .............................. 31
Mechanical...................................................... 22 Nameplate............................................................ 19
Installation of the gear unit ................................... 24 Notes
Installation tolerances .......................................... 23 Designation in the documentation..................... 5
Installing the gear unit .......................................... 24 Meaning of the hazard symbols ........................ 6
L O
Labyrinth seal....................................................... 79 Oil change ............................................................ 95
Leakage ............................................................ 0 Oil check .............................................................. 95
Lubricant fill quantities........................................ 151 Oil drain valve ...................................................... 81
Lubricant table............................................ 149, 150 Oil expansion tank................................................ 81
Lubricants........................................................... 148 Oil seals ............................................................... 22
M Oil sight glass....................................................... 83
Optional equipment .............................................. 74
M0 universal mounting position.......................... 111 Options................................................................. 74
Maintenance......................................................... 88
P
21932786/EN – 05/15
Maintenance intervals
Gear unit ......................................................... 92 Painting the gear unit ................................... 30, 109
Maintenance works Parallel-shaft helical gear units ............................ 12
AD Input shaft assembly ................................. 94 Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors
AL/AM/AQ./EWH adapter ............................... 93 Mounting positions ........................................ 118
Checking the oil .............................................. 95 Performance data................................................. 19
Index
Product names ....................................................... 7 SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 – W..30 ......... 17

Pseudo-leakage ................................................ 0 SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 – W..47 ......... 18
R T
Relubrication ........................................................ 79 Technical data.................................................... 146
Repair................................................................. 160 Tightening torques ............................................... 26
Resources ............................................................ 22 Tools .................................................................... 22
Rights to claim under limited warranty ................... 6 TorqLOC® ............................................................. 47
Rigid flange coupling............................................ 78 Torque arms......................................................... 33
Run-in period........................................................ 85 Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units........... 33
S Helical-bevel gear units K..37 – K..157........... 35
Helical-worm gear units .................................. 36
Safety notes Parallel-shaft helical gear units ....................... 33
Designated use ................................................. 9 SPIROPLAN® W gear units............................. 37
Designation in the documentation..................... 5 Trademarks ............................................................ 7
General ............................................................. 8 Transport................................................................ 9
Meaning of the hazard symbols ........................ 6 Type designation............................................ 19, 21
Preliminary information ..................................... 8
U
Structure of embedded ..................................... 6
Structure of the section-related......................... 5 Universal mounting position M0 ......................... 111
Transport........................................................... 9 Using a mounting device...................................... 31
Screw quality........................................................ 25 V
Section-related safety notes................................... 5
Service ............................................................... 160 Ventilation ............................................................ 28
Shaft-mounted gear units..................................... 33 Venting ................................................................. 28
Keyway ........................................................... 38 W
Shrink disk ...................................................... 44
Waste disposal................................................... 160
Splined hollow shaft ........................................ 38
TorqLOC® ........................................................ 47
Signal words in the safety notes ............................ 5
Solid shaft ............................................................ 31
SPIROPLAN® gear units
Mounting positions ........................................ 112
SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 – W..30 .............. 17
SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 – W..47 .............. 18
SPIROPLAN® gearmotors
Mounting positions ........................................ 140
Startup.................................................................. 83
Start-up coupling, AT ........................................... 74
Storage conditions ............................................. 146
21932786/EN – 05/15
Structure
Helical gear units ............................................ 11
Helical-bevel gear units K..7 ........................... 15
Helical-bevel gear units K..9 ..................... 13, 14
Helical-worm gear units .................................. 16
Parallel-shaft helical gear units ....................... 12
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

P.O. Box 3023
76642 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com
KTR Kupplungstechnik KTR-N 49510 EN
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 1 of 30
D-48407 Rheine Operating/Assembly instructions
Edition: 13
POLY-NORM®
Flexible jaw-type couplings
AR, ADR, AVR, AZR,
AR/AZR, AZVR, Type AR
AR with taper clamping sleeve
and their combinations
according to directive 94/9/EC

(ATEX 95) for finish bored, pilot bored
and unbored couplings
Type ADR, ADR-K and AVR
Type AZR and AZR short
Type AR/AZR
Type AZVR
Type AR with taper clamping sleeve
Please observe protec- Drawn: 21.01.14 Pz Replaced for: KTR-N dated 20.02.13
tion note ISO 16016. Verified: 06.02.14 Pz Replaced by:
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 2 of 30
Edition: 13
POLY-NORM® is a torsionally flexible jaw coupling. It is able to compensate for shaft misa-
lignment, for example caused by manufacturing inaccuracies, thermal expansion, etc.
Table of contents
1 Technical data
2 Advice
2.1 Coupling selection
2.2 General advice
2.3 Safety and advice symbols
2.4 General hazard warnings
2.5 Intended use
3 Storage
4 Assembly
4.1 Components of the couplings
4.2 Assembly of the coupling (general)
4.3 Assembly of type AR
4.4 Assembly of type ADR, ADR-K and AVR
4.5 Assembly of type AZR, AZR short and AZVR
4.6 Assembly of type AR/AZR
4.7 Assembly of taper clamping sleeve
4.8 Advice for finish bore
4.9 Displacements - alignment of the couplings
4.10 Spares inventory, customer service addresses
5 Enclosure A
Advice and instructions regarding the use in hazardous locations
5.1 Intended use in hazardous locations
5.2 Inspection intervals for couplings in hazardous locations

5.3 Standard values of wear
5.4 Permissible coupling materials in hazardous locations
5.5 marking of coupling for hazardous locations

5.6 Start-up
5.7 Breakdowns, causes and elimination
5.8 EC certificate of conformity according to the EC directive 94/9/EC dated March 23,
1994
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 3 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
Size 28 to 125
Size 140 to 280
®
Illustration 1: POLY-NORM , type AR
Table 1: Dimensions and torques – type AR

®
POLY-NORM AR Cast iron (EN-GJL-250)
1)
Elastomer ring Dimensions [mm]
4)
(part 2) Finish bore Thread for Weight
Size 2) General 3)
Torque [Nm] setscrews [kg]
TKN TKmax. dmax. LAR l1 s DH D dH N G t
28 40 80 30 59 28 3 69 46 36.5 12.0 M5 7 0.77
32 60 120 35 68 32 4 78 53 41.5 14.0 M8 7 1.14
38 90 180 40 80 38 4 87 62 50.0 19.5 M8 10 1.59
42 150 300 45 88 42 4 96 69 55.5 20.0 M8 10 2.17
48 220 440 50 101 48 5 106 78 64 24.0 M8 15 3.03
55 300 600 60 115 55 5 118 90 73 29.0 M8 14 4.27
60 410 820 65 125 60 5 129 97 81 33.0 M8 15 5.32
65 550 1100 70 135 65 5 140 105 86 36.0 M10 20 6.86
75 850 1700 80 155 75 5 158 123 100 42.5 M10 20 10.25
85 1350 2700 90 175 85 5 182 139 116 48.5 M10 25 15.05
90 2000 4000 95 185 90 5 200 148 128 49.0 M12 25 19.50
100 2900 5800 110 206 100 6 224 165 143 55.0 M12 25 26.98
110 3900 7800 50-120 226 110 6 250 185 158 60.0 M16 30 38.12
125 5500 11000 55-140 256 125 6 280 210 178 70.0 M16 35 54.21
140 7200 14400 65-155 286 140 6 315 235 216 76.5 M20 35 77.28
160 10000 20000 75-175 326 160 6 350 265 246 94.5 M20 45 106.24
180 13400 26800 75-200 366 180 6 400 300 290 111.5 M20 50 155.20
200 19000 38000 200 408 200 8 450 335 - 126 M24 50 218.50
220 30000 60000 220 448 220 8 500 370 - 140 M24 50 296.10
240 43000 86000 240 488 240 8 550 405 - 154 M24 50 390.00
260 55000 110000 260 530 260 10 650 440 - 158 M24 60 575.00
280 67000 134000 280 570 280 10 700 475 - 172 M24 60 716.00
1) Material Perbunan (NBR) 78 Shore A with size 28 to 180; material T-PUR 84 Shore A with size 200 to 280; with size 140 to 280 use of DZ
individual elastomers
2) Bores H7 with keyway to DIN 6885 sheet 1 [JS9] and thread for setscrew on the keyway
3) Tightening torques of setscrews see table 2
4) Weights apply for max. bore diameters with feather key according to DIN 6885 sheet 1
Table 2: Setscrews DIN EN ISO 4029

Size 28 32 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90
Dimension G [mm] M5 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M12
Tightening torque TA
2 10 10 10 10 10 10 17 17 17 40
[Nm]
Size 100 110 125 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
Dimension G [mm] M12 M16 M16 M20 M20 M20 M24 M24 M24 M24 M24
40 100 100 140 140 140 240 240 240 240 240
[Nm]
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 4 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
® ®
Illustration 2: POLY-NORM , type ADR (three-part) Illustration 3: POLY-NORM , type ADR-K (three-part)
Table 3: Dimensions – type ADR and ADR-K

POLY-NORM® ADR and ADR-K (type AVR corresponding to components 3D and 4D mirrored)
cast iron (EN-GJL-250), component 3D/3Dk flange hub nodular iron (EN-GJS-400-15)
Dimensions [mm]
1) Thread for
Max. finish bore General 2)
Size setscrews
LADR/
d1 d2 l1/l2 s s1 DH D D1 dH N M W G t t1
LADR-K
38 40 34 80 38 4 12.0 87 62 48 50 19.5 11 12 M8 10 7
42 45 38 88 42 4 14.5 96 69 54 55.5 20.0 12 16 M8 10 7
48 50 44 101 48 5 16.0 106 78 62 64 24.0 13.7 16 M8 15 7
55 60 50 115 55 5 17.0 118 90 72 73 29.0 18.7 15 M8 14 14
60 65 56 125 60 5 18.0 129 97 80 81 33.0 22.2 14 M8 15 15
65 70 60 135 65 5 20.0 140 105 86 86 36.0 26.7 11 M10 20 20
75 80 68 155 75 5 23.5 158 123 98 100 42.5 27.8 16 M10 20 20
85 90 78 175 85 5 27.0 182 139 112 116 48.5 33.7 18 M10 25 25
90 95 85 185 90 5 29.5 200 148 122 128 49.0 31.5 26 M12 25 25
100 110 95 206 100 6 33.0 224 165 136 143 55.0 37.5 28 M12 25 25
110 50-120 105 226 110 6 36.0 250 185 150 158 60.0 39.5 30 M16 30 30
125 55-140 115 256 125 6 39.0 280 210 168 178 70.0 48.0 35 M16 35 35
140 65-155 55-135 286 140 6 - 315 235 195 216 76.5 47.0 59 M20 35 35
160 75-175 65-155 326 160 6 - 350 265 225 246 94.5 65.0 43 M20 45 45
180 75-200 65-175 366 180 6 - 400 300 255 290 111.5 79.0 33 M20 50 50
200 200 200 408 200 8 - 450 335 290 - 126 95 7 M24 50 50
220 220 220 448 220 8 - 500 370 320 - 140 103 8 M24 50 50
240 240 240 488 240 8 - 550 405 350 - 154 119 1 M24 50 50
260 260 260 530 260 10 - 650 440 380 - 158 109 34 M24 60 60
280 280 280 570 280 10 - 700 475 410 - 172 109 29 M24 60 60
Table 4: Torques and weights - type ADR and ADR-K

Size 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90 100
3)
Elastomer ring (part 2) TKN 90 150 220 300 410 550 850 1350 2000 2900
Torque [Nm] TKmax. 180 300 440 600 820 1100 1700 2700 4000 5800
4)
Weight ADR 1.75 2.34 3.23 4.41 5.43 7.10 10.50 15.29 20.06 27.83
[kg] ADR-K 1.70 2.26 3.12 4.24 5.24 6.67 10.01 14.44 19.02 26.28
Size 110 125 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
3)
Elastomer ring (part 2) TKN 3900 5500 7200 10000 13400 17600 22000 28000 50000 65000
Torque [Nm] TKmax. 7800 11000 14400 20000 26800 35200 44000 56000 100000 130000
4)
Weight ADR 38.95 55.67 80.30 108.00 155.00 215 294 380 593 728
[kg] ADR-K 37.31 53.26 77.90 104.70 150.30 - - - - -
3) Material Perbunan (NBR) 78 Shore A with size 28 to 180; material T-PUR 84 Shore A with size 200 to 280; with size 140 to 280 use of DZ
individual elastomers
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 5 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
Type ADR and ADR-K:
Table 5: Arrangement of the cap screws DIN EN ISO 4762 - 12.9

Size 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90 100
Screw dimension M M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16 M16
Screw length l 16 16 20 20 20 20 25 25 30 30
5)
Number z 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Dimension D4 62 69 78 88 98 104 120 138 149 163
10 25 25 25 25 49 49 86 210 210
[Nm]
Size 110 125 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
Screw dimension M M16 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M24 M27 M30 M30
Screw length l 40 40 50 55 60 60 70 70 90 90
5)
Number z 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10 10 10
Dimension D4 183 202 237 267 304 342 378 416 480 520
210 410 410 410 410 580 1000 1500 2000 2000
[Nm]
5) per flange hub
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 6 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
Illustration 4:
®
POLY-NORM , type AZR
Table 6: Dimensions and torques – type AZR

®
POLY-NORM AZR cast iron (EN-GJL-250), component 4N steel (S355 J2G3)
Drop-out Elastomer ring Dimensions [mm]
1) 4)
center (part 2) Finish Thread for Weight
Size 2) General 3)
length L Torque [Nm] bore setscrews [kg]
[mm] TKN TKmax. dmax. LAZR l2 l3 s l4 DH DF dH M G t
100 170 49.5 2.33
28 40 80 30 35 3 1 69 46 36.5 26 M5 7
140 210 69.5 2.91
100 170 49 2.86
32 60 120 35 35 4 1 78 53 41.5 26 M8 7
140 210 69 3.50
100 184 49 3.78
38 90 180 40 42 4 1 87 62 50 33 M8 10
140 224 69 4.57
100 190 49 4.56
42 150 300 45 45 4 1 96 69 55.5 35 M8 10
140 230 69 5.41
100 204 49 6.03
48 220 440 50 52 5 1.5 106 78 64 41.5 M8 15
140 244 69 6.98
100 210 49 7.81
55 140 300 600 60 250 55 69 5 1.5 118 88 73 43.5 M8 14 9.21
180 290 89 10.57
100 220 49 9.49
60 140 410 820 65 260 60 69 5 1.5 129 97 81 47.5 M8 15 11.05
180 300 89 12.61
100 230 49 11.85
65 140 550 1100 70 270 65 69 5 1.5 140 105 86 51.5 M10 20 13.61
180 310 89 15.37
140 290 69 19.71
75 180 850 1700 80 330 75 89 5 1.5 158 123 100 60.5 M10 20 22.15
250 400 124 26.18
140 310 69 27.57
85 180 1350 2700 90 350 85 89 5 1.5 182 139 116 69.5 M10 25 30.65
250 420 124 36.22
140 320 69 32.00
90 180 2000 4000 100 360 90 89 5 1.5 200 148 128 73.5 M12 25 35.35
250 430 124 41.22
140 340 69 42.31
100 180 2900 5800 110 380 100 89 6 2 224 165 143 83 M12 25 46.44
250 450 124 53.67
Table 7: Assignment of the cap screws DIN EN ISO 4762 - 12.9

Size 28 32 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90 100
Screw dimension M M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M12
Screw length l 18 18 20 20 20 25 25 25 30 30 35 35
Dimension D4 58 67 76 85 95 103 114 124 141 160 180 200
5)
Number z 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Tightening torque TA [Nm] 14 14 14 14 14 35 35 35 69 69 120 120
1) Material Perbunan (NBR) 78 Shore A
5) Each flange connection
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 7 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
® ®
Illustration 5: POLY-NORM , type AZR short Illustration 6: POLY-NORM , type AR/AZR
Table 8: Dimensions – type AZR short and AR/AZR

POLY-NORM® AZR short and AR/AZR cast iron (EN-GJL-250), component 4N steel (S355 J2G3)
Dimensions [mm]
General Thread for
Size 1)
setscrews
LAZR short LAR/AZR l1 l2 l3 s l4 L DH D/DF dH N M
G t
28 101 80 28 35 15 3 1 31 69 46 36.5 12 26 M5 7
32 102 85 32 35 15 4 1 32 78 53 41.5 14 26 M8 7
38 116 98 38 42 15 4 1 32 87 62 50 19.5 33 M8 10
42 128 108 42 45 18 4 1 38 96 69 55.5 20 35 M8 10
48 144 122.5 48 52 19 5 1.5 40 106 78 64 24 41.5 M8 15
55 154 134.5 55 55 21 5 1.5 44 118 90/88 73 29 43.5 M8 14
60 166 145.5 60 60 22 5 1.5 46 129 97 81 33 47.5 M8 15
65 180 157.5 65 65 24 5 1.5 50 140 105 86 36 51.5 M10 20
75 206 108.5 75 75 27 5 1.5 56 158 123 100 42.5 60.5 M10 20
85 234 204.5 85 85 31 5 1.5 64 182 139 116 48.5 69.5 M10 25
90 252 218.5 90 90 35 5 1.5 72 200 148 128 49 73.5 M12 25
100 280 243 100 100 39 6 2 80 224 165 143 55 83 M12 25
Table 9: Torques and finish bores - type AZR short and AR/AZR
Size 28 32 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90 100
2)
Elastomer ring (part 2) TKN 40 60 90 150 220 300 410 550 850 1350 2000 2900
Torque [Nm] TKmax. 80 120 180 300 440 600 820 1100 1700 2700 4000 5800
3)
Max. finish bore d1 30 35 40 45 50 60 65 70 80 90 100 110
[mm] d2 30 35 40 45 50 60 65 70 80 90 95 110
4) AZR
Weight 1.24 1.57 2.20 2.98 4.07 5.18 6.76 8.11 11.34 20.06 24.43 34.16
short
[kg]
AR/AZR 1.01 1.35 1.89 2.57 3.55 4.72 6.04 7.48 10.79 17.54 21.94 30.56
Size 28 32 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90 100
Screw dimension M M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M12
Screw length l 16 16 16 20 20 25 25 25 30 30 35 35
Dimension D4 58 67 76 85 95 103 114 124 141 160 180 200
5)
Number z 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Tightening torque TA [Nm] 14 14 14 14 14 35 35 35 69 69 120 120

POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 8 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
®
Illustration 7: POLY-NORM , type AZVR
Table 11: Dimensions – type AZVR

®
POLY-NORM AZVR cast iron (EN-GJL-250), component 4N and 4Nv steel (S355 J2G3)
Dimensions [mm]
2)
General Thread for Weight
Size 1)
setscrews [kg]
LAZVR l2 l3 s l4 l5 L DH DF dH M
G t
38 224 42 69 4 1 69 140 87 62 50 33 M8 10 4.33
42 230 45 69 4 1 69 140 96 69 55.5 35 M8 10 5.25
48 244 52 69 5 1.5 69 140 106 78 64 41.5 M8 15 6.83
250 49 140 8.59
55 55 5 1.5 89 118 88 73 43.5 M8 14
290 89 180 9.97
260 49 140 10.66
60 60 5 1.5 89 129 97 81 47.5 M8 15
300 89 180 12.22
270 49 140 12.74
65 65 5 1.5 89 140 105 86 51.5 M10 20
310 89 180 14.50
330 89 180 21.34
75 75 5 1.5 89 158 123 100 60.5 M10 20
450 209 300 28.58
350 89 180 29.91
85 85 5 1.5 89 182 139 116 69.5 M10 25
470 209 300 39.25
Table 12: Torques and finish bores - type AZVR

Size 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85
3)
Elastomer ring (part 2) TKN 90 150 220 300 410 550 850 1350
Torque [Nm] TKmax. 180 300 440 600 820 1100 1700 2700
4)
Finish bore [mm] dmax. 40 45 50 60 65 70 80 90
Size 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85
Screw dimension M M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10
Screw length l 20 20 20 25 25 25 30 30
Dimension D4 76 85 95 103 114 124 141 160
5)
Number z 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6
Tightening torque TA [Nm] 14 14 14 35 35 35 69 69

POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 9 of 30
Edition: 13
1 Technical data
®
Illustration 8: POLY-NORM type with taper clamping sleeve
Table 14: Dimensions - type with taper clamping sleeve

®
POLY-NORM with taper clamping sleeve hub TB1 and TB2 cast iron (EN-GJL-250)
1)
Elastomer ring Dimensions [mm] Taper
Speed 2) 3)
(part 2) Finish bore General clamp- Weight
Size nmax.
Torque [Nm] d1/d2 ing [kg]
[1/min] l1/l2 s L D DH N
TKN TKmax. min. max. sleeve
32 60 120 7300 10 28 25.5 4 55 53 78 7.5 1108 1.05
42 150 300 6000 11 32 31.0 4 66 69 96 9.0 1210 1.98
30.0 65 6.0 1610 2.35
48 220 440 5400 14 42 5 78 106
42.5 90 18.5 1615 2.96
60 410 820 4400 14 50 38.5 5 80 97 129 10.5 2012 4.16
65 550 1100 4100 16 60 62.5 5 130 105 140 - 2517 9.13
75 850 1700 3600 16 60 52.5 5 110 123 158 20.0 2517 8.54
16 60 46.5 98 132 2517 11.60
85 1350 2700 3150 5 139 10.0
35 75 82.0 169 182 3030 14.81
90 2000 4000 2900 25 75 52.0 5 109 148 200 11.0 3020 14.88
100 2900 5800 2600 35 90 98.0 6 202 165 224 53.0 3535 27.41
125 5500 11000 2050 40 100 111.5 6 229 210 280 56.5 4040 48.70
POLY-NORM® couplings with attachments that can generate heat, sparks and static charg-
ing (e. g. combinations with brake drums, brake disks, overload systems like torque limit-
ers, fans etc.) are not permitted for the use in hazardous areas.
A separate analysis must be performed.
POLY-NORM®
GmbH Sheet: 10 of 30
Edition: 13
2 Advice
2.1 Coupling selection
CAUTION!
! For a long-lasting and failure-free operation of the coupling it must be selected according to
the selection instructions (according to DIN 740 part 2) for the particular application (see
POLY-NORM® catalogue).
If the operating conditions (performance, speed, modifications on engine and machine)
change, the coupling selection must be reviewed again.
Please make sure that the technical data regarding torque refer to the elastomer part only.
The transmittable torque of the shaft-hub-connection must be reviewed by the customer and
is subject to his responsibility.
For drives subject to torsional vibrations (drives with cyclic stress due to torsional vibrations) it is necessary to
perform a torsional vibration calculation to ensure a reliable selection. Typical drives subject to torsional vibrations
are e. g. drives with diesel engines, piston pumps, piston compressors etc. If requested, KTR will perform the
coupling selection and the torsional vibration calculation.
2.2 General advice
Please read through these assembly instructions carefully before you start up the coupling.
Please pay special attention to the safety instructions!
The POLY-NORM® coupling is suitable and approved for the use in hazardous locations. When using
the coupling in hazardous locations please observe the special advice and instructions regarding
safety in enclosure A.
The assembly instructions are part of your product. Please keep them carefully and close to the coupling.
The copyright for these assembly instructions remains with KTR Kupplungstechnik GmbH.
2.3 Safety and advice symbols
STOP DANGER! Danger of injury to persons.
! CAUTION! Damages on the machine possible.
) ATTENTION! Pointing to important items.
WARNING! Hints concerning explosion protection.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
2 Advice
2.4 General hazard warnings
DANGER!
STOP With assembly, operation and maintenance of the coupling it has to be made sure that the
entire drive train is secured against accidental switch-on. You may be seriously hurt by ro-
tating parts. Please make absolutely sure to read through and observe the following safety
indications.
x All operations on and with the coupling have to be performed taking into account "safety first".
x Please make sure to switch off the power pack before you perform your work on the coupling.
x Secure the power pack against accidental switch-on, e. g. by providing warning signs at the place of switch-on
or removing the fuse for current supply.
x Do not reach into the operation area of the coupling as long as it is in operation.
x Please secure the coupling against accidental contact. Please provide for the necessary protection devices
and covers.
2.5 Intended use
You may only assemble, operate and maintain the coupling if you
x have carefully read through the assembly instructions and understood them
x had technical training
x are authorized by your company
The coupling may only be used in accordance with the technical data (see table 1 to 14 in chapter 1). Unauthor-
ized modifications on the coupling design are not admissible. We will not assume liability for any damage that
may arise. In the interest of further development we reserve the right for technical modifications.
The POLY-NORM® described in here corresponds to the technical status at the time of printing of these assembly
instructions.
3 Storage
The coupling hubs are supplied in preserved condition and can be stored at a dry and covered place for 6 - 9
months.
The features of the elastomer rings/DZ individual elastomers remain unchanged for up to 5 years with favourable
stock conditions.
CAUTION!
! The storage rooms may not include any ozone-generating devices like e. g. fluorescent light
sources, mercury-vapour lamps or electrical high-voltage appliances.
Humid storage rooms are not suitable.
Please make sure that condensation is not generated. The best relative air humidity is less
than 65 %.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
Generally the coupling is supplied in individual parts. Before assembly the coupling has to be inspected for com-
pleteness.
Components of POLY-NORM®, type AR

Compo- Quantity Description
Material Balancing condition
nent
According to customer
1 2 Hub EN-GJL-250
specification
NBR (Perbunan) from
2 1 Elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers
size 200 T-PUR
9 2 Setscrews DIN EN ISO 4029 Steel
Size 28 to 125 Size 140 to 280

®
Components of POLY-NORM®, type ADR (three-part)

type AVR corresponding to components of 3D and 4D mirrored
nent
1 1 Hub EN-GJL-250
specification
NBR (Perbunan) from
size 200 T-PUR
EN-GJS-400-15
3D 1 Flange hub from size 200 steel According to customer
(S355J2G3) specification
4D 1 Cam ring EN-GJL-250
10 see table 5 Cap screws DIN EN ISO 4762 Steel

®
Illustration 10: POLY-NORM , type ADR (three-part)
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
Components of POLY-NORM®, type ADR-K (three-part)

nent
1 1 Hub EN-GJL-250
specification
NBR (Perbunan) from
size 200 T-PUR
EN-GJS-400-15 from
3Dk 1 Flange hub K size 200 steel According to customer
(S355J2G3) specification
4D 1 Cam ring EN-GJL-250

®
Illustration 11: POLY-NORM , type ADR-K (three-part)
Components of POLY-NORM®, type AZR and AZR short

nent
2 1 Elastomer ring NBR (Perbunan)
3N 2 Driving flange EN-GJL-250
EN-GJL-250 /
4N 2 Coupling flange specification
S355 J2G3
see table 7
10 Cap screws DIN EN ISO 4762 Steel
and 10
®
Illustration 12: POLY-NORM , type AZR and AZR short
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
Components of POLY-NORM®, type AR/AZR

nent
1 1 Hub EN-GJL-250
specification
EN-GJL-250 /
4N 1 Coupling flange specification
S355 J2G3
®
Illustration 13: POLY-NORM , type AR/AZR
Components of POLY-NORM®, type AZVR

nent
4N 1 Coupling flange EN-GJL-250 / According to customer
4Nv 1 Coupling flange AZVR S355 J2G3 specification
8 1 Driving flange AZVR EN-GJL-250
®
Illustration 14: POLY-NORM , type AZVR
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
Components of POLY-NORM®, type with taper clamping sleeve

nent
1)
9 2 Setscrew Steel
TB1 2 Hub for taper clamping sleeve EN-GJL-250
specification
11 2 Taper clamping sleeve EN-GJL-250
1) For each taper clamping sleeve from size 100, 3-off setscrews are needed.
®
Coupling design:
TB1 Screwing on cam side

TB2 Screwing on collar side
Different combinations of types TB1 and TB2 are

possible.
Illustration 16: Type with taper clamping sleeve

hub design TB1 and TB2
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.2 Assembly of the coupling (general)
)
ATTENTION!
We recommend to inspect bores, shaft, keyway and feather key for dimensional accuracy
before assembly.
Heating the hubs, coupling flanges or flange hubs lightly (approx. 80 °C) allows for an easier mounting on the
shaft.
WARNING!
Please pay attention to the ignition risk in hazardous locations!
DANGER!
STOP Touching the heated hubs causes burns.
Please wear safety gloves.
CAUTION!
! With the assembly please make sure that the dimension s or L, respectively (see table 1 to
14 of the different types) is observed so that the hubs are not in contact with each other
during the operation.
Disregarding this advice may cause damage to the coupling.
4.3 Assembly of type AR
x Mount the hubs on the shaft of driving and driven

side (see illustration 17).
x Insert the elastomer ring or DZ individual elasto-
mers, respectively, into the cam section of the drive-
or driven-sided hub (see illustration 18.1 and 18.2).
)
ATTENTION!
Insert the DZ individual elastomers
with the web into the cam section of Illustration 17: Assembly of hub
the hub first (see illustration 18.2).
Illustration 18.1: Assembly of elastomer ring Illustration 18.2: Assembly of DZ individual elastomers
x Shift the power packs in axial direction until the di-

mension s is achieved (see illustration 19).
x If the power packs are already firmly assembled,
shifting the hubs axially on the shafts allows for ad-
justing the distance dimension s (see illustration 19).
x Fasten the hubs by tightening the setscrews
DIN EN ISO 4029 with a cup point (tightening torque
see table 2).
Illustration 19: Assembly of coupling
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.4 Assembly of type ADR, ADR-K and AVR
x Please stick the flange hub and the cam ring to-
gether (see illustration 20).
x Hand-tighten the components for the time being.
x Mount the hub and flange hub with cam ring on the
shaft of driving and driven side (see illustration 21).
Illustration 20: Assembly of flange hub with cam ring
x Tighten the screws by means of a suitable torque
key to the tightening torques TA mentioned in table
5.
x Insert the elastomer ring or DZ individual elasto-
mers, respectively, into the cam section of the
drive- or driven-sided hub or cam ring (see illustra-
tion 22.1 and 22.2).
Illustration 21: Assembly of hub and flange hub with cam ring
)
ATTENTION!
Insert the DZ individual elastomers with the web into the cam section of the hub or cam
ring first (see illustration 22.2).
Illustration 22.1: Assembly of elastomer ring Illustration 22.2: Assembly of DZ individual elastomers
CAUTION!
! To facilitate the assembly of the elastomer
ring when the power packs are already firmly
assembled, we would recommend to sepa-
rate the elastomer ring up to size 65 in one
position between the dampers (see illustra-
tion 23).
From size 75 on we would recommend to
separate the elastomer ring between every
Illustration 23: Mounting aid of Illustration 24: Mounting aid of
second damper to facilitate the assembly elastomer ring up to size 65 elastomer ring from size 75
(see illustration 24).
x Shift the power packs in axial direction until the dimension s is

achieved (see illustration 25).
x If the power packs are already firmly assembled, shifting the
hubs axially on the shafts allows for setting the dimension s (see
illustration 25).
x Fasten the hub or flange hubs by tightening the setscrews
DIN EN ISO 4029 with a cup point (tightening torque see
table 2).
CAUTION!
! Having started up the coupling, the tightening torque of the screws and wear of elastomer
ring has to be inspected at regular maintenance intervals.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.5 Assembly of type AZR, AZR short and AZVR
x Mount the coupling flanges on the shaft of driving

and driven side (see illustration 26). The internal
sides of the coupling flanges must be flush with the
front sides of the shafts.
x Shift the power packs in axial direction until the di-
mension L is achieved.
x Fasten the coupling flanges by tightening the set-
screws DIN EN ISO 4029 with a cup point (tighten-
ing torque see table 2).
Illustration 26: Assembly of coupling flanges
x Please plug the driving flanges and the elastomer

ring together (see illustration 27).
Illustration 27: Assembly of driving flange with elastomer ring
x Place the components plugged together between

the coupling flanges (see illustration 28).
x Hand-tighten the components for the time being.
x Tighten the screws by means of a suitable torque
key to the tightening torques TA mentioned in table
7, 10 and 13.
x Please check the dimension s or L (see table 6, 8
and 11).
x If the power packs are already firmly assembled,
shifting the coupling flanges axially on the shafts al-
lows for setting the dimension s or L (see illustration
28).
CAUTION!
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.6 Assembly of type AR/AZR
x Mount the coupling flange on the shaft of driving or

driven side (see illustration 29).
The internal side of the coupling flange must be
flush with the faces of the shafts.
Illustration 29: Assembly of coupling flange
x Please plug the hub, the elastomer ring and the

driving flange together (see illustration 30).
Illustration 30: Assembly of hub, elastomer ring and driving flange
x Assemble the parts plugged together onto the other

shaft end (see illustration 31).
x Fasten the hub and coupling flange by tightening the
setscrews DIN EN ISO 4029 with a cup point (tight-
ening torques see table 2).
Illustration 31: Assembly of component assembly

x Place the machine such that the driving flange and
coupling flange can be screwed to each other.
Hand-tighten the components for the time being and
tighten the screws by means of a suitable torque key
to the tightening torque TA mentioned in table 10.
x Please review the dimension s (see illustration 32).
CAUTION!
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.7 Assembly of taper clamping sleeve
Assembly of taper clamping sleeve:

Clean the contact surfaces of the taper clamping sleeves and of shaft and hub and afterwards apply thin fluid oil
lightly (e. g. Ballistol Universal oil or Klüber Quietsch-Ex).
The taper clamping sleeves have axially parallel, cylindrical and smooth blind holes. Only half of these holes are
located in the material of the sleeve. The other half located in the hub has threads.
Fit the coupling element and the taper clamping sleeve into each other, make sure that the bores cover each oth-
er and tighten the setscrews lightly. Fit the coupling element along with the taper clamping sleeve on the shaft
and tighten the setscrews at the tightening torque indicated in table 15.
During the process of screwing the hub is mounted onto the taper sleeve and thus the sleeve is pressed onto the
shaft. By light blows of the hammer the taper clamping sleeve must be pushed further into the taper bore by
means of a suitable sleeve. Afterwards please re-tighten the setscrews at the tightening torque indicated in table
15. This process must be performed at least once.
After the drive has operated under load for a short while please inspect if the setscrews have unscrewed.
An axial fixing of the Taper Lock hub (coupling hub with taper clamping sleeve) is obtained by a proper assembly
only.
CAUTION!
! If used in hazardous locations the setscrews to fix the taper clamping sleeves have to be
secured against working loose additionally, e. g. conglutinating with Loctite (average
strength).
The use of taper clamping sleeves without a feather key is not permitted in hazardous
locations.
CAUTION!
! Oils and greases with molybdenum disulphide or high-pressure additives, additives of
Teflon and silicone as well as sliding grease paste reducing the coefficient of friction signif-
icantly must not be used.
®
Disassembly of taper clamping sleeve:

The taper clamping sleeve is released by removing the setscrews. Afterwards one of the setscrews used as
forcing screw is screwed in the thread of the sleeve and tightened.
The coupling hub detached in this way can be manually removed from the shaft with the taper clamping sleeve.
Table 15:
Screw dimensions
Taper clam-
G L SW TA Quantity
ping sleeve
[inch] [inch] [mm] [Nm]
1108 1/4 1/2 3 5.7 2
1210 3/8 5/8 5 20 2
1610 3/8 5/8 5 20 2
1615 3/8 5/8 5 20 2
2012 7/16 7/8 6 31 2
2517 1/2 7/8 6 49 2
3020 5/8 1 1/4 8 92 2
3030 5/8 1 1/4 8 92 3
3535 1/2 1 1/2 10 115 3 Illustration 34: Withworth setscrew (BSW)
4040 5/8 1 3/4 12 170 3
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.8 Advice for finish bore
KTR supplies unbored or pilot bored coupling components and spare parts only upon explicit request of the cus-
tomer. These parts are additionally labelled with the symbol .
CAUTION!
! The customer bears the sole responsibility for all machining processes performed subse-
quently on unbored or pilot bored as well as finish machined coupling components and
spare parts. KTR does not assume any warranty claims resulting from insufficient rema-
chining.
Table 16: Recommended fit pairs acc. to DIN 748/1

Bore [mm]
Shaft tolerance Bore tolerance
above up to
50 k6 H7
50 m6 (KTR standard)
If a feather key is intended to be used in the hub, it should correspond to the tolerance ISO JS9 (KTR standard)
with normal operating conditions or ISO P9 with complicated operating conditions (frequently alternating torsional
direction, shock loads, etc.). The keyway should preferably be located between the cams. With axial fastening by
setscrews the tapping should be located on the keyway.
The transmittable torque of the shaft-hub-connection must be reviewed by the customer and is subject to his re-
sponsibility.
4.9 Displacements - alignment of the coupling
The POLY-NORM® compensates for displacements generated by the shafts to be combined as shown in table
17. Excessive misalignment may be caused by inaccurate alignment, production tolerances, thermal expansion,
shaft deflection, twisting of machine frames, etc.
CAUTION!
! In order to ensure a long service life of the coupling and avoid dangers with the use in haz-
ardous locations, the shaft ends must be accurately aligned.
Please absolutely observe the displacement figures indicated (see table 17). If the figures
are exceeded, the coupling will be damaged.
The more accurate the alignment of the coupling, the longer is its service life.
If used in hazardous locations for the explosion group IIC (marking II 2GD c IIC T X), only
half of the displacement figures (see table 17) are permissible.
Please note:
x The displacement figures mentioned in table 17 are maximum figures which must not arise in parallel. If the
radial and the angular displacement occur at the same time, the sum of the displacement figures must not ex-
ceed 'Kr or 'KW.
x Please inspect with a dial gauge, ruler or feeler whether the permissible displacement figures of table 17 are
observed.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.9 Displacements - alignment of the coupling
Axial displacements Radial displacements Angular displacements
Ladm. = L + 'Ka [mm] 'Kw = smax. - smin. [mm]

Illustration 35: Displacements
Examples for the displacement combina-

tions specified in illustration 36: Illustration 36:
Combinations of
Example 1: displacement
'Kr = 30 %
'Kw = 70 %
Example 2:
'Kr = 60 %
'Kw = 40 %
'Ktotal = 'Kr + 'Kw d 100 %
Table 17: Displacement figures

Size 28 32 38 42 48 55 60 65 75 85 90
Max. axial displacement 'Ka [mm] ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5 ±1.5
Max. radial dis- 1500 rpm 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.4 0.5
placement 'Kr [mm]
with 3000 rpm 0.15 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.26 0.3 0.3 0.33
1500 rpm
Max. angular dis- 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.4
(1 degree)
placement 'Kw
3000 rpm
[degree] 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7
(0.5 degree)
Size 100 110 125 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
Max. axial displacement 'Ka [mm] ±3 ±3 ±3 ±3 ±3 ±3 ±4 ±4 ±4 ±4 ±4
1350 1220 1030 960
Max. radial dis- 1500 rpm
rpm rpm rpm rpm
placement 'Kr [mm]
0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.70 0.70 0.85 0.85
with
3000 rpm 0.37 - - - - - - - - - -
1350 1220 1030 960
1500 rpm 1500 rpm
Max. angular dis- rpm rpm rpm rpm
(1 degree)
placement 'Kw 3.9 4.3 4.8 5.5 6.1 6.0 7.8 8.7 9.6 11.3 12.2
[degree] 3000 rpm
1.9 - - - - - - - - - -
(0.5 degree)
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
4 Assembly
4.10 Spares inventory, customer service addresses
A basic requirement to ensure the operational readiness of the coupling is a stock of the most important spare
parts on site.
Contact addresses of the KTR partners for spare parts and orders can be obtained from the KTR homepage at
www.ktr.com.
)
ATTENTION!
KTR does not assume any liability or warranty for the use of spare parts and accessories
which are not provided by KTR and for the damages which may incur as a result.
5 Enclosure A
Type AR: hub/elastomer ring/hub or hub/DZ individual elastomers/hub

Type ADR: hub/elastomer ring/flange hub/cam ring or
hub/DZ individual elastomers/flange hub/cam ring
Type ADR-K: hub/elastomer ring/flange hub K/cam ring or
hub/DZ individual elastomers/flange hub K/cam ring
Type AZR and AZR short: coupling flange/driving flange/elastomer ring/driving flange/coupling flange
Type AR/AZR: hub/elastomer ring/driving flange/coupling flange
Type AZVR: coupling flange/driving flange/elastomer ring/driving flange AZVR/
coupling flange AZVR
Type with taper clamping sleeve: hub/taper clamping sleeve/elastomer ring/taper clamping sleeve/hub
(Use of taper clamping sleeve only permissible in combination with a
feather key!)
Conditions of operation in hazardous locations
POLY-NORM® couplings are suitable for the use according to EC directive 94/9/EC.
1. Industry (with the exception of mining)

x Equipment group II of category 2 and 3 (coupling is not approved for equipment group 1)
x Media class G (gases, fogs, steams), zone 1 and 2 (coupling is not approved for zone 0)
x Media class D (dusts), zone 21 and 22 (coupling is not approved for zone 20)
x Explosion group IIC (explosion class IIA and IIB are included in IIC)
Temperature class:
Ambient or operating temperature
Temperature class Max. surface temperature
Ta
T5, T4, T3, T2, T1 - 30 °C to + 80 °C 1) + 100 °C 2)
T6 - 30 °C to + 65 °C + 85 °C
Explanation:
The maximum surface temperatures result from each the maximum permissible ambient or operating temperature Ta plus the maximum tem-
perature increase 'T of 20 K which has to be taken into account.
1) The ambient or operating temperature Ta is limited to + 80 °C due to the permissible permanent operating temperature of the elastomers
used.
2) The maximum surface temperature of + 100 °C applies for the use in locations which are potentially subject to dust explosion, too.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
2. Mining
Equipment group I of category M2 (coupling is not approved for equipment group M1).
Permissible ambient temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C.
5.2 Inspection intervals for couplings in hazardous locations
Explosion group Inspection intervals

For couplings which are classified in category 3G or 3D the operating and assembly instructions
that are usual for standard operation apply. During the standard operation which has to be sub-
3G
ject to the ignition risk analysis the couplings are free from any ignition source. Merely the tem-
3D perature increase produced by self-heating and depending on the coupling type has to be con-
sidered: for POLY-NORM®: 'T = 20 K
An inspection of the circumferential backlash and a visual inspection of the elastomer ring/DZ
individual elastomers must be performed after 3,000 operating hours for the first time, at the
latest after 6 months after start-up of the coupling.
If you note insignificant or no wear on the elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers upon this
II 2G c IIB initial inspection, further inspections can each be performed after 6,000 operating hours or at
T4, T5, T6 the latest after 18 months, provided that the operating parameters remain the same.
If you note significant wear during the initial inspection, so that it would be recommendable to
replace the elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers, please find out the cause according to the
table „Breakdowns“, if possible.
The maintenance intervals must be adjusted to the modified operating parameters without fail.
An inspection of the circumferential backlash and a visual inspection of the elastomer ring/DZ
individual elastomers must be performed after 2,000 operating hours for the first time, at the
latest after 3 months after start-up of the coupling.
If you note insignificant or no wear on the elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers upon this
II 2G c IIC initial inspection, further inspections can each be performed after 4,000 operating hours or at
T4, T5, T6 the latest after 12 months, provided that the operating parameters remain the same.
If you note significant wear during the initial inspection, so that it would be recommendable to
replace the elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers, please find out the cause according to the
table „Breakdowns“, if possible.
The maintenance intervals must be adjusted to the modified operating parameters without fail.
Inspection of torsional backlash
Here the backlash between the coupling cams

and the elastomer teeth must be inspected by
means of reversing backlash.
The friction/wear may be 25 % of the original
tooth thickness of the elastomer before the
elastomer rings/DZ individual elastomers must
be replaced.
When reaching the limit of wear and tear 'smax.,
the elastomer rings/DZ individual elastomers
must be replaced immediately, irrespective of
®
the inspection intervals.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
5.3 Standard values of wear
Reaching the limits for replacing depends on the operating conditions and the existing operating parameters.
With torsional backlash t 'smax. [mm] the elastomer rings/DZ individual elements must be replaced. With wear t
25 % of the original thickness of the elastomer teeth it is necessary to replace the elastomer rings/DZ individual
elements.
CAUTION!
! In order to ensure a long service life of the coupling and avoid dangers with the use in haz-
ardous locations, the shaft ends must be accurately aligned.
Please absolutely observe the displacement figures indicated (see table 17). If the figures
are exceeded, the coupling will be damaged.
Illustration 38: Inspection of the limit of wear Illustration 39: Wear of elastomer ring
Table 18:
Limits of wear Limits of wear
® ®
POLY-NORM Thickness of Torsional back- POLY-NORM Thickness of Torsional back-
size Friction Xmax. size Friction Xmax.
elastomer elastomer
tooth [mm]
[mm] lash 'Smax. [mm] tooth [mm]
[mm] lash 'Smax. [mm]
28 7.2 1.80 3.0 100 23.0 5.75 9.1
32 8.8 2.20 3.6 110 22.5 5.5 8.0
38 9.0 2.20 3.6 125 24.5 6.0 9.0
42 9.6 2.40 4.0 140 23.8 6.0 9.0
48 10.3 2.55 4.2 160 25.4 6.4 9.6
55 11.9 2.95 4.7 180 26.2 6.6 9.9
60 12.6 3.15 5.1 200 28.0 7.0 13.0
65 13.4 3.35 5.4 220 29.5 7.4 13.4
75 15.6 3.90 6.1 240 32.5 8.1 14.1
85 19.1 4.75 7.4 260 38.0 9.5 15.5
90 20.0 5.00 7.0 280 40.0 10.0 16.0
5.4 Permissible coupling materials in hazardous locations
In the explosion groups IIA, IIB and IIC the following materials may be combined:
EN-GJL-250 (GG 25)
EN-GJS-400-15 (GGG 40)
Steel
Semifinished products of aluminium with a magnesium share of up to 7.5°% and a yield point of
Rp0.2 250 N/mm2 are permitted for the use in hazardous locations.
Aluminium diecast is generally excluded for hazardous locations.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
5.5 marking of coupling for hazardous locations
Couplings for the use in hazardous locations are marked on at least one component completely and on the bal-
ance of components by an label on the outside diameter of the hub or on the front side each for the operating
conditions permitted. The elastomer ring or DZ individual elastomer is excluded.
Short labelling:
II 2GD c IIC T X/I M2 c X
(Standard)
Complete labelling: II 2G c IIC T6 resp. T5 - 30 °C dTa d + 65 °C resp. + 80 °C

II 2D c T 100 °C - 30 °C d Ta d + 80 °C / I M2 c - 30 °C dTad + 80 °C
The former marking remains II 2G c IIC T4/T5/T6 - 30 °C d Ta d + 80/60/45 °C

valid: II 2D c T 110 °C/I M2 c - 30 °C d Ta d + 80 °C
The labelling with explosion group llC includes the explosion groups llA and llB.
If the symbol was stamped in addition to , the coupling component was supplied unbored or pilot bored by
KTR.
5.6 Start-up
Before start-up of the coupling, please inspect the tightening of the setscrews in the hubs, the alignment and the
distance dimension s and adjust, if necessary, and also inspect all screw connections for the tightening torques
specified, dependent on the type of coupling.
If used in hazardous locations the setscrews to fasten the hubs as well as all screw connections
must be secured against working loose additionally, e. g. conglutinating with Loctite (average
strength).
Finally, the coupling protection against accidental contact must be fitted.
The cover must be electrically conductive and included in the equipotential bonding. Bellhousings (magnesium
share below 7.5 %) made of aluminium and damping rings (NBR) can be used as connecting element between
pump and electric motor. The cover may only be taken off after having stopped the unit.
During operation of the coupling, please pay attention to

x different operating noise
x vibrations occurring.
If the couplings are used in locations subject to dust explosion and in mining the user must make sure that there
is no accumulation of dust in a dangerous volume between the cover and the coupling. The coupling must not
operate in an accumulation of dust.
For covers with unlocked openings on the top face no light metals must be used if the couplings are used as
equipment of equipment group ll (if possible, from stainless steel).
If the couplings are used in mining (equipment group l M2), the cover must not be made of light metal. In addition,
it must be resistant to higher mechanical loads than if it is used as equipment of equipment group ll.
The minimum distance „Sr“ between the protection device and the rotating parts must at least correspond to the
figures mentioned below.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
5.6 Start-up
If the protection device is used as cover, regular openings complying with the explosion protection demands can
be made that must not exceed the following dimensions:
Cover [mm]
Openings
Top side Lateral components Distance „Sr“
Circular - max. diameter 4 8 t 10
Rectangular - max. lateral length 4 8 t 10
Straight or curved slot - max. lateral
not permissible 8 t 20
length/height
CAUTION!
! If you note any irregularities with the coupling during operation, the drive unit must be
switched off immediately. The cause of the breakdown must be found out by means of the
table „Breakdowns“ and if possible, be eliminated according to the proposals. The potential
breakdowns mentioned can be hints only. To find out the cause all operating factors and
machine components must be considered.
Coupling coating:
If coated (priming, painting etc.) couplings are used in hazardous locations, the requirements on
conductibility and coating thickness must be considered. In case of paintings up to 200 μm electro-
static load does not have to be expected. Multiple coatings that are thicker than 200 μm are prohib-
ited for explosion group llC.
The below-mentioned failures can lead to a use of the POLY-NORM® coupling other than intended. In addition to
the specifications given in these operating and assembly instructions please make sure to avoid these failures.
The errors listed can only be clues to search for the failures. When searching for the failure the adjacent compo-
nents must generally be included.
If used other than intended the coupling can become a source of ignition.
EC directive 94/9/EC requires special care from the manufacturer and the user.
General failures with use other than intended:

x Important data for the coupling selection were not forwarded.
x The calculation of the shaft-hub-connection was not considered.
x Coupling components with damage occurred during transport are assembled.
x If the heated hubs are assembled, the permissible temperature is exceeded.
x The clearance of the components to be assembled is not coordinated with each other.
x Tightening torques have been fallen below/exceeded.
x Components are exchanged by mistake/assembled incorrectly.
x A wrong or no elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers are inserted in the coupling.
x No original KTR parts (purchased parts) are used.
x Old/already worn off elastomer rings resp. DZ individual elastomers or those which are stored for too long are
used.
x The coupling used/the coupling protection used is not suitable for the operation in hazardous areas and does
not correspond to EC directive 94/9/EC, respectively.
x Maintenance intervals are not observed.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
Hazard notes for

Breakdowns Causes Elimination
hazardous locations
1) Set the unit out of operation
2) Eliminate the reason for the misalign-
ment (e. g. loose foundation bolts,
breaking of the engine mount, heat ex-
Misalignment
pansion of unit components, modifica-
tion of the mounting dimension s of the
coupling)
3) Inspection of wear see item inspection
2) Disassemble the coupling and remove
Different operating
remainders of the elastomer ring
noise and/or vibra- Wear of elastomer
3) Inspect coupling components and re-
tions occurring ring, short-term
place coupling components that are
torque transmission
damaged
due to metal contact
4) Insert elastomer ring, assemble cou-
pling components
5) Inspect alignment, adjust if necessary
Screws for axial 2) Inspect alignment of coupling
fastening of hubs 3) Tighten the screws to secure the hubs
working loose and secure against working loose
Wear of elastomer
ring, torque trans- Ignition risk due to
2) Replace complete coupling
mission due to metal sparking
3) Inspect alignment
contact
Breaking of the 1) Set the unit out of operation
cams due to high 2) Replace complete coupling
impact ener- 3) Inspect alignment
gy/overload 4) Find out the reason for overload
Breaking of cam Operating parame-
2) Review the operating parameters and
ters do not corre-
select a bigger coupling (consider
spond to the per-
mounting space)
formance of the
3) Assemble new coupling size
coupling
4) Inspect alignment
Operating error of 2) Replace complete coupling
the unit 3) Inspect alignment
4) Instruct and train the service staff
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
Hazard notes for

Breakdowns Causes Elimination
hazardous locations
2) Eliminate the reason for the misalign-
ment (e. g. loose foundation bolts,
breaking of the engine mount, heat ex-
Misalignment
pansion of unit components, modifica-
tion of the mounting dimension s of the
coupling)
e. g. contact with 2) Disassemble the coupling and remove
aggressive liq- remainders of the elastomer ring
uids/oils, influence 3) Inspect coupling components and re-
by ozone, too place coupling components that are
high/low ambient damaged
Early wear of elas- temperature etc. 4) Insert elastomer ring, assemble cou-
tomer ring causing a physical pling components
modification of the 5) Inspect alignment, adjust if necessary
elastomer ring 6) Make sure that other physical modifica-
tions of the elastomer ring are excluded
excessively high
3) Inspect coupling components and re-
ambient/contact Ignition risk due to
place coupling components that are
temperatures for the sparking with metallic
damaged
elastomer ring; max. contact of the cams
4) Insert elastomer ring, assemble cou-
permissible
pling components
- 30 °C/+ 80 °C
6) Inspect and adjust ambient/contact
temperature
Early wear of elas- 3) Inspect coupling components and re-
tomer ring (Harden- place coupling components that are
Vibrations of drive
ing/embrittlement of damaged
the elastomer cam) 4) Insert elastomer ring, assemble cou-
pling components
6) Find out the reason for vibrations
If you operate with a worn elastomer ring/DZ individual elastomers (see chapter 5.2) and the sub-
sequent contact of metal parts, a proper operation meeting the explosion protection requirements
and acc. to directive 94/9/EC is not ensured.
POLY-NORM®
Edition: 13
5 Enclosure A
5.8 EC Certificate of conformity
EC Certificate of conformity
corresponding to EC directive 94/9/EC dated 23 March 1994
and to the legal regulations
The manufacturer - KTR Kupplungstechnik GmbH, D-48432 Rheine - states that the
POLY-NORM® couplings
in an explosion-proof design described in these assembly instructions correspond to article 1 (3) b) of
directive 94/9/EC and comply with the general safety and health requirements according to enclosure
II of directive 94/9/EC.
The POLY-NORM® torsionally flexible coupling is in accordance with the specifications of the directive
94/9/EC. One or several directives mentioned in the corresponding EC type examination certificate
IBExU02ATEXB006_05 X were in part replaced by updated versions.
KTR Kupplungstechnik GmbH being the manufacturer confirms that the product mentioned above is in
accordance with the specifications of the new directives, too.
According to article 8 (1) of directive 94/9/EC the technical documentation is deposited with the institu-
tion:
IBExU
Institut für Sicherheitstechnik GmbH
Fuchsmühlenweg 7
09599 Freiberg
Rheine, 20.02.2013 i. V. i. V.
Place Date Reinhard Wibbeling Michael Brüning
Head of Engineering Product Manager
System description:
Design:
Both progressive grease lubrication systems basically have identical designs, and each one
essentially consists of the FZ-B pump (these only differ with respect to the drive position), the
ZP-A main distributor and the PVB sub-distributors. The main distributor is supplied by the
pump through a feed line. The main distributor has a control pin for for optical display for on-site
functional monitoring and an electronic monitoring switch for the electrical evaluation.
An NU-A pressure relief valve (already attached to the pump) is integrated into the feed line to
the main distributor directly after the pump. As can be seen in the diagram, the pump, the
distributor and the lubrication points are connected with pipe and hose lines. The pipework and
screwed joints are not part of the Delimon scope of delivery.
Attention: The outlet of the NU-A must be aligned in such a way that there is no danger to
personnel in the event that lubricant leaks out.
The electrical design of the entire system is not documented in this document. The lubrication
cycles are controlled by the customer's electrical system. The pump motor, level switch and
monitoring switch are connected directly to the terminals provided for them of the devices
named. Electrical functions and connections for individual devices are included in the
appendices.
Function: (See also the attached description "Progressive functional sequence".)

If required, the customer's switchgear can be used to trigger a lubrication process, e.g. at the
end of a specific operating time of the system to be lubricated. The lubrication process runs as
follows:
 The pump is turned on and delivers lubricant continuously to the distributors depending on
the delivering quantity set at its outlet.
 Depending on their configuration (metering volume and segment arrangement), the
distributor divides this quantity into partial quantities, which are fed to the lubrication points.
 After a specific running time, the pump is switched off and the pause time begins.
The NU-A pressure relief valves prevent any damage to the system from an excessive build-up
of pressure if a distributor is blocked or a feed line clogged. In this case the lubricant is pumped
outside, so we strongly recommend regular functional monitoring using the optical control pin on
the distributor, or through evaluation of the monitoring switch.
Level monitoring:
The pump is equipped with an ultrasonic level switch with three switching points (max - min -
empty) that allows both an on-site display (LED) and also includes further processing of the
signals in the customer's control unit. The switching point max. is used as a fault message in the
event of failure of the filling valve (not relevant here). The min signal must be processed in such
a way that a "tank level < min." message is displayed in the centre as a prompt for immediate
refilling. The empty signal must be processed in such a way that the "empty tank" fault message
is issued. However, the shut-down of the pump should not be carried out immediately while a
lubrication process is running, but only after the regular end of this process, unless the runtime
of the pump has exceeded the 10 min. value since the empty signal was sent. Then the
lubrication process must be stopped immediately. Otherwise there is a risk of the pump drawing
in air.
Description_902403 „Song Hau 1 – Vietnam“ Page 1 of 2

Adjustment activities, settings:
Lubricant quantities:
The delivered quantity of the pump outlets and the parameters for control of the plant (pause
time, pump runtime or number of cycles) must be set according to the required lubricant
amounts. These values must be specified by the bearing manufacturer or the system operator.
The quantity of lubrication supplied to a main distributor can be set on the pump outlet assigned
to the feed line in question. If multiple pump outlets are combined, their individual quantities are
added. The division ratios for the distributor itself cannot be adjusted but rather are fixed by their
configuration. The total quantity supplied over a certain period of operation is set by the
frequency and duration of lubrication cycles, that is, via the pause time and the pump running
time.
FZ-A/B grease lubrication pump: The numbers 0 to 4 are stamped into the hexagon of the
adjustment spindle. Setting 4 corresponds to the greatest delivery quantity. Turning the
adjustment spindle clockwise reduces the delivery quantity. To ensure reliable operation of the
pump, avoid adjusting the setting to less than 1/4 of the maximum delivery quantity. For pumps
with 2 outlets (FZ-B) or 7 to 12 outlets (FZ-A) a single adjustment spindle sets the delivery
volume of two outlets one above the other. The type FZ-B has 6 adjustment spindles, each
responsible for a partial quantity of 0.1 cm³ (for 2 outlets) or 0.2 cm³ (for 1 outlet). The total
quantity at the outlet is thus determined by the total of the setting for the partial quantities. If it is
necessary to reduce the total quantity, we recommend that this is achieved by an equal spread
of the reduction across all 6 adjustment spindles. At the factory the pump is set by default to
the maximum delivery quantity.
For more details about the design and function, as well as the operation and maintenance of the
system, refer to the accompanying individual documents for the devices and components.
Description_902403 „Song Hau 1 – Vietnam“ Page 2 of 2

Installation and Servicing of Central Lubricating Systems
Operating instruction
1. Pump
1.01 Install the pump where it is easily accessibble, in a place 2.11 When vehicles are used at the site, in mining or in agricul-
free from dirt. Pay attention to the operating temperature ture, take special steps to ensure that piping cannot be
range (dependent on the type of pump and lubricant). pulled down, particularly in winter when there is ice and
1.02 Install it at a central point in the system to be lubricated, so snow, e.g. by installing the piping in load-bearing parts of
that with short lenghts of piping, the pressure drop can be the plant, sufficiently high up and on the side furthest
kept to a minimum thus ensuring sufficient pressure to away from the normal direction of travel of the vehicles.
overcome the back-pressure at the lubrication points. 2.12 High temperature accelerates the aging of lubricants, low
1.03 The pump resevoir should be big enough to ensure infre- temperature increases the resistance offered by the pi-
quent replenishing. ping and, in certain circumstances, can lead to the
lubrication being inadequate, or to damage to the pump;
1.04 Pumps with electric motors often need to rotate in a parti- piping should therefore be installed so that, as far as pos-
cular direction. Pay attention to the arrow on the motor or sible, it is not exposed to very high or very low
the pump casing. If the direction of rotation is not that temperatures.
shown by arrow, interchange two of the leads of 3-phase
A.C. motors. The operating instructions for the particular 2.13 For mobile lubrication points of difficult access, use rub-
pump should be followed in all cases. berized fabric hoses or nylon pipes, or, if heavily loaded,
heavy steel-braided hoses.
2. Pipes and hoses

2.01 The use of seamless steel pipes to DIN 2391 is recom- 3. Pipe connections
mended. For systems operating in severe conditions, it is
3.01 For pipes of outside diameters up to about 42 mm, use
recommended to use copper pipes, externally ?tinned
non-soldered pipe unions for preference.
steel pipes? or stainless steel pipes.
3.02 Make pipe joints in accordance with the supplier’s in-
2.02 Use a pipe cutter, and not a saw, for cutting pipes, so that
struction (see page 4).
no swarf is produced. If pipes do have to be sawn, they
must be rinsed out afterwards. 3.03 Do not use hemp; use sealing tape or gaskets.
2.03 Always bend in the cold state using a bending device, to
avoid scale.
2.04 Do not use sharp pipe bends.
2.05 Thoroughly clean the pipes, dislodge and remove all loo-
se matter, and blow through; fill the pipes with lubricant as 4. Filter
soon as they are installed, if possible.
4.01 In some pump types, the filter is integrated in the pressure
2.06 Remove any rust or mill scale present inside, if necessary connection of the pump.
pickle and then neutralize.
4.02 External filtration
2.07 Cover the openings of pipes which have been cleaned,
for transport. 4.03 At intervals depending on the amount of dirt, unscrew and
remove the filter, clean it in paraffin and blow through with
2.08 In oil central lubrication systems, install the piping with a compressed air.
slight slope upwards to the end of the line, to avoid air Attention:
locks. If this is not possible, arrange the distributor so that A blinding filter due to pollution is leading to the bursting
the system can be bled via the distributor. of the filter element.
2.09 Avoid syphons - socalled sacks - for instance when you
have to bypass obstacles. In such syphons, air inclusions
accumulate which cannot be eliminated during venting.
2.10 Fix the pipes to the machine to be lubricated or to a wall,
where they can be seen and are easily accessible, using
enough pipe clips to protect them from mechanical da-
mage.
X01BA1_2010_1_GB
5. Distributor 9. Pressure gauge
5.01 Fix the distributor to the machine being lubricated, or on a 9.01 A pressure gauge for checking the pressure should al-
wall, in such a way that it can not be pulled off by normal ways be installed on the pump delivery side, in the main
forces acting on it. delivery line.
5.02 If possible, arrange the distributor so that it can be easily 9.02 In single-line systems for grease, a pressure gauge
bled and/or replaced. Installation in a branch line is prefe- should also be fitted at the end of the line.
rable to an installation in the main delivery line itself. 9.03 In dual-line systems, a pressure gauge should be fitted at
5.03 Take care that the distributors are not twisted when scre- the end of each of the two main delivery lines.
wing together distributor segments (e.g. progressive 9.04 The secondary delivery lines leading to the pressure gau-
distributors) because this might result in the fact that the ges are filled with oil appropriately as grease might suffer
pistons get stuck. from ageing after a longer period of time.
5.04 In severse conditions it is recommended to install dis-
tributors with the adjustment and indicating devices
facing downwards.
6. Switching units at the end of the line 10. Commissioning of the system
6.01 Switching units are often used at the end of the line in 10.01 Avoid removing the cover to fill up the reservoir on the
single-line and dual-line systems, to signal a maximum or pump; instead, use a filling pump and fill the reservoir
minimum pressure or differential pressure. Since such through the filling connection.
units are liable to gum up after a time when grease is 10.02 If the filling line is not permanently installed, a quick relea-
used, a distributor should be installed downstream from se coupling should be used.
the switching unit.
Secondary delivery lines leading to the pressure switch 10.03 When filling, take care that the reservoir does not over-
are filled with oil appropriately. flow.
10.04 It is preferable to fit an electrical level indicator to switch
off the filling pump when the level reaches the permitted
maximum.
10.05 For the initial filling of pumps and lubricant reservoirs with
grease, it is advisable, with most pumps, to put oil in first;
7. Pressure relief valve this fills all the cavites and prevents air locks which could
lead to the pump failing to develop sufficient pressure
7.01 A pressure relief valve should always be fitted in the deli-
when it is started up.It the bearings are of a type which
very line of a pump driven by an electric motor, so that the
should not be lubricated with oil,even for a short time, the
pump is not damaged if, while it is working, a distributor
pump should be operated until air-free grease issues
becomes jammed or a lubrication point stopped up, or
from the ends of the lines.
the main delivery line is inadvertently closed.
10.06 On pumps having an anti.cavitation plate and which are
7.02 The pressure release line from the relief valve should be
filled through the top of the reservoir after the cover has
connected to the suction side of the pump or to the reser-
been removed, withdraw the plate and after filling, press
voir.
the plate down on to the grease a number of times to drive
7.03 The pressure relief valve should not be set at a higher out the air.
pressure than is permissible for the pump.
10.07 Do not connect the distributors before lubricant comes
(Some pumps have a built-in pressure relief valve).
bubble-free out of the feed line.
10.08 Do not connect the lubrication points until air-free lubri-
cant issues from the lines.
10.09 Cocks for checking the supply of lubricant may be fitted, if
8. Burst discs desired, in front of the lubrication points.
8.01 Some pumps (e.g. BS-B), in addition to pressure relief

valve, also have built-in burst discs, which burst and the-
reby protect the system components (e.g. pipes, fittings,
etc.) if the pressure rises too high (pressure relief valve
wrongly set).
2
11. Types of lubricants and frequency of 14. Installation of hoses
lubrication
a) Hoses should be of such a length and installed in such a
11.01 Types of lubricants and frequency of lubrication are spe- way, that
cified by the supplier or manufacturer of the machine 1. They can be installed and removed without difficulty,
being lubricated. In general, when starting up, it is better 2. The radius of curvature of the hoses is not less than the
to over-lubricate rather to underlubricate, but in the cour- minimum stated,
se of time, after adequate observation of the lubrication 3. The hose is not kinked, either when the parts connected
points, it is often possible to reduce considerably the by it are at rest or in motion. There is a risk of this particu-
quantity of lubricant used. larly at the point where the hose is connected to the fitting.
The points where the risks exist are circled in the drawings.
If the space available for installation is restricted, kinking of the
hose at its connection to the fitting can be avoided by the use of
an elbow.
12. Electrical system b) Movement of the part to which the hose is connected,
12.01 Connection of the power supply and changeing of electri- should be only in the plane in which the hose is installed.
cal parts if required, should be undertaken only by a Rotation round an axis which is not perpendicular to the
qualified electrician. plane of installation, is not permissible.
13. Spares
13.01 When ordering spares, state the following:
Designation of the pump
Code no.
Year of manufacture
Quantity, designation and Code no. of the spares requi-
red.
13.02 Note that in almost all pumps and distributors, the
plungers have been lapped into or matched to their cy-
linders. These parts must not be interchanged. Plungers
removed during servicing must always be replaced in the
bore from which they were taken. If replacement is nec-
cessary, the two parts must be ordered together.
13.03 It is recommended to keep a stock of parts subject to
wear, for all major units. The most important parts subject
to wear are specially marked in the parts list.
13.04 Repair of particularly old discontinued pumps or units is
sometimes uneconomical. In that case, the pump or unit
should be replaced by one from our current range.
13.05 It is often not possible to give a firm estimate for a repair
until the unit has been dismantled. If no order follows the
quotation for repair, the enquirer must bear the cost of
dismantling and of reassembling if required.
3
15. Assembly of olives
Fig.1 Cut off the end of the pipe square. Fig. 2 Deburr the inside of the pipe. Fig. 3 Deburr the outside of the pipe.
Fig.4 Thoroughly oil the thread. Fig. 5 Oil the taper. Fig. 6 Thorougly oil the olive all over.
Fig.7 Thoroughly oil zhe thread of the Fig. 8 Slide the olive on correctly - Fig. 9 Tighten the union nut by hand
union nut; do not use grease. otherside the fitting will be wrong. until it is felt to come to a stop.
Fig.10 Press the pipe into the taper Fig. 11 Tighten the nut by about 3/4 of Fig. 12 Tighten finally by about 3/4 of
against the stop. a turn. This causes the olive to grip the a turn. This causes the olive to cut
Mark the pipe and nut. pipe. The pipe must not turn. into the pipe and results in a visible
collar over ist cutting edge.
Fig.13 Unscrew the nut and check whether Fig. 14 Tighten the nut slightly after the Fig. 15 How the union functions after
the visible collar takes up the space in front connection has been completed and every the nut has been tightened.
of the cutting edge. time after the nut has been slackened.
DELIMON GmbH
Arminstraße 15 Phone: +49 211 77740 Niederlassung: Am Bockwald 4 Für reibungslose Bewegung
40227 Düsseldorf Fax: +49 211 7774 210 08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld For smooth motion
Postfach 10 20 52 kontakt@bijurdelimon.com Phone: +49 3774 65110
40011 Düsseldorf www.bijurdelimon.com Fax: +49 3774 651130
Principle of Operation of the Control Unit
of a Progressive Centralized Lubrication System
(with monitored main distributor)
1. Terms:
- Distributor circulationProcess in which all pistons of the distributor have completely moved in
both final positions once and the initial state has been reobtained.
- Circulation volume: Sum of the partial volumes of all outlets of a distributor. This quantity has to
be supplied to the distributor to enable the same to execute one distributor
circulation.
- Circulation time: Time being required for one distributor circulation. This accrues from the
circulation volume and the volume flow in the feed line.
In case of progressive systems, only the main distributor is usually monitored and/or the monitoring
switch of the same evaluated for the control of the system. Possible subsidiary distributors connected
downstream are included in the monitoring because of the special principle of operation of
progressive systems (please also see leaflet X35P1).
2. Parameters:
The following parameters, which can be adjusted according to requirement within given limits, should
be provided in the control system.
- Pause time: Time between two lubricating cycles.
Range: 1...9999 min
- Number of circulations: Number of distributor circulations per lubricating cycle (*)
Range: 1...99
- Operation time: Given operation time of the pump for one lubricating cycle (*)
Range: 1...9999 s
- Monitoring time: Max. time allowed for the execution of one lubricating cycle
and/or one distributor circulation (*)
Range: 1...9999 s
(*) – depends on the chosen control mode of the lubricating cycle.
3. Sequence:
In the switching facility provided by the customer, a lubricating cycle is released in case of need by
detection of the operation time of the system to be lubricated and/or by evaluation of the in situ
operating elements being available depending on the design. The detection of the operation time
should be effected by an adding timer which only runs down when the system area to be lubricated is
in operation. A lubricating cycle is to be started when the detected operation time reaches the preset
pause time.
There are basically two possibilities of controlling a lubricating cycle.
Circulation-controlled lubricating cycle:
The duration of the lubricating cycle is fixed by the preselected number of circulations.
Operation time-controlled lubricating cycle:
The duration of the lubricating cycle is fixed by the preselected operation time.
Page 1 of 2 Ablauf Progressiv_1_GB

Sequence of the lubricating cycle:
1. Reset (clear) the pause timer. (*)
2. Switch on pump, start monitoring time.
3. Wait for switch-off criterion, i. e.
- In case of the circulation-controlled cycle: reaching of the preselected number of distributor
circulations (**)
- In case of the operation time-controlled cycle: expiration of the preselected operation time
4. During the operation time of the pump, check functioning of the main distributor by evaluating the
pulses of the monitoring switch.
- In case of the circulation-controlled cycle, the preselected monitoring time must not expire
before the selected number of distributor circulations has been obtained. Otherwise, the pump is
to be switched off and a fault alarm has to be given.
- In case of the operation time-controlled cycle, at least one complete pulse (i. e. two signal
changes) must have come from the monitoring switch of the distributor within the preselected
monitoring time. Otherwise, the pump is to be switched off and a fault alarm has to be given. In
case of a longer operation time, the monitoring time is to be started with an adequate frequency.
5. In case of a trouble-free sequence, switch off the pump after achievement of the switch-off
criterion.
6. After another expiration of the pause time, a new lubricating cycle starts.
(*) – The instant for the reset (clearance) of the pause timer has an influence on the expiration. When
the clearance – as described here – is made at the same time when the lubricating cycle starts, the
duration of the lubricating cycle itself has no influence on the expiration of the pause time. If the timer
is cleared at the end of the lubricating cycle only, the time required for the lubricating cycle adds up to
the preselected pause time. When the difference between the pause time and the time for a
lubricating cycle is not very great, this circumstance has a considerable influence on the really
effective pause time.
(**) – When evaluating the pulses of the monitoring switch it has to be considered that one complete
pulse (with a pulse-pause ratio of approx. 1 : 1) is released per distributor circulation. As the initial
position of the distributor, however, is not defined before the beginning of the lubricating cycle, the
pulse sequence can start at any point.
Page 2 of 2 Ablauf Progressiv_1_GB

Datenblatt für Drehstrom-Käfigläufermotoren
Data sheet for three-phase Squirrel-Cage-Motors
ohne (Standard)
Bestelldaten 1LA7063-4AB12-Z without (standard)
Ordering data: A11+K52
Kunden-Auftrags-Nr. / Client order no.: Item-Nr. / Item no.:

Siemens-Auftrags-Nr. / Order no.: Komm.-Nr. / Consignment no.:
Angebots-Nr. / Offer no.: Projekt / Project: DELIMON-Nr.: 76911M438
Bemerkung / Remarks:
Elektrische Daten / Electrical data: Allgemeine Daten / General data:

Bemessungsspannung (1) 230 VD/400 VY, 50 Hz, 460 VY, 60 Hz Baugröße
063 M
Rated voltage (1) 230 VD/400 VY, 50 Hz, 460 VY, 60 Hz Frame size
Frequenz Bauform (2) IM B14 / V18 / V19,
50 Hz 60 Hz Type of construction Normflansch
Frequency
Bemessungsleistung Gewicht in kg, ohne optionale Anbauten
0.18 kW 0.21 kW 4.10 kg
Rated power Weight in kg, without optional accessories
Bemessungsdrehzahl Gehäusematerial Aluminium
1350 1/ min 1650 1/ min Frame material Aluminum
Rated speed
Bemessungsmoment Schutzart
IP 56
1.3 Nm 1.2 Nm Degree of protection
Rated torque
Kühlart, TEFC,
Bemessungsstrom (IE) VD VY VY IC 411
Method of cooling, TEFC
Rated current (IE) 1.01 A 0.58 A 0.59 A Vibrationsklasse
A (Standard)
Anzugs-/ Bemessungsstrom Vibration class
3.0 3.1 Isolation 155(F) nach 130(B)
Starting / rated current
Kipp-/ Bemessungsmoment Insulation 155(F) to 130(B)
1.9 2.0
Breakdown / rated torque Betriebsart S1 - Dauerbetrieb
Anzugs-/Bemessungsmoment Duty type S1 - continuous duty
1.9 2.0
Starting / rated torque Drehrichtung bidirektional
4/4 3/4 2/4 4/4 3/4 2/4 Direction of rotation Bi-directional
Wirkungsgrad %
58.3% 56.8% 52.3% 58.3% 56.8% 52.3%
Efficiency %
Anschlusskasten / Terminal box:
Leistungsfaktor
0.76 0.70 0.59 0.77 0.71 0.59
Power factor Klemmenkastenmaterial Aluminium
Wirkungsgradklasse / Efficiency -/- -/- Material of terminal box Aluminum
Klemmenkastentyp
gk 030
Type of terminal box
Mechanische Daten / Mechanical data: Gewinde Kontaktschraube
M4
Schalldruckpegel (LpfA) 50Hz/60Hz (Last) Contact screw thread
42 dB(A) 46 dB(A)
Sound pressure level 50Hz/60Hz (load) Max. Leiterquerschnitt
1.50 mm²
Trägheitsmoment Max. cross-sectional area
0.00037 kg*m² Kabeldurchmesser von ... bis ...
Moment of inertia 9.00 mm - 17.00 mm
Cable diameter from ... to ...
Lager AS
6201 2ZC3 Kabeleinführung
Bearing DE 1xM25x1,5-1xM16x1,5
Cable entry
Lager BS
Bearing NDE
6201 2ZC3 Kabelverschraubung 2 Verschlussstopfen
Cable gland 2 plugs
Art der Lagerung Schwimmende Lagerung mit Anstellung AS
Type of bearing (Standard) Sonderausführung / Special design:
Kondenswasserlöcher Nein
A11 Motorschutz durch Kaltleiter mit 3 eingebauten Temperaturfühlern für Abschaltung
Condensate drainage holes No PTC thermistor motor protection using 3 integrated temperature sensors for
Nachschmiereinrichtung Nein shutdown
Regreasing device No K52 Schutzart IP56 (non-heavy-sea)
IP56 degree of protection (non-heavy sea)
Schmiermittel
Esso Unirex N3
Lubricants
Fettgebrauchsdauer/Nachschmierintervall
40000 h
Grease lifetime/Relubrication interval
Fettmenge Nachschmierung
null g
Quantity of grease for relubrication
Äußere Erdungsklemme Nein
External earthing terminal No
Anstrich Sonderanstrich RAL7030 steingrau
Coating Special paint finish RAL 7030 stone gray
Umgebungsbedingungen / Environmental
Umgebungstemperatur
-20 °C - +40 °C
Ambient temperature
Höhe über Meeresspiegel
1000 m
Altitude above sea level
Normen und Vorschriften
IEC, DIN, ISO, VDE, EN
Standards and specifications
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten! Es könnte Unterschiede zwischen Datenblatt und Leistungsschild geben. Generiert / Generated: 21.04.2016 13:57:25
Technical data are subject to change! There may be discrepancies between calculated and rating plate values.
Pump FZ-B
INDEX
Page
1. General ................................................................................. 2
2. Safety .............................................................................. 2 – 4
A Pump type ............................................................................ 5
B Number of outlets ................................................................ 5
C Revision ................................................................................ 5
D Kinds of drive ................................................................. 6 – 9
E Position of drive .................................................................. 9
F Reservoir ............................................................................ 10
G Accessories ....................................................................... 10
3. Application ......................................................................... 11
4. Principle of operation ........................................................ 11
5. Rotational direction of drive ............................................. 12
6. Specifications .................................................................... 12
7. Start-up ............................................................................... 12
8. Maintenance ............................................................... 13 – 14
9. Plates .................................................................................. 14
page 1 of 14 BA_2005_1_GB_FZB
1. General
Before installing and operating this equipment, we highly recommend that you become thoroughly familiar
with these instructions. DELIMON does not accept liability, expressed or implied, for any direct or
inconsequential injuries to personnel or damage to equipment, including process interruption, arising from
the misuse or misapplication of its products. Application and / or modification of product beyond its
intended purpose is strictly prohibited.
DELIMON reserves the right to make modifications, changes and/or amendments to both products and to
these instructions as may become necessary to assure ongoing technical clarity.
The content of this technical publication is the sole graphic and intellectual property of DELIMON and is
protected by local and International Copyright Law. As such, it may not be copied, reproduced or used for
any purpose other than that intended by the Company; i.e. as a guide to proper installation, maintenance
and operation of its equipment by qualified personnel and their supervisors. Use of this information for
any other purpose or intent requires the expressed written permission of DELIMON GmbH.
Contact Information: For assistance with product, replacement parts, service or training.
DELIMON GmbH Branch Office
Arminstraße 15 Am Bockwald 4
D-40277 Düsseldorf D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Phone : +49 211 77 74-0 E-mail : kontakt@bijurdelimon.com
Fax : +49 211 77 74-210 www.bijurdelimon.com
2. Safety
These instructions provide basic guidance which must be followed during installation, operation and
maintenance. It is assumed that personnel performing required tasks are skilled in the areas of electrical
and mechanical millwright trades plus all local and federal safety requirements. These instructions should
be kept near the point of use and made available for reference at all times.
2.1 Identification of safety warnings in the operating instructions

To minimize risk to people working with this equipment, safety warnings included within these instructions
must be observed. Potential safety issues are identified through use of the following general danger
symbols:
Safety Sign, per DIN 4844, provides warning of potential general danger.
Safety Sign, per DIN 4844, provides warning of potential electrical danger.
ATTENTION
Caution designation utilized to signify that damage to machinery and function may result if guidance is not
properly followed.
Instructions affixed directly to machines and equipment must always be observed and maintained to
ensure that they are fully legible. Examples of such instructions would be:
• Rotational direction arrows for shafts and couplings.
• Identification of fluid connections, direction of flow and substance contained in pipes.
Important Note: There is always increased risk of slipping or falling whenever spilled or leaking
lubricants are present. In all cases, they should be properly removed and disposed of.
Safety Sign, per DIN 4844, provides warning of an increased risk of slipping and falling
due to the presence of water, oil, grease or other foreign substances on pavements,
floors and walkways.
2. Safety (continuation)
2.2 Personnel qualification and training
Personnel performing work required to install, operate, maintain or inspect this equipment must be
adequately trained and qualified. In this regard, determination of competency, understanding and
supervision levels required for individual assignment is left to the purchaser of the equipment. However,
should assistance with on-site training be desired, please contact your local DELIMON office for
assistance.
2.3 Dangers in case of nonobservance of the safety instructions

Failure to properly follow all safety instructions may result in hazard to personnel, the environment or to
machinery and equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may also additionally void warranties and
nullify claims for damages. Examples of such instances follow:
• Failure of machinery or operating systems to function properly
• Failure to observe proper methods of maintenance and repair
• Unnecessary creation of hazards to personnel by means of electrical shock, mechanical injury or
exposure to potentially hazardous chemicals
• Unnecessary creation of environmental hazards through chemical leaks
2.4 Safety conscious working

All Safety Instructions resulting from National, Local or User mandated regulations, as well as those
contained within this instruction, must be observed at all times.
2.5 Safety instructions for the user/operator

• Users should always take care that only authorized and skilled personnel are allowed to perform
installation, maintenance and inspection work.
• Installation, maintenance and inspection of lubrication systems should only be performed while
machinery and equipment being serviced is in “Shut-Down Mode”.
• Protective covers and guards, provided to ensure that contact with moving parts is eliminated during
machine operation, (e.g. couplings, pulleys, gears, etc.), must be replaced following maintenance
and repair.
• Use “Common Sense”! When hot or cold machine parts can lead to potential dangers, those parts
must be handled in such manner so as to avoid human touch; i.e. shielding is required.
• Leaks from shaft seals, reservoirs, piping or fittings should be repaired so as to not cause potentially
hazardous materials from escaping to the work area. In instances where such leaks have occurred,
all local and National rules and regulations for their recovery and disposition must be followed.
• All potential hazards resulting from exposure to electrical sources must be eliminated. Please refer
to VDE and local power company rules and regulations for guidance.
• Before restarting system and equipment, refer to instruction in Section 7; Start-Up Procedure.
2.6 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and installation work

Before installing or servicing lubrication equipment and machinery, management should insure that only
persons who are fully trained, skilled and authorized to perform such work are assigned to such tasks.
Major installation or modification work should only be performed during shut-downs. It is also imperative
that shut-down procedures recommended by equipment manufacturers be followed. Pumps, lubricators
and distribution systems which deliver potentially hazardous materials to the environment must be
thoroughly cleaned. All safety devices and protective equipment, disabled or removed during cleaning,
must be immediately reinstalled and reactivated prior to machine use.
Safety Sign, per DIN 4844, Use Safety Glasses or Goggles.

Advice: Whenever working with compressed air, wear safety glasses
Safety Sign, per DIN 4844, Use Breathing Mask.

Advice: Observe EC-Safety Data Sheet for materials of consumption
and additives used and use personal protective equipment.
Additional Cautions for Pump Type FZ-B
• Potential ‘pinch-point’ whenever closing the reservoir lid! When filling the reservoir while pump is
operational, DO NOT put your hand into the reservoir. Risk of personal injury may result from
contact with scraper blade and agitator.
• Whenever handling lubricants, take measures to avoid environmental pollution.
• DO NOT use high-pressure cleaning devices on outside of pump. Always use solvent free cleansers.
2.7 Unauthorized conversion and manufacture of spare parts

The modification and/or manufacturing of parts for use as spare or replacement parts in DELIMON
lubrication equipment, without the written consent and approval of DELIMON Engineering, is strictly
prohibited. Any such modification and/or manufacture of component parts shall immediately render any
and all warranties as null and void.
2.8 Unacceptable modes of operation

The operational integrity and reliability of all equipment supplied is warranted only when said equipment is
utilized in strict accordance with parameters established in Section 1; Introduction. Maximum operating
parameters outlined in Engineering Data Sheets must never be exceeded.
2.9 Guidelines & standards

1., 2. and 3. guideline (see data sheet: R&N_2009_1_GB)
3.0 Notes on environmental protection and waste disposal

During proper operation, various component parts of lubricating systems are subject to special
requirements as set forth by Environmental Legislation.
General requirements for handling lubricants are specified in their respective safety data sheets.
Used lubricants are hazardous forms of waste and therefore require special handling and supervision
with regard to § 41 paragraph 1, sentence 1 and paragraph 3 no. 1 of KrW-/AbfG (Closed-Loop Waste
Management Act).
Used oils must be handled in compliance with AltölV (Waste Oil Ordinance).
Any devices or components which become contaminated with lubricant must be disposed of by a certified
waste management company. Additionally, records indicating proper conformance to waste management
practice and law must be filed according to NachwV (Ordinance on Waste Recovery and Disposal
Records).
GENERAL PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS
• Central piston technique
• Insert for anticlockwise and clockwise rotation
• Feed volume per outlet up to 720cm3/h
• Lubricants: oil, grease, liquid grease
• Surface signal grey RAL 7004
A PUMP TYPE FZB
B NUMBER OF OUTLETS
Factory pre-set at 1 or 2 outlets, depending upon order specifications.
Outlets 1 - 6 are arranged in the upper row. Outlets placed one above the other can only be combined in
the order shown in the picture. Fusions begin at the outlets 1/7 and follow the direction of the arrow. Refer
to graphic for order of outlets.
The pump body is comprised of a control sleeve which guides the piston, and a setting spindle which
determines piston stroke; thus determining the delivery rate of each outlet (up to 6 outlets), or of two
outlets when placed on above the other (7 to 12 outlets).
Designation and position of outlets when being combined.
Whenever dealing with 2 outlets having half the total volumetric output, one outlet in the upper and lower
rows may be opened.
C REVISION
Stage A
D. KINDS OF DRIVE
Drive with oscillating lever
The assembly group constitutes an extension of the assembly group drive with free shaft end containing
those parts being necessary for the oscillating lever drive. The oscillating lever is reciprocated by a
suitable component part of the machine to be lubricated via an eccentric, a crank and rod, and at the
same time, the worm wheel is always turned – regardless of the rotational direction of the driving shaft -
in the same direction via the switch mechanism.
Drive with oscillating lever
D. KINDS OF DRIVE (continuation)
Drive with free shaft end
The drive assembly consists of a ball bearing supported drive shaft and worm gear. A filler plug is
provided to facilitate filling of the housing with oil. The filler plug must be removed prior to removal of the
shaft with a mandrel.
Rotary drive with free shaft end
Drive with reduction gear or with reduction gear and motor
The assembly consists of the drive assembly with free shaft end, to which a second worm gear drive is
added.
Drive with reduction gear
Drive with reduction gear and motor
E. POSITION OF DRIVE
Position 1 left
Position 5 right
without
F. RESERVOIR
The reservoir lid is hinged for ease of access. It can be secured with a padlock to prevent unauthorized
access or tampering. Reservoirs are equipped with a scraper and feed screw. The scraper removes
grease from the sidewall of the tank, while the feed screw assures slight pressurization of grease being
fed to the pump’s inlet chamber. A strainer is fitted in the bottom of the tank to protect the pump inlet
chamber against contamination.
G. ACCESSORIES
Level switch
A lubricant level switch is available for reservoir monitoringby ultrasonic means. When the minimum or
maximum level is reached, an electrical signal is generated. The signal may be used for the purpose of
providing visual indication of status by adding a signal lamp, or to activate an automated filling device.
When so equipped, operating instructions pertaining to P/N BA_2005_1_GB_76951_6001 are provided
with the unit.
Pressure control
When so equipped, operating instructions for pressure control PB_2005_1_GB_38132 are provided with
the unit.
3. Application
Pump FZ-B is designed as a single-piston pump, and is factory configured with a maximum of 2 outlets. It
is primarilly intended for multiline - centralized lubrication systems. The pump can be driven by an
independent flange motor, or directly from the machine to be lubricated via an oscillating lever or a direct
drive coupling.
Pump FZ-B is furnished with one combined single outlet having a maximum delivery of 12 x 0.1 cm3 or
with 2 outlets, each delivering 6 x 0.1 cm3 .
4. Principle of operation (figures 1 and 2)

The top of the worm wheel (1) driven by a worm shaft is provided with 2 drivers with recesses in which a
crosspiece (2) engages. In two other grooves of the crosspiece the drivers of the eccentric disk (3)
engage and impart a rotary movement to the eccentric disk and the piston (4). The compression spring
(5) located between the crosspiece and the eccentric disk presses the eccentric disk upwards. On its top
surface the eccentric disk is provided with a cam which, due to its rotary movement, strikes the 6 setting
spindles (6) arranged on the circumference of the pump and therefore forces the piston to perform one
suction stroke each time.
The lubricant is supplied to the pump inlet chamber (S) by a feed unit.
The underside of the eccentric disk is provided with 6 cams. Due to the rotary movement the cams on the
eccentric disk strike against a pressure cam (7), causing the piston to make a compression stroke each
time. The piston has three vertical grooves (N), which terminate in an annular channel (R). On pumps
with up to 12 (2 x 6) outlets the piston has two sets of three vertical grooves each terminating in an
annular channel. During the suction stroke lubricant is drawn from the inlet chamber (S) into the vertical
grooves of the piston and from there delivered into the annular channels (R). During the compression
stroke the lubricant is delivered from the annular channel via a vertical groove into the pressure channel
(D).
In continuous operation the pump can overcome a backpressure of 200 bar. Transient pressures of up to
250 bars are permitted. Safety valves can be installed in the discharge line as protection against
overload.
Fig. 1 Section through the pump Fig. 2 Principle of operation
5. Rotational direction of drive
As required, all pumps can be set-up for clockwise or counter-clockwise operation without modifying the
method of drive.
6. Specifications
Permissible back pressure: .............................................................................................................. 200 bar
for a short time: ............................................................................................................... 250 bar
Permissible pump piston speed:
with running drive: .................................................................................................................. max. 10 r.p.m.
with oscillating drive: ............................................................................................................. max. 16 r.p.m.
Number of oscillating strokes: ............................................................................................. max. 300 min.-1
In case that higher speed or less then < 1 is requested and also when distributors ZPA or E 4 are
installed downstream, ask manufacturer
In case of using the oscillating lever drive, the lever rod should be installed in such a way, that the
amplitude of the oscillating lever is same in both directions ∝ 1 = ∝ 2 = max. 50o
Lever amplitude max. : .......................................................................................................................... 100o
Lever amplitude min. : ............................................................................................................................ 10o
7. Start-up
Installing and connecting the lubricating pump
The pump should be installed and mounted vertically. Wiring connections of the motor to its control box
must be carried out according to the circuit diagram with full observance of the paragraph concerning
direction of drive. When utilizing mechanical drives, all moving parts must be properly enclosed. To
prevent injuries.
Filling the lubricant tank and piping

All piping must be properly descaled and carefully cleaned prior to use. Following cleaning, fill with clean,
fresh grease using a grease gun. For initial start-up, first fill the grease tank with oil up to the strainer;
then add grease. Failure to do so will result in longer start-up times by obstructing proper venting. Before
connecting piping, operate the pump at full capacity until grease emerges from each outlet, evenly and
without air. Next, connect the piping to the pump, taking care to use seal washers. Continue to operate
pump until air-free grease emerges from the ends of the pipe.
Once the bearings to be lubricated are also filled with grease, piping can be connected to the bearings.
The system can be then be started after all required settings and adjustments are completed.
Setting the delivery rate (figure 3)

Full discharge capacity, (equal to 0.1 cm3 lubricant per discharge per piston stroke), is indicated by an
arrow on the outlet pointing to the number 4 stamped on the head of the setting spindle (Figure 2.5).
Turning the spindle clockwise reduces delivery. Reduction below 1/4 of the max. delivery setting (above)
should be avoided. Where pumps have 7 to 12 outlets, the delivery rate of two vertically arranged outlets
is adjusted by means of an adjusting spindle. The second arrow on the outlet points to the outlet bore
related to the setting spindle.
Changing the drive speed or the internal gear ratio of the pump changes the output volume of all outlets
and thus, overall pump output volume is changed.
Figure 3 Pump body FZ-B
8. Maintenance
Filling the grease tank
The grease tank should be refilled whenever ¾ of its capacity has been depleted. Never allow the tank to
empty to a point where the feed screw is exposed, as air may enter the distribution piping. When filling
the tank, use only clean grease and take precautions to ensure that no dirt enters into the system while
the tank lid is opened. Failure to prevent dirt from entering the tank may lead to system malfunction.
Whenever possible, utilization of an external filling valve and firmly installed plumbing is the preferred
method.
Changing the number of outlets (figure 3)
Pumps are furnished with the number of outlets configured according to the original factory order. Should
circumstances arise requiring changes to the outlets, make changes according to the following
procedure.
Outlets are blocked off by connecting the pressure channel to the pump inlet chamber. To facilitate this,
the top channels are joined to the pump inlet chamber by threaded connections. To block off an upper
outlet, remove the tank, then remove the M4 x 6 cap screw and seal from the threaded hole (Figure 2.19).
To open a blocked off outlet, insert a cap screw and new A4 x 8 seal (Figure 2.18) to assure a tight fit.
Associated outlets can generally be opened or closed by either inserting or removing a screw plug;
(Figure 2.17).
When working on pumps having two vertical outlets, the setting spindle, ball and compression spring,
(Figures 2.5, 2.6 and 2.7) must be removed in order to close off the lower outlet. Before removing the
spindle, unscrew the shank screw (Figure 2.9). Next, insert the plug (Figure 2.20) into the setting spindle
bore. For reconfiguration at a later time, successively reinsert the setting spindle, ball and compression
spring following removal of the shank screw and seal. Reinsertion of the locating screw will bring the
spring and ball to their correct position with relation to the setting spindle groove. Note: Always use a new
seal ring, and lubricate the ball and spring prior to insertion.
Whenever two outlets, arranged one over the other, are shut down for a short period of time, the setting
spindle must be set to 0 and the outlets must not be rigidly blocked. In such cases, use plastic plugs in
place of screw plugs to enable accidental grease discharges to escape without causing
overpressurization.
ATTENTION!
If the number of outlets is modified improperly, damage to the pump cannot be avoided.
8. Maintenance (continuation)
Removal of the drive shaft (see figure)
After removing the spring washer (3.11) and the cap, the circlip (3.13) should be removed. After loosening
the plug (3.20) the drive shaft (3.12) including the roller bearings (3.17) and the sleeve (3.16) can be driven
out using a copper dowel and a hammer.
Gearboxes:
Gearboxes are filled with liquid type grease; i.e. Gearmaster LX00 (Messrs. Lubritech) or equivalent.
Refilling should only be done following gearbox disassembly and cleaning.
Filler Plugs: Main Gearbox (Figure 3.9), Reduction Gear (Figure 3.20)
9. Plates
Name plate Type plate
Distributor PVB
INDEX
Page
1. General ................................................................................. 2
2. Safety .............................................................................. 2 – 4
A. Distributor type .................................................................... 5
B. Number of outlets ................................................................ 5
C. Inspection ............................................................................. 5
D. Monitoring ............................................................................ 5
E. Code of outlets .................................................................... 5
F. Accessories ......................................................................... 5
3. Application ........................................................................... 6
4. Design ............................................................................. 6 – 8
5. Principle of operation .......................................................... 9
6. Installation .......................................................................... 10
7. Specification ...................................................................... 10
8. Plates .................................................................................. 10
page 1 of 10 BA_2005_1_GB_PVB
1. General
Prior to start up, we recommend to read these operating instructions carefully as we do not assume any
liability for damages and operating troubles which result from the nonobservance of these operating
instructions!
Any use beyond the applications described in these operating instructions is considered to be not in
accordance with the product’s intended purposes. The manufacturer is not to be held responsilbe for any
damages resulting from this: the user alone bears the corresponding risk.
As to figures and indications in these operating instructions we reserve the right to make technical changes
which might become necessary for improvements.
The copyright on these operating instructions is kept reserved to the company DELIMON. These operating
instructions are intended for the erecting, the operating and supervising personnel. They contain
regulations and drawings of technical nature which must not – completely or partially - be distributed nor
used nor communicated to others without authorization for competition purposes.
Company address, spare parts and service address

DELIMON GmbH Branch office
2. Safety
These operating instructions contain fundamental instructions which are to be observed during erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore it is absolutely necessary for the fitter and the competent qualified
staff/user to read these operating instructions before installation and start-up. The operating instructions
must be available at all times at the place of use of the machine/system.
Not only the general safety instructions stated under this main point “safety“ are to be observed, but also
the other specific safety instructions stated under the other main points.

The safety warnings contained in these operating instructions which, if not observed, may cause dangers
to people, are specially marked with general danger symbols
safety sign according to DIN 4844, warning about a danger spot ,

in case of warning about electric voltage with
safety sign according to DIN 4844, warning about dangerous electric voltage.
In case of safety instructions which, if not observed, may cause damage to the machine and its function,
the word
ATTENTION
is inserted.
Instructions that are directly attached to the machine, as for example
• rotational direction arrow
• identifications for fluid connections
must be observed at all events and maintained in a fully legible condition.
• Note: There is an increased skid risk in case of spilled/leaked out lubricants. They are to be removed
at once properly.
Safety sign according to DIN 4844, warning about skid risk.
The operating, maintaining, inspecting and erecting personnel must have the appropriate qualification for
such work. Area of responsibility, competence and supervision of the personnel have to be regulated by
the user. If the personnel do not have the necessary knowledge, they have to be trained and given
instructions. This can be effected, if necessary, by the manufacturer/supplier on behalf of the user of the
machine. Furthermore, the user has to make sure that the contents of the operating instructions are fully
understood by the personnel.

The nonobservance of the safety instructions may result in hazards to persons, to the environment and to
the machine. The nonobservance of the safety instructions may lead to the loss of any claims for
damages.
In detail, the nonobservance may for instance lead to the following hazards:
• Failure of important functions of the machine/system
• Failure of prescribed methods for maintenance and repair
• Harzard to persons by electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
• Hazard to the environment by the leakage of dangerous substances
The safety instructions stated in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
accident preventation as well as possible internal working, operating and safety rules of the user are to
be observed.
• If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts have to be protected against touch.
• Protection against touch for moving parts (e. g. coupling) must not be removed when the machine is
in operation.
• Leakages (e. g. from the shaft seal) of hazardous goods to be delivered (e. g. explosive, toxic, hot)
are to be removed in such a way that there is no danger to persons and environment. Legal rules
are to be ovserved. .
• Hazards caused by electrial power are to be excluded (for details please refer for instance to the
rules of the VDE and the local power supply companies).
The user has to take care that all the maintenance, inspection and installation work is executed by
authorized and qualified skilled personnel who have informed themselves adequately by thoroughly
studying the operating instructions.
Basically, work on the machine is only to be carried out during shut-down. It is obligatory to observe the
shut-down procedure described in the operating instructions .
Pumps or pump aggregates that deliver media being hazardous to health have to be decontaminated.
Immediately after completion of the work, all safety and protective equipments have to be reinstalled
and/or reactivated.
• Advice: When working with compressed air, do wear glasses.
(DIN 4844 – Use breathing mask)

• Advice: Observe EC-Safety Data Sheet for materials of consumption and additives used and use
personal protective equipment.

Before recommissioning, observe the points stated in section “initial start-up“.
Conversion or modifications to the machine are only permitted when agreed with the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve to ensure safety. The use of
other parts may render the liability for consequencial losses null and void.
The operational reliability of the machine supplied is only guaranteed if the machine is used in
accordance with its intended purposes as per section 1 - General - of the operating instructions. The
limiting values specified in the data sheet must on no account be exceeded.

1., 2. and 3. guideline (see data sheet: R&N_2009_X_GB)

In correct operation with lubricants, the components are subject to the special requirements set by
environmental legislation.
The general requirements for lubricants are specified in the respective safety data sheets.
Used lubricants are hazardous forms of waste and therefore require special supervision in the sense of §
41 paragraph 1 sentence 1 and paragraph 3 no. 1 of KrW-/AbfG (Closed-Loop Waste Management Act).
The devices or components contaminated with lubricant must be disposed of by a certified waste
management company.
Records of proper waste management must be filed in conformance to NachwV (Ordinance on Waste
Recovery and Disposal Records).
• Progressive distributor / modular design
• up to 20 outlets for pipe 6 mm
• Metered volume: 0.17 ccm
• Lubricant: Grease and oil
• Material: steel
A. DISTRIBUTOR TYPE PVB
B. NUMBER OF OUTLETS
6 outlets
8 outlets
10 outlets
12 outlets
14 outlets
16 outlets
18 outlets
20 outlets
C. INSPECTION
Stage A
D. MONITORING
with non-return valve, without motion indicator, without electrical monitoring
with non-return valve, with motion indicator, without electrical monitoring
with non-return valve, with motion indicator, with electronic limit switch
E. CODE OF OUTLETS
A segment
M segment
E/M segment 3 ( 6 outlets)
E/M segment 4 ( 8 outlets)
E/M segment 5 (10 outlets)
F. ACCESSORIES
without
Inlet screw joint GE 6 LR
Inlet screw joint GE 10 LR
3. Application
Distributors of the above mentioned design are used in progressive centralized lubrication systems. Their
field of application is the total loss lubrication for the media oil, liquid grease and grease as well as the oil
recirculation lubrication in small and medium-sized machinery. They can be used for machine tools,
processing machines, all kinds of presses, plastics and paper processing machines, textile machines,
printing machines, wrapping machines and machines of the food and luxury food processing industry.
Further possibilities of use are at open cast appliances in the construction of heavy machinery and in the
field of commercial vehicles, among other things also in connection with dual-line systems.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product’s intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corsesponding risk is taken by the user only.
4. Design
General
The progressive distributors are piston distributors in block assembly which meter the lubricant, which they
receive via the main line, in partial quantities and allocate it forcibly to the individual lubrication line
connections. Here, the pistons have the metering and control function of the lubricant flow. Due to the
forcibly bound mode of working of the progressive distributor, a safe operational monitoring of a
"progressive lubrication system“ is possible with little expenditure only. The distributor works as long as it
receives lubricant under sufficient pressure.
Progressive distributor
The progressive distributors PVB consist of the manifold block, in which are arranged the pistons and the
functional connection and control bores, the plugs for the determination of the pistons‘ lodgment, the
screwin threads for the main and lubrication line connections and the bores for the fixation of the
progressive distributor. The metered volume started for each lubrication point connection is constant and
equal.
It is however possible to collet lubrication point connections in the manifold block according to the
requirement in order to increase the metered quantity of lubricant at given connections. This is possible for
the connections on the right or left side of a distributor.
In addition to this, it is possible to lead individual or fused lubricant volumes within one metering assembly
group to the respective opposite side. For both collection kinds of metered volumes of individual outlets, it
is essential to observe certain conditions.
4. Design (continuation)
Control facilities
If required, the progressive distributors can be provided with a visual control facility or a monitoring switch
the encapsulated proximity switch of which triggers a pulse. This control facility is always fixed on the right
side to the connection having the greatest distance to the inlet (connection C2 to F2). Control facilities are
used as visual or electric variant. The visual control facilities consists of the indicator screw fittings and the
indicator pin, which is firmly connected with the piston and makes the stroke motion visible. Regarding the
electrical control facility, a proximity switch with switching state indication (LED) is actuated by the control
pin of the visual control facility.
Pipe connections
ATTENION
For the connetion of the lubrication point lines, special union pieces with nonreturn valve (similar to union
piece DIN 2353 - CLL 6 - St) for pipe diameter 6 mm are used, which simultaneously have a sealing
function inside the progressive distributor. These union pieces cannot be replaced by normal olive union
pieces. The nonreturn valves integrated in the outlet union pieces ensure that the distributor works with
reliability even in case of little lubricant volumes and higher counterpressure involved in connection with
flexible pipework material.
Main and connection measurements
Number of L
outlets
6 60
8 75
10 90
12 105
14 120
16 135
18 150
20 165
4. DESIGN (continuation)
5. Principle of operation
Progressive distributor
When lubricant is supplied to the main line connection
of the progressive distributor, piston "A" (for instance)
is moved in direction of outlet A1 up to the limit stop,
and the lubricant in front of the limit stop is metered to
outlet F2. The delivery of lubricant is continued, and
piston "B" is moved in direction of outlet B1 up to limit
stop, and the lubricant in front of the limit stop is
carried to outlet A1. In the continued succession,
piston "C" is moved in direction of outlet C1 up to the
limit stop, and the lubricant in front of the limit stop is
metered to outlet B1 etc.
When all pistons are adjacent to the left limit stops,
piston "A" is moved in direction of outlet A2 up to the
limit stop, and the lubricant in front of the limit stop is
metered to outlet F1.
In the sequel of the lubricant supply, the piston "B"
and "C" are moved to the right limit stops, piston "B"
metering the lubricant to outlet A2, and piston "C"
metering the lubricant to outlet B2 etc.
The supply of lubricant to the outlets is effected in the
same order as described, until the pistons "A" to "F"
have been moved into the respective limit stop side.
The functioning of the progressive distributors
requires at least 3 metering groups (piston pairings).
An unlimited increase of the number of outlets is
theoretically possible
Fusion of outlets
If it is necessary to fuse individual lubrication point connections in order to increae the lubricant volume
delivered for a given lubrication line connection, it is essential to observe the order of the metering of
lubricant.
ATTENTION
It is basic rule that the two outlets having the greatest distance to the lubricant inlet must not be closed.
Fusion of two opposite outlets

• Remove the headless pin, which normally has the task to seal the opposite lubrication line connections,
from the connection bore.
• Close the outlet of one side with a plug being capable of receiving a clamping ring and a clamping ring.
Fusion of several outlets of one side

• Remove the connecting union piece with clamping ring at the outlets to be fused.
• Close the connections concerned with plug M 10 x 1/6 using seal rings DIN 7603 – A 10 x 13.5 – Cu.
6. Installation
The progressive distributors are delivered according to the indications made and normally supplied
completely with the connecting union pieces for the lubrication point lines.
The progressive distributor is fixed via the two fixing holes Ø 6,4, preferably by means of hexagon head cap
screws M 6 x 45 and spring washers DIN 127 – B 6, which protect the screw joint from automatic
loosening.
These fixing elements and the union pieces for the connection of the main line are not part of the extent of
supply and have to be specified on the order. The final pipe connection at the distributor must not be
effected before the lubricant comes without air bubbles out of the pipe having been detached from the
distributor. This fact can be recognized by a constant air bubble-free delivery of lubricant.
7. Specification
Working pressure max. (layout with motion indicator) ..................................................................... 160 bar
Working pressure max. (layout without motion indicator) ................................................................ 300 bar
Metered volume per piston stroke and outlet ................................................................................. 0.17 ccm
Response pressure ......................................................................................................................... > 10 bar
Temperature range .......................................................................................................... - 20° up to + 120°C
Volume flow for oil and grease ........................................................ min. 0.5 ccm/min; max. 1000 ccm/min
Differential pressure between 2 outlets ...................................................................................... max. 70 bar
Compatible lubricants on mineral oil basis

Grease lubricants up to ...................................................................................... NLGI-Klasse 2 DIN 51818
Oil ............................................................... ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) at 20°C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants ....................................................................................................................... at request
Connectable pipelines
Inlet .............................................................................................................................. female thread: G 1/8
Outlet ................................................................................................................................................ Ø 6 mm
Electrical values of the control facility

Voltage ........................................................................................................................... 10...30 V DC
Switching current max. ........................................................................................................... 200 mA
Make of contact .................................................................................................................... N/C PNP
Protective system ....................................................................................................................... IP 65
Temperature range ................................................................................................ - 20° up to + 70°C
8. Plates
Type plate
Operating Instructions
Distributor
ZP-A
INDEX
Page
1. General ................................................................................. 2
2. Safety .............................................................................. 2 – 4
A. Distributor type .................................................................... 4
B. Number of segments ........................................................... 4
C. Inspection ............................................................................. 5
D. Monitoring ............................................................................ 5
E. Coding of the outlets ........................................................... 5
F. Accessories ......................................................................... 5
3. Application ........................................................................... 5
4. Design and Function ........................................................... 5
5. Specification ........................................................................ 6
6. Explanation .......................................................................... 7
7. Plates .................................................................................... 7
Page 1 of 7 BA_2005_1_GB_ZPA
1. General
Prior to start up, we recommend to read these operating instructions carefully as we do not assume any
liability for damages and operating troubles which result from the nonobservance of these operating
instructions!
Any use beyond the applications described in these operating instructions is considered to be not in
accordance with the product’s intended purposes. The manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any
damages resulting from this: the user alone bears the corresponding risk.
As to figures and indications in these operating instructions we reserve the right to make technical changes
which might become necessary for improvements.
The copyright on these operating instructions is kept reserved to the company DELIMON. These operating
instructions are intended for the erecting, the operating and supervising personnel. They contain
regulations and drawings of technical nature which must not – completely or partially - be distributed nor
used nor communicated to others without authorization for competition purposes.
Company address, spare parts and service address

DELIMON Branch office
2. Safety
These operating instructions contain fundamental instructions which are to be observed during erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore it is absolutely necessary for the fitter and the competent qualified
staff/user to read these operating instructions before installation and start-up. The operating instructions
must be available at all times at the place of use of the machine/system.
Not only the general safety instructions stated under this main point “safety“ are to be observed, but also
the other specific safety instructions stated under the other main points.

The safety warnings contained in these operating instructions which, if not observed, may cause dangers
to people, are specially marked with general danger symbols
safety sign according to DIN 4844, warning about a danger spot ,

in case of warning about electric voltage with
safety sign according to DIN 4844, warning about dangerous electric voltage.
In case of safety instructions which, if not observed, may cause damage to the machine and its function,
the word
ATTENTION
is inserted.
Instructions that are directly attached to the machine, as for example
• rotational direction arrow
• identifications for fluid connections
must be observed at all events and maintained in a fully legible condition.
• Note: There is an increased skid risk in case of spilled/leaked out lubricants. They are to be removed
at once properly.
Safety sign according to DIN 4844, warning about skid risk.
The operating, maintaining, inspecting and erecting personnel must have the appropriate qualification for
such work. Area of responsibility, competence and supervision of the personnel have to be regulated by
the user. If the personnel do not have the necessary knowledge, they have to be trained and given
instructions. This can be effected, if necessary, by the manufacturer/supplier on behalf of the user of the
machine. Furthermore, the user has to make sure that the contents of the operating instructions are fully
understood by the personnel.

The nonobservance of the safety instructions may result in hazards to persons, to the environment and to
the machine. The nonobservance of the safety instructions may lead to the loss of any claims for
damages.
In detail, the nonobservance may for instance lead to the following hazards:
• Failure of important functions of the machine/system
• Failure of prescribed methods for maintenance and repair
• Harzard to persons by electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
• Hazard to the environment by the leakage of dangerous substances
The safety instructions stated in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
accident preventation as well as possible internal working, operating and safety rules of the user are to
be observed.
• If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts have to be protected against touch.
• Protection against touch for moving parts (e. g. coupling) must not be removed when the machine is
in operation.
• Leakages (e. g. from the shaft seal) of hazardous goods to be delivered (e. g. explosive, toxic, hot)
are to be removed in such a way that there is no danger to persons and environment. Legal rules
are to be ovserved. .
• Hazards caused by electrial power are to be excluded (for details please refer for instance to the
rules of the VDE and the local power supply companies).
The user has to take care that all the maintenance, inspection and installation work is executed by
authorized and qualified skilled personnel who have informed themselves adequately by thoroughly
studying the operating instructions.
Basically, work on the machine is only to be carried out during shut-down. It is obligatory to observe the
shut-down procedure described in the operating instructions .
Pumps or pump aggregates that deliver media being hazardous to health have to be decontaminated.
Immediately after completion of the work, all safety and protective equipments have to be reinstalled
and/or reactivated.
• Advice: When working with compressed air, do wear glasses.

• Advice: Observe EC-Safety Data Sheet for materials of consumption and additives used and use
personal protective equipment.

Before recommissioning, observe the points stated in section “initial start-up“.
Conversion or modifications to the machine are only permitted when agreed with the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve to ensure safety. The use of
other parts may render the liability for consequencial losses null and void.
The operational reliability of the machine supplied is only guaranteed if the machine is used in
accordance with its intended purposes as per section 1 - General - of the operating instructions. The
limiting values specified in the data sheet must on no account be exceeded.

1., 2. and 3. guideline (see data sheet: R&N_2009_1_GB)

In correct operation with lubricants, the components are subject to the special requirements set by
environmental legislation.
The general requirements for lubricants are specified in the respective safety data sheets.
Used lubricants are hazardous forms of waste and therefore require special supervision in the sense of §
41 paragraph 1 sentence 1 and paragraph 3 no. 1 of KrW-/AbfG (Closed-Loop Waste Management Act).
The devices or components contaminated with lubricant must be disposed of by a certified waste
management company.
Records of proper waste management must be filed in conformance to NachwV (Ordinance on Waste
Recovery and Disposal Records).

• Progressive distributor
• up to 24 outlets
• Electronic monitoring possible
• Metered volume: variable from 0.1 cm3
• Lubricant: grease, fluid grease, oil
A. DISTRIBUTOR TYPE ZPA
B. NUMBER OF SEGMENTS
3 segments
4 segments
5 segments
6 segments
7 segments
8 segments
9 segments
10 segments
11 segments
12 segments
C. INSPECTION
Stage A
D. MONITORING
with non-return valve, with motion indicator
with non-return valve, with monitoring switch
E. CODING OF THE OUTLETS

A segment
M segment
E or M segment
F. ACCESSORIES
without
Slot angle
Overpressure indicator 70 or 100 bar
3. Application
The major element of a progressive system is the lubricant distributor.
Distributors ZP-A are used to divide and meter lubricant in total loss central lubrication systems (oil, liquid
grease and grease) and in oil recirculation systems suitable for small, medium and large machine plants.
4. Design and function

ZP-A distributors consist of several individual segments (at least 3 in the standard version) that are
screwed together and sealed against each other. Depending on the arrangement within the distributor, the
following segment types are available:
• Initial- or A-segment
• Medium or M-segment
• Final- or E-segment
The distributor ZP-A has the task to divide the lubricant volume (oil or grease) received under pressure into
portions and to deliver them successively to the up to 24 possible outlets. This is achieved due to pistons
which are moved by the lubricant being under pressure, and forcibly controlled by each other. The pistons
move into their final positions, and the lubricant waiting in front of the piston is successively supplied to the
lubrication points.
The distributor works as long as it is supplied with lubricant.
The distributor is equipped with integrated nonreturn valves. These nonreturn valves, which are integrated
in the distributor outlets, have the advantage that the distributor works reliably even in case of small
lubricant volumes and higher counterpressures involved as far as the line material is flexible.
In case that a visual operational monitoring of the distributor is necessary or desired, the distributor has to
be ordered with motion indicators. For the extended version with motion indicators, it is possible to provide
additionally an electrical operational monitoring by means of an electronical monitoring switch.
5. Specification
Working pressure max. : ................................................................................................................... 160 bar
Temperature range (with proximity indicator) : ................................................................ – 20 °C to + 80 °C
Temperature range (without proximity indicator) : ......................................................... – 20 °C to + 110 °C
Admissible differential pressure between 2 outlets: .................................................................... max. 50 bar
...................................................................... with non-return valves max. up to admissible system pressure
Metered volume per piston stroke: .................................................................... at choice 0.1; 0.2 or 0.3 cm3
Flow volume for oil and grease: ......................................................... min. 0.5 cm3/min; max. 1000 cm3/min
Opening pressure of nonreturn valves: .................................................................................................. 2 bar
Response pressure: ............................................................................................................................ 10 bar
Usable lubricants on mineral oil basis:
Lubricating greases up to ................................................................................ NLGI class 3 DIN 51818
Oil ........................................................ ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) at 20 °C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants ....................................................................................................................... on request
Pipe connections:
Inlet G 1/8 ................................................................................................................................ standard Ø 10
Outlet G 1/8 .............................................................................................................................................. Ø 6
max. Number of Dimensions Weight

number of segments (mm) approx.
outlets a b kg
6 3 48 – 1,03
8 4 64 – 1,37
10 5 80 – 1,72
12 6 96 137 2,06
14 7 112 153 2,40
16 8 128 169 2,75
18 9 144 185 3,09
20 10 160 201 3,43
22 11 176 217 3,77
24 12 192 233 4,11
ATTENTION
Special care has to be taken that the quantity of lubricant metered by a piston does not escape in the same
segment but in the adjacent segment next to the inlet port. The metered volume of the piston in the initial
segment is discharged at the final segment.
6. EXPLANATION
1. The basic design of distributor ZP-A is illustrated
by a symbol; the channel bores drawn into the
symbol show that the metered volume of one
segment is principally carried to the adjacent
segment located next to the “inlet” port - with one
exception: the metered volume of the initial
segment is carried back to the final segment.
Each segment of the distributor is marked with
the respective metered volume.
01 is equal to 0.1 cm3 per piston stroke
2. There are various possibilities of combining
several metered volumes and delivering them to
a single outlet port. The following 3 letter symbols
are available to mark these possibilities and the
arrangement of the outlets.
Symbol “a” shows the position of the outlet port.
Symbol “b” denotes the combination of the two
metered volumes within one segment. For this,
the bridge is attached to the respective segment.
Symbol “c” denotes the combination of the
metered volumes of neighbouring segments; for
this, the disks between the segments in direction
of the inlet port are removed. This combination is
not feasible in the initial segment.
3. Metering volume at outlet port (cm3).
7. Plates
Type plate 26 x 52mm (75511-1311)
Level Switch 76951 – 6011
Description for Programmer
Field of application:
The level control device is used for the control of up to three filling level in tanks.
Features : Switching interval adjustable from 60 mm to 550 mm
Operating voltage range 20 V to 252 V AC / DC.
Relay outputs.
Parameterizable via DIP switch.
Installation position:
The level switch is installed vertically to the surface of the liquid in the lid of the tank.
Teaching-in of the switching points:
How to prepare the teaching-in of the switching points:
 Remove transparent lid and insertion plate
 Switch on operating voltage
 Switch DIP switch 5 in ON position. The red LED´s 1 and 4 will light up.
During the teaching-in process, the relays switch into the dead state.
 Position suitable target in the desired switching interval
Teaching-in of switching point 1:
 Switch over DIP switch 1.
If the target is recognized, a green LED will light up additionally.
 If the target is not recognized, a yellow LED will light up additionally.
The target has to be positioned a new until it is recognized.
 Switch back DIP switch 1.
The switching interval is stored in the RAM memory when the DIP switch is switched back while the green LED
is flashing. After this, only the red LED’s will emit light.
This state shows the operator that the DIP switch is in its inital position again.
 Please refer switching point 1, but switch over DIP switch 2.
 Please refer switching point 1, but switch over DIP switch 3.
Page 1 of 6 BA_2015_1_GB_76951-6011
replacement for BA_2005_1_GB_76951-6011
How to finish the teaching-in process :
 Switch DIP switch 5 back into OFF position.
The adjustment will be transferred into the (retentive) memory with permanent effect.
After the teaching-in, the order of the switching points is always
switching point 1 < switching point 2 < switching point 3.
 Insert insertion plate according to the position of DIP switch 4.
 Screw on transparent lid and insertion plate.
Teaching-in of the default values :
 Switch DIP switch 5 in ON position. The red LED’s 1 and 4 will light up.
 Switch over DIP switch 4.
 Switch over DIP switch 1, then switch it back again.
 Switch DIP switch 4 back again.
 Switch DIP switch 5 back into OFF position again.
The default adjustments are transferred into the memory with permanent effect.
The following default values have been adjusted : S1 = 60mm; S2 = 220mm; S3 = 270mm
(measured from the sensor to the switching point)
Adjustment of the switching behaviour :

In normal operation (DIP switch 5 in OFF position), one can adjust the switching behaviour of switching outputs S1 to
S3 by means of the DIP switches 1 to 3.
DIP switch ON position OFF position State ipon delivery
DIP switch 1 NO contact behaviour NC contact behaviour OFF position
“NO (normally open) contact behaviour“ means : The corresponding contact closes, when the filling level is higher
than the pertaining switching point.
“NC (normally closed) contact behaviour“ means : The corresponding contact opens, when the filling level is higher
than the pertaining switching point.
Page 2 of 6 BA_2015_1_GB_76951-6011
Adjustment of the indication mode :
In normal operation, (DIP switch 5 in OFF position), one can choose the indication mode by means of DIP switch 4.
Mode “early warning/max. filling level“ (state upon delivery)

DIP switch 4 in OFF position
 LED 1 (red): overfill signal (full) switching point S1
 LED 2 (yellow) early warning (max) switching point S2
 LED 3 (green) normal state (normal) -
 LED 4 (red) empty signal (empty) switching point S3
Filling level x x > S1 S1 > x > S2 S2 > x > S3 x < S3

LED 1, red flashes off off off
LED 2, green/yellow off flashes yellow off off
LED 3, green/yellow off off flashes green off
LED 4, red off off off flashes
Insertion plate :
Page 3 of 6 BA_2015_1_GB_76951-6011
Mode “early warning/min. filling level“
DIP switch 4 in ON position :
 LED 1 (red): overfill signal (full) switching point S1
 LED 2 (green) normal state (normal) -
 LED 3 (yellow) early warning (min) switching point S2
 LED 4 (red) empty signal (empty) switching point S3
Filling level x x > S1 S1 > x > S2 S2 > x > S3 x < S3

LED 1, red flashes off off off
LED 2, green/yellow off flashes green off off
LED 3, green/yellow off off flashes yellow off
LED 4, red off off off flashes
Insertion plate: Connection diagram:
Adjustment:
Pump Reservoir S1 S2 S3
mm mm mm
FZ 8l 60 240 290
FZ 15 l 60 265 315
FZ 30 l 60 335 385
BM – B 8l 60 240 290
BM – B 15 l 60 265 315
BM – B 30 l 60 335 385
BS – B 30 l 60 335 385
BS – B 60 l 60 390 440
BS – B 100 l 60 480 530
Autolub 8l 60 220 270
HA III 100 l 60 460 510
Page 4 of 6 BA_2015_1_GB_76951-6011
Specification:
General data:
Acquisition range ............................................................. 60 mm...550 mm (ex ultrasonic transducer)
Reference quantity ........................................................... 100 mm x 100 mm (even surface)
Opening angle of sound beam ....................................... approx. 5° at –6dB sound pressure
Transducer frequency ..................................................... approx. 380 kHz
Repeat accuracy ............................................................. < 0.5 %, < 0.5 mm at constant ambient conditions
Reaction time of relay contacts ....................................... approx. 10 s
Release time of relay contacts ........................................ approx. 10 s
Reaction time of LEDs ..................................................... < 1 s (indication of measured value)
Release time of LEDs ...................................................... < 1 s (indication of measured value)
Temperature drift ............................................................. < 4 % over the whole temperature range
Electrical data:
Operating voltage UB ....................................................... 20 V...252 V DC/AC, 47 Hz...63 Hz
Current consumption ....................................................... ca. 70 mA at 30 V DC (all relays in working position)
Switching output 1, 2 and 3 ............................................. relays
 Contact material ...................................................... gilded silver alloy
 Switching voltage max. . .......................................... 150 V DC, 252 V AC
 Switching current max. ............................................ 3 A, ohmic
 Switching current min. ............................................. 0.1 mA, 100 mV DC
 Switching capacity ................................................... 90 W at 30 V DC, 750 W at 250 V AC
 Life time (electrical) ................................................. 106 switching cycles at a resistive load of 3 A / 30 V DC
.................................................................................. and/or 3 A / 252 V AC
Mechanical data:
Operating temperature .................................................... -20 °C...+60 °C
Storage temperature ....................................................... -40 °C...+85 °C
Protective system acc. DIN 40 050 ................................. IP 65
Type of connection .......................................................... 7-polar 90°- cable box (PG 11) with screw and
.......................................................................................... soldering contacts
.......................................................................................... Cross section: max. 1.5 mm² wire sleeves without
.......................................................................................... insulation collar.
Weight .............................................................................. 0.55 kg
State upon delivery

DIP switch ........................................................................ switch 1-5 in OFF position.
Indication mode ............................................................... indication with early warning “filling level max.“
Standards and guidelines conformity:

Standards conformity
Standards ........................................................................ EN 60947-5-2:2007
.......................................................................................... IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approval and certificates:
CCC- Certified ................................................................. Certified by China Compulsory Certification (CCC)
Page 5 of 6 BA_2015_1_GB_76951-6011
Dimensioned drawing:
Replacement plug for level switch 76951-6011: Code no. 76951-6021
Page 6 of 6 BA_2015_1_GB_76951-6011
Monitoring switch
DATA SHEET 66925 - 1311
Specification
Protective system : ___ IP 65 in plugged condition
Operating voltage : ___________ 10 V to 30 V DC
Output current : _________________ max. 200 m A
Switching function : _______________ NO contact
Switching frequency : ____________ max. 1000 Hz
Temperature range : ________ - 25 oC to + 70 oC
Feed lines:
Proof against wrong poling : _______________ yes
Shortcircuit proof : ________________________ no
Connection diagram
Item. Pcs. Designation Code no.

1 1 Monitoring switch 66925 - 1311
Cable sheating of PUR (oil resistant) Example for ordering
---
cable length (”I”)
Monitoring switch consist of:
cable lenght 2 m (”I”) 76928 - 2813
1 pcs. Monitoring switch,
2 1 Right angle plug Code no. 66925 - 1311
cable lenght 10 m (”I”) 76928 - 2833 1 pcs. Right angle plug, cable
length 10 m and cable sheating of
3 1 Plug (straight) cable lenght 5 m (”I”) 76928 - 2853 PUR (oil resistant)
cable lenght 10 m (”I”) 76928 - 2863 Code no. 76928 - 2833
66925 P 1_GB /3 0509HF

Pressure relief valve NU - A
APPLICATION MODE OF OPERATION

The NU-A type pressure relief valve is used as safety In the event of a pressure in a central lubrication sys-
valve to protect central lubrication systems from overpres- tem rising the excess of the pre-set rating, the spring-loa-
sure. It is suitable especially in multi-line systems and ded piston (4) is raised thus allowing the lubricant to esca-
progressive systems. pe into the open air or to flow back via a return line into
the pump reservoir or into the pump suction chamber.
CHARACTERISTICS
• It can be used for all kinds of centralized lubrication
systems as far as the latter work in the pressure range
between 15 and 300 bar.
• Simple configuration, thus low price, maintenance-
free, and easy to set. Picture corresponds to
Code no.
• Reduces space. 38132 - 1211
38132 - 1221
38132 - 1231
TECHNICAL DATA
Response pressure : _ adjustable from 15 up to 300 bar
Operating temperature : __________ - 20 oC to + 120 oC
Flow media :
Lubricant greases ___________ based on mineral oil Picture corresponds to
________________ NLGI-class 000 to 3 DIN 51818 Code no.
38132 - 1241
Mineral oils _______ with a viscosity above 68 mm²/s 38132 - 1251
_______________________ at operating temperature
Installation : _____________________________ at choice
Weight : __________________________________ 0.03 kg
Setting range set to Flow media Code no.

INSTALLATION
15 - 70 bar 16 bars grease or oil 38132 - 1211 Into the pressure line to be protected against over-
15 - 70 bar 70 bars grease or oil 38132 - 1221 pressure a Tee connector for tube 10 mm dia. will be fitted;
50 - 200 bar 160 bars grease or oil 38132 - 1231
the relief valve is to be located towards the free connection
as to ensure that the setting screw remains visible.
100 - 300 bar 200 bars grease 38132 - 1241 In lubrication systems where a return line is provided, con-
100 - 300 bar 300 bars grease 38132 - 1251 nect the line only when the response pressure rating has
been set.
DIMENSIONS (mm)
PB_2005_1_GB_38132
replacement for 38132 PB 1 d+e / 02 0900HF
SUGGESTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
SAFETY ADVICE SETTING

To increase the set pressure, turn the hexagon socket
ATTENTION
screw (6) (wrench size across flats 4) clockwise. This ten-
Never adjust the opening pressure of the pressure relief sions the spring (5) in the sleeve (8). When the adjustment
valve to a higher value than the max. allowed service pres- is finished, push the tension pin (7) with a drift into the slee-
sure of the centralized lubrication system. ve (8) until it lies on the hexagon socket screw (6).
To decrease the set pressure, turn the hexagon socket
screw (6) (wrench size across flats 4) anticlockwise. This
release the spring (5) in the sleeve (8).
Depending on the system pressure, the lubricant may

- when the pressure relief valve opens - escape under high
pressure. Therefore it is essential, if there is no return line
connected to connection ”R”, to adjust the pressure relief ACCESSORIES
valve in such a way that its opening is not directed towards Union pieces, connection pieces and pipes have to be
persons, working places or machines. specified separately on the order.
If it is impossible to obtain a sufficient security for per-
sons, working places and machines by adjustment of the
presure relief valve, a drain pipe has to be mounted at con-
nection ”R” of the pressure relief valve.
The nonobservance of the working safety

advice means danger to life and limb of persons.
DELIMON GmbH
Arminstraße 15 Phone: +49 211 77740 Niederlassung: Für reibungslose Bewegung
D-40227 Düsseldorf Fax: +49 211 7774 210 Am Bockwald 4 For smooth motion
Postfach 10 20 52 kontakt@bijurdelimon.com D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
D-40011 Düsseldorf www.bijurdelimon.com

Book13 - Roller Screen RR1439 - P0EBD72 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Book13 - Roller Screen RR1439 - P0EBD72 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

OPERATING

Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 1/6

1.1 Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3

1.2 Basic notes ............................................................................................................................................... 3

1.3 Responsibility of the operator ................................................................................................................ 4

1.4 Responsibility of the personnel ............................................................................................................. 5

1.5 Warranty and liability .............................................................................................................................. 5

1.6 Copyright .................................................................................................................................................. 5

1.7 Constructional changes .......................................................................................................................... 6

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 2/6

1.2 Basic notes

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 3/6

We recommend you check that your personnel are working in a safety-conscious

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 4/6

1.5 Warranty and liability

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 5/6

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M1 6/6

Phone: +49 391 6380 10700

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 1/14

1.1 Explanation of symbols and notes ........................................................................................................ 3

1.2 Safety and protective appliances ........................................................................................................... 9

1.3 Notes describing specific kinds of potential hazard ......................................................................... 11

1.4 Specific areas where hazards might exist .......................................................................................... 12

1.5 Cleaning the machine/plant and waste disposal in general .............................................................. 13

1.6 Noise level of machines ........................................................................................................................ 14

1.7 Environmental protection ..................................................................................................................... 14

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 2/14

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 3/14

This symbol means „Warning of hazardous electrical voltage“.

This symbol means: „Warning of automatic start-up“.

This symbol means: „Warning of explosive substances“.

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 4/14

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 5/14

This symbol means: „Warning, danger of falling“.

This symbol means: „Warning, Hot liquids and vapours“

This symbol means: „Caution, danger of stumbling“.

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 6/14

This symbol means: „Use protective clothing“.

This symbol means: „Use ear protectors“.

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 7/14

This symbol means: „Danger of environmental pollution“.

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 8/14

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 9/14

1.2.2 EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons

In case of danger, operate the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton or the pull-cable

Sudden movements of equipment components may cause severe injuries.

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 10/14

POTENTIAL HAZARDS CAUSED BY ELECTRIC POWER!

1.3.2 Potential hazards caused by hydraulic components

ALL WORK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY WELL QUALIFIED STAFF

CAUTION, HOT LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 11/14

CAUTION, RISK OF EXPLOSION AND FIRE!

1.4 Specific areas where hazards might exist

CAUTION, SUSPENDED LOADS!

CAUTION, RISK OF DOWNFALL!

CAUTION, RISK OF STUMBLING!

CAUTION, RISK OF SQUEEZING!

SH1-FAM-P0-100-GE-M02-HDD-0001 Book13_M2 12/14

1.5 Cleaning the machine/plant and waste disposal in general

CAUTION RISK OF FIRE! / CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION!

naked fire of any kind and smoking!